Cisco ONS 15454 And 15327 TL1 Command Guide, Release 4.0 454tl140

User Manual: CISCO ONS 15327

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 514 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Corporate Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 526-4100
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327
TL1 Command Guide
Product and Documentation Release 4.0
March 2003
Customer Order Number: DOC-7815244=
Text Part Number: 78-15244-01
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required
to correct the interference at their own expense.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not
installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital
devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television
communications at your own expense.
You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its
peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.
• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.
• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits
controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public
domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide
Copyright © 2003 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved
CCIP, CCSP, the Cisco Arrow logo, the Cisco Powered Network mark, Cisco Unity, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, and StackWise are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.;
Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, and iQuick Study are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCNA,
CCNP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, the Cisco IOS logo, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo,
Empowering the Internet Generation, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherSwitch, Fast Step, GigaStack, Internet Quotient, IOS, IP/TV, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net
Readiness Scorecard, LightStream, MGX, MICA, the Networkers logo, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, Packet, PIX, Post-Routing, Pre-Routing, RateMUX, Registrar,
ScriptShare, SlideCast, SMARTnet, StrataView Plus, Stratm, SwitchProbe, TeleRouter, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, TransPath, and VCO are registered
trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship
between Cisco and any other company. (0401R)
iii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
CONTENTS
About This Guide xxix
Document Objectives xxix
Audience xxix
Document Organization xxx
Related Documentation xxx
Document Conventions xxxi
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information xxxii
Obtaining Documentation xxxii
World Wide Web xxxii
Documentation CD-ROM xxxii
Ordering Documentation xxxii
Documentation Feedback xxxiii
Obtaining Technical Assistance xxxiii
Cisco.com xxxiii
Technical Assistance Center xxxiv
Cisco TAC Web Site xxxiv
Cisco TAC Escalation Center xxxiv
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information xxxv
CHAPTER
1Getting Started 1-1
1.1 Setting up TL1 Communication 1-2
1.1.1 Open a TL1 session 1-2
Open a TL1 Session Via CTC 1-2
Open a TL1 Session Via Telnet 1-3
Open a TL1 Session Via Craft Interface 1-4
1.2 TL1 Command Syntax 1-5
1.3 Autonomous Messages 1-6
1.3.1 Alarm Codes 1-6
1.4 TL1 Commands by User Security 1-7
1.5 Provisioning a DS3E Card in CTC Using TL1 1-8
1.6 Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards 1-8
1.6.1 Payload Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-8
1.6.2 Termination Mode Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-9
Contents
iv
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
1.6.3 Wavelength Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-9
1.6.4 DCC/GCC Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-10
1.6.5 G.709 Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-10
1.6.6 FEC Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-11
1.6.7 Synchronization Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-11
1.6.8 Trace Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-12
1.6.9 PM and Alarm Threshold Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-13
1.6.10 Regeneration Group Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-13
1.6.11 Y Cable Protection Group Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards 1-13
1.7 CTC Interoperability 1-14
1.8 Mixed Mode Timing Support 1-14
1.9 TL1 Command Completion Behavior 1-14
1.9.1 General Rules 1-14
1.9.1.1 Explicit List of AIDs - No Wildcards 1-15
1.9.1.2 Implicit List of AIDs - Single AID With Wildcard 1-15
1.9.1.3 Explicit List Grouped With Implicit List 1-15
1.9.2 Command Completion Behavior for Retrieval of Cross-Connections 1-15
1.9.2.1 Explicit List of AIDs - No Wildcards 1-15
1.9.2.2 Implicit List of AIDs - Single AID With Wildcard 1-16
1.9.2.3 Explicit List Grouped With Implicit List 1-16
1.10 Test Access 1-17
1.10.1 Test Access Terminology 1-18
1.10.2 TAP Creation and Deletion 1-18
1.10.2.1 ED-T1 1-19
1.10.2.2 ED-T3 1-19
1.10.2.3 ED-DS1 1-20
1.10.2.4 ED-STSn 1-20
1.10.2.5 ED-VT1 1-21
1.10.3 Connect Test Access Points 1-21
1.10.4 Change Access Mode 1-22
1.10.5 Disconnect Test Access Points 1-22
1.10.6 Delete Test Access Points 1-23
1.10.7 Retrieve Test Access Point Information 1-23
1.10.8 Test Access Configurations 1-24
1.10.9 Test Access Mode Definitions 1-26
1.10.9.1 MONE 1-26
1.10.9.2 MONF 1-27
1.10.9.3 MONEF 1-27
1.10.9.4 SPLTE 1-28
Contents
v
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
1.10.9.5 SPLTF 1-28
1.10.9.6 SPLTEF 1-29
1.10.9.7 LOOPE 1-29
1.10.9.8 LOOPF 1-30
1.10.9.9 SPLTA 1-30
1.10.9.10 SPLTB 1-31
1.10.10 Unmapped AID Test Access Point Connections 1-31
1.10.10.1 1-Way Circuit 1-32
1.10.10.2 2-Way Circuits 1-33
1.10.10.3 Unmapped AID 1-33
1.11 TL1 PCA Provisioning 1-34
1.11.1 Provision a PCA Cross-Connection 1-34
1.11.2 Retrieve a PCA Cross-Connection 1-35
1.12 FTP Software Download 1-35
1.12.1 COPY-RFILE 1-35
1.12.2 APPLY 1-36
1.12.3 REPT EVT FXFR 1-37
1.12.4 Downloading New Software 1-37
Download New Software 1-37
1.12.5 Activating New Software 1-40
Activate New Software 1-40
1.12.6 Remote Software Download/Activation Using the GNE 1-41
CHAPTER
2TL1 Gateway 2-1
2.1 Gateway Network Element Topology 2-1
2.2 Implementing TL1 Gateway 2-4
Log Into a Remote ENE 2-5
Forward Commands by Specifying the ENE TID (Node 1 or Node 3) 2-5
Receive Autonomous Messages from the Remote ENE 2-5
Log Out of a Remote ENE 2-5
CHAPTER
3TL1 Command Descriptions 3-1
3.1 TL1 Commands by Category 3-1
3.2 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454) 3-6
3.3 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327) 3-12
3.4 TL1 Commands 3-17
3.4.1 ACT-USER: Activate User 3-17
3.4.2 ALW-MSG-ALL: Allow Message All 3-19
3.4.3 ALW-MSG-DBCHG: Allow Database Change Message 3-19
Contents
vi
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
3.4.4 ALW-MSG-SECU: Allow Message Security 3-20
3.4.5 ALW-PMREPT-ALL: Allow Performance Report All 3-20
3.4.6 ALW-SWDX-EQPT: Allow Switch Duplex Equipment 3-21
3.4.7 ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT: Allow Switch to Protection Equipment 3-21
3.4.8 ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT: Allow Switch to Working Equipment 3-23
3.4.9 APPLY: Apply 3-24
3.4.10 CANC: Cancel 3-25
3.4.11 CANC-USER: Cancel User 3-25
3.4.12 CHG-ACCMD-<MOD_TACC>: Change Test Access Mode (DS1, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C,
STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3, VT1) 3-26
3.4.13 CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC>: Connect Test Access (DS1, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C,
STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3, VT1) 3-27
3.4.14 COPY-IOSCFG: Copy IOS Config File 3-28
3.4.15 COPY-RFILE: Copy RFILE 3-30
3.4.16 DISC-TACC: Disconnect Test Access 3-32
3.4.17 DLT-BLSR: Delete BLSR 3-32
3.4.18 DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH>: Delete Cross Connection (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C,
STS24C, STS48C, STS192C) 3-33
3.4.19 DLT-CRS-VT1: Delete Virtual Tributary Cross Connect 3-35
3.4.20 DLT-EQPT: Delete Equipment 3-36
3.4.21 DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>: Delete Facility Protection Group (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192) 3-37
3.4.22 DLT-FFP-CLNT: Delete Facility Protection Group Client 3-38
3.4.23 DLT-UCP-CC: Delete Unified Control Plane Control Channel 3-39
3.4.24 DLT-UCP-IF: Delete Unified Control Plane Interface 3-40
3.4.25 DLT-UCP-NBR: Delete Unified Control Plane Neighbor 3-40
3.4.26 DLT-USER-SECU: Delete User Security 3-41
3.4.27 ED-<OCN_TYPE>: Edit (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192) 3-42
3.4.28 ED-<STS_PATH>: Edit (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C,
STS192C) 3-43
3.4.29 ED-BITS: Edit Building Integrated Timing Supply 3-46
3.4.30 ED-BLSR: Edit Bidirectional Line Switched Ring 3-48
3.4.31 ED-CLNT: Edit Client 3-49
3.4.32 ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>:ED CRS (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS 48C,
STS192C) 3-51
3.4.33 ED-CRS-VT1: Edit Cross Connection VT1 3-52
3.4.34 ED-DAT: Edit Date and Time 3-53
3.4.35 ED-DS1: Edit DS1 3-53
3.4.36 ED-DWDM: Edit Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing 3-54
3.4.37 ED-EC1: Edit Electrical Carrier 3-55
3.4.38 ED-EQPT: Edit Equipment 3-56
3.4.39 ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>: Edit Facility Protection Group (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192) 3-58
Contents
vii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
3.4.40 ED-FFP-CLNT: Edit Facility Protection Group Client 3-59
3.4.41 ED-G1000: Edit G1000 3-60
3.4.42 ED-NE-GEN: Edit Network Element General 3-61
3.4.43 ED-NE-SYNCN: Edit Network Element Synchronization 3-62
3.4.44 ED-OCH: Edit Optical Channel 3-63
3.4.45 ED-PID: Edit Password 3-66
3.4.46 ED-SYNCN: Edit Synchronization 3-67
3.4.47 ED-T1: Edit T1 3-68
3.4.48 ED-T3: Edit T3 3-69
3.4.49 ED-TRC-CLNT: Edit Trace Client 3-71
3.4.50 ED-TRC-OCH: Edit Trace Optical Channel Facilities 3-72
3.4.51 ED-UCP-CC: Edit Unified Control Plane Control Channel 3-73
3.4.52 ED-UCP-IF: Edit Unified Control Plane Interface 3-74
3.4.53 ED-UCP-NBR: Edit Unified Control Plane Neighbor 3-75
3.4.54 ED-UCP-NODE: Edit Unified Control Plane Node 3-76
3.4.55 ED-USER-SECU: Edit User Security 3-79
3.4.56 ED-VT1: Edit Virtual Tributary 3-81
3.4.57 ENT-BLSR: Enter BLSR 3-82
3.4.58 ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>: Enter Cross Connection (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C,
STS24C, STS48C, STS192C) 3-84
3.4.59 ENT-CRS-VT1: Enter STS Cross Connection VT1 3-86
3.4.60 ENT-EQPT: Enter Equipment 3-87
3.4.61 ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>: Enter Facility Protection Group (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192) 3-90
3.4.62 ENT-FFP-CLNT: Enter Facility Protection Group Client 3-91
3.4.63 ENT-UCP-CC: Enter Unified Control Plane Control Channel 3-92
3.4.64 ENT-UCP-IF: Enter Unified Control Plane Interface 3-95
3.4.65 ENT-UCP-NBR: Enter Unified Control Plane Neighbor 3-96
3.4.66 ENT-USER-SECU: Enter User Security 3-99
3.4.67 EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>: Operate Protection Switch (OC12, OC48, OC192) 3-100
3.4.68 INH-MSG-ALL: Inhibit Message All 3-101
3.4.69 INH-MSG-DBCHG: Inhibit Database Change Message 3-102
3.4.70 INH-MSG-SECU: Inhibit Message Security 3-102
3.4.71 INH-PMREPT-ALL: Inhibit Performance Report All 3-102
3.4.72 INH-SWDX-EQPT: Inhibit Switch Duplex Equipment 3-103
3.4.73 INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT: Inhibit Switch to Protection Equipment 3-104
3.4.74 INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT: Inhibit Switch to Working Equipment 3-105
3.4.75 INIT-REG-<MOD2>: Initialize Register (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, OCH, STS1,
STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3, VT1) 3-108
3.4.76 INIT-SYS: Initialize System 3-109
3.4.77 OPR-ACO-ALL: Operate Alarm Cutoff All 3-109
Contents
viii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
3.4.78 OPR-EXT-CONT: Operate External Control 3-110
3.4.79 OPR-LPBK-<MOD2>: Operate Loopback (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH,
STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C, STS9C, T1, T3, VT1) 3-111
3.4.80 OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>: Operate Protection Switch (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192) 3-112
3.4.81 OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>: Operate Protection Switch (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C,
STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C) 3-114
3.4.82 OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT: Operate Protection Switch Client 3-115
3.4.83 OPR-PROTNSW-VT1: Operate Virtual Tributary Protection Switch VT1 3-116
3.4.84 OPR-SYNCNSW: Operate Synchronization Switch 3-117
3.4.85 REPT ALM <MOD2ALM>: Report Alarm (CLNT, DS1, E100, E1000, EC1, FSTE, G1000, GIGE,
OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, POS, STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C,
STS9C, T1, T3, UDCDCC, UDCF, VT1) 3-118
3.4.86 REPT ALM BITS: Report Alarm Building Integrated Timing Supply 3-119
3.4.87 REPT ALM COM: Report Alarm COM 3-120
3.4.88 REPT ALM ENV: Report Alarm Environment 3-121
3.4.89 REPT ALM EQPT: Report Alarm Equipment 3-122
3.4.90 REPT ALM RING: Report Alarm Ring 3-123
3.4.91 REPT ALM SYNCN: Report Alarm Synchronization 3-124
3.4.92 REPT ALM UCP: Report Alarm Unified Control Plane 3-125
3.4.93 REPT DBCHG: Report Database Change Message 3-126
3.4.94 REPT EVT <MOD2ALM>: Report Event (CLNT, DS1, E100, E1000, EC1, FSTE, G1000, GIGE,
OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, POS, STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C,
STS9C, T1, T3, UDCDCC, UDCF, VT1) 3-128
3.4.95 REPT EVT BITS: Report Event BITS 3-129
3.4.96 REPT EVT COM: Report Event COM 3-130
3.4.97 REPT EVT ENV: Report Event Environment 3-131
3.4.98 REPT EVT EQPT: Report Event Equipment 3-132
3.4.99 REPT EVT FXFR: Report Event Software Download 3-133
3.4.100 REPT EVT IOSCFG: Report Event IOS Config File 3-134
3.4.101 REPT EVT RING: Report Event Ring 3-135
3.4.102 REPT EVT SECU: Report Event Security 3-136
3.4.103 REPT EVT SESSION: Report Event Session 3-137
3.4.104 REPT EVT SYNCN: Report Event Synchronization 3-138
3.4.105 REPT EVT UCP: Report Event Unified Control Plane 3-139
3.4.106 REPT PM <MOD2>: Report Performance Monitoring (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC12, OC192, OC3,
OC48, OCH, STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C, STS9C, T1, T3, VT1) 3-140
3.4.107 REPT SW: Report Switch 3-141
3.4.108 RLS-EXT-CONT: Release External Control 3-141
3.4.109 RLS-LPBK-<MOD2>: Release Loopback (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH,
STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C, STS9C, T1,T3, VT1) 3-142
3.4.110 RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>: Release Protection Switch (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192) 3-143
Contents
ix
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
3.4.111 RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>: Release Protection Switch (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C,
STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C) 3-144
3.4.112 RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT: Release Protection Switch Client 3-145
3.4.113 RLS-PROTNSW-VT1: Release Protection Switch VT1 3-145
3.4.114 RLS-SYNCNSW: Release Synchronization Switch 3-146
3.4.115 RMV-<MOD2_IO>: Remove (CLNT, DS1, EC1, G1000, OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, T1,
T3) 3-147
3.4.116 RST-<MOD2_IO>: Restore (CLNT, DS1, EC1, G1000, OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, T1,
T3) 3-147
3.4.117 RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>: Retrieve (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192) 3-148
3.4.118 RTRV-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C,
STS192C) 3-151
3.4.119 RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM>:Retrieve Alarm (CLNT, DS1, E100, E1000, EC1, FSTE, G1000, GIGE,
OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, POS, STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C,
STS9C, T1, T3, UDCDCC, UDCF, VT1) 3-154
3.4.120 RTRV-ALM-ALL: Retrieve Alarm All 3-155
3.4.121 RTRV-ALM-BITS: Retrieve Alarm Building Integrated Timing Supply 3-157
3.4.122 RTRV-ALM-ENV: Retrieve Alarm Environment 3-159
3.4.123 RTRV-ALM-EQPT: Retrieve Alarm Equipment 3-160
3.4.124 RTRV-ALM-RING: Retrieve Alarm Ring 3-162
3.4.125 RTRV-ALM-SYNCN: Retrieve Alarm Synchronization 3-163
3.4.126 RTRV-ALM-UCP: Retrieve Alarm Unified Control Plane 3-165
3.4.127 RTRV-ATTR-CONT: Retrieve Attribute Control 3-167
3.4.128 RTRV-ATTR-ENV: Retrieve Attribute Environment 3-168
3.4.129 RTRV-BITS: Retrieve Building Integrated Timing Supply 3-169
3.4.130 RTRV-BLSR: Retrieve Bidirectional Line Switched Ring 3-171
3.4.131 RTRV-CLNT: Retrieve Client 3-173
3.4.132 RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>: Retrieve Condition (CLNT, DS1, E100, E1000, EC1, FSTE, G1000,
GIGE, OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, POS, STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C,
STS6C, STS9C, T1, T3, UDCDCC, UDCF, VT1) 3-175
3.4.133 RTRV-COND-ALL: Retrieve Condition All 3-177
3.4.134 RTRV-COND-BITS: Retrieve Condition Building Integrated Timing Supply 3-179
3.4.135 RTRV-COND-ENV: Retrieve Environmental Condition 3-181
3.4.136 RTRV-COND-EQPT: Retrieve Condition Equipment 3-182
3.4.137 RTRV-COND-RING: Retrieve Condition Ring 3-185
3.4.138 RTRV-COND-SYNCN: Retrieve Condition Synchronization 3-186
3.4.139 RTRV-COND-UCP: Retrieve Condition Unified Control Plane 3-188
3.4.140 RTRV-CRS: Retrieve Cross Connect 3-189
3.4.141 RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve Cross Connect (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C,
STS24C, STS48C, STS192C) 3-191
3.4.142 RTRV-CRS-VT1: Retrieve Cross Connect Virtual Tributary 3-194
Contents
x
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
3.4.143 RTRV-DS1: Retrieve DS1 3-196
3.4.144 RTRV-DWDM: Retrieve Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing 3-197
3.4.145 RTRV-EC1: Retrieve EC1 3-199
3.4.146 RTRV-EQPT: Retrieve Equipment 3-200
3.4.147 RTRV-EXT-CONT: Retrieve External Control 3-202
3.4.148 RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>: Retrieve Facility Protection Group (OC3, OC12, OC48,
OC192) 3-203
3.4.149 RTRV-FFP-CLNT: Retrieve Facility Protection Group Client 3-204
3.4.150 RTRV-FSTE: Retrieve Fast Ethernet 3-206
3.4.151 RTRV-G1000: Retrieve G1000 Facility 3-207
3.4.152 RTRV-GIGE: Retrieve Gigabit Ethernet 3-208
3.4.153 RTRV-HDR: Retrieve Header 3-210
3.4.154 RTRV-INV: Retrieve Inventory 3-210
3.4.155 RTRV-LOG: Retrieve Log 3-212
3.4.156 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK: Retrieve Map Network 3-213
3.4.157 RTRV-NE-GEN: Retrieve Network Element General 3-213
3.4.158 RTRV-NE-IPMAP: Retrieve Network Element IPMAP 3-215
3.4.159 RTRV-NE-SYNCN: Retrieve Network Element Synchronization 3-216
3.4.160 RTRV-OCH: Retrieve Optical Channel 3-218
3.4.161 RTRV-PM-<MOD2>: Retrieve Performance (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, OCH,
STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3, VT1) 3-221
3.4.162 RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve Performance Mode of PM Data Collection (STS1,
STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C) 3-224
3.4.163 RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>:Retrieve Performance Monitoring Schedule (CLNT, DS1, EC1,
OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, OCH, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C,
T1, T3, VT1) 3-225
3.4.164 RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL: Retrieve Performance Schedule All 3-226
3.4.165 RTRV-POS: Retrieve Packet Over SONET 3-228
3.4.166 RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>: Retrieve Protection Switch (OC3, OC12, OC48,
OC192) 3-229
3.4.167 RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve Protection Switch (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C,
STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C) 3-230
3.4.168 RTRV-PROTNSW-CLNT: Retrieve Protection Switch Client 3-231
3.4.169 RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1: Retrieve Protection Switch VT1 3-232
3.4.170 RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve Path Trace (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C,
STS24C, STS48C, STS192C) 3-232
3.4.171 RTRV-SYNCN: Retrieve Synchronization 3-234
3.4.172 RTRV-T1: Retrieve T1 Facility 3-235
3.4.173 RTRV-T3: Retrieve T3 3-237
3.4.174 RTRV-TACC: Retrieve Test Access 3-238
Contents
xi
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
3.4.175 RTRV-TH-<MOD2>: Retrieve Threshold (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, OCN,
STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3, VT1) 3-240
3.4.176 RTRV-TOD: Retrieve Time of Day 3-242
3.4.177 RTRV-TRC-<OCN_BLSR>: Retrieve Trace Client (OC12, OC192, OC48) 3-243
3.4.178 RTRV-TRC-CLNT: Retrieve Trace Client 3-244
3.4.179 RTRV-TRC-OCH: Retrieve Trace Optical Channel 3-245
3.4.180 RTRV-UCP-CC: Retrieve Unified Control Plane Control Channel 3-247
3.4.181 RTRV-UCP-IF: Retrieve Unified Control Plane Interface 3-249
3.4.182 RTRV-UCP-NBR: Retrieve Unified Control Plane Neighbor 3-251
3.4.183 RTRV-UCP-NODE: Retrieve Unified Control Plane Node 3-252
3.4.184 RTRV-USER-SECU: Retrieve User Security 3-255
3.4.185 RTRV-VT1: Retrieve VT1 3-256
3.4.186 SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>: Schedule Performance Monitoring Report (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3,
OC12, OC48, OC192, OCH, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3,
VT1) 3-257
3.4.187 SET-ATTR-CONT: Set Attribute Control 3-259
3.4.188 SET-ATTR-ENV: Set Attribute Environment 3-260
3.4.189 SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>: Set Performance Mode of PM Data Collection (STS1, STS3C,
STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C) 3-261
3.4.190 SET-TH-<MOD2>: Set Threshold (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12,OC48, OC192, OCH, STS1,
STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C,T1, T3, VT1) 3-262
3.4.191 SET-TOD: Set Time of Day 3-263
3.4.192 SW-DX-EQPT: Switch Duplex Equipment 3-263
3.4.193 SW-TOPROTN-EQPT: Switch to Protection Equipment 3-264
3.4.194 SW-TOWKG-EQPT: Switch to Working Equipment 3-266
CHAPTER
4TL1 Command Components 4-1
4.1 TL1 Default Values 4-1
4.1.1 BLSR 4-1
4.1.2 Cross Connections 4-1
4.1.3 Environment Alarms and Controls 4-2
4.1.4 Equipment 4-2
4.1.5 Performance 4-2
4.1.6 Ports 4-3
4.1.7 SONET Line Protection 4-4
4.1.8 STS and VT Paths 4-4
4.1.9 Synchronization 4-5
4.1.10 Testing 4-5
4.2 Modifier Support by Platform 4-6
4.3 Starting Positions for an STS-Mc SPE 4-7
Contents
xii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
4.4 Access Identifiers 4-10
4.4.1 ALL 4-10
4.4.2 CrossConnectID 4-14
4.4.3 IPCC 4-16
4.4.4 NBR 4-16
4.4.5 PRSLOT 4-16
4.4.6 UCP 4-17
4.4.7 AONS 4-17
4.4.8 BAND 4-17
4.4.9 BITS 4-18
4.4.9.1 BITS for ONS 15454 4-18
4.4.9.2 BITS for ONS 15327 4-18
4.4.10 BLSR 4-18
4.4.10.1 BLSR for ONS 15454 4-18
4.4.10.2 BLSR for ONS 15327 4-19
4.4.11 CHANNEL 4-19
4.4.12 COM 4-19
4.4.12.1 COM for ONS 15454 4-19
4.4.12.2 COM for ONS 15327 4-20
4.4.13 DS1 4-20
4.4.14 ENV 4-20
4.4.14.1 ENV for ONS 15454 4-20
4.4.14.2 ENV for ONS 15327 4-21
4.4.15 EQPT 4-21
4.4.15.1 EQPT for ONS 15454 4-21
4.4.15.2 EQPT for ONS 15327 4-22
4.4.16 FACILITY 4-22
4.4.16.1 FACILITY for ONS 15454 4-22
4.4.16.2 FACILITY for ONS 15327 4-23
4.4.17 LINE 4-23
4.4.18 OSC 4-24
4.4.19 RFILE 4-24
4.4.19.1 RFILE for ONS 15454 4-24
4.4.20 STS 4-24
4.4.20.1 STS for ONS 15454 4-24
4.4.20.2 STS for ONS 15327 4-26
4.4.21 SYN 4-26
4.4.21.1 SYN for ONS 15454 4-26
4.4.21.2 SYN for ONS 15327 4-27
4.4.22 SYN_SRC 4-27
Contents
xiii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
4.4.22.1 SYN_SRC for ONS 15454 4-27
4.4.22.2 SYN_SRC for ONS 15327 4-27
4.4.23 SYNC_REF 4-28
4.4.23.1 SYNC_REF for ONS 15454 4-28
4.4.23.2 SYNC_REF for ONS 15327 4-28
4.4.24 SYNCSW 4-29
4.4.24.1 SYNCSW for ONS 15454 4-29
4.4.24.2 SYNCSW for ONS 15327 4-29
4.4.25 TACC 4-29
4.4.26 TAP 4-30
4.4.27 UDC 4-30
4.4.28 VT1_5 4-30
4.4.28.1 VT1_5 for ONS 15454 4-30
4.4.28.2 VT1_5 for ONS 15327 4-31
4.5 Parameter Types 4-31
4.5.1 ATAG Description 4-31
4.5.2 CTAG Description 4-32
4.5.3 TID Description 4-32
4.5.4 Parameter Notes 4-33
4.5.5 ALL_MONTYPE 4-33
4.5.6 ALL_THR 4-37
4.5.7 ALM_THR 4-40
4.5.8 ALS_CFG 4-41
4.5.9 ALS_MODE 4-41
4.5.10 ALS_RESTART 4-41
4.5.11 AMPL_MODE 4-42
4.5.12 AWG_STATUS 4-42
4.5.13 BITS_LineBuildOut 4-42
4.5.14 BLSR_MODE 4-42
4.5.15 BLSR_PTH_STATE 4-43
4.5.16 BLSR_PTH_TYPE 4-43
4.5.17 BLSR_TYPE 4-43
4.5.18 C2_BYTE 4-44
4.5.19 CCT 4-45
4.5.20 CIRCUIT_SIZE 4-45
4.5.21 CMD_MODE 4-46
4.5.22 COMM_TYPE 4-46
4.5.23 COND_EFF 4-47
4.5.24 CONDITION 4-47
4.5.25 CONT_MODE 4-59
Contents
xiv
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
4.5.26 CONTTYPE 4-59
4.5.27 CREATION_TYPE 4-60
4.5.28 CRS_TYPE 4-60
4.5.29 DATARATE 4-60
4.5.30 DIRECTION 4-60
4.5.31 DIRN 4-61
4.5.32 DL_TYPE 4-61
4.5.33 DS_LINE_CODE 4-61
4.5.34 DS_LINE_TYPE 4-61
4.5.35 DURATION 4-62
4.5.36 E_LBO 4-62
4.5.37 ENV_ALM 4-62
4.5.38 EQPT_TYPE 4-63
4.5.39 EQUIP 4-66
4.5.40 EQUIPMENT_TYPE 4-66
4.5.41 ETHER_DUPLEX 4-67
4.5.42 ETHER_SPEED 4-68
4.5.43 EXP 4-68
4.5.44 EXT_RING 4-68
4.5.45 FIBER_TYPE 4-68
4.5.46 FLOW 4-69
4.5.47 FRAME_FORMAT 4-69
4.5.48 GCCRATE 4-69
4.5.49 HEATER_STATUS 4-69
4.5.50 INH_MODE 4-70
4.5.51 LASER_STATUS 4-70
4.5.52 LINE_BUILDOUT 4-70
4.5.53 LINE_CODE 4-70
4.5.54 LOCATION 4-71
4.5.55 LPBK_TYPE 4-71
4.5.56 MFS_TYPE 4-71
4.5.57 MOD2 4-72
4.5.58 MOD2_IO 4-72
4.5.59 MOD2ALM 4-73
4.5.60 MOD2B 4-74
4.5.61 MOD2O 4-75
4.5.62 MOD_PATH 4-75
4.5.63 MOD_PORT 4-76
4.5.64 MOD_TACC 4-76
4.5.65 MODULE_OP 4-77
Contents
xv
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
4.5.66 MSGTYPE 4-77
4.5.67 MUX_TYPE 4-78
4.5.68 NOTIF_CODE 4-78
4.5.69 OCN_BLSR 4-78
4.5.70 OCN_MONTYPE 4-79
4.5.71 OCN_TYPE 4-79
4.5.72 ON_OFF 4-79
4.5.73 OPTICAL_BAND 4-80
4.5.74 OPTICAL_LINK_TYPE 4-80
4.5.75 OPTICAL_MODE 4-80
4.5.76 OPTICAL_PORT_TYPE 4-81
4.5.77 OPTICAL_WLEN 4-81
4.5.78 OPTICS 4-82
4.5.79 PAYLOAD 4-83
4.5.80 PM_MODE 4-83
4.5.81 PM_STATE 4-83
4.5.82 PRIVILEGE 4-83
4.5.83 PRODUCT_TYPE 4-84
4.5.84 PROTECTION_GROUP 4-84
4.5.85 PROTTYPE 4-84
4.5.86 PST 4-85
4.5.87 RDIRN_MODE 4-85
4.5.88 REVERTIVE_TIME 4-85
4.5.89 SD_BER 4-85
4.5.90 SDCC_MODE 4-86
4.5.91 SERV_EFF 4-86
4.5.92 SF_BER 4-86
4.5.93 SIDE 4-87
4.5.94 SST 4-87
4.5.95 STATUS 4-87
4.5.96 STM_TYPE 4-87
4.5.97 STS_MONTYPE 4-88
4.5.98 STS_PATH 4-88
4.5.99 SW 4-88
4.5.100 SWITCH_TYPE 4-89
4.5.101 SYNC_CLOCK_REF_QUALITY_LEVEL 4-89
4.5.102 SYNC_GENERATION 4-90
4.5.103 SYNC_QUALITY_LEVEL 4-90
4.5.104 SYNC_GENERATION 4-91
4.5.105 SYS_TYPE 4-91
Contents
xvi
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
4.5.106 T1_MONTYPE 4-91
4.5.107 T3_MONTYPE 4-92
4.5.108 TACC_MODE 4-92
4.5.109 TERM_MODE 4-93
4.5.110 TIMING_MODE 4-93
4.5.111 TMPER 4-93
4.5.112 TRANS_MODE 4-94
4.5.113 TRCFORMAT 4-94
4.5.114 TRCLEVEL 4-94
4.5.115 TRCMODE 4-94
4.5.116 TX_RSLT 4-95
4.5.117 TX_STATUS 4-95
4.5.118 TX_TYPE 4-95
4.5.119 UCP_ADM_STATE 4-96
4.5.120 UCP_CC_TUN_MD 4-96
4.5.121 UCP_CKT_STATE 4-96
4.5.122 UCP_CRC_MODE 4-97
4.5.123 UCP_IPCC_TYPE 4-97
4.5.124 UCP_TNA_TYPE 4-97
4.5.125 UNI_BI 4-97
4.5.126 UP_DOWN 4-98
4.5.127 VALIDITY 4-98
4.5.128 VOA_CNTR_MODE 4-98
4.5.129 VT1_5_MONTYPE 4-98
4.5.130 WDM 4-99
4.5.131 WLEN_MODE 4-99
CHAPTER
5Ring Provisioning 5-1
5.1 UPSR Topology 5-1
5.2 UPSR Cross-Connections 5-2
5.3 Ring-to-Ring Interconnection 5-2
5.3.1 Sample UPSR to UPSR Connection 5-3
5.3.2 Sample UPSR to Two-Fiber BLSR Connection 5-4
5.3.3 Sample Two-Fiber BLSR to UPSR Connection 5-5
5.3.4 Sample Two-Fiber BLSR to Two-Fiber BLSR Connection 5-6
5.3.5 Sample Two-Fiber BLSR to Four-Fiber BLSR Connection (ONS 15454) 5-7
5.3.6 Sample UPSR to Four-Fiber BLSR Connection (ONS 15454) 5-8
5.4 1-Way Drop and Continue 5-9
5.4.1 Sample Node 1 Configuration (Source Node) 5-9
Contents
xvii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
5.4.2 Sample Node 2 Configuration (Drop and Continue Node) 5-10
5.4.3 Sample Node 3 Configuration (Destination Node) 5-10
CHAPTER
6TL1 Performance Monitoring 6-1
6.1 Performance Monitoring by Card 6-1
6.2 PM Parameters by Line Type 6-5
6.3 Scheduled PM Report 6-6
6.3.1 Create a PM Schedule and Receive an Autonomous PM Report 6-6
6.3.2 Manage PM Schedules 6-7
6.3.3 Enable or Disable a TL1 Session to Receive Autonomous PM Reports 6-7
CHAPTER
7TL1 Alarms and Errors 7-1
7.1 Alarms 7-1
7.1.1 AEP 7-2
7.1.2 AIP 7-2
7.1.3 BITS 7-3
7.1.4 BP 7-3
7.1.5 CC 7-3
7.1.6 CKT 7-4
7.1.7 DS1 7-4
7.1.8 DS3 7-4
7.1.9 DWDM Client 7-5
7.1.10 DWDM Trunk 7-6
7.1.11 ECN 7-9
7.1.12 ENV 7-9
7.1.13 EQPT 7-10
7.1.14 ETHER 7-12
7.1.15 EXTSYNCH 7-12
7.1.16 FAN 7-12
7.1.17 FUDC 7-13
7.1.18 HDGE (G1000) 7-13
7.1.19 ML1000 7-14
7.1.20 MSUDC 7-14
7.1.21 NBR 7-14
7.1.22 NE 7-15
7.1.23 NERING 7-16
7.1.24 NESYNCH 7-16
7.1.25 OCN 7-16
7.1.26 STSMON 7-18
Contents
xviii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
7.1.27 STSTERM 7-18
7.1.28 VT-MON 7-19
7.1.29 VT-TERM 7-19
7.2 Errors 7-20
7.2.1 Errors Listed by Error Code 7-20
7.3 Echo 7-37
I
NDEX
FIGURES
xix
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Figure 1-1 Autonomous message format 1-6
Figure 1-2 Circuit with no access 1-17
Figure 1-3 Single node view (Node 1) 1-24
Figure 1-4 Multi-node view (MONE example) 1-25
Figure 1-5 Circuit with no access 1-26
Figure 1-6 MONE access 1-26
Figure 1-7 MONF access 1-27
Figure 1-8 MONEF access 1-27
Figure 1-9 SPLTE access 1-28
Figure 1-10 SPLTF access 1-28
Figure 1-11 SPLTEF access 1-29
Figure 1-12 LOOPE access 1-29
Figure 1-13 LOOPF access 1-30
Figure 1-14 SPLTA access 1-30
Figure 1-15 SPLTB access 1-31
Figure 2-1 Example of a GNE topology 2-2
Figure 2-2 Four-node ring without TL1 Gateway 2-4
Figure 2-3 Four-node ring with TL1 Gateway 2-4
Figure 5-1 Network configured with a 1-way UPSR circuit 5-2
Figure 5-2 Network map with Cisco node showing ring-to-ring interconnection 5-3
Figure 5-3 UPSR to UPSR connection specifications through the Cisco node 5-3
Figure 5-4 Selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1 5-4
Figure 5-5 Selector between 12/3/2 and 13/3/2 5-4
Figure 5-6 UPSR to two-fiber BLSR 5-4
Figure 5-7 Selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1 5-5
Figure 5-8 Bridge from 12/3/2 to Ring 1 5-5
Figure 5-9 Two-fiber BLSR to UPSR 5-5
Figure 5-10 Bridge from 6/1/1 to Ring 2 5-6
Figure 5-11 Selector between 12/3/2 and 13/3/2 to Ring 1 5-6
Figure 5-12 Two-fiber BLSR to two-fiber BLSR 5-6
Figure 5-13 2-way connection from 5/1/1 to 13/3/2 5-7
Figures
xx
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Figure 5-14 Two-fiber BLSR to four-fiber BLSR 5-7
Figure 5-15 2-way connection from 1/1/1 to 5/1/1 5-7
Figure 5-16 UPSR to four-fiber BLSR 5-8
Figure 5-17 Selector between 1/1/1 and 2/1/1 to Ring 2 (5/1/190) 5-8
Figure 5-18 Bridge from 5/1/190 to Ring 1 (1/1/1 and 2/1/1) 5-8
Figure 5-19 1-way drop and continue 5-9
Figure 5-20 Bridge from 1/1/1 to 5/1/1 and 6/1/1 5-9
Figure 5-21 Selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1 to 1/1/1 5-10
Figure 5-22 Selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1 to 1/1/1 5-10
TABLES
xxi
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Table 1-1 Command Access 1-7
Table 1-2 Security Default Time Outs 1-8
Table 1-3 Modes Supported by Circuit Type 1-33
Table 2-1 Gateway Resource Pool 2-2
Table 2-2 Examples of a Single GNE Topology Showing How the GNE/ENE Resources can be Allocated 2-3
Table 3-1 TL1 Commands by Category 3-1
Table 3-2 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454) 3-6
Table 3-3 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327) 3-12
Table 4-1 BLSR Default Values 4-1
Table 4-2 Cross Connections Default Values 4-1
Table 4-3 Environment Alarms and Controls Default Values 4-2
Table 4-4 Equipment Default Values 4-2
Table 4-5 Performance Default Values 4-2
Table 4-6 Ports Default Values 4-3
Table 4-7 SONET Line Protection Default Values 4-4
Table 4-8 STS and VT Paths Default Values 4-4
Table 4-9 Synchronization Default Values 4-5
Table 4-10 Testing Default Values 4-5
Table 4-11 Modifier Support 4-6
Table 4-12 Starting Positions for an STS-Mc SPE in an OC-12 Signal 4-7
Table 4-13 Starting Positions for an STS-Mc SPE in an OC-48 Signal 4-7
Table 4-14 Starting positions for an STS-Mc SPE in an OC-192 Signal 4-8
Table 4-15 ALL for ONS 15454 and ONS 15327 4-10
Table 4-16 CrossConnectID for ONS 15454 4-14
Table 4-17 IPCC for ONS 15454 4-16
Table 4-18 NBR for ONS 15454 4-16
Table 4-19 PRSLOT for ONS 15454 4-16
Table 4-20 UCP for ONS 15454 4-17
Table 4-21 AONS for ONS 15454 4-17
Table 4-22 BAND for ONS 15454 4-17
Table 4-23 BITS for ONS 15454 4-18
Tables
xxii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Table 4-24 BITS for ONS 15327 4-18
Table 4-25 BLSR for ONS 15454 4-18
Table 4-26 BLSR for ONS 15327 4-19
Table 4-27 CHANNEL Values 4-19
Table 4-28 COM for ONS 15454 4-19
Table 4-29 COM for ONS 15327 4-20
Table 4-30 DS1 for ONS 15454 4-20
Table 4-31 ENV for ONS 15454 4-20
Table 4-32 ENV for ONS 15327 4-21
Table 4-33 EQPT for ONS 15454 4-21
Table 4-34 EQPT for ONS 15327 4-22
Table 4-35 FACILITY for ONS 15454 4-22
Table 4-36 FACILITY for ONS 15327 4-23
Table 4-37 LINE Values 4-23
Table 4-38 OSC Values 4-24
Table 4-39 RFILE for ONS 15454 4-24
Table 4-40 STS for ONS 15454 4-24
Table 4-41 STS for ONS 15327 4-26
Table 4-42 SYN for ONS 15454 4-26
Table 4-43 SYN for ONS 15327 4-27
Table 4-44 SYN_SRC for ONS 15454 4-27
Table 4-45 SYN_SRC for ONS 15327 4-27
Table 4-46 SYNC_REF for ONS 15454 4-28
Table 4-47 SYNC_REF for ONS 15327 4-28
Table 4-48 SYNCSW for ONS 15454 4-29
Table 4-49 SYNCSW for ONS 15327 4-29
Table 4-50 TACC for ONS 15454 4-29
Table 4-51 TACC for ONS 15327 4-30
Table 4-52 UDC for ONS 15454 4-30
Table 4-53 VT1_5 for ONS 15454 4-30
Table 4-54 VT1_5 for ONS 15327 4-31
Table 4-55 ALL_MONTYPE Values 4-33
Table 4-56 ALL_THR Value 4-37
Table 4-57 ALM_THR Values 4-40
Table 4-58 ALS_CFG Values 4-41
Tables
xxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Table 4-59 ALS_MODE Values 4-41
Table 4-60 ALS_RESTART Values 4-41
Table 4-61 AMPL_MODE Values 4-42
Table 4-62 AWG_STATUS Values 4-42
Table 4-63 BITS_LineBuildOut Values 4-42
Table 4-64 BLSR_MODE Values 4-43
Table 4-65 BLSR_PTH_STATE Values 4-43
Table 4-66 BLSR_PTH_TYPE Values 4-43
Table 4-67 BLSR_TYPE Values 4-43
Table 4-68 C2_BTYE Values 4-44
Table 4-69 CCT Values 4-45
Table 4-70 CIRCUIT_SIZE Values 4-45
Table 4-71 CMD_MODE Values 4-46
Table 4-72 COMM_TYPE Values 4-46
Table 4-73 COND_EFF Values 4-47
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values 4-47
Table 4-75 CONT_MODE Values 4-59
Table 4-76 CONTTYPE Values 4-59
Table 4-77 CREATION_TYPE Values 4-60
Table 4-78 CRS_TYPE Values 4-60
Table 4-79 DATARATE Values 4-60
Table 4-80 DIRECTION Values 4-60
Table 4-81 DIRN Values 4-61
Table 4-82 DL_TYPE Values 4-61
Table 4-83 DS_LINE_CODE Values 4-61
Table 4-84 DS_LINE_TYPE Values 4-61
Table 4-85 DURATION Values 4-62
Table 4-86 E_LBO Values 4-62
Table 4-87 ENV_ALM Values 4-62
Table 4-88 EQPT_TYPE Values 4-63
Table 4-89 EQUIP Values 4-66
Table 4-90 EQUIPMENT_TYPE Values 4-66
Table 4-91 ETHER_DUPLEX Values 4-68
Table 4-92 ETHER_SPEED Values 4-68
Table 4-93 EXP Values 4-68
Tables
xxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Table 4-94 EXT_RING Values 4-68
Table 4-95 FIBER_TYPE Values 4-69
Table 4-96 FLOW Values 4-69
Table 4-97 FRAME_FORMAT Values 4-69
Table 4-98 GCCRATE Values 4-69
Table 4-99 HEATER_STATUS Values 4-70
Table 4-100 INH_MODE Values 4-70
Table 4-101 LASER_STATUS Values 4-70
Table 4-102 LINE_BUILDOUT Values 4-70
Table 4-103 LINE_CODE Values 4-71
Table 4-104 LOCATION Values 4-71
Table 4-105 LPBK_TYPE Values 4-71
Table 4-106 MFS_TYPE Values 4-71
Table 4-107 MOD2 Values 4-72
Table 4-108 MOD2_IO Values 4-72
Table 4-109 MOD2ALM Values 4-73
Table 4-110 MOD2B Values 4-74
Table 4-111 MOD2O Values 4-75
Table 4-112 MOD_PATH Values 4-75
Table 4-113 MOD_PORT Values 4-76
Table 4-114 MOD_TACC Values 4-76
Table 4-115 MOD_OP Values 4-77
Table 4-116 MSGTYPE Values 4-77
Table 4-117 MUX_TYPE Values 4-78
Table 4-118 NOTIF_CODE Values 4-78
Table 4-119 OCN_BLSR Values 4-78
Table 4-120 OCN_MONTYPE Values 4-79
Table 4-121 OCN_TYPE Values 4-79
Table 4-122 ON_OFF Values 4-79
Table 4-123 OPTICAL_BAND Values 4-80
Table 4-124 OPTICAL_LINK_TYPE Values 4-80
Table 4-125 OPTICAL_MODE Values 4-80
Table 4-126 OPTICAL_PORT_TYPE Values 4-81
Table 4-127 OPTICAL_WLEN Values 4-81
Table 4-128 OPTICS Values 4-82
Tables
xxv
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Table 4-129 PAYLOAD Values 4-83
Table 4-130 PM_MODE Values 4-83
Table 4-131 PM_STATE Values 4-83
Table 4-132 PRIVILEGE Values 4-83
Table 4-133 PRODUCT_TYPE Values 4-84
Table 4-134 PROTECTION_GROUP Values 4-84
Table 4-135 PROTTYPE Values 4-84
Table 4-136 PST Values 4-85
Table 4-137 RDIRN_MODE Values 4-85
Table 4-138 REVERTIVE_TIME Values 4-85
Table 4-139 SD_BER Values 4-85
Table 4-140 SDCC_MODE Values 4-86
Table 4-141 SERV_EFF Values 4-86
Table 4-142 SF_BER Values 4-86
Table 4-143 SIDE Values 4-87
Table 4-144 SST Values 4-87
Table 4-145 STATUS Values 4-87
Table 4-146 STM_TYPE Values 4-87
Table 4-147 STS_MONTYPE Values 4-88
Table 4-148 STS_PATH Values 4-88
Table 4-149 SW Values 4-88
Table 4-150 SWITCH_TYPE Values 4-89
Table 4-151 SYNC_CLOCK_REF_QUALITY_LEVEL Values 4-89
Table 4-152 SYNC_GENERATION Values 4-90
Table 4-153 SYNC_QUALITY_LEVEL Values 4-90
Table 4-154 SYNC_GENERATION Values 4-91
Table 4-155 SYS_TYPE Values 4-91
Table 4-156 T1_MONTYPE Values 4-91
Table 4-157 T3_MONTYPE Values 4-92
Table 4-158 TACC_MODE Values 4-92
Table 4-159 TERM_MODE Values 4-93
Table 4-160 TIMING_MODE Values 4-93
Table 4-161 TMPER Values 4-93
Table 4-162 TRANS_MODE Values 4-94
Table 4-163 TRCFORMAT Values 4-94
Tables
xxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Table 4-164 TRCLEVEL Values 4-94
Table 4-165 TRCMODE Values 4-94
Table 4-166 TX_RSLT Values 4-95
Table 4-167 TX_STATUS Values 4-95
Table 4-168 TX_TYPE Values 4-95
Table 4-169 UCP_ADM_STATE Values 4-96
Table 4-170 UCP_CC_TUN_MD Values 4-96
Table 4-171 UCP_CKT_STATE Values 4-96
Table 4-172 UCP_CRC_MODE Values 4-97
Table 4-173 UCP_IPCC_TYPE Values 4-97
Table 4-174 UCP_TNA_TYPE Values 4-97
Table 4-175 UNI_BI Values 4-97
Table 4-176 UP_DOWN Values 4-98
Table 4-177 VALIDITY Values 4-98
Table 4-178 VOA_CNTR_MODE Values 4-98
Table 4-179 VT1_5_MONTYPE Values 4-98
Table 4-180 WDM Values 4-99
Table 4-181 WLEN_MODE Values 4-99
Table 6-1 TXP_MR_10G (Transponder) and MXP_2.5G_10G (Muxponder) Card PMs 6-1
Table 6-2 EC1 Card PMs 6-2
Table 6-3 DS1(N) Card PMs 6-2
Table 6-4 DS3(N) Card PMs 6-2
Table 6-5 DS3(N)-3E Card PMs 6-2
Table 6-6 DS3XM-6 Card PMs 6-3
Table 6-7 OC3 Card PMs 6-3
Table 6-8 OC12, OC48, OC192 Card PMs 6-4
Table 6-9 PM Parameters by Line Type 6-5
Table 7-1 AEP 7-2
Table 7-2 AIP 7-2
Table 7-3 BITS 7-3
Table 7-4 BP 7-3
Table 7-5 CC 7-3
Table 7-6 CKT 7-4
Table 7-7 DS1 7-4
Table 7-8 DS3 7-4
Tables
xxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Table 7-9 DWDM Client 7-5
Table 7-10 DWDM Trunk 7-6
Table 7-11 ECN 7-9
Table 7-12 ENV 7-9
Table 7-13 EQPT 7-10
Table 7-14 ETHER 7-12
Table 7-15 EXTSYNCH 7-12
Table 7-16 FAN 7-12
Table 7-17 FUDC 7-13
Table 7-18 HDGE (G1000) 7-13
Table 7-19 ML1000 7-14
Table 7-20 MSUDC 7-14
Table 7-21 NBR 7-14
Table 7-22 NE 7-15
Table 7-23 NERING 7-16
Table 7-24 NESYNCH 7-16
Table 7-25 OCN 7-16
Table 7-26 STSMON 7-18
Table 7-27 STSTERM 7-18
Table 7-28 VT-MON 7-19
Table 7-29 VT-TERM 7-19
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code 7-20
Tables
xxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
xxix
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
About This Guide
This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and
describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information.
This section provides the following information:
Document Objectives
Audience
Document Organization
Related Documentation
Document Conventions
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
Obtaining Documentation
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information
Document Objectives
This guide explains the use of Transaction Language 1 (TL1) for Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15327
systems. Use this guide in conjunction with the appropriate publications listed in the Related
Documentation section.
Audience
To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware
and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and
preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician.
xxx
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
About This Guide
Document Organization
Document Organization
This Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0 is organized into the
following chapters:
Chapter 1, “Getting Started” explains how to gain access to TL1, command syntax, autonomous
messages, provision a DS3E card in CTC using TL1, CTC interoperability, security level privileges
associated with each command, command completion behavior, test access configurations, PCA
provisioning and FTP software download.
Chapter 2, “TL1 Gateway” describes the TL1 Gateway and provides procedures and examples for
implementing TL1 Gateway on a four node ring.
Chapter 3, “TL1 Command Descriptions” lists TL1 commands by category and then lists each
command and autonomous message supported by the ONS 15454 and the ONS 15327.
Chapter 4, “TL1 Command Components” describes the components of TL1 commands including,
default values, access identifiers (AIDs), and parameter types.
Chapter 5, “Ring Provisioning” provides sample procedures for setting up STS or VT circuits over
existing unidirectional path switched ring (UPSR) and bidirectional line switch ring (BLSR)
configurations.
Chapter 6, “TL1 Performance Monitoring” provides TL1 performance monitoring (PM) information
and scheduled PM report provisioning.
Chapter 7, “TL1 Alarms and Errors” lists TL1 alarms and errors supported by the ONS 15454 and
the ONS 15327 including descriptions and severity.
Related Documentation
Use this Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0 in conjunction with the
following referenced publications:
Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide, R4.0
Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide, R4.0
Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R4.0
Cisco ONS 15327 Procedure Guide, R4.0
Cisco ONS 15327 Troubleshooting Guide, R4.0
Cisco ONS 15327 Reference Manual, R4.0
xxxi
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
About This Guide
Document Conventions
Document Conventions
This publication uses the following conventions:
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in
the document.
Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
Convention Application
boldface Commands and keywords in body text.
italic Command input that is supplied by the user.
[ ] Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.
{ x | x | x } A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by
vertical bars. The user must select one.
Ctrl The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the
Control key while pressing the D key.
screen font Examples of information displayed on the screen.
boldface screen font Examples of information that the user must enter.
< > Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.
Warning
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. To see translations of the warnings that appear in
this publication, refer to the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device.
Note: SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Note: This documentation is to be used in conjunction with the specific product installation guide
that shipped with the product. Please refer to the Installation Guide, Configuration Guide, or other
enclosed additional documentation for further details.
xxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
About This Guide
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command
Guide, R4.0 that accompanied the product. This publication describes the international agency
compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15xxx systems. It also includes translations of the
safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15xxx system documentation.
Obtaining Documentation
Cisco provides several ways to obtain documentation, technical assistance, and other technical
resources. These sections explain how to obtain technical information from Cisco Systems.
World Wide Web
You can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/home/home.htm
You can access the Cisco website at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com
International Cisco web sites can be accessed from this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml
Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation is available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your
product. The Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM is updated with incremental
releases and may be more current than printed documentation.
Ordering Documentation
You can find instructions for ordering documentation at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/es_inpck/pdi.htm
You can order Cisco documentation in these ways:
Registered Cisco.com users (Cisco direct customers) can order Cisco product documentation from
the Networking Products MarketPlace:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/partner/ordering/index.shtml
Registered Cisco.com users can order the Documentation CD-ROM (Customer Order Number
DOC-CONDOCCD=) through the online Subscription Store:
http://www.cisco.com/go/subscription
Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local account representative by
calling Cisco Systems Corporate Headquarters (California, U.S.A.) at 408 526-7208 or, elsewhere
in North America, by calling 800 553-NETS (6387).
xxxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
About This Guide
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Documentation Feedback
You can submit comments electronically on Cisco.com. On the Cisco Documentation home page, click
Feedback at the top of the page.
You can email your comments to bug-doc@cisco.com.
You can submit your comments by mail by using the response card behind the front cover of your
document or by writing to the following address:
Cisco Systems
Attn: Customer Document Ordering
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-9883
We appreciate your comments.
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Cisco provides Cisco.com, which includes the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) Website, as a
starting point for all technical assistance. Customers and partners can obtain online documentation,
troubleshooting tips, and sample configurations from the Cisco TAC website. Cisco.com registered users
have complete access to the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC website, including TAC tools
and utilities.
Cisco.com
Cisco.com offers a suite of interactive, networked services that let you access Cisco information,
networking solutions, services, programs, and resources at any time, from anywhere in the world.
Cisco.com provides a broad range of features and services to help you with these tasks:
Streamline business processes and improve productivity
Resolve technical issues with online support
Download and test software packages
Order Cisco learning materials and merchandise
Register for online skill assessment, training, and certification programs
To obtain customized information and service, you can self-register on Cisco.com at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com
xxxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
About This Guide
Obtaining Technical Assistance
Technical Assistance Center
The Cisco TAC is available to all customers who need technical assistance with a Cisco product,
technology, or solution. Two levels of support are available: the Cisco TAC website and the Cisco TAC
Escalation Center. The avenue of support that you choose depends on the priority of the problem and the
conditions stated in service contracts, when applicable.
We categorize Cisco TAC inquiries according to urgency:
Priority level 4 (P4)—You need information or assistance concerning Cisco product capabilities,
product installation, or basic product configuration.
Priority level 3 (P3)—Your network performance is degraded. Network functionality is noticeably
impaired, but most business operations continue.
Priority level 2 (P2)—Your production network is severely degraded, affecting significant aspects
of business operations. No workaround is available.
Priority level 1 (P1)—Your production network is down, and a critical impact to business operations
will occur if service is not restored quickly. No workaround is available.
Cisco TAC Web Site
You can use the Cisco TAC website to resolve P3 and P4 issues yourself, saving both cost and time. The
site provides around-the-clock access to online tools, knowledge bases, and software. To access the
Cisco TAC website, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/tac
All customers, partners, and resellers who have a valid Cisco service contract have complete access to
the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC website. Some services on the Cisco TAC website
require a Cisco.com login ID and password. If you have a valid service contract but do not have a login
ID or password, go to this URL to register:
http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do
If you are a Cisco.com registered user, and you cannot resolve your technical issues by using the Cisco
TAC website, you can open a case online at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/support/index.html
If you have Internet access, we recommend that you open P3 and P4 cases through the Cisco TAC
website so that you can describe the situation in your own words and attach any necessary files.
Cisco TAC Escalation Center
The Cisco TAC Escalation Center addresses priority level 1 or priority level 2 issues. These
classifications are assigned when severe network degradation significantly impacts business operations.
When you contact the TAC Escalation Center with a P1 or P2 problem, a Cisco TAC engineer
automatically opens a case.
To obtain a directory of toll-free Cisco TAC telephone numbers for your country, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/687/Directory/DirTAC.shtml
Before calling, please check with your network operations center to determine the level of Cisco support
services to which your company is entitled: for example, SMARTnet, SMARTnet Onsite, or Network
Supported Accounts (NSA). When you call the center, please have available your service agreement
number and your product serial number.
xxxv
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
About This Guide
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information
Information about Cisco products, technologies, and network solutions is available from various online
and printed sources.
The Cisco Product Catalog describes the networking products offered by Cisco Systems as well as
ordering and customer support services. Access the Cisco Product Catalog at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/products_catalog_links_launch.html
Cisco Press publishes a wide range of networking publications. Cisco suggests these titles for new
and experienced users: Internetworking Terms and Acronyms Dictionary, Internetworking
Technology Handbook, Internetworking Troubleshooting Guide, and the Internetworking Design
Guide. For current Cisco Press titles and other information, go to Cisco Press online at this URL:
http://www.ciscopress.com
Packet magazine is the Cisco monthly periodical that provides industry professionals with the latest
information about the field of networking. You can access Packet magazine at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/about/ac123/ac114/about_cisco_packet_magazine.html
iQ Magazine is the Cisco monthly periodical that provides business leaders and decision makers
with the latest information about the networking industry. You can access iQ Magazine at this URL:
http://business.cisco.com/prod/tree.taf%3fasset_id=44699&public_view=true&kbns=1.html
Internet Protocol Journal is a quarterly journal published by Cisco Systems for engineering
professionals involved in the design, development, and operation of public and private internets and
intranets. You can access the Internet Protocol Journal at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/about/ac123/ac147/about_cisco_the_internet_protocol_journal.html
Training—Cisco offers world-class networking training, with current offerings in network training
listed at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/learning/le31/learning_recommended_training_list.html
xxxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
About This Guide
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information
CHAPTER
1-1
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
1
Getting Started
Transaction Language 1 (TL1) is a subset of the input and output messages contained in the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU) Man-Machine Language (MML). TL1 provides a standard set of
messages that can be used for communicating between operating systems and network elements, and
personnel and network elements. The ONS 15454 and ONS 15327 can support up to 20 concurrent TL1
sessions in this release. For more information about TL1, refer to Telcordia document GR-833-CORE,
Network Maintenance: Network Element and Transport Surveillance Messages.
This chapter provides information and procedures for getting started with TL1:
Setting up TL1 communication
TL1 command syntax
Autonomous messages
TL1 commands by user security
Provisioning a DS3E card in CTC using TL1
Provisioning rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G cards
CTC interoperability
Mixed mode timing support
TL1 command completion behavior
Test access
TL1 PCA provisioning
FTP software download
1-2
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Setting up TL1 Communication
1.1 Setting up TL1 Communication
The period during which a user is logged into the ONS 15454 or ONS 15327 is called a session. There
are three options you can use to open a session (login):
Cisco Transport Controller (CTC)
Telnet
Craft interface
The TL1 password (PID) is masked when accessing a TL1 session using any of these options. When you
logout of any of these options, you are closing a session. The ONS 15454 and ONS 15327 allow a
maximum of 20 (19 telnet sessions and one craft session) concurrent TL1 sessions using any one or any
combination of the options listed above. For information on issuing commands to multiple nodes, see
Chapter 2, “TL1 Gateway.”
1.1.1 Open a TL1 session
Use the following procedures to open a TL1 session via the CTC, telnet, or craft interface. In the
procedures the Activate and Cancel User commands are shown in their input format. For more
information about these and other commands and messages, see Chapter 3, “TL1 Command
Descriptions.”
Open a TL1 Session Via CTC
Step 1 From the PC connected to the ONS 15454, start Netscape or Internet Explorer.
Step 2 Enter the ONS 15454 IP address of the node you want to communicate with in the Netscape or Internet
Explorer Web address (URL) field.
Step 3 Log into the CTC. The IP address at the title bar should match the IP address of the node you entered in
Step 2.
Step 4 Once logged into the CTC, click Tools > Open TL1 Connection.
Step 5 Choose the node you want to communicate with from the Select Node dialog box.
Step 6 Click OK.
A TL1 interface window opens. There are three sub-windows in the TL1 interface window: Request
history, Message log, and TL1 request. Type commands in the TL1 request window. You will see
responses in the Message log window. The Request history window allows you to recall previous
commands by clicking on them.
Step 7 Verify that the Connect button is selected (grayed out).
Step 8 Type the Activate User command in the TL1 request window to open a TL1 session:
ACT-USER:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>::<PID>; and press Enter.
Note You must press Enter after the semicolon in each TL1 command, or the command will not be
issued.
1-3
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Setting up TL1 Communication
Step 9 Type the Cancel User command in the TL1 request window or press the Disconnect button to close a
TL1 session:
CANC-USER:[<TID>]:<USERID>:<CTAG>; and press Enter.
Open a TL1 Session Via Telnet
To access TL1 commands in a telnet session over a craft interface or a LAN connection (TCC+/TCC2
card front panel or backplane pins) you can choose from several ports. Port number 3082 is a raw TCP/IP
port; it will not echo and it will not prompt the user. Port number 3083 is a telnet port that uses the telnet
protocol and associated telnet escape sequences. Port number 2361 is supported for backward
compatibility with earlier releases and has the same behavior as Port 3083 (telnet port). Use the
following procedure with PCs running Windows operating systems.
Step 1 At the DOS prompt, type cmd and click OK. (The same steps can also be done from a Unix prompt).
Step 2 At the DOS command prompt type:
TELNET <NODE IP ADDRESS OR NODE NAME> <PORT NUMBER> and press Enter.
The Node IP address or Node Name refers to the IP address or Node Name of the node you want to
communicate with. Port number is the port (2361, 3082, or 3083) where TL1 commands are understood.
If the connection is successful, a screen opens with a prompt.
Step 3 Type the Activate User command to open a TL1 session:
ACT-USER:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>::<PID>;
Note When the semicolon is typed, the command is issued immediately.
Step 4 Type the Cancel User command to close a TL1 session:
CANC-USER:[<TID>]:<USERID>:<CTAG>;
1-4
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Setting up TL1 Communication
Open a TL1 Session Via Craft Interface
The TCC+/TCC2 and XTC cards have two built-in interface ports for accessing the ONS 15454. With
one RJ-45 LAN connection you can access the system using a standard browser interface. In the browser
interface, you can perform local and remote Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
(OAM&P) functions and open a VT100 emulation window to enter TL1 commands. If a browser is not
available, you can access the system using a nine-pin RS-232 port. The RS-232 port supports VT100
emulation such that TL1 commands may be entered directly without a browser. For instructions on how
to install the TL1 craft interface, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide or the Cisco ONS 15327
Procedure Guide.
Step 1 Connect the serial cable to the RS-232 port on the active TCC+/TCC2 or XTC card.
Step 2 Configure the terminal emulation software (Hyperterminal):
a. Terminal emulation = vt100
b. Bits per second = 9600
c. Parity = None
d. Stop BITS = 1
e. Flow control = None
Step 3 Press Enter. An angle bracket prompt (>) appears.
Step 4 At the > prompt, type the Activate User command to open a TL1 session:
ACT-USER:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>::<PID>;
Note When the semicolon is typed, the TL1 command is issued immediately.
Step 5 Type the Cancel User command to close a TL1 session:
CANC-USER:[<TID>]:<USERID>:<CTAG>;
1-5
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
TL1 Command Syntax
1.2 TL1 Command Syntax
TL1 commands conform to the following syntax:
a:b:c:d:e: ... z;
where:
“a” is the command code
“b” is the target identifier (TID)
“c” is the access identifier (AID) or the user identifier (UID)
“d” is the correlation tag (CTAG)
“e: ... z;” are other positions required for various commands
The TID, AID, and CTAG route and control the TL1 command. Other parameters provide additional
information required to complete the action requested by the command. TL1 command codes, parameter
names and parameter values can be either uppercase or lowercase exclusively or any combination of the
two, unless specifically noted in the command description.
The TID is a unique name given to each system when it is installed. The name identifies the particular
NE (in this case, the ONS 15454 or ONS 15327), to which each command is directed. Each TID can have
a maximum of 20 ASCII characters limited to letters, digits, and hyphens, but each TID must start with
an alphabetic character. The presence of the TID is required in all input commands, but its value can be
null (represented by two successive colons). The TID can be null when the operating system directly
communicates with the target NE. The recommended value for the TID, when it is used, is the target’s
CLLI code. To establish the TID for an ONS 15454/15327 node, use the Provisioning > General tabs in
CTC.
Note If the TID contains any characters other than letters and digits, such as spaces, the text string form
(enclosed in double quotes) must be used.
The AID is an access code used to identify and address specific objects within the ONS 15454 and the
ONS 15327. These objects include individual pieces of equipment, transport spans, access tributaries,
and other objects.
The CTAG is a unique identifier given to each input command by the user. When the
ONS 15454/ONS 15327 system responds to a specific command, it includes the command’s CTAG in
the reply. Including the CTAG eliminates discrepancies about which response corresponds to which
command. Valid CTAG values include strings of up to six characters comprised of identifiers
(alphanumeric, beginning with a letter) or decimal numerals (a string of decimal digits with an optional
non-trailing “.”).
The following specification characters are used throughout this document as vehicles for defining the
syntax:
< > enclose a symbol specifier, for example <CTAG>.
[ ] enclose an optional symbol, for example [<TID>].
“ ” enclose a literal character, for example an output format
“SLOT-7:PLUGIN,TC,,,,,,,:\“EQUIPMENT PLUG-IN\”,TCC”
^ is a space, a literal blank character used only in examples of messages.
1-6
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Autonomous Messages
1.3 Autonomous Messages
The autonomous TL1 messages are included in Chapter 3, “TL1 Command Descriptions” and listed
alphabetically. Figure 1-1 shows the autonomous message format. The autonomous message tag (ATAG)
is used for message sequencing. The number is incremented by one for each autonomous message sent
by the ONS 15454 or ONS 15327. The ONS 15454 and ONS 15327 use whole numbers 0000 to 9999.
Note Some autonomous messages (REPT DBCHG and REPT EVT SESSION, for example) differ slightly
from the format shown in the third line of Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Autonomous message format
1.3.1 Alarm Codes
The alarm code indicates the severity of the autonomous message. Valid values for alarm codes in
decreasing order of severity are as follows:
*C Critical alarm
** Major alarm
*^ Minor alarm
A^ Non-alarm message
Critical, Major, and Minor correspond to the reporting of alarmed events. The Non-alarm message
designation is used when the NE is reporting non-alarmed events, periodic measurements, or results of
previously-scheduled diagnostics or audits. If multiple alarms are reported in the same message, the
alarm code is the highest severity of those being reported.
The following is an example of an output message that includes the Critical alarm code:
AB7-56 1970-01-01 16:02:10
*C 100.100 REPT ALM EQPT
“SYSTEM:CR,HITEMP,NSA,,,,:\“High Temperature\”,TCC”
For more information about alarms, see Chapter 7, “TL1 Alarms and Errors.”
SVT197 1999-04-08 18:26:02
A 100.100 REPT ALM BITS
BITS-2: CL,LOS,SA,,,,:Loss of Signal
/* Loss of Signal*/
DateTime
Service Affecting/
Non Service
Affecting
Condition
(TID)
Target or
Node ID
Access
Identifier Level
(ATAG)
Number In Messaging
Sequence
Text
Description
String
Alarm
Code
40898
1-7
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
TL1 Commands by User Security
1.4 TL1 Commands by User Security
The following table specifies command access privileges for each user security level.
Table 1-1 Command Access
Command Superuser Provisioning Maintenance Retrieve
ALW-MSG-SECU X
ALW-USER-SECU X
APPLY X
COPY-RFILE X
DLT-USER-SECU X
ED-DAT X
ED-USER-SECU X
ENT-USER-SECU X
INH-MSG-SECU X
INH-USER-SECU X
REPT EVT SECU X
DLT-*-* X X
ED-*-* X X
ENT-*-* X X
SET-*-* X X
SET-TOD X X
INIT-*-* X X X
OPR-*-*XXX
RLS-*-* XXX
RMV-*-*XXX
RST-*-* XXX
SW-*-* X X X
ACT-*-*XXXX
ALW-*-*XXXX
CANC-*-*XXXX
ED-PID XXXX
INH-*-* XXXX
REPT * *1
1. Except for REPT EVT SECU which is Superuser only as shown above.
XXXX
RTRV-*-*XXXX
1-8
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Provisioning a DS3E Card in CTC Using TL1
User security levels limit the amount of time a user can leave the system idle before the TL1 session is
locked to prevent unauthorized users from making changes. Higher security levels have shorter time
outs. Starting with Release 4.0, time outs can be provisioned (by a Superuser) from CTC. If provisioned,
it only affects users who are not currently logged in. A user that is logged in has to log out and log back
in before the new timeouts will take affect.
Table 1-2 shows security levels and their default time outs.
1.5 Provisioning a DS3E Card in CTC Using TL1
The DS3E card can autosense the framing being received and set the framing accordingly; however, this
framing autosense feature can only be set using CTC. Use CTC to set the FMT attribute on a DS3E card
to autoprovision which results in the FMT field being blanked out for a few seconds while the DS3E card
is determining the framing mode coming into that particular port. The FMT field is then set accordingly
to unframed, M23, or CBit. If the DS3E card is not present (pre-provisioned), setting the FMT field to
autoprovision will result in the FMT field defaulting to unframed.
The TL1 interface does not support the autoprovision option for the DS3E card; the TL1 interface only
supports unframed, M23, or CBit. If autoprovision is selected from CTC and at the same time the TL1
command RTRV-T3 is issued, the TL1 output will result in the FMT field populated with unframed
during the time period that the DS3E card (if present) is autosensing the frame format. If the DS3E card
is not present (pre-provisioned), issuing RTRV-T3 after CTC sets the FMT to autoprovision will result
in the TL1 output populating the FMT field with unframed.
1.6 Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G
Cards
The following sections provide rules necessary when performing provisioning with theMXP_2.5G_10G
and TXP_MR_10G (MXP/TXP) cards.
1.6.1 Payload Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. You are allowed to change payload type only if all ports are in OOS state.
2. If the slot is in regeneration group, changing payload type affects both cards.
3. Changing payload is a card-level operation (i.e. all client ports are affected).
4. There should be no DCC enable on any ports.
5. Only the TXP card can be used for 10GE payload.
Table 1-2 Security Default Time Outs
Security Level Default Timeouts
Retrieve Unlimited
Maintenance 60 minutes
Provisioning 30 minutes
Superuser 15 minutes
1-9
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards
6. To set the 10GE payload, the termination mode must be set to transparent.
7. The payload cannot be changed if any of the ports are a part of any Y cable protection group or are
used as the timing source.
8. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ED-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PEERID=<PEERID>,]
[TERMMODE=<TERMMODE>,][PAYLOAD=<PAYLOAD>,][PWL=<PWL>];
RTRV-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
1.6.2 Termination Mode Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. Only applicable to payload type of SONET/SDH.
2. Changing termination mode is a card-level operation (i.e. client and trunk must have the same
termination mode selection).
3. There should be no DCC enabled on any ports.
4. All ports need to be in OOS state.
5. For transparent termination mode, the trunk port should not be a timing source.
6. Section termination mode is not supported for both the MXP and TXP cards.
7. The trace mode should be set to OFF for the J0 Section trace level on all ports, prior to a change of
the termination mode.
8. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ED-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PEERID=<PEERID>,]
[TERMMODE=<TERMMODE>,][PAYLOAD=<PAYLOAD>,][PWL=<PWL>];
RTRV-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
1.6.3 Wavelength Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. The DWDM (trunk) port should be placed in OOS state because this change is traffic affecting. This
is enforced in CTC. TL1 does not enforce this restriction.
2. Setting the wavelength to the first tunable wavelength will cause the first wavelength from the card
manufacturing data to be used as the operational wavelength.
3. If the provisioned wavelength is set to the first tunable wavelength, any removal of an operational
card and the subsequent replacement with a card of a different wavelength will not cause a mismatch
alarm to be raised.
4. In order to receive the mismatch alarm notification, you need to explicitly provision the wavelength
and not use the first tunable wavelength.
5. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ED-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PEERID=<PEERID>,]
[TERMMODE=<TERMMODE>,][PAYLOAD=<PAYLOAD>,][PWL=<PWL>];
RTRV-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
1-10
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards
1.6.4 DCC/GCC Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. The DCC can be provisioned for the MXP and TXP cards.
2. The DCC can be provisioned only if the card payload is set to SONET/SDH and the termination
mode is set to line terminated.
3. The client ports can only support DCC.
4. The trunk port can only support either DCC or GCC.
5. To enable the GCC on the trunk port, the G.709 should be enabled.
6. To enable the DCC on the trunk port, the G.709 should be disabled.
7. Only the working port (not the protect) in a Y cable protection scheme is allowed to be provisioned
as DCC and timing reference.
8. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ED-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,]
[ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,][ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,][ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,]
[COMM=<COMM>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,][SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,]
[SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
ED-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[RDIRN=<RDIRN>,][EXPWLEN=<EXPWLEN>,]
[VOAATTN=<VOAATTN>,][VOAPWR=<VOAPWR>,][CALOPWR=<CALOPWR>,]
[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,][ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,]
[ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,][ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,][COMM=<COMM>,]
[GCCRATE=<GCCRATE>,][OSFBER=<OSFBER>,][OSDBER=<OSDBER>,]
[DWRAP=<DWRAP>,][FEC=<FEC>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>,]
[SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
RTRV-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
RTRV-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
1.6.5 G.709 Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. The G.709 can only be provisioned on the trunk (DWDM) port.
2. In order to disable G.709, the FEC, if enabled, should be disabled first.
3. In order to disable G.709, the GCC if provisioned, should be removed.
4. In order to change G.709 setting, the trunk port needs to be OOS.
1-11
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards
5. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ED-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,]
[ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,][ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,][ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,]
[COMM=<COMM>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,][SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,]
[SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
ED-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[RDIRN=<RDIRN>,][EXPWLEN=<EXPWLEN>,]
[VOAATTN=<VOAATTN>,][VOAPWR=<VOAPWR>,][CALOPWR=<CALOPWR>,]
[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,][ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,]
[ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,][ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,][COMM=<COMM>,]
[GCCRATE=<GCCRATE>,][OSFBER=<OSFBER>,][OSDBER=<OSDBER>,]
[DWRAP=<DWRAP>,][FEC=<FEC>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>,]
[SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
RTRV-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
RTRV-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
1.6.6 FEC Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. The FEC can only be provisioned if the G.709 is enabled.
2. Trunk port needs to be OOS.
3. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ED-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,]
[ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,][ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,][ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,]
[COMM=<COMM>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,][SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,]
[SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
ED-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[RDIRN=<RDIRN>,][EXPWLEN=<EXPWLEN>,]
[VOAATTN=<VOAATTN>,][VOAPWR=<VOAPWR>,][CALOPWR=<CALOPWR>,]
[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,][ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,]
[ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,][ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,][COMM=<COMM>,]
[GCCRATE=<GCCRATE>,][OSFBER=<OSFBER>,][OSDBER=<OSDBER>,]
[DWRAP=<DWRAP>,][FEC=<FEC>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>,]
[SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
RTRV-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
RTRV-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
1.6.7 Synchronization Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. Only the MXP card ports can be used for a timing source.
2. For the MXP card, all client ports are available for timing irrespective of the termination mode.
3. For the MXP card, the trunk port is only allowed for a timing reference if G.709 is off and the
termination mode is set to line.
1-12
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards
4. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ED-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,]
[ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,][ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,][ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,]
[COMM=<COMM>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,][SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,]
[SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
ED-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[RDIRN=<RDIRN>,][EXPWLEN=<EXPWLEN>,]
[VOAATTN=<VOAATTN>,][VOAPWR=<VOAPWR>,][CALOPWR=<CALOPWR>,]
[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,][ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,]
[ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,][ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,][COMM=<COMM>,]
[GCCRATE=<GCCRATE>,][OSFBER=<OSFBER>,][OSDBER=<OSDBER>,]
[DWRAP=<DWRAP>,][FEC=<FEC>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>,]
[SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
RTRV-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
RTRV-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
1.6.8 Trace Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. The client ports only support the SONET/SDH J0 section trace.
2. The client ports support the J0 Section trace only in line terminated mode.
3. The trunk (DWDM) port supports the J0 Section trace mode only in line terminated mode.
4. For the trunk port, if G.709 is enabled, TTI level trace can be provisioned for section and path
monitoring.
5. In line termination, the J0 Section trace supports MANUAL and MANUAL_NO_AIS trace mode.
6. The J0 Section trace level supports 1 or 16-byte length trace format.
7. The OTN level trace supports only the Manual and MANUAL-NO-AIS trace modes.
8. The OTN level trace supports only 64-byte length trace format
9. The trace mode of AUTO and AUTO-NO-AIS are not supported.
10. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ED-TRC-CLNT:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>:::[EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,][TRC=<TRC>,]
[TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,][TRCLEVEL=<TRCLEVEL>,]
[TRCFORMAT=<TRCFORMAT>][:];
ED-TRC-OCH:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>:::[EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,][TRC=<TRC>,]
[TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,][TRCLEVEL=<TRCLEVEL>,]
[TRCFORMAT=<TRCFORMAT>][:];
RTRV-TRC-CLNT:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>::[<MSGTYPE>],[<TRCLEVEL>][::];
RTRV-TRC-OCH:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>::[<MSGTYPE>],[<TRCLEVEL>][::];
1-13
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards
1.6.9 PM and Alarm Threshold Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. The OTN thresholds are only applicable if the G.709 is enabled.
2. The FEC thresholds are only applicable if the G.709 and FEC are enabled.
3. The Optics TCA & Alarm Thresholds apply to the local node only.
4. The TL1 commands to provision are:
SET-TH-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<MONTYPE>,<THLEV>,
[<LOCN>],,[<TMPER>];
SET-TH-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<MONTYPE>,<THLEV>,[<LOCN>],,[<TMPER>];
RTRV-TH-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<MONTYPE>],[<LOCN>],<TMPER>[::];
RTRV-TH-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<MONTYPE>],[<LOCN>],<TMPER>[::];
1.6.10 Regeneration Group Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. Only a TXP card can be used in a regeneration group.
2. A regeneration group enables the continuation of the client signal across multiple spans.
3. Regeneration group rules are as follows:
a. peer-slot must not be itself
b. peer-slot must at least be preprovisioned
c. same card type
d. same payload type
e. termination mode has to be set to transparent mode
f. peer slot cannot be part of another Y cable or regeneration group
4. Once two cards are in regeneration group, any payload changes will be reflected on both cards.
5. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ED-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PEERID=<PEERID>,]
[TERMMODE=<TERMMODE>,][PAYLOAD=<PAYLOAD>,][PWL=<PWL>];
RTRV-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
1.6.11 Y Cable Protection Group Provisioning Rules for MXP/TXP Cards
1. A Y cable protection group can be created between the client ports of either two TXP cards or two
MXP cards.
2. Y cable protection cannot be part of a regeneration group.
3. Only the working ports (not the protect) can be provisioned with DCC and timing reference.
4. The TL1 commands to provision are:
ENT-FFP-CLNT:[<TID>]:<WORKAID>,<PROTAID>:
<CTAG>:::[PROTTYPE=<PROTTYPE>,][PROTID=<PROTID>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,]
[RVTM=<RVTM>,][PSDIRN=<PSDIRN>][:];
1-14
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
CTC Interoperability
ED-FFP-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PROTID=<PROTID>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,]
[RVTM=<RVTM>,][PSDIRN=<PSDIRN>][:];
RTRV-FFP-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
1.7 CTC Interoperability
A TL1 cross-connect that has been upgraded to a CTC circuit can no longer be managed by TL1. For
example, if you issue a DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH> command to delete a circuit, you will see that the circuit
still appears in CTC as “incomplete.” The reason for this is because in addition to creating
cross-connects (as TL1 does), CTC creates another object on the source node that stores network-level
circuit attributes. CTC will continue to see that object after the cross-connect is deleted which is why it
shows an incomplete circuit.
Starting with R3.4, there is a Create cross connects only (TL1-like) check box that appears in CTC when
creating circuits. If applicable, you can check this box to create one or more cross-connects to complete
a signal path for TL1-generated circuits. If this box is checked, you cannot assign a name to the circuit;
and VT tunnels, Ethergroup sources, and drops are unavailable. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide or the Cisco ONS 15327 User Documentation for information about CTC circuit
creation.
1.8 Mixed Mode Timing Support
Although TL1 supports mixed mode timing in this release, Cisco strongly advises against its
implementation. Mixed mode timing is not a recommended timing mode because of the inherent risk of
creating timing loops. Refer to Telcordia document GR-436-CORE, Digital Network Synchronization
Plan for recommended synchronization planning. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide or the
Cisco ONS 15327 User Documentation for information about setting up ONS 15454/15327 timing. For
further assistance contact the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) at www.cisco.com or call
1-877-323-7368 for unresolved problems.
1.9 TL1 Command Completion Behavior
When you enter a TL1 command, one of three completion codes will be returned. The completion codes
are: completed (COMPLD), partial (PRTL), and deny (DENY). You can specify an explicit, implicit, or
explicit with implicit list as explained in the following sections.
1.9.1 General Rules
Note The command completion behavior does not apply to RTRV-CRS, RTRV-ALM, and RTVR-COND
commands.
1-15
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
TL1 Command Completion Behavior
1.9.1.1 Explicit List of AIDs - No Wildcards
If a set of AIDs is explicitly listed, including a set of just one AID, then each AID must complete
successfully to return a COMPLD message. If more than one AID is in the set and at least one AID
succeeds but all do not, then a PRTL with errors for each failed AID is returned. If all AIDs in the set
fail, a DENY with errors for each failed AID is returned.
SLOT-1
FAC-2-1&FAC-3-3&FAC-4-2
1.9.1.2 Implicit List of AIDs - Single AID With Wildcard
If a set of AIDs is implied by the use of the ALL modifier on a single AID, then follow the same rules
as in the “Explicit List of AIDs - No Wildcards” section on page 1-15. The caveat is that the implicit list
only includes AIDs that apply to the command:
SLOT-ALL
FAC-1-ALL
STS-3-ALL
where Slot 3 contains an OC-12 and the command is ED-STS1 but STS-3-4 and STS-3-7 are STS3C.
The set implied by STS-3-ALL then only contains STS-3-{1,2,3,10,11,12} and will not return an error
for STS-3-{4,5,6,7,8,9}. Disregard the STS3C in this case because the modifier of the command
specifies that the user is only interested in STS-1 paths. The rule specified in this section then applies to
the implicit set of {1,2,3,10,11,12}.
1.9.1.3 Explicit List Grouped With Implicit List
If the set of AIDs is comprised of two subsets, one set including explicitly stated AIDs and the other set
implied by one or more AID(s) with the ALL modifier, then follow the rules of the“Explicit List of AIDs
- No Wildcards” section on page 1-15 and the “Implicit List of AIDs - Single AID With Wildcard”
section on page 1-15, respectively.
FAC-1-1&FAC-2-ALL
FAC-3-ALL&FAC-7-ALL
STS-2-ALL&STS-12-1&STS-13-2&STS-14-ALL
1.9.2 Command Completion Behavior for Retrieval of Cross-Connections
When you enter a RTRV-CRS command, one of three completion codes will be returned. The completion
codes are: completed (COMPLD), partial (PRTL), and deny (DENY). You can specify an explicit,
implicit, or explicit with implicit list as explained in the following sections.
1.9.2.1 Explicit List of AIDs - No Wildcards
For an explicit list of AIDs on a RTRV-CRS command, an error code will be returned for each AID that
fails validation (e.g. the user specifies STS-N-13 when SLOT-N only contains an OC-12) or for each AID
where no matching cross-connection is found. To determine the completion code, follow the rules from
the “Explicit List of AIDs - No Wildcards” section on page 1-15. If the result is either PRTL or
COMPLD, then a list of matching cross-connections will accompany the response.
1-16
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
TL1 Command Completion Behavior
1.9.2.2 Implicit List of AIDs - Single AID With Wildcard
If a set of AIDs is implied by the use of the ALL modifier on a single AID, then follow the same AID
expansion rule as defined in the example from the “Implicit List of AIDs - Single AID With Wildcard”
section on page 1-15. Then apply the following rules to the set:
1. If all valid AIDs match, COMPLD is returned with a matching list of cross-connections.
2. If some valid AIDs match but not all, COMPLD is returned with a matching list of
cross-connections.
3. If all valid AIDs fail to match, DENY is returned.
RTRV-CRS-STS1:[<TID>]:STS-9-ALL:<CTAG>; where STS-9-ALL maps to STS-9-{1,2,3,10,11,12}
because there is a single-port OC-12 card in Slot 3 with STS-3C defined for STS-9-4 and STS-9-7. You
then traverse the set and return only the STS1 cross-connections that exist using end points in that set.
If no cross-connections are retrieved, COMPLD is returned.
1.9.2.3 Explicit List Grouped With Implicit List
When you have determined the implicit list, apply the rules from the “Implicit List of AIDs - Single AID
With Wildcard” section on page 1-16 to the implicit list and the rules from the “Explicit List of AIDs -
No Wildcards” section on page 1-15 to the explicit list. Apply the following logic to the results from the
two subsets:
1. Explicit list returns COMPLD, implicit list returns COMPLD, return COMPLD plus matching list
2. Explicit list returns COMPLD, implicit list returns DENY, return PRTLwith errors plus matching
list
3. Explicit list returns PRTL, implicit list returns COMPLD, return PRTL with errors plus matching
lists
4. Explicit list returns PRTL, implicit list returns DENY, return PRTL with errors plus matching list
5. Explicit list returns DENY, implicit list returns COMPLD, return PRTL with errors plus matching
list
6. Explicit list returns DENY, implicit list returns DENY, return DENY with errors
1-17
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10 Test Access
The test access (TACC) feature allows a third-party Broadband Remote Test Unit (BRTU) to create
non-intrusive test access points (TAPs) to monitor the circuits on the ONS 15454/15327 for errors. The
test access feature also allows the circuit to be split (intrusive), so that the transmission paths can be
tested for bit errors via the use of various bit test patterns. The two BRTUs supported by the
ONS 15454/15327 are the Hekimian/Spirent BRTU-93 (6750) and the TTC/Acterna Centest 650.
The test access functionality provides TL1 commands for creating and deleting TAPs, connecting or
disconnecting TAPs to circuit cross-connects and changing the mode of test access on the
ONS 15454/15327. You can view test access information in CTC; in node view click the
Maintenance > Test Access tabs.
Refer to Telcordia document GR-834-CORE, Network Maintenance: Access and Testing and
GR-1402-CORE, Network Maintenance: Access Testing - DS3 HCDS TSC/RTU and DTAU Functional
Requirements for more information about Test Access. See Chapter 3, “TL1 Command Descriptions” for
TL1 command information.
A TAP provides the capability of connecting the circuit under test to a BRTU. This connection initially
provides in-service monitoring capability to permit the tester to determine that the circuit under test is
idle. The monitor connection should not disturb the circuit under test. The access point and remote test
unit (RTU) also provide the capability of splitting a circuit under test. A split consists of breaking the
transmission path of the circuit under test. This is done out of service. The two sides of the access point
are called the Equipment (E) and Facility (F) directions. For a 4-wire or 6-wire circuit, the transmission
pairs within the access point are defined as the A and B pairs. The circuit under test should be wired into
the access point so the direction of transmission on the A pair is from E to F, and the transmission
direction for the B pair is from F to E (Figure 1-2).
Figure 1-2 Circuit with no access
61106
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
1-18
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.1 Test Access Terminology
BRTU—Broadband remote test unit
DFAD—Dual facility access digroup
FAD—Facility access digroup
FAP—Facility access path
MONE—Monitor access with signal detector on A path
MONF—Monitor access with signal detector on B path
MONEF—Monitor access with signal detector on A and B paths
SPLTA—Split access on A path with signal detector from equipment, QRS on facility side
SPLTB—Split access on B path with signal detector from equipment, QRS on equipment side
SPLTE—Split access on A and B paths with signal detector from equipment, QRS on equipment side
SPLTF—Split access on A and B paths with signal detector from equipment, QRS on facility side
SPLTEF—Split access on A and B paths for testing in both equipment and facility directions
LOOPE—Split/loop access on A and B paths equipment side
LOOPF—Split/loop access on A and B paths facility side
QRS—Quasi-random signal (bit test pattern)
TACC—Test access
TAP—Test access path/point
Path Naming Conventions:
E—Equipment test access point direction
F—Facility test access point direction
A—Transmission path (the direction of transmission on the A pair is from E to F)
B—Transmission path (the transmission direction for the B pair is from F to E)
1.10.2 TAP Creation and Deletion
The edit command (ED-<rr>) is used to change an existing port, STS, or VT to a TAP.
Input Format:
ED-(STS_PATH):[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,]
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,][SWPDIP=<SWPDIP>,][EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,]
[TRC=<TRC>,][TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,][TACC=<TACC>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
Edit an existing port, STS, or VT and change it to a TAP so it can be used when requesting TACC
connections. Includes a new optical parameter TACC=n that defines the port, STS, or VT as a TAP with
a selected unique TAP number. This TAP number will be used when requesting test access connections
to circuit cross-connections under test. The TAP creation will fail if there is a cross-connection already
on the port, STS, or VT.
1-19
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
The following list applies to TAP numbers:
1. The TAP number is an integer within the range of 1–999. When TACC=0 is specified, the TAP is
deleted (if already present).
2. The TAP number is unique across T1/T3/STS/VT/DS1 TAPs in the system.
3. The TAP number is not editable.
1.10.2.1 ED-T1
When the ED-T1 command is issued with a specified TACC value for a given T1 port/facility, a dual
facility access group (DFAD) is created by using the specified port/facility and the consecutive
port/facility.
Example 1-1 ED-T1::FAC-1-1:12:::TACC=1;
DV9-99 1970-01-02 03:16:11
M 12 COMPLD
;
This command creates a DFAD on FAC-1-1 and FAC-1-2.
Note These ports/facilities cannot be used for the creation of cross-connects until the TAP is deleted.
1.10.2.2 ED-T3
When the ED-T3 command is issued with a specified TACC value for a given T3 port/facility, a DFAD
is created by using the specified port/facility and the consecutive port/facility.
The command in Example 1-2 creates a T3 DFAD on FAC-2-1 and FAC-2-2.
Example 1-2 ED-T3::FAC-2-1:12:::TACC=2;
DV9-99 1970-01-02 03:16:11
M 12 COMPLD
;
Note These ports/facilities cannot be used for the creation of cross-connects until the TAP is deleted.
1-20
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.2.3 ED-DS1
When the ED-DS1 command is issued with a specified TACC value for a given DS1 facility on a
DS3XM, a DFAD is created by using the specified facility and the consecutive port/facility.
The command in Example 1-3 creates DFAD on DS1-2-1-1 and DS1-2-1-2.
Example 1-3 ED-DS1::DS1-2-1-1:12:::TACC=3;
DV9-99 1970-01-02 03:16:11
M 12 COMPLD
;
Note These ports/facilities cannot be used for the creation of cross-connects until the TAP is deleted.
1.10.2.4 ED-STSn
When the ED-STSn command is issued for a TACC it assigns the STS for the first 2-way test access
connection and STS+1 as the second 2-way connection. For STS3c, STS9c, STS12c, STS24c, and
STS48c the next consecutive STS of same width is chosen. The TAP creation will fail if either of the
consecutive STSs are not available.
The command in Example 1-4 creates a TAP on STS-5-1 and STS-5-2.
Example 1-4 ED-STS1::STS-5-1:12:::TACCC=4
DV9-99 1970-01-02 03:16:11
M 12 COMPLD
;
Note These STSs cannot be used for the creation of cross-connects until the TAP is deleted.
The command in Example 1-5 creates an STS24C dual TAP on STS-6-1 and STS-6-25.
Example 1-5 ED-STS24C::STS-6-1:12:::TACC=5:
DV9-99 1970-01-02 03:16:11
M 12 COMPLD
;
Note These STSs cannot be used for the creation of cross-connects until the TAP is deleted.
1-21
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.2.5 ED-VT1
When the ED-VT1 command is issued for a TACC, a VT TAP is created. The specified VT AID is taken
as the first VT connection, the second VT connection is made by incrementing the VT group and keeping
the VT number the same.
The command in Example 1-6 creates a VT TAP on VT1-1-1-1-1 and VT1-1-1-2-1.
Example 1-6 ED-VT1-1-1-1-1:12:::TACC=6;
DV9-99 1970-01-02 03:16:11
M 12 COMPLD
;
Note These VTs cannot be used for the creation of cross-connects until the TAP is deleted.
1.10.3 Connect Test Access Points
The CONN-TACC command (CONN-TACC-<rr>) is used to make a connection between the TAP and
the circuit or cross-connect under test.
Input Format: CONN-TACC-(T1, T3, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, VT1,
DS1):[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<TAP>:MD=<MD>;
Connect the port/STS/VT defined by <AID> to the port/STS/VT defined by the <TAP> number. The
mode of test access to the circuit/cross-connect is specified by <MD>. The modes can be either of
monitor (non-intrusive), split or loop (intrusive) modes. The various modes are described in the “Test
Access Mode Definitions” section on page 1-26.
Note The connection is maintained only for the duration of the TL1 session (non-persistent).
Note The TAP number is displayed at the output if the CONN-TACC command completes successfully.
Error Codes Supported:
RTBYRequested TAP busy
RTEN—Requested TAP does not exist
SCAT—Circuit is already connected to another TAP
SRCN—Requested condition already exists
IIAC—Invalid access identifier (AID)
EANS—Access not supported
SRAC—Requested access configuration is invalid
1-22
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
The command in Example 1-7 creates a connection between TAP with number one and the port/facility
FAC-1-3 with access mode as MONE. The various modes are described in the “Test Access Mode
Definitions” section on page 1-26.
Example 1-7 CONN-TACC-T1::FAC-1-3:12::1:MD=MONE;
DV9-99 1970-01-02 02:51:54
M 12 COMPLD
1
;
1.10.4 Change Access Mode
The CHG-ACCMD command (CHG-ACCMD-<rr>) is used to change the access mode.
Input Format: CHG-ACCMD-(T1, T3, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C,
VT1, DS1):[<TID>]:<TAP>:<CTAG>::<MD>;
Change the type of test access. This may be a change from monitoring the data to inserting data into the
STS. This command can only be applied to an existing TAP connection. If a TAP connection does not
exist, a RTEN error is returned.
Error codes supported:
SRCN—Requested condition already exists
SRAC—Requested access configuration is invalid
RTEN—Requested TAP does not exist
The command in Example 1-8 changes the access mode of TAP 1 to LOOPE.
Example 1-8 CHG-ACCMD-T1::1:12::LOOPE;
DV9-9 1970-01-02 02:59:43
M 12 COMPLD
;
Note The access mode cannot be changed if the TAP is not connected.
1.10.5 Disconnect Test Access Points
TAPs can be disconnected in the following ways:
Issue the DISC-TACC command
Delete or modify accessed connection
Drop the TL1 session for any reason, including logout or a dropped telnet session
Switch or reset a TCC+/TCC2or XTC
The DISC-TACC command disconnects the <TAP> and puts the connection back to it’s original state
(no access). To issue the DISC-TACC command, follow the input format and examples shown below:
Input Format: DISC-TACC:[<TID>]:<TAP>:<CTAG>;
1-23
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
The command in Example 1-9 disconnects TAP 1 from the circuit/cross-connect under test.
Example 1-9 DISC-TACC::1:12;
DV9-99 1970-01-02 02:59:43
M 12 COMPLD
;
Error codes supported:
SADC—Already disconnected
SRTN—Unable to release TAP
1.10.6 Delete Test Access Points
The command in Example 1-10 deletes a TAP.
Example 1-10 ED-<STS_PATH>:[<[TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::TACC=0:;
Note The TACC number must be set to zero in order to delete a TAP.
Note If a TAP is not removed the STS bandwidth will be stranded.
1.10.7 Retrieve Test Access Point Information
The RTRV-TACC command retrieves TAP information. See the “RTRV-TACC: Retrieve Test Access”
section on page 3-238 for more information.
Input Format: RTRV-TACC:[<TID>]:<TAP>:<CTAG>;
<TAP> indicates the assigned numeric number for the AID being used as a test access point. The <TAP>
number must be an integer with a range of 1–999. The ALL TAP value means that the command will
return all the configured TACCs in the NE. <TAP> is a string and must not be null.
Example 1-11 RTRV-TACC::ALL:12;
PTLM6-454A59-52 1970-01-10 09:51:27
M 12 COMPLD
“1:STS-2-1,STS-2-2,MONE,STS-2-3,STS-2-4”
“2:VT1-1-1-1-1,VT1-1-1-2-1,MONF,VT1-1-1-3-1,VT1-1-1-4-1”
;
Parameter definitions:
<TAP> indicates the assigned numeric number for the AID being used as a TAP; <TAP> is a string
<TACC_AID1> is the STS or VT AID that was designated as a test access point and assigned to the
TAP; <TACC_AID1> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<TACC_AID2> is the STS or VT AID that was designated as a test access point and assigned to the
TAP+1; <TACC_AID2> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10
1-24
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
<MD> indicates the test access mode. It identifies the status of the circuit connected to the TACC.
Valid values are shown in the “TACC_MODE” section on page 4-92
<E_CONN> indicates the E side STS or VT AID of a circuit connected to the TACC or under test;
<E_CONN> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10 and is optional
<F_CONN> indicates the F side STS or VT AID of a circuit connected to the TACC or under test;
<F_CONN> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10
1.10.8 Test Access Configurations
Figure 1-3 Single node view (Node 1)
Example 1-12 ED-STS1::STS-1-1:90:::TACC=1:;
This command changes STS1 and STS2 on Slot 1 to a TAP. The <CTAG> is 90. Sets the TAP number
to 1.
Example 1-13 CONN-TACC-STS1::<AID for E or F depending on MD>:91::TAP-1:MONE
This command connects the <AID> to the TACC defined by TAP 1 on the E side. <CTAG> is 91.
Note The connection made in the CONN-TACC command can use MONE to connect to the F side <AID>.
The <AID> provided designates the E side and the other automatically becomes the F side. For example,
if an <AIDF> is supplied to a MONE connection the top line would be connected to the side of the path,
or what is shown in the diagram as the F side. Once a CONN-TACC is set up, these designations cannot
change until a DISC-TACC or another CONN-TACC command is issued. The connection is based on the
<AID> supplied.
Note In the Figure 1-3 configuration there may be a single DS3 port wired-up but configured as 14 dual FADs
(28 VTs).
RTU
EF
Test Set
71716
1-25
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
Figure 1-4 Multi-node view (MONE example)
On NE3:
Example 1-14 ENT-CRS-STS1::<AID I-G>:100::2WAY; A connection, not a TAP. CTAG is 100.
ENT-CRS-STS1::<AID J-H>:101::2WAY; Second connection, not a TAP.
On NE1:
Assuming the path from A to B is already entered; the A and B points in the diagram refer to entry and
exit points on the node or different cards. The E/F designators refer to the two 2-way connections from
NE3.
Example 1-15 ED-STS1::STS-1-1:TACC=4; Creates TAP with STS-1-1 and STS-1-2 through NE1. TAP
number assigned is 4.
Example 1-16 CONN-TACC-STS1::<AID A or B>:102::4:<MD> Connects TAP #4 to the circuit.
Note The I and J connections above are TAPs in Figure 1-3, but normal connections in the Figure 1-4
configuration.
D
C
B
A
RTU
OC12
OC12
NE1
NE2
NE3
I
J
G
H
E
F
71717
1-26
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.9 Test Access Mode Definitions
The following diagrams show what the different test access modes <MD> refer to. Figure 1-5 shows a
circuit with no access followed by all the modes. The QRS may be generated by an outside source, i.e.
the empty connection of the BRTU.
Figure 1-5 Circuit with no access
1.10.9.1 MONE
Monitor E (MONE) indicates a monitor connection provided from the facility access digroup (FAD) to
the A transmission path of the accessed circuit (Figure 1-6). This is a non-intrusive mode.
Figure 1-6 MONE access
61106
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
61107
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
1-27
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.9.2 MONF
Monitor F (MONF) indicates that the FAD is providing a monitor connection to the B transmission path
of the accessed circuit (Figure 1-7). This is a non-intrusive mode.
Figure 1-7 MONF access
Note The MONE and SPLTA modes are applicable to unidirectional circuits from E to F. The MONF and
SPLTB modes are applicable to unidirectional circuits from F to E.
1.10.9.3 MONEF
Monitor EF (MONEF) is a monitor connection provided from the FAD1 (odd pair) to a DFAD, to the A
transmission path and from FAD2 (even pair) of the same DFAD, to the B transmission path of the
accessed circuit. This is a non-intrusive mode.
MONEF for T3 (DS3 HCDS) indicates that the odd pair of a FAP is providing a monitor connection to
the A transmission path and from the even pair of a facility access path (FAP) to the B transmission path
of the accessed circuit.
Figure 1-8 MONEF access
61108
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
61109
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
1-28
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.9.4 SPLTE
Split E (SPLTE) indicates to split both the A and B paths and connect the E side of the accessed circuit
to the FAD. Figure 1-9 through 1-11 show split E and F access modes.
Figure 1-9 SPLTE access
1.10.9.5 SPLTF
Split F (SPLTF) indicates to split both the A and B paths and connect the F side of the accessed circuit
to the FAD.
Figure 1-10 SPLTF access
61110
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
BB
61111
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
BB
1-29
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.9.6 SPLTEF
Split EF (SPLTEF) for T1 (DS1 HCDS) indicates to split both the A and B paths, connect the E side of
the accessed circuit to FAD1 and the dual facility access digroup (DFAD) pair, and connect the F side to
the FAD2 of the same DFAD pair. SPLTEF for T3 (DS3 HCDS) indicates to split both the A and B paths
and connect the E side of the accessed circuit to the odd pair of the FAP and the F side to the even pair
of the FAP.
Figure 1-11 SPLTEF access
1.10.9.7 LOOPE
Loop E (LOOPE) indicates to split both the A and B paths, connect the incoming line from the E
direction to the outgoing line in the E direction, and connect this looped configuration to the FAD. Loop
E and F modes are basically identical to the SPLT E and F modes except that the outgoing signal is the
incoming signal and not the signal from the remote test unit (RTU).
Figure 1-12 LOOPE access
61112
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
61113
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
BB
1-30
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.9.8 LOOPF
Loop F (LOOPF) indicates to split both the A and B paths, connect the incoming line from the F direction
to the outgoing line in the F direction and connect this looped configuration to the FAD.
Figure 1-13 LOOPF access
1.10.9.9 SPLTA
Split A (SPLTA) indicates that a connection is provided from both the E and F sides of the A transmission
path of the circuit under test to the FAD and split the A transmission path. Split A and B access modes
are shown in Figure 1-14 and Figure 1-15. These modes are similar to the Split E and F modes, except
the signals are sent to the RTU, not the NE signal configuration.
Figure 1-14 SPLTA access
61114
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
BB
61115
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
1-31
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.9.10 SPLTB
Split B (SPLTB) indicates that a connection is provided from both the E and F sides of the B transmission
path of the circuit under test to the FAD and split the B transmission path.
Figure 1-15 SPLTB access
1.10.10 Unmapped AID Test Access Point Connections
The ONS 15454/15327 supports connections to unmapped AIDs (unmapped circuits). The TAPs can be
connected to an unmapped AID, i.e. an AID that does not have a cross-connect on it. The access modes
supported are: MONE, SPLTE, and LOOPE.
Example 1-17 ED-STS1::STS-5-1:12:::TACC=1;
DV9-99 1970-01-02 03:16:11
M 12 COMPLD
;
This command creates a TAP on STS-5-1 and STS-5-2.
Example 1-18 CONN-TACC-STS1::STS-5-3:12::1:MD=MONE;
DV9-99 1970-01-02 02:51:54
M 12 COMPLD
1
;
Note STS-5-3 does not have a cross-connect on it. This command creates an unmapped AID connection with
the MONE access mode. STS-5-3 becomes unusable until the connection is disconnected by the
DISC-TACC command.
Note The <AID> provided in the CONN-TACC command designates the E side and the other automatically
becomes the F side.
61116
A
E
B
F
"Mapped"
AID
AID
Dual-FAD TAP
(2 times the bandwidth
of the circuit accessed)
1-32
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
Note In the case of all 1-way circuits (1-way, UPSR_HEAD, UPSR_DROP, UPSR_DC, UPSR_EN): If the
<AID> specified is the source AID, the direction is designated as From E in the above table. If the
<AID> specified is the destination AID or the drop side, the direction is designated as From F in the
above table.
Examples:
The following examples assume an STS TAP is already created with TAP number = 1.
1.10.10.1 1-Way Circuit
Example 1-19 ENT-CRS-STS1::STS-5-1,STS-5-2:12::1WAY;
DV9-99 1970-07-01 20:29:06
M 12 COMPLD;
Example 1-20 CONN-TACC-STS1::STS-5-1:12::1:MD=MONF;
DV9-99 1970-01-01 20:29:47
M 12 DENY
EANS
STS-5-1
/*INCORRECT TAP MODE*/
The <AID> specified in the above CONN-TACC command is the source AID for the 1-way circuit. In
this case only MONE and SPLTA modes are allowed because there is no B path in the case of a 1-way
circuit (see Table 1-3 on page 1-33).
Example 1-21 CONN-TACC-STS1::STS-5-1:12::1:MD=MONE;
DV9-99 1970-01-01 20:30:09
M 12 COMPLD
Example 1-22 DISC-TACC::1:12;
DV9-99 1970-01-01 20:30:20
M 12 COMPLD
;
However if the <AID> specified is the destination AID as shown below, the modes allowed are MONF
and SPLTB.
Example 1-23 CONN-TACC-STS1::STS-5-2:12::1:MD=MONF;
DV9-99 1970-01-01 20:30:32
M 12 COMPLD
Notes:
1. The same examples apply for UPSR_HEAD, UPSR_DROP, UPSR_DC and UPSR_EN which are all
1-way circuits.
2. The connections are made only to the working path irrespective of which path is currently active.
1-33
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Test Access
1.10.10.2 2-Way Circuits
For 2-way circuits all the modes are allowed as shown in Table 1-3 and the same applies for
UPSR_UPSR and UPSR circuit types. In the case of UPSR_UPSR and UPSR circuits the working path
is connected irrespective of which path is currently active.
1.10.10.3 Unmapped AID
As explained in the “Unmapped AID Test Access Point Connections” section on page 1-31, connections
can be made to an <AID> without a cross-connect on it. The modes supported are MONE, SPLTE and
LOOPE as shown in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 Modes Supported by Circuit Type
MONE MONF MONEF SPLTE SPLTF SPLTEF LOOPE LOOPF SPLTA SPLTB
1-way (from E) X X
1-way (from F) X
2-way XXXXXXXXXX
UPSR XXXXXXXXXX
UPSR_HEAD
(from E)
X X
UPSR_HEAD
(from F)
X X
UPSR_DROP
UPSR_DC
UPSR_EN
(from E)
X X
UPSR_DROP
UPSR_DC
UPSR_EN
(from F)
X X
UPSR_UPSRXXXXXXXXXX
Unmapped AIDXXX
1-34
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
TL1 PCA Provisioning
1.11 TL1 PCA Provisioning
You can provision or retrieve protection channel access (PCA) cross-connections on two-fiber and
four-fiber BLSR topologies at these supported OC rates: OC12 (two-fiber only), OC48, and OC192. The
traffic on the protection channel is referred to as extra-traffic and has the lowest priority level.
Extra-traffic will be preempted by any working traffic that requires the use of the protection channel.
In a two-fiber BLSR the extra traffic is provisioned on the upper half of the bandwidth path. In a
four-fiber BLSR the extra traffic is provisioned on the protect fiber. The PCA provisioning feature allows
you to establish the PCA cross-connection on the protection path of the two-fiber BLSR and protection
channel of the four-fiber BLSR only when the query is an explicit request.
There are two PCA connection types: 1WAYPCA and 2WAYPCA. The PCA cross-connection is
provisioned only when the user provides an explicit request using the ENT-CRS-STSp/VT1 commands.
If the cross-connection is a PCA cross-connection, either 1WAYPCA or 2WAYPCA is shown in the CCT
field of the RTRV-CRS-STSp/VT1 command output.
1WAYPCA and 2WAYPCA are only used in the TL1 user interface to provide usability and visibility for
the user to specify a PCA cross-connection type in the TL1 cross-connection commands.
Note The network must be configured as either a two-fiber or four-fiber OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192 BLSR.
Note The STS or VT1 path cross-connection can be established with TL1 commands (ENT-CRS-xxx).
Note Because the RTRV-CSR-xxx command does not include the optional CTYPE field to specify a
connection type, the output result reports the matched cross-connections based on the queried AID(s);
therefore, the retrieved cross-connection inventory can be both PCA and non-PCA cross-connections.
1.11.1 Provision a PCA Cross-Connection
Input format for provisioning a PCA cross-connection:
Example 1-24 ENT-CRS-<PATH>:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>::[<CCT>][::];
<PATH>::={STS_PATH | VT1}
[<C CT >]: :={ 1WAY, 1WAYD C, 1WAYE N, 2 WAY, 1WAY PCA , 2WAY PCA }, it de fau lts to 2 WAY.
{STS_PATH}::={STS1 | STS3C | STS6C | STS9C | STS12C | STS24C | STS48C | STS192C}
STS= all the STS bandwidth cross-connections.
VT1=VT1_5 cross-connection.
1-35
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
FTP Software Download
Input example of provisioning an STS3C PCA cross-connection:
Example 1-25 ENT-CRS-STS3C::STS-1-1,STS-2-1:123::2WAYPCA;
Note If the [<CCT>] of this cross-connection provisioning command is either 1WAYPCA or 2WAYPCA, and
the NONE of both <FROM> and <TO> AID is PCA AID, an IIAC ( Input, Invalid PCA AIDs) error
message is returned.
Note If sending this command with a non-PCA connection type (CCT), and one (or two) AIDs is/are the PCA
AIDs, an IIAC (The PCA AID Is Not Allowed for the Queried CCT Type) error message is returned.
1.11.2 Retrieve a PCA Cross-Connection
Input Format for retrieving a PCA cross-connection:
Example 1-26 RTRV-CRS-[<PATH>]:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];<PATH>::={STS_PATH | VT1 | STS }
If PATH is STS, it will retrieve all the STS cross-connections based on the queried AIDs.
<AID>={FacilityAIDs, STSAIDs, VTAIDs, ALL}
Output format of the PCA STSp cross-connection retrieval command:
Example 1-27 “<FROM>,<TO>:2WAYPCA,STS3C”
Output format of the PCA VT cross-connection retrieval command:
Example 1-28 “<FROM>,<TO>:2WAYPCA”
1.12 FTP Software Download
The file transfer protocol (FTP) software download feature downloads a software package to the inactive
flash partition residing on either the TCC+/TCC2 or XTC card. FTP software download provides for
simplex and duplex TCC+/TCC2 or XTC card downloads, success and failure status, and in-progress
status at 20% increments.
1.12.1 COPY-RFILE
The COPY-RFILE command downloads a new software package from the location specified by the FTP
URL into the inactive flash partition residing on either the TCC+/TCC2 or XTC card.
Input format:
Example 1-29 COPY-RFILE:[<TID>]:[<SRC>]:<CTAG>::TYPE=<XFERTYPE>,[SRC=<SRC1>]:
1-36
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
FTP Software Download
where:
SRC is the type of file being transferred and is from the “RFILE” section on page 4-24
<XFERTYPE> is the file transfer protocol; valid values can be found in the “TX_TYPE” section on
page 4-95
<SRC1> specifies the source of the file to be transferred. Only the FTP URL is supported. In a
non-firewall environment the format for the URL is:
“FTP://FTPUSER[:FTPPASSWORD]]@FTPHOST/PACKAGE_PATH”
where:
userid is the userid to connect to the computer with the package file
password is the password used to connect to the computer with the package file
hostname is the IP address of the computer with the package file. DNS lookup of hostname is
not supported.
package_path is the long path name to the package file
Note Userid and password are optional if the user does not need to log into the host computer. The
password may be optional if the user does not need to log in. All other portions of the URL
are required, including the initial “FTP://” string.
In a firewall environment the hostname should be replaced with a list of IP addresses each separated
by a “@” character. The first IP address should be for the computer where the package file is stored.
Subsequent IP addresses are for firewall computers moving outward toward the edge of the network
until the final IP address listed is the computer that outside users use to first access the network.
For example, if your topology is:
“FTPHOST <-> GNE3 <->GNE2 <-> GNE1 <-> ENE”
the FTP URL is:
FTP://FTPUSER:FTPPASSWORD@FTPHOST@GNE3@GNE2@GNE1/PACKAGE_PATH
SRC1 is a String
Notes:
1. SWDL is the only allowable <XFERTYPE>.
2. FTP is the only allowed file transfer method.
3. The use of the SWDL and the extended FTP URL syntax are required by the COPY-RFILE syntax.
1.12.2 APPLY
The APPLY command can activate or revert software depending on the version of software loaded on
the active and protect flash. An error is returned if attempting to activate to an older software load or
trying to revert to a newer software load. If this command is successful the appropriate flash is selected
and the TCC+/TCC2 or XTC card will reboot.
Input format:
Example 1-30 APPLY:[<TID>]::<CTAG>[::<MEM_SW_TYPE>]:
1-37
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
FTP Software Download
where:
<MEM_SW_TYPE> indicates memory switch action during the software upgrade.
<MEM_SW_TYPE> is ACT for activate and RVRT for revert.
1.12.3 REPT EVT FXFR
REPT EVT FXFR is an autonomous message used to report the start, completion, and completed
percentage status of the FTP software download. REPT EVT FXFR also reports any failure during the
software upgrade including invalid package, invalid path, invalid userid/password, and loss of network
connection.
Note:
1. The “FXFR_RSLT” is only sent when the “FXFR_STATUS” is COMPLD.
2. The “BYTES_XFRD” is only sent when the “FXFR_STATUS” is IP or COMPLD.
Output format:
Example 1-31 SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT FXFR
“<FILENAME>,<FXFR_STATUS>,[<FXFR_RSLT>],[<BYTES_XFRD>]”
;
where:
<FILENAME> indicates the transferred file path name and is a string
<FXFR_STATUS> indicates the file transferred status: Start, IP (in progress), or COMPLD
<FXFR_RSLT> indicates the file transferred result: success or failure. <FXFR_RSLT> is optional
<BYTES_XFRD> indicates the percentage transfer complete and is optional
1.12.4 Downloading New Software
The following procedure downloads new software to the TCC+/TCC2 or XTC card using TL1.
Download New Software
Note Only Superusers can download and activate software.
Step 1 Copy the new software package (15454-0340-X02E-2804.pkg) to an FTP host.
Step 2 Establish a TL1 session with the target NE.
Step 3 Login with the ACT-USER command.
Step 4 Check the working and protect software on the NE by issuing the RTRV-NE-GEN command.
Input example:
Example 1-32 RTRV-NE-GEN:::1;
1-38
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
FTP Software Download
Output example:
Example 1-33 VA454-94 1970-01-06 22:22:12
M 1 COMPLD
“IPADDR=1-.82.87.94,IPMASK=255.255.254.0,DEFRTR=10.82.86.1,
ETHIPADDR=10.82.87.94,ETHIPMASK=255.255.254.0,NAME=VA454-94,
SWER=3.40.00,LOAD=03.40-002G-14.21,PROTSWVER=4.00.00,
PROTLOAD=04.00-X02G-25.07,DEFDESC=\”FACTORY DEFAULTS\””
;
Step 5 Issue the COPY-RFILE command. This command will initiate the download process. Refer to the
“COPY-RFILE” section on page 1-35 for command syntax.
In the following example the package is located in “/USR/CET/VINTARA” in the host 10.77.22.199.
The userid and passwords are TL1 and CISCO454. The directory path of the package is similar to what
you will see during an FTP session.
Example 1-34 COPY-RFILE::RFILE-
PKG:CTAG::TYPE=SWDL,SRC=”FTP://TL1:CISCO454@10.77.29.199
/USR/CET/VINTARA/15454-0340-X02E-2804.PKG”;
DEV208 1970-01-10 11:51:57
M CTAG COMPLD
;
Step 6 If any of the parameters are wrong or if the host is not accessible, a REPT EVT FXFR message will
report from the following list. A download failure may be due to one or more of the following:
Directory path of the package is invalid or not found
Package is invalid (i.e., ONS 15454 package on an ONS 15327, vice-versa, or an invalid file type)
Package not found on specified path
Userid/password or hostname is invalid
Host is not accessible
Firewall userid/password or host in invalid
Node rebooted/lost connection during download
If software download is already in progress
If the node or the host timed out during FTP protocol
Example 1-35 DEV208 1970-01-10 11:52:02
A 2816.2816 REPT EVT EQPT
“SLOT-11:SFTWDOWN-FAIL,TC,,,,,,,:\”SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD FAILED\”,TCC
;
Step 7 If the download is successful the REPT EVT FXFR message will report an active start:
Example 1-36 DEV208 1970-01-10 11:52:15
A 2818,2818 REPT EVT FXFR
ACTIVE START”
;
Step 8 A SFTDOWN minor alarm is raised to indicate that the software download is in progress. The
SFTDOWN alarm will clear when the download is complete.
1-39
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
FTP Software Download
Example 1-37 DEV208 1970-01--10 11:52:15
* 2817.2817 REPT ALM EQPT
“SLOT-7:MN,SFTWDOWN,NSA,,,,:\”SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS\”,TCC”
;
Use the in-progress status at any time during the software download to verify the RTRV-NE-GEN
command.
Example 1-38 RTRV-NE-GEN
VA454-94 1970-01-06 22:22;12
M 1 COMPLD
“IPADDR=10.82.87.94,IPMASK=255.255.245.0,DEFRTR=10.82.86.1,
ETHIPADDR=10.82.87.94,EHTIPMASK=255.255.254.0,NAME=VA454-94,
SWVER=3.40.00,LOAD=03.40-002G-14-21,PROTSWVER=NONE,
PROTLOAD=DOWNLOADINPROGRESS,DEFDESC=\:FACTORY DEFAULTS\”
;
Step 9 The download progress is reported by the REPT EVT FXFR message which will report a message after
every 20% of download is complete as shown:
Example 1-39 DEV208 1970-01-10 11:53:12
A 2820,2820 REPT EVT FXFR
ACTIVE,IP,,20”
;
DEV208 1970-01-10 11:53:12
A 2820,2820 REPT EVT FXFR
ACTIVE,IP,,40”
;
DEV208 1970-01-10 11:53:12
A 2820,2820 REPT EVT FXFR
ACTIVE,IP,,60”
;
DEV208 1970-01-10 11:53:12
A 2820,2820 REPT EVT FXFR
ACTIVE,IP,,80”
;
Step 10 If the TL1 session times out during download or if the user terminates the TL1 session the download will
continue. The download completion can be confirmed by issuing the RTRV-NE-GEN command and
verifying the PROTLOAD.
Example 1-40 RTRV-NE-GEN:::1;
VA454-94 1970-01-06 22:22:12
M 1 COMPLD
“IPADDR=10.82.87.94,IPMASK=255.255.245.0,DEFRTR=10.82.86.1,
ETHIPADDR=10.82.87.94,EHTIPMASK=255.255.254.0,NAME=VA454-94,
SWVER=3.40.00,LOAD=03.40-002G-14-21,PROTSWVER=4.00.00,
PROTLOAD=03.40-X02E-28.04,DEFDESC=\:FACTORY DEFAULTS\””
;
Step 11 REPT EVT FXFR confirms the completion of the software download.
1-40
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
FTP Software Download
Example 1-41 DEV208 1970-01-10 12:01:16
A 2825,2825 REPT EVT FXFR
ACTIVE,COMPLD,SUCCESS”
;
Step 12 The SFTDOWN alarm clears when the download is complete.
Example 1-42 DEV208 1970-01-10 11:52:15
* 2826,2817 REPT ALM EQPT
“SLOT-7:CL,SFTWDOWN,NSA,,,,:\”SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS\”,TCC”
;
1.12.5 Activating New Software
After the software is successfully downloaded, the new software which resides in the protect load must
be activated to run on the NE. The APPLY command can be used to activate and revert depending on the
version of the protect software and the newly downloaded software (refer to the APPLY” section on
page 1-36 for correct APPLY syntax).
Activate New Software
Step 1 If the protect software is newer than the working software, activate it as shown:
Example 1-43 APPLY::1::ACT;
DEV208 1970-01-10 13:40:53
M 1 COMPLD
;
An error is reported if a revert is attempted with a newer protect software.
Step 2 If the APPLY command is successful, logout of the TL1 session using the CANC-USER command:
Example 1-44 CANC-USER::CISCO15:1;
VA454-94 1970-01-07 01:18:18
M 1 COMPLD
;
After a successful completion of the APPLY command the NE will reboot and the TL1 session will
disconnect. When the NE comes up after the reboot it will be running the new software. Traffic switches
are possible during activation.
1-41
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
FTP Software Download
1.12.6 Remote Software Download/Activation Using the GNE
In a network with SDCC-connected ONS 15454 and ONS 15327s, remote download and activation are
possible using the GNE/ENE feature supported in TL1. The GNE must be connected by a LAN and the
remaining ENEs can download the new software package through fiber from the GNE.
For remote software downloading, complete the steps in the “Download New Software” procedure on
page 1-37 and the Activate New Software” procedure on page 1-40, but ensure that the TID in each
command is filled with the ENE node name.
A maximum of 5 ENEs (an additional session through craft interface) can be contacted using the GNE
sessions through the GNE by opening a single TL1 session on the GNE. For more information on TL1
Gateway, see Chapter 2, “TL1 Gateway.”
Example 1-45 ACT-USER:NODE1:CISCO15:1;
ACT-USER:NODE2:CISCO15:1;
ACT-USER:NODE3:CISCO15:1;
ACT-USER:NODE4:CISCO15:1;
ACT-USER:NODE5:CISCO15:1;
Five simultaneous software downloads can be initiated using the COPY-RFILE command with
appropriate TIDs. All downloads will be independent of each other and download speeds may differ.
Example 1-46 COPY-RFILE:NODE1:RFILE-PKG:CTAG::TYPE=SWDL,SRC=”FTP://TL1:
CISCO454@10.77.29.199/USR/CET/VINTARA/15454-0340-X02E-2804.PKG”;
COPY-RFILE:NODE2:RFILE-PKG...
COPY-RFILE:NODE3:RFILE-PKG...
COPY-RFILE:NODE4:RFILE-PKG...
COPY-RFILE:NODE5:RFILE-PKG...
Individual REPT EVT FXFR messages can be isolated using the node names. RTRV-NE-GEN also
requires the individual node names entered in the TID to see a specific download status.
You can activate the software on all of the nodes using the GNE node.
Note Activate the GNE last, after activating all the ENEs or else ENE connectivity will be lost when the GNE
starts to reboot for activation.
Example 1-47 APPLY:NODE1::1::ACT;
APPLY:NODE2::1::ACT;
APPLY:NODE3::1::ACT;
APPLY:NODE4::1::ACT;
APPLY:NODE5::1::ACT;
1-42
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 1 Getting Started
FTP Software Download
CHAPTER
2-1
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
2
TL1 Gateway
This chapter describes the TL1 Gateway and provides procedures and examples for implementing
TL1 Gateway on the ONS 15454 or ONS 15327.
2.1 Gateway Network Element Topology
You can issue TL1 commands to multiple nodes via a single connection through the TL1 Gateway. Any
node can serve as a Gateway Network Element (GNE), End-Point Network Element (ENE), or
Intermediate Network Element (INE). A node becomes a GNE when a TL1 user connects to it and enters
a command destined for another node. An ENE is an end node because it processes a TL1 command that
is passed to it from another node. An INE is an intermediate node because of topology; it has no special
hardware, software, or provisioning.
To implement the TL1 Gateway, use the desired ENE’s TID in the ACT-USER command to initiate a
session between the GNE and the ENE. Once a session is established you need to enter the ENE’s TID
in all of the subsequent commands that are destined for the ENE. From the GNE, you can access several
remote nodes which become the ENEs. The ENEs are the message destinations or origins. The INE
handles the DCC TCP/IP packet exchange.
The GNE Session is the connection that multiplexes TL1 messages between the OSS/craftsperson and
the GNE. The GNE demulitplexes incoming operations support system (OSS) TL1 commands and
forwards them to the remote ENE. The GNE also multiplexes incoming responses and autonomous
messages to the GNE Session. The ENE Session is the connection that exchanges messages between the
GNE and the remote ENE. Figure 2-1 shows the GNE topology.
2-2
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 2 TL1 Gateway
Gateway Network Element Topology
Figure 2-1 Example of a GNE topology
With the TCC2, each GNE can support eleven (10+1) concurrent gateway communication sessions
(connections from an OS to the GNE). Ten of these sessions are via the LAN (wire-wrap, active TCC2
LAN port, or DCC) and the eleventh session is reserved for the active TCC2 serial port. With the
XTC/TCC+, each GNE can support six (5+1) concurrent gateway communication sessions. Five of these
session are via the LAN (wire wrap, active XTC LAN port or DCC) and the sixth session is reserved for
the active XTC/TCC+ serial port.
On each gateway communication session a GNE can establish TL1 sessions to up to 31 additional DCC-
connected nodes, for a total DCC of 32 nodes. Each GNE can handle 32 nodes and 6 (XTC/TCC+) or 11
(TCC2) concurrent communication gateway sessions, and the GNE can handle up to a maximum of 96
(XTC/TCC+) or 176 (TCC2) ENEs/GNE. You can dynamically distribute the ENEs to balance the
number of concurrent gateway communication sessions versus the number of NEs on the DCC. The GNE
treats the 6 (5+1 for XTC/TCC+) or 11 (10+1 for TCC2) concurrent gateway communication sessions
and 96 (XTC/TCC+) or 176 (TCC2) ENEs/GNE limit as a resource pool (Table 2-1) and continues to
allocate resources until the pool is exhausted (see Table 2-2 for allocation examples). When the pool is
exhausted the GNE returns an “All Gateways in Use” message or an “All ENE Connections in Use
message.
55276
Number of connections
Node 1 Node 2
OSS
Node 3
Autonomous messages
TLI Gateway node
Single connection
Command/Response
Table 2-1 Gateway Resource Pool
Number of GNEs Number of GNE Sessions Number of ENEs
1 (Cisco ONS 15327) 6 (5+1) 96 (dynamically allocated)
1 (Cisco ONS 15454) 11 (10+1) TCC2 176 (dynamically allocated)
6 (5+1) XTC/TCC+ 96 (dynamically allocated)
2-3
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 2 TL1 Gateway
Gateway Network Element Topology
Note Issuing commands to specific nodes in the network is accomplished by entering a unique node name in
the TID field in each TL1 message. The TID field is synonymous with the name of the node and is the
second token in a TL1 command.
Table 2-2 Examples of a Single GNE Topology Showing How the GNE/ENE Resources can be
Allocated
Number of GNE Communication Sessions Maximum Number of ENEs
131
262
393
496
Number of GNE Communication Sessions Number of ENEs
116
232
348
464
580
696
2-4
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 2 TL1 Gateway
Implementing TL1 Gateway
2.2 Implementing TL1 Gateway
The following procedures demonstrate TL1 Gateway on a four-node ring (without TL1 Gateway in
Figure 2-2 and with TL1 Gateway in Figure 2-3), where:
Node 0 is the GNE.
Node 1 is the ENE 1.
Node 2 is the INE 2.
Node 3 is the ENE 3.
Figure 2-2 Four-node ring without TL1 Gateway
Figure 2-3 Four-node ring with TL1 Gateway
55274
Node 3Node 2
Node 0
Node 1
55275
ENE 3INE 2
DCC Channel
GNE
ENE 1
TCP/IP
GNE Session
2-5
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 2 TL1 Gateway
Implementing TL1 Gateway
Log Into a Remote ENE
Step 1 Telnet or serial port to Node 0, which will become the GNE.
Step 2 To connect to the ENE 1 node, enter the TL1 login command using the following input example:
ACT-USER:NODE1:USERNAME:1234:PASSWORD;
The GNE forwards the login to ENE 1. After successful login, ENE 1 sends a COMPLD response.
Step 3 When you are logged into ENE 1, enter the following TL1 login command to connect to ENE 3:
ACT-USER:NODE3:USERNAME:1234:PASSWORD;
The GNE forwards the login to ENE 3. After successful login, the ENE 3 sends a COMPLD response.
Forward Commands by Specifying the ENE TID (Node 1 or Node 3)
When you are logged into ENE 1 and ENE 3, enter a command and designate a specific TID, as shown
in the following example:
RTRV-HDR:NODE1::1; will retrieve the header of Node 1 and
RTRV-HDR:NODE3::3; will retrieve the header of Node 3.
Receive Autonomous Messages from the Remote ENE
To receive autonomous messages from the remote ENE, you must log into the remote ENE. When you
are logged in, you will start receiving autonomous messages. The source of the message is identified by
the node TID as part of the message.
Log Out of a Remote ENE
To disconnect from a remote ENE, you must use the CANC-USER command as follows:
CANC-USER:NODE1:USERNAME:1; will disconnect ENE 1 and
CANC-USER:NODE3:USERNAME:3; will disconnect ENE 3.
The GNE forwards the logout to the remote ENEs. The GNE/ENE TCP session is closed.
2-6
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 2 TL1 Gateway
Implementing TL1 Gateway
CHAPTER
3-1
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
3
TL1 Command Descriptions
This chapter provides specific information on TL1 commands and autonomous messages for the
Cisco ONS 15454 and the Cisco ONS 15327, Release 4.0, including:
TL1 commands by category
TL1 commands by card
TL1 commands
For information on command components, such as parameters, see Chapter 4, “TL1 Command
Components.”
3.1 TL1 Commands by Category
Table 3-1 TL1 Commands by Category
Category Command or Autonomous Message
BLSR DLT-BLSR
ED-BLSR
ENT-BLSR
EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>
REPT EVT RING
RTRV-BLSR
RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-TRC-<OCN_BLSR>
Cross Connections DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
DLT-CRS-VT1
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ED-CRS-VT1
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ENT-CRS-VT1
RTRV-CRS
RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-CRS-VT1
3-2
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Category
DWDM (ONS 15454) DLT-FFP-CLNT
ED-CLNT
ED-DWDM
ED-FFP-CLNT
ED-OCH
ED-TRC-CLNT
ED-TRC-OCH
ENT-FFP-CLNT
OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT
RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT
RTRV-CLNT
RTRV-DWDM
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
RTRV-OCH
RTRV-PROTNSW-CLNT
RTRV-TRC-CLNT
RTRV-TRC-OCH
Environment Alarms and Controls OPR-ACO-ALL
OPR-EXT-CONT
REPT ALM ENV
REPT EVT ENV
RLS-EXT-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV
RTRV-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ATTR-ENV
RTRV-COND-ENV
RTRV-EXT-CONT
SET-ATTR-CONT
SET-ATTR-ENV
Equipment ALW-SWDX-EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT
DLT-EQPT
ED-EQPT
ENT-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT
REPT ALM EQPT
REPT EVT EQPT
RTRV-ALM-EQPT
RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-EQPT
SW-DX-EQPT
SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Table 3-1 TL1 Commands by Category (continued)
Category Command or Autonomous Message
3-3
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Category
Fault REPT ALM <MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM COM
REPT ALM RING
REPT EVT <MOD2ALM>
REPT EVT COM
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM>
RTRV-ALM-ALL
RTRV-ALM-RING
RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
RTRV-COND-ALL
IOS COPY-IOSCFG
REPT EVT IOSCFG
Log ALW-MSG-DBCHG
INH-MSG-DBCHG
REPT DBCHG
RTRV-LOG
Network RTRV-NE-IPMAP
RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
Performance ALW-PMREPT-ALL
INH-PMREPT-ALL
INIT-REG-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
SET-TH-<MOD2>
Ports ED-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-DS1
ED-EC1
ED-G1000
ED-T1
ED-T3
INIT-REG-G1000
RMV-<MOD2_IO>
RST-<MOD2_IO>
RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-DS1
RTRV-EC1
RTRV-FSTE
RTRV-G1000
RTRV-GIGE
RTRV-POS
RTRV-T1
RTRV-T3
Table 3-1 TL1 Commands by Category (continued)
Category Command or Autonomous Message
3-4
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Category
Security ACT-USER
ALW-MSG-SECU
CANC
CANC-USER
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-PID
ED-USER-SECU
ENT-USER-SECU
INH-MSG-SECU
REPT EVT SECU
REPT EVT SESSION
RTRV-USER-SECU
SONET Line Protection DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
Software Download APPLY
COPY-RFILE
REPT EVT FXFR
STS and VT Paths ED-<STS_PATH>
ED-VT1
RTRV-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-VT1
Synchronization ED-BITS
ED-NE-SYNCN
ED-SYNCN
OPR-SYNCNSW
REPT ALM BITS
REPT ALM SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS
REPT EVT SYNCN
RLS-SYNCNSW
RTRV-ALM-BITS
RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
RTRV-BITS
RTRV-COND-BITS
RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-NE-SYNCN
RTRV-SYNCN
Table 3-1 TL1 Commands by Category (continued)
Category Command or Autonomous Message
3-5
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Category
System ALW-MSG-ALL
ED-DAT
ED-NE-GEN
INH-MSG-ALL
INIT-SYS
RTRV-HDR
RTRV-INV
RTRV-NE-GEN
RTRV-TOD
SET-TOD
Test Access CHG-ACCMD-<MOD_TACC>
CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC>
DISC-TACC
RTRV-TACC
Testing OPR-LPBK-<MOD2>
RLS-LPBK-<MOD2>
UCP DLT-UCP-CC
DLT-UCP-IF
DLT-UCP-NBR
ED-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-IF
ED-UCP-NBR
ED-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-CC
ENT-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-NBR
REPT ALM UCP
REPT EVT UCP
RTRV-ALM-UCP
RTRV-COND-UCP
RTRV-UCP-CC
RTRV-UCP-IF
RTRV-UCP-NBR
RTRV-UCP-NODE
UPSR Switching OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1
REPT SW
RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1
RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1
Table 3-1 TL1 Commands by Category (continued)
Category Command or Autonomous Message
3-6
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454)
3.2 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454)
Table 3-2 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454)
G1000-4
ML1000-2
ML100T-12
EC1
DS1
DS1N
DS3
DS3N
DS3E
DS3NE
DS3XM
OC3
OC3-8
OC12
OC12-4
OC48
OC48AS
OC192
E100T
E1000T
TCC
XC
TCC2
XCVT
XC192
XCVXL
AICI
AIC
MXP
TXP
ACT-USER
ALW-MSG-ALL
ALW-MSG-DBCHG
ALW-PMREPT-ALL
ALW-SWDX-EQPT XXX
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT XXXXXXXX
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT XXXXXXXX
APPLY XX
CANC
CANC-USER
CHG-ACCMD-<CHG_ACCMD> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
COPY-IOSCFG XX
COPY-RFILE XX
DISC-TACC XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DLT-BLSR XXXXX
DLT-CRS-VT1 X XXX XXXXXXXX
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DLT-EQPT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> XXXXXXX
DLT-FFP-CLNT XX
DLT-UCP-CC XXXXXXX
DLT-UCP-IF
DLT-UCP-NBR
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-BITS X
ED-BLSR XXXXXXX
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ED-CRS-VT1 XXXXXXXX
ED-CLNT XX
ED-DAT
ED-DS1 X
3-7
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454)
ED-DWDM XX
ED-EC1 X
ED-EQPT XXXXXXXX
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> XXXXXXX
ED-FFP-CLNT XX
ED-G1000 X
ED-NE-GEN X
ED-NE-SYNCN X
ED-OCH XX
ED-PID
ED-SYNCN XX
ED-T1 XX
ED-T3 XXXXX
ED-TRC-CLNT XX
ED-TRC-OCH XX
ED-UCP-CC XXXXXXX
ED-UCP-IF XXXXXXX
ED-UCP-NBR
ED-UCP-NODE
ED-USER-SECU
ED-VT1 XXX XXXXXXXX
ED-<OCN_TYPE> XXXXXXX
ED-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ENT-BLSR XXXXX
ENT-CRS-VT1 XXXXXXXX
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ENT-EQPT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> XXXXXXX
ENT-FFP-CLNT XX
ENT-UCP-CC XXXXXXX
ENT-UCP IF XXXXXXX
ENT-UCP-NBR
ENT-USER-SECU
EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR> XXXXXX
Table 3-2 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454) (continued)
G1000-4
ML1000-2
ML100T-12
EC1
DS1
DS1N
DS3
DS3N
DS3E
DS3NE
DS3XM
OC3
OC3-8
OC12
OC12-4
OC48
OC48AS
OC192
E100T
E1000T
TCC
XC
TCC2
XCVT
XC192
XCVXL
AICI
AIC
MXP
TXP
3-8
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454)
INH-MSG-ALL
INH-MSG-DBCHG
INH-MSG-SECU XX
ING-PMREPT-ALL
INH-SWDX-EQPT XXX
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT XXXXXXXX
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT XXXXXXXX
INIT-REG-<MOD2> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
INIT-REG-G1000 X
INIT-REG-CLNT XX
INIT-SYS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OPR-ACO-ALL XX
OPR-EXT-CONT XX
OPR-LPBK-<MOD2> X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1 XXXXXXX
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> XXXXXXX
OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXX
OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT XX
OPR-SYNCNSW XXXXXXX X
REPT ALM BITS X
REPT ALM COM
REPT ALM ENV XX
REPT ALM EQPT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
REPT ALM RING XXXXX
REPT ALM SYNCN XXXXXXX X
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
REPT ALM UCP
REPT DBCHG XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
REPT EVT BITS X
REPT EVT COM
REPT EVT ENV XX
REPT EVT FXFR XX
REPT EVT EQPT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
REPT EVT IOSCFG XX
Table 3-2 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454) (continued)
G1000-4
ML1000-2
ML100T-12
EC1
DS1
DS1N
DS3
DS3N
DS3E
DS3NE
DS3XM
OC3
OC3-8
OC12
OC12-4
OC48
OC48AS
OC192
E100T
E1000T
TCC
XC
TCC2
XCVT
XC192
XCVXL
AICI
AIC
MXP
TXP
3-9
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454)
REPT EVT RING XXXXX
REPT EVT SECU
REPT EVT SESSION XX
REPT EVT SYNCN XXXXXXX X
REPT EVT <MOD2ALM> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
REPT EVT UCP
REPT PM <MOD2> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
REPT SW XXX
RLS-EXT-CONT XX
RLS-LPBK-<MOD2> X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT XX
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1 XXXXXXX
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> XXXXXXX
RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXX
RLS-SYNCNSW XXXXXXX X
RMV-<MOD2_IO> X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
RST-<MOD2_IO> X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
RTRV-ALM-ALL XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-ALM-BITS X
RTRV-ALM-ENV XX
RTRV-ALM-EQPT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-ALM-RING XXXXX
RTRV-ALM-SYNCN XXXXXXX X
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-ALM-UCP
RTRV-ATTR-CONT XX
RTRV-ATTR-ENV XX
RTRV-BITS X
RTRV-BLSR XXXXX
RTRV-CKT-ORIG
RTRV-CKT-TERM
RTRV-CLNT XX
RTRV-COND-ALL XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-COND-BITS X
Table 3-2 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454) (continued)
G1000-4
ML1000-2
ML100T-12
EC1
DS1
DS1N
DS3
DS3N
DS3E
DS3NE
DS3XM
OC3
OC3-8
OC12
OC12-4
OC48
OC48AS
OC192
E100T
E1000T
TCC
XC
TCC2
XCVT
XC192
XCVXL
AICI
AIC
MXP
TXP
3-10
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454)
RTRV-COND-ENV XX
RTRV-COND-EQPT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-COND-SYNCN X
RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-COND-RING XXXXX
RTRV-COND-UCP
RTRV-CRS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-CRS-VT1 XXX XXXXXXXX
RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-DWMD XX
RTRV-EC1 X
RTRV-DS1 X
RTRV-EQPT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-EXT-CONT XX
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> XXXXXXX
RTRV-FSTE XX
RTRV-G1000 X
RTRV-GIGE XX
RTRV-HDR
RTRV-INV XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-LOG
RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
RTRV-NE-GEN X
RTRV-NE-IPMAP XXXXXXX
RTRV-NE-SYNCN X
RTRV-OCH XX
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL XX
RTRV-POS XX
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> XXXXXXX
RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> XXX XXXXXXX
Table 3-2 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454) (continued)
G1000-4
ML1000-2
ML100T-12
EC1
DS1
DS1N
DS3
DS3N
DS3E
DS3NE
DS3XM
OC3
OC3-8
OC12
OC12-4
OC48
OC48AS
OC192
E100T
E1000T
TCC
XC
TCC2
XCVT
XC192
XCVXL
AICI
AIC
MXP
TXP
3-11
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454)
RTRV-PROTNSW-CLNT XX
RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1 XXXXXXX
RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
RTRV-SYNCN XX
RTRV-TACC XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-T1 XX
RTRV-T3 XXXX
RTRV-TH-<MOD2> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
RTRV-TOD
RTRV-TRC-<OCN_BLSR> XXXXX
RTRV-TRC-CLNT XX
RTRV-TRC-OCH XX
RTRV-VT1 XXX XXXX XXX
RTRV-<OCN_TYPE> XXXXXXXX
RTRV-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-UCP-CC XXXXXXXX
RTRV-UCP-IF XXXXXXXX
RTRV-UCP-NBR
RTRV-UCP-NODE
RTRV-USER-SECU
SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
SET-ATTR-CONT XX
SET-ATTR-ENV XX
SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SET-TH-<MOD2> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
SET-TOD
SW-DX-EQPT XXX
SW-TOPROTN-EQPT XXXXXXXX
SW-TOWKG-EQPT XXXXXXXX
Table 3-2 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15454) (continued)
G1000-4
ML1000-2
ML100T-12
EC1
DS1
DS1N
DS3
DS3N
DS3E
DS3NE
DS3XM
OC3
OC3-8
OC12
OC12-4
OC48
OC48AS
OC192
E100T
E1000T
TCC
XC
TCC2
XCVT
XC192
XCVXL
AICI
AIC
MXP
TXP
3-12
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327)
3.3 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327)
Table 3-3 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327)
XTC/DS1
XTC/DS3
OC3
OC12
OC48
E100T
E1000T
XTC
G1000-2
XTC/XCVT
XTC/AIC
ACT-USER
ALW-MSG-ALL
ALW-MSG-DBCHG
ALW-PMREPT-ALL
ALW-SWDX-EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT
APPLY X
CANC
CANC-USER
CHG-ACCMD-<CHG_ACCMD> XXXXX
CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC> XXXXX
COPY-IOSCFG
COPY-RFILE X
DISC-TACC XXXXX
DLT-BLSR XX
DLT-CRS-VT1 XXX
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH> XXXXX
DLT-EQPT X XXXXX X
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> XXX
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-BITS X
ED-BLSR XX
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH> XXXXX X
ED-CRS-VT1 XXX
ED-DAT
ED-DS1
ED-EC1
ED-EQPT XX
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> XXX
ED-G1000 X
ED-NE-GEN X
3-13
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327)
ED-NE-SYNCN X
ED-PID
ED-SYNCN X
ED-T1 X
ED-T3 X
ED-USER-SECU
ED-VT1 XXXX
ED-<OCN_TYPE> XXX
ED-<STS_PATH> XXXXX X
ENT-BLSR XX
ENT-CRS-VT1 XXX
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH> XXXXX X
ENT-EQPT XXXXXXXXXXX
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> XXX
ENT-USER-SECU
EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR> XX
INH-MSG-ALL
INH-MSG-DBCHG
INH-MSG-SECU X
INH-PMREPT-ALL
INH-SWDX-EQPT X
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT XX
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT XX
INIT-REG-<MOD2> XXXXX
INIT-REG-G1000 X
INIT-SYS XXXXXXXXXXX
OPR-ACO-ALL X
OPR-EXT-CONT X
OPR-LPBK-<MOD2> XXXXX X
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1 XXX
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> XXX
OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> XXX
OPR-SYNCNSW XXX X
REPT ALM BITS X
Table 3-3 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327) (continued)
XTC/DS1
XTC/DS3
OC3
OC12
OC48
E100T
E1000T
XTC
G1000-2
XTC/XCVT
XTC/AIC
3-14
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327)
REPT ALM COM
REPT ALM ENV X
REPT ALM EQPT XXXXXXXXXXX
REPT ALM RING XX
REPT ALM SYNCN XXX X
REP ALM <MOD2ALM> XXXXXXXXXX X
REPT DBCHG X
REPT EVT BITS X
REPT EVT COM
REPT EVT ENV X
REPT EVT EQPT XXXXXXXXXX X
REPT EVT FXFR X
REPT EVT RING XX
REPT EVT SECU
REPT EVT SESSION X
REPT EVT SYNCN XXX X
REPT EVT <MOD2ALM> XXXXXXXXXX X
REPT PM <MOD2> XXXXXX
REPT SW X
RLS-EXT-CONT X
RLS-LPBK-<MOD2> XXXXX X
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1 XXX
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> XXX
RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> XXX
RLS-SYNCNSW XXX X
RMV-<MOD2_IO> XXXXX X
RST-<MOD2_IO> XXXXX X
RTRV-ALM-ALL XXXXXXXXXX X
RTRV-ALM-BITS X
RTRV-ALM-ENV X
RTRV-ALM-EQPT XXXXXXXXXX X
RTRV-ALM-RING
RTRV-ALM-SYNCN XXX X
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> XXXXXXXXXX X
Table 3-3 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327) (continued)
XTC/DS1
XTC/DS3
OC3
OC12
OC48
E100T
E1000T
XTC
G1000-2
XTC/XCVT
XTC/AIC
3-15
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327)
RTRV-ATTR-CONT X
RTRV-ATTR-ENV X
RTRV-BITS X
RTRV-BLSR XX
RTRV-COND-ALL XXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-COND-BITS X
RTRV-COND-ENV X
RTRV-COND-EQPT XXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-COND-SYNCN X
RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM> XXXXXXXXXXX
RTRV-CRS XXXXX X
RTRV-CRS-VT1 XXXX
RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH> XXXXX X
RTRV-EC1
RTRV-DS1
RTRV-EQPT XXXXXXXXXX X
RTRV-EXT-CONT X
RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> XXX
RTRV-G1000 X
RTRV-HDR
RTRV-INV XXXXXXXXXX X
RTRV-LOG
RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
RTRV-NE-GEN X
RTRV-NE-IPMAP XXX
RTRV-NE-SYNCN X
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> XXXXX
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> XXXX
RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL XXXXX
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2> XXXXX
RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1 XXX
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> XXX
RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> XXX
Table 3-3 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327) (continued)
XTC/DS1
XTC/DS3
OC3
OC12
OC48
E100T
E1000T
XTC
G1000-2
XTC/XCVT
XTC/AIC
3-16
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327)
RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH> XX X X
RTRV-SYNCN X
RTRV-T1 X
RTRV-T3 X
RTRV-TACC XXXXX
RTRV-TH-<MOD2> XXXXX
RTRV-TOD
RTRV-TRC-<OCN_BLSR> XX
RTRV-USER-SECU
RTRV-VT1 XXXX
RTRV-<OCN_TYPE> XXX
RTRV-<STS_PATH> XXXXX X
SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
SET-ATTR-CONT X
SET-ATTR-ENV X
SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> XXXXX
SET-TH-<MOD2> XXXXX
SET-TOD
SW-DX-EQPT X
SW-TOPROTN-EQPT XX
SW-TOWKG-EQPT XX
Table 3-3 TL1 Commands by Card (ONS 15327) (continued)
XTC/DS1
XTC/DS3
OC3
OC12
OC48
E100T
E1000T
XTC
G1000-2
XTC/XCVT
XTC/AIC
3-17
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4 TL1 Commands
The commands and autonomous messages used for ONS 15454 and ONS 15327 are described in detail
in this section and are listed alphabetically according to the first alpha character of the command string.
Each TL1 command must be less than or equal to 255 characters. Any command larger than 255
characters must be split into multiple commands. For example, if you use the ED-<STS_PATH>
command to edit the J1 EXPTRC/TRC message, UPSR attributes, and TACC attributes and the
command exceeds 255 characters the command will not be processed. You must use multiple
ED-<STS_PATH> commands instead.
Note The CTAG of any TL1 line mode command is a mandatory field in this TL1 release.
Note The AID definitions provided are supersets of the actual AID definitions.
Note TL1 commands that are entered incorrectly are not completed.
Note Starting with release 3.3 (R3.3), all TL1 commands will return the DENY error code without any
additional error messages prior to a successful TL1 login (i.e., prior to a successful ACT-USER
command). Releases earlier than R3.3 either return different error codes; for example, PLNA and IICT
and also additional error messages; for example, Login Not Active.
3.4.1 ACT-USER: Activate User
This command set-ups a session with the Network Element (NE).
Notes:
1. Passwords are masked for the following security commands: ACT-USER, ED-PID,
ENT-USER-SECU and ED-USER-SECU. Access to a TL1 session via any means will have the
password masked. The CTC Request History and Message Log will also show the masked
commands. When a password-masked command is re-issued by double-clicking the command from
CTC Request History, the password will still be masked in the CTC Request History and Message
Log. The actual password that was previously issued will be sent to the NE. To use a former
command as a template only, single-click the command in CTC Request History. The command will
be placed in the Command Request text box, where you can edit the appropriate fields prior to
re-issuing it.
2. In this release, the ACT-USER command does not return the date and time of the last session
established by the UID or the number of unsuccessful session attempts since the last session.
3. This command is backwards compatible with userids and passwords from ONS 15454 2.X software
versions according to the following rules:
ACT-USER:[TID]:[STRING]:CTAG::[STRING]
a. The syntax of the userid (first [STRING]) and the password (second [STRING]) are not
checked.
3-18
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
b. Invalid syntax for both the userid and password is permitted, but the user can only log in if the
userid/password match what is in the database.
c. The userid and password cannot exceed 10 characters.
4. For the ACT-USER command, it is required that no error code be transmitted except to convey that
the login is granted or denied. Per TR-835, Appendix A, Section A.2:
“... the error codes corresponding to ACT ... do not apply to the ACT-USER command because this
command requires that no error code be provided to the session request except to indicate that it has
been denied. Before a session is established, a specific error code may reveal clues to an intruder
attempting unauthorized entry.”
Section ACT-USER Description
Category Security
Security N/A
Related
Messages
CANC
CANC-USER
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-PID
ED-USER-SECU
ENT-USER-SECU
REPT EVT SECU
RTRV-USER-SECU
Input Format ACT-USER:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>::<PID>;
where:
<UID> is the user identifier; <UID> is any combination of up to 10
alphanumeric characters. <UID> is a string and must not be null
<PID> is the user password; <PID> is any combination of up to 10 alphanumeric
characters. <PID> is a string and must not be null
Note CTC allows <UID> and <PID> of up to 20 characters. The 20 character
CTC-entered <UID> and <PID> are not valid TL1 <UID> and <PID>
Input Example ACT-USER:PETALUMA:TERRI:100::MYPASSWD;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-19
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.2 ALW-MSG-ALL: Allow Message All
This command instructs the NE to enter a mode in which all the REPT ALM and REPT EVT autonomous
messages are transmitted. See the INH-MSG-ALL command to inhibit these autonomous messages.
When a TL1 session starts, the REPT ALM and REPT EVT messages are allowed by default.
Note If this command is issued twice in the same session, the SAAL (Status, Already Allowed) error message
will be returned. The optional fields in the e block are not supported.
3.4.3 ALW-MSG-DBCHG: Allow Database Change Message
This command enables REPT DBCHG. When a TL1 session starts, the REPT DBCHG messages are not
allowed by default.
Note This command is not defined in the GR.
Section ALW-MSG-ALL Description
Category System
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
APPLY RTRV-HDR
COPY-RFILE RTRV-INV
ED-DAT RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INIT-SYS RTRV-TOD
REPT EVT FXFR SET-TOD
Input Format ALW-MSG-ALL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>[::,,];
Input Example ALW-MSG-ALL:PETALUMA::549;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ALW-MSG-DBCHG Description
Category Log
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
INH-MSG-DBCHG
REPT DBCHG
RTRV-LOG
Input Format ALW-MSG-DBCHG:[<TID>]::<CTAG>[::,,];
Input Example ALW-MSG-DBCHG:CISCO::123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-20
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.4 ALW-MSG-SECU: Allow Message Security
This command enables REPT EVT SECU and REPT ALM SECU
3.4.5 ALW-PMREPT-ALL: Allow Performance Report All
This command resumes processing all the PM reports that are inhibited. The allowance of the PM
reporting is session-based, which means the command is only effective to the TL1 session that issues
this command. REPT PM messages are inhibited by default for a session.
Section ALW-MSG-SECU Description
Category Security
Security Superuser
Related
Messages
ACT-USER ENT-USER-SECU
CANC INH-MSG-SECU
CANC-USER REPT EVT SECU
DLT-USER-SECU REPT EVT SESSION
ED-PID RTRV-USER-SECU
ED-USER-SECU
Input Format ALW-MSG-SECU:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example ALW-MSG-SECU:PETALUMA::123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ALW-PMREPT-ALL Description
Category Performance
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
INH-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INIT-REG-<MOD2> RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> SET-TH-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
Input Format ALW-PMREPT-ALL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example ALW-PMREPT-ALL:CISCONODE::123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-21
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.6 ALW-SWDX-EQPT: Allow Switch Duplex Equipment
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command allows automatic or manual switching on a duplex system containing duplexed or
redundant equipment. To inhibit an NE switching to duplex, use the INH-SWDX-EQPT command.
ALW-SWDX-EQPT is not used for SONET line or electrical card protection switching. For SONET line
or path protection switching commands, see OPR-PROTNSW and RLS-PROTNSW commands. For the
electrical card protection switching, see the SW-TOWKG-EQPT and SW-TOPROTN-EQPT commands.
Note This command applies to the XC, XCVT, or XC10G equipment units only in this release.
3.4.7 ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT: Allow Switch to Protection Equipment
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command allows automatic or manual switching of an equipment unit back to a protection status.
Use the INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT command to inhibit an NE from switching to protection.
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT is used for non-SONET line cards (e.g. DS1, DS3, DS3XM, and EC1). DS1
and DS3 cards have 1:1 and 1:N equipment protection. DS3XM and EC1 cards have only 1:1 equipment
protection. When this command is given to a working unit, the working unit will be allowed to switch to
the protection unit. When this command is given to a protection unit, any working unit in the protection
group is allowed to switch to the protection unit.
The standing condition of INHSWPR on the unit specified by the AID will be cleared.
Section ALW-SWDX-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Input Format ALW-SWDX-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::];
where:
<AID> is the XC/XCVT/XC10G equipment AID from the “EQPT” section on
page 4-21
Input Example ALW-SWDX-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-8:1234;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-22
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Notes:
1. This command only supports one value of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. A command with any other
value is considered an incorrect use of the command. An IDNV (Input, Data Not Valid) error
message should be responsed.
2. This command is not used for the common control (TCC+/TCC2 or XC/XCVT/XC10G) cards. A
command on a common control card will receive an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message. To use the common control card switching commands, use the SW-DX-EQPT and
ALW-SWDX-EQPT commands.
3. This command is not used for SONET (OCN) cards. A command on a SONET card will receive an
IIAC (Input, Invalid Access identifier) error message. To use a SONET card switching command,
use OPR-PROTNSW and RLS-PROTNSW commands.
4. If this command is used on a card that is not in a protection group, the SNVS (Status, Not in Valid
State) error message should be responsed.
5. If this command is used on a card that is not in the inhibit state, the SAAL (Status, Already Allowed)
error message should be responsed.
6. The following situation(s) are allowed and will not generate any error response: Sending this
command to missing cards so long as none of the previous error conditions apply.
Section ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TORPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Input Format ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::<DIRN>];
where:
<AID> This parameter can either be the protection unit for which carrying traffic
is to be allowed (release of lockout) or the working unit for which switching to
protect is to be allowed (release of lock on); <AID> is from the “EQPT” section
on page 4-21
<DIRN> is the direction of the switching. The command only supports one value
of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. This parameter defaults to BTH; valid values
for <DIRN> are shown in the “DIRECTION” section on page 4-60
Input Example ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-2:123::BTH;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-23
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.8 ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT: Allow Switch to Working Equipment
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command allows automatic or manual switching of an equipment unit back to a working status. Use
the INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT command to inhibit an NE from switching to working.
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT is used for non-SONET line cards (e.g. DS1, DS3, DS3XM, and EC1). DS1
and DS3 cards have 1:1 and 1:N equipment protection. DS3XM and EC1 cards have only 1:1 equipment
protection.
When this command is given to a working unit, the working unit will be allowed to carry traffic. In the
case of revertive protection, the traffic will switch immediately from the protection unit to the working
unit regardless of the reversion time setting.
When this command is given to a protection unit, the protection unit will be allowed to switch back to
the working unit currently protected as long as the working unit has not raised INHSWWKG. In the case
of revertive protection, the traffic will switch immediately from the protection unit to the working unit
regardless of the reversion time setting. In the case of non-revertive protection, the protection unit will
continue to carry the traffic.
The standing condition of INHSWWKG on the unit specified by the AID will be cleared.
Notes:
1. This command only supports one value of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. A command with any other
value is considered an incorrect use of the command. An IDNV (Input, Data Not Valid) error
message should be responsed.
2. This command is not used for the common control (TCC+/TCC2 or XC/XCVT/XC10G) cards. A
command on a common control card will receive an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message. To use the common control card switching commands, use the SW-DX-EQPT and
ALW-SWDX-EQPT commands.
3. This command is not used for SONET (OCN) cards. A command on a SONET card will receive an
IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error message. To use a SONET card switching command,
use the OPR-PROTNSW and RLS-PROTNSW commands.
4. If this command is used on a card that is not in a protection group, the SNVS (Status, Not in Valid
State) error message should be responsed.
5. If this command is used on a card that is not in the inhibit state, the SAAL (Status, Already Allowed)
error message should be responsed.
6. The following situation(s) are allowed and will not generate any error response: sending this
command to missing cards as long as none of the previous error conditions apply.
Section ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
3-24
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.9 APPLY: Apply
This command activates or reverts a software load during a software upgrade or downgrade process.
Input Format ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::<DIRN>];
where:
<AID> This parameter can either be the protection unit for which switching back
to working is to be allowed (release of lock on) or the working unit for which
carrying traffic is to be allowed (release of lockout); <AID> is from the “EQPT”
section on page 4-21
<DIRN> is the direction of the switching. The command only supports one value
of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. This parameter defaults to BTH; valid values
for <DIRN> are shown in the “DIRECTION” section on page 4-60
Input Example ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-2:123::BTH;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT Description (continued)
Section APPLY Description
Category Software Download
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL RTRV-HDR
COPY-RFILE RTRV-INV
ED-DAT RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INIT-SYS RTRV-TOD
REPT EVT FXFR SET-TOD
Input Format APPLY:[<TID>]::<CTAG>[::<MEM_SW_TYPE>];
where:
<MEM_SW_TYPE> indicates memory switch action during the software
upgrade; valid values for <MEM_SW_TYPE> are shown in the “DL_TYPE”
section on page 4-61
Input Example APPLY:CISCO::123::ACT;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-25
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.10 CANC: Cancel
Reports the occurrence of a session timeout event.
CANC is an autonomous message transmitted by the NE to a user when a session established by that user
is terminated because no messages were exchanged for a long period of time, a timeout. There is a
default timeout period based on the user’s privilege/security level, and starting with Release 4.0 timeouts
can be provisioned. The default timeouts based on privilege/security level are: superuser [SUPER] has
the timeout period of 15 minutes., the Provision user [PROV] has the timeout period of 30 minutes, the
Maintenance [MAINT] user has the timeout period of 60 minutes, the Retrieve user [RTRV] has no
timeout.
When a timeout occurs, the corresponding port drops and the next session initiation at that port requires
the regular login procedure.
3.4.11 CANC-USER: Cancel User
This command logs a user out of an active session with the NE.
Note The USERID field of this command is a mandatory field.
For the CANC-USER command: CANC-USER:[TID]:[STRING]:CTAG
the syntax of the userid (fist [STRING]) is not checked. Invalid syntax for the userid is permitted and
the userid must not exceed 10 characters.
Section CANC Description
Category Security
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ACT-USER
CANC-USER
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-PID
ED-USER-SECU
ENT-USER-SECU
REPT EVT SECU
RTRV-USER-SECU
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG CANC
“<UID>”
;
where:
<UID> refers to the user’s identification whose session is terminated due to
timeout; <UID> is any combination of up to 10 alphanumeric characters. <UID>
is a string
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 CANC
“CISCO15”
;
3-26
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.12 CHG-ACCMD-<MOD_TACC>: Change Test Access Mode (DS1, STS1,
STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command changes the test access (TACC) mode for the circuit being tested. For more information
on TACC, refer to the “Test Access” section on page 1-17.
This may be a change from monitoring the data to inserting data into the STS. This command can only
be applied to an existing TAP connection.
For this command to be applicable, you must first create the TAP using the ED-<STS_PATH> or
ED-VT1 commands
Notes:
1. If there is no TAP connection, a DENY error message is returned.
2. If a requested condition already exists, a SRCN error message is returned.
3. If a requested access configuration is invalid, a SRAC error message is returned
4. If a requested TAP does not exist, a RTEN error message is returned.
Section CANC-USER Description
Category Security
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ACT-USER
CANC
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-PID
ED-USER-SECU
ENT-USER-SECU
REPT EVT SECU
RTRV-USER-SECU
Input Format CANC-USER:[<TID>]:<USERID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<USERID> identifies the user to the system; <USERID> is any combination of
up to 10 alphanumeric characters. <USERID> is a string
Note CTC allows <UID> and <PID> of up to 20 characters. The 20 character
CTC-entered <UID> and <PID> are not valid TL1 <UID> and <PID>
Input Example CANC-USER:PETALUMA:TERRI:101;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section CHG-ACCMD-<MOD_TACC> Description
Category Test Access
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
CONN-TACC-<MODE_TACC>
DISC_TACC
RTRV-TACC
3-27
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.13 CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC>: Connect Test Access (DS1, STS1, STS3C,
STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command connects the STS or VT defined by AID to the STS specified by the TAP number. For
more information on TACC, refer to the “Test Access” section on page 1-17.
The connection will exist only for the duration of the TL1 session, after which the TAP will be
disconnected from the circuit before the session cancels out. For this command to be applicable, you
must first create the TAP using the ED-<STS_PATH> or ED-VT1 commands.
Notes:
1. If all TAPs are busy, a RABY error message is returned.
2. If a requested TAP is busy, a RTBY error message is returned.
3. If a requested TAP does not exist, a RTEN error message is returned.
4. If a circuit is already connected to another TAP, a SCAT error message is returned.
5. If a requested condition already exists, a SRCN error message is returned.
6. If the AID is invalid, an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error message is returned.
7. If an access is not supported, an EANS error message is returned.
8. If a requested access configuration is invalid, a SRAC error message is returned.
Input Format CHG-ACCMD-<MOD_TACC>:[<TID>]:<TAP>:<CTAG>::<MD>;
where:
<TAP> indicates the test access path number selected by the NE. The <TAP> is
used to identify all messages between the TSC and NE until the access point is
released. The <TAP> number must be an integer with a range of 1 to 999. <TAP>
is a string
Note This command only changes a single TAP at a time.
<MD> indicates the test access mode (SPLTE, SPLTF, LOOPE, AND LOOPF
require an external QRS input signal); valid values for <MD> are shown in the
“TACC_MODE” section on page 4-92
Input Example CHG-ACCMD-STS1:CISCO:8:123::MONE;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section CHG-ACCMD-<MOD_TACC> Description (continued)
Section CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC> Description
Category Test Access
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
CHG-ACCMD-<CHG-ACCMD>
DISC-TACC
RTRV-TACC
3-28
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.14 COPY-IOSCFG: Copy IOS Config File
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command supports the following types of operations on the IOS configuration file of ML-series
Ethernet cards:
1. Uploading of startup IOS configuration file from the network to the node.
FTP is the only protocol allowed for uploading. When doing this operation, the SRC field must be
a FTP URL string specifying the user name and password for FTP authentication, and specifying
the host and the directory to locate the startup config file from the network. The DEST field must
be a string of “STARTUP”.
Input Format CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<TAP>:MD=<MD>;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier. <AID> format is the modifier AID format in the
ALL AID list. Only a single AID is supported in this command. <AID> is the
AID from the ALL” section on page 4-10. <AID> must not be null
<TAP> indicates the test access path number selected by the NE. The <TAP> is
used to identify all messages between the TSC and the NE until the access point
is released. The <TAP> number must be an integer with a range of 1 to 999. A
null <TAP> defaults to an appropriate <TAP> number selected by the NE.
<TAP> is an integer and a null value is equivalent to ALL
<MD> indicates the test access mode (SPLTE, SPLTF, LOOPE and LOOPF
require an external QRS input signal); valid values for <MD> are shown in the
“TACC_MODE” section on page 4-92. <MD> must not be null
Input Example CONN-TACC-STS1:CISCO:STS-2-4:123::8:MD=MONE;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<TAP>”
;
where:
<TAP> indicates the test access path number selected by the NE. The <TAP> is
used to identify all messages between the TSC and NE until the access point is
released. The <TAP> number must be an integer with a range of 1 - 999. A null
<TAP> defaults to an appropriate <TAP> number selected by the NE. <TAP> is
an integer
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“8”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC> Description (continued)
3-29
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
2. Downloading of startup IOS configuration file from the node to the network.
FTP is the only protocol allowed for downloading. When doing this operation, the SRC field must
be a string of “STARTUP”. The DEST field must be a FTP URL string specifying the user name and
password for FTP authentication, and specifying the host and the directory to store the startup config
file.
Notes:
1. The IOS configuration file is unique for each ML-series card, and is specified by the SLOT number
in the AID field of the command.
2. In the GNE/ENE environment, if the GNE firewall exists, the download (backup) of IOS
configuration file via TL1 is not allowed. Any such attempt will receive a “Data Connection Error”
from the GNE. For the upload of IOS configuration file via TL1, GNE will allow it to go through
the firewall only if the file contains the header “! Cisco IOS config <text>”. If the configuration file
does not contain this header, GNE will block the uploading with “Data Connection Error”.
3. The format of the FTP URL string used in the SRC or DEST field of the command is as follows:
In a non-firewall environment, the format of the URL should be
“FTP://[FTPUSER[:FTPPASSWORD]]@FTP_HOST_IP/PACKAGE_PATH” where:
<FTPUSER> is the userid to connect to the computer with the package file
<FTPPASSWORD> is the password used to connect to the computer with the package file
<FTP_HOST_IP> is the IP address of the computer with the package file, DNS lookup of hostnames
is not supported
<PACKAGE_PATH> is the long path name to the package file
Note Note that USERID and PASSWORD are optional if the user does not need to log into the host
computer. Also note that the password may be optional if the user does not need to log in. All
the other portions of the URL are required, including the initial “FTP:\\” string.
In a firewall environment, the hostname should be replaced with a list of IP addresses each separated
by a @ character. The first IP address should be for the machine where the package file is stored.
Subsequent IP addresses should then be for firewall machines moving outwards towards the edge of
the network, until the final IP address listed was the machine that outside users first access the
network.
For example: if your topology is “FTP_HOST_IP <-> GNE3 <->GNE2 <-> GNE1 <-> ENE”, your
FTP URL will be:
FTP://FTPUSER:FTPPASSWORD@FTP_HOST_IP@GNE3@GNE2@GNE1/PACKAGE_PATH
Section COPY-IOSCFG Description
Category IOS
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
REPT EVT IOSCFG
3-30
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.15 COPY-RFILE: Copy RFILE
This command downloads a new software package from the location specified by the FTP URL. It is also
used to backup and restore the system database.
Notes:
1. Userid is the userid to connect to the computer with the package file or system database.
2. Password is the password used to connect to the computer with the package file or system database.
3. Hostname is the hostname or IP address of the computer with the package file or system database.
4. Package_path is the long path name to the package file or system database.
5. Both the userid and password are optional if the user does not need to log into the host computer.
6. The password may be optional if the user does not need to log in.
7. All the other portions of the URL are required, including the initial “FTP://” string.
Example:
COPY-RFILE:TID:RFILE-PKG:703::TYPE=SWDL,SRC=“FTP://USERID:
PASSWORD@HOSTIP:21/DIR1/DIR2/DIR3/PACKAGE.PKG”;
Notes:
1. The SWDL type is used for software package uploads. The RFBU type is used for system database
backups, and the RFR type is used for system database restores. The SRC input is required when the
type is SWDL or RFR. The DEST input is needed when the type is RFBU. The SRC and DEST
inputs cannot both be used in the same command.
2. FTP is the only allowed file transfer method.
3. The extended FTP URL syntax is required by the COPY-RFILE syntax.
4. Port number (21) is optional. 21 is the only supported Port Number. Leaving this field blank defaults
to 21.
Input Format COPY-IOSCFG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::SRC=<SRC>,DEST=<DEST>;
where:
<AID> specifies the slot number of the card where the IOS configuration file
belongs and is from the AID “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<SRC> specifies where the IOS config file is copied from and is a string
<DEST> specifies where the IOS config file is copied to and is a string
Input Example COPY-IOSCFG::SLOT-1:CTAG::SRC=“LONG_FTP_PATH”,DEST=“STARTUP”;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section COPY-IOSCFG Description (continued)
Section COPY-RFILE Description
Category Software Download
Security Superuser
Related
Messages
APPLY
REPT EVT FXFR
3-31
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format COPY-RFILE:[<TID>]:[<SRC>]:<CTAG>::TYPE=<XFERTYPE>,
[SRC=<SRC1>,][DEST=<DEST>];
where:
<SRC> is the type of file being transferred; <SRC> is the AID from the
“RFILE” section on page 4-24
<XFERTYPE> is the file transfer protocol; valid values for <XFERTYPE> are
shown in the “TX_TYPE” section on page 4-95
<SRC1> specifies the source of the file to be transferred. Only the FTP URL is
supported. In a non-firewall environment the format of the URL should be:
“FTP://[FTP_USER[:FTP_PASSWORD]]@
FTP_HOST_IP/PACKAGE_PATH”
where:
<FTP_USER> is the userid to connect to the computer with the package file
<FTP_PASSWORD> is the password used to connect to the computer with
the package file
<FTP_HOST_IP> is the IP address of the computer with the package file,
DNS lookup of hostnames is not supported
<PACKAGE_PATH> is the long path name to the package file
Note Userid and password are optional if the user does not need to log into the host
computer. The password may be optional if the user does not need to log in.
All the other portions of the URL are required, including the initial “FTP://”
string.
In a firewall environment, the hostname should be replaced with a list of IP
addresses each separated by a @ character. The first IP address should be for the
machine where the package file is stored. Subsequent IP addresses should then
be for firewall machines moving outwards towards the edge of the network, until
the final IP address listed is the machine that outside users first access the
network.
For example, if the topology is “FTP_HOST_IP <-> GNE3 <->GNE2 <->
GNE1 <-> ENE”, the FTP URL is:
FTP://FTP_USER:FTP_PASSWORD@FTP_HOST_IP@GNE3@GNE2@
GNE1/PACKAGE_PATH
<SRC1> is a string.
<DEST> see <SRC1> above
Input Example COPY-RFILE:HERNDON:RFILE-PKG:703::TYPE=SWDL,
SRC=“LONG_FTP_PATH”,DEST=“LONG_FTP_PATH”;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section COPY-RFILE Description (continued)
3-32
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.16 DISC-TACC: Disconnect Test Access
This command disconnects the TAP and puts the connection back to its original state (no splits). For
more information on TACC, refer to the “Test Access” section on page 1-17.
For this command to be applicable, you must first create the TAP using the ED-<STS_PATH> or
ED-VT1 commands.
Notes:
1. If you send this command to an already disconnected connection, a SADC error message is returned.
2. If the system cannot release TAP, an SRTN error message is returned.
3. Automatic disconnection of the STS/VT path from a TAP happens when the session that created the
connection gets timed out or is terminated.
3.4.17 DLT-BLSR: Delete BLSR
This command deletes the BLSR of the NE.
Error conditions:
1. If the system fails on getting IOR, a SDBE (Status, Internal Data Base Error) error message is
returned.
2. If the NE returns nothing for the required BLSR (BLSR-# AID), a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request)
error message is returned.
Section DISC-TACC Description
Category Test Access
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
CHG-ACCMD-<MOD_TACC>
CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC>
RTRV-TACC
Input Format DISC-TACC:[<TID>]:<TAP>:<CTAG>;
where:
<TAP> indicates the test access path number selected by the NE. The <TAP> is
used to identify all messages between the TSC and the NE until the access point
is released. The <TAP> number must be an integer with a range of 1- 999. This
command only supports changing a single <TAP> number at a time. <TAP> is a
string
Note This command only disconnects a single TAP at a time.
Input Example DISC-TACC:CISCO:8:123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section DLT-BLSR Description
Category BLSR
Security Provisioning
3-33
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.18 DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH>: Delete Cross Connection (STS1, STS3C, STS6C,
STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command deletes a cross-connection between STS paths. STS paths are specified using their STS
AID.
Notes:
1. The fields after CTAG (trailing colons) are optional.
2. For the 1-way cross-connections the AIDs must be in the same order as originally entered; for the
2-way cross-connections, either order will work.
3. This command does not support deleting multiple STS cross-connections.
4. Using “&” in the AID field of this command can delete an UPSR STS cross-connection.
a. The following command is used to delete a 1-way selector or 2-way selector and bridge with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1
DLT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1:<CTAG>;
b. The following command is used to delete a 1-way bridge or 2-way selector and bridge with:
from point: F1
to points: T1, T2
DLT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:F1,T1&T2:<CTAG>;
c. The following command is used to delete a 1-way or 2-way subtending UPSR connection with:
from point: F1, F2
to points: T1, T2
DLT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1&T2:<CTAG>;
d. The AID format in the deletion command is the same as the AID format in the retrieved response
message. For example, if the output of any retrieved AID is “F1&F2,T1:CCT,STS3C”, the
deletion command with the AID format (F1&F2,T1) is required to delete this cross-connection.
Related
Messages
ED-BLSR RTRV-ALM-RING
ENT-BLSR RTRV-BLSR
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT RING
Input Format DLT-BLSR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[:::];
where:
<AID> identifies the BLSR of the NE. “ALL” or “BLSR-ALL” AID is not
allowed for editing BLSR. This command only supports a single BLSR AID.
<AID> is the AID from the “BLSR” section on page 4-18
Input Example DLT-BLSR:PETALUMA:BLSR-2:123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section DLT-BLSR Description (continued)
3-34
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
e. The following command is used to create a UPSR IDRI Cross-Connection:
ENT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:A&B,C&D:<CTAG>::2WAYDC;
A–Path on ring X to which traffic from ring Y is bridged
B–Path on ring X to which traffic from the same ring is bridged
C–Path on ring Y to which traffic from ring X is bridged
D–Path on ring Y to which traffic from the same ring is bridged
A, B, C, and D have a positional meaning. Connection type 2WAYDC is used for UPSR IDRI
cross-connections.
f. The following command is used to create a UPSR DRI Cross-Connection:
ENT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:A&B,C:<CTAG>::2WAYDC;
A–Path on ring X to which traffic from ring Y is bridged
B–Path on ring X to which traffic from the same ring is bridged
C–Traffic to and from ring Y
A, B, C, and D have a positional meaning. Connection type 2WAYDC is used for UPSR DRI
cross-connections.
5. All A&B AIDs in the TL1 cross-connection command are in the format of
WorkingAID&ProtectAID.
6. You can experience some implementation behavior problems if additional drops have been added to
the connection object.
7. The facility AID is only valid for slots holding the G1000-4 card.
8. The virtual facility AID (VFAC) is only valid on slots holding an ML-series card.
9. A TL1 cross-connect that has been upgraded to a CTC circuit can no longer be managed by TL1.
For example, if you issue a DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH> command to delete a circuit, you will see that
the circuit still appears in CTC as “incomplete”. The reason for this is because in addition to creating
cross-connects (as TL1 does), CTC creates another object on the source node that stores
network-level circuit attributes. CTC will continue to see that object after the cross-connect is
deleted which is why it shows an incomplete circuit.
Section DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH> Description
Category Cross Connections
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-CRS-VT1
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ED-CRS-VT1
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ENT-CRS-VT1
RTRV-CRS
RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-CRS-VT1
Input Format DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<SRC>,<DST>:<CTAG>[:::];
where:
<SRC> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
<DST> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
3-35
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.19 DLT-CRS-VT1: Delete Virtual Tributary Cross Connect
This command deletes the VT1 cross-connections.
Notes:
1. The fields after CTAG (trailing colons) are the optional.
2. For the 1-way cross-connections the AIDs must be in the same order as originally entered; for the
2-way either order will work.
3. This command does not support deleting multiple VT cross-connections.
4. Using “&” in the AID field of this command can delete an UPSR VT cross-connection.
a. The following command is used to delete a 1-way selector or 2-way selector and bridge with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1
DLT-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1:<CTAG>;
b. The following command is used to delete a 1-way bridge or 2-way selector and bridge with:
from point: F1
to points: T1, T2
DLT-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:F1,T1&T2:<CTAG>;
c. The following command is used to delete a 1-way subtending UPSR connection or 2-way
subtending UPSR connection with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1, T2
DLT-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1&T2:<CTAG>;
d. The AID format in the deletion command is the same as the AID format in the retrieved response
message. For example, if the output of any retrieved AID is “F1&F2,T1:CCT”, the deletion
command with the AID format (F1&F2,T1) is required to delete this cross-connection.
5. All A&B AIDs in the TL1 cross-connection command are in the format of
WorkingAID&ProtectAID.
6. You can experience some implementation behavior problems if additional drops have been added to
the connection object.
Input Example DLT-CRS-STS12C:VINBURG:STS-1-1-1,STS-12-1-1:102;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH> Description (continued)
Section DLT-CRS-VT1 Description
Category Cross Connections
Security Provisioning
3-36
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.20 DLT-EQPT: Delete Equipment
This command deletes a card from the NE.
This command removes the card type and attributes that were entered for a particular slot. If any facilities
are assigned, they are deleted too. The command will be denied if the card is part of a protection group
or has a cross-connect end-point.
To delete a card that is part of a protection group, it has to be removed from the protection group first
using the ED-EQPT command.
Error conditions for deleting equipment may be:
1. If the equipment is in use which corresponds to some provisioning having been done on the
equipment, the SPLD (Equipment in use) error message will be returned:
a. If it is belongs to a protection group that has a cross-connection.
b. If one of its ports has been provisioned as a DCC channel.
c. If one of its ports is being used for a synchronization source.
d. If the equipment has a Test Access Point (TAP).
e. If one of its ports is being used as a UCP Control Channel or Interface.
f. If one of its ports is provisioned for a BLSR.
g. If one of its ports is a part of a 1+1 protection group.
2. If a card is not provisioned, an error message will be returned.
Related
Messages
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ED-CRS-VT1
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ENT-CRS-VT1
RTRV-CRS
RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-CRS-VT1
Input Format DLT-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>[:::];
where:
<FROM> indicates an identifier at one end of the VT cross-connection;
<FROM> is the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<TO> indicates an identifier at the other end of the VT cross-connection; <TO>
is the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
Input Example DLT-CRS-VT1:CISCO:VT1-2-3-7-2,VT1-4-4-5-2:1234;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section DLT-CRS-VT1 Description (continued)
Section DLT-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Provisioning
3-37
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.21 DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>: Delete Facility Protection Group (OC3, OC12,
OC48, OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command deletes an OCN facility protection group in a 1+1 architecture.
Note If the protection group does not exist, an error message will be returned.
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Input Format DLT-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[:::];
where:
<AID> is the equipment unit (slot) to act on and is the AID from the “EQPT”
section on page 4-21
Input Example DLT-EQPT:SONOMA:SLOT-1:104;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section DLT-EQPT Description (continued)
Section DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> Description
Category SONET Line Protection
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
Input Format DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>:[<TID>]:<WORK>,<PROTECT>:<CTAG>[:::];
where:
<WORK> identifies the working facility and is the AID from the “FACILITY”
section on page 4-22
<PROTECT> identifies the protect facility and is the AID “FACILITY” section
on page 4-22
Input Example DLT-FFP-OC3:PETALUMA:FAC-2-1,FAC-1-1:1;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-38
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.22 DLT-FFP-CLNT: Delete Facility Protection Group Client
This command deletes Y cable protection on client facilities.
Section DLT-FFP-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-CLNT RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT
ED-DWDM RTRV-CLNT
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-DWDM
ED-FFP-CLNT RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-OCH RTRV-FFP-CLNT
ED-TRC-CLNT RTRV-OCH
ED-TRC-OCH RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-PROTNSW-CLNT
ENT-FFP-CLNT RTRV-TRC-CLNT
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-TRC-OCH
OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT
Input Format DLT-FFP-CLNT:[<TID>]:<WORKAID>,<PROTAID>:<CTAG>[:::];
where:
<WORKAID> identifies the working facility and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<PROTECTAID> identifies the protect facility and is the AID “FACILITY”
section on page 4-22
Input Example DLT-FFP-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-1-1,FAC-2-1:100;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-39
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.23 DLT-UCP-CC: Delete Unified Control Plane Control Channel
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command deletes a UCP IP control channel.
1. If you send this command to a control channel that is in use, a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request) error
message is returned.
2. If sending this command to delete an SDCC IPCC with a complete result, the SDCC of the specified
SONET line is deleted (or disabled) automatically with a DB change reporting (if the DB change
report is enabled).
3. If sending this command to delete an IPCC which is in use by a UCP Interface, an SROF (Delete
UCP IPCC Failed - Object Is In Use) error message is returned.
Section DLT-UCP-CC Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-IF ENT-UCP-NBR
DLT-UCP-NBR REPT ALM UCP
ED-UCP-CC REPT EVT UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-CC
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-NBR
Input Format DLT-UCP-CC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> indicates an individual IPCC ID; <AID> is the AID from the “IPCC”
section on page 4-16
Input Example DLT-UCP-CC:CISCO:CC-9:CTAG;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-40
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.24 DLT-UCP-IF: Delete Unified Control Plane Interface
This command deletes a UCP interface.
Note If the UCP interface is not found or in use, a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request) error message is returned.
3.4.25 DLT-UCP-NBR: Delete Unified Control Plane Neighbor
This command deletes a UCP neighbor.
Notes:
1. If the neighbor is in use, an SRQN (Status, Invalid Request) error message is returned.
2. If sending this command to delete a neighbor which is in use by IPCC, an SROF (Delete UCP
neighbor Failed - Object Is In Use) error message is returned.
Section DLT-UCP-IF Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC ENT-UCP-NBR
DLT-UCP-NBR REPT ALM UCP
ED-UCP-CC REPT EVT UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-CC
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-NBR
Input Format DLT-UCP-IF:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> indicates the interface port index of the data link; <AID> is the AID
from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
Input Example DLT-UCP-IF:CISCO:FAC-2-1:CTAG;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section DLT-UCP-NBR Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC ENT-UCP-NBR
DLT-UCP-IF REPT ALM UCP
ED-UCP-CC REPT EVT UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-CC
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-NBR
3-41
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.26 DLT-USER-SECU: Delete User Security
This command deletes a user and can only be performed by a Superuser. Privilege levels are described
in the ENT-USER-SECU command.
This command cannot be used to delete a user that is currently logged on.
For the DLT-USER-SECU command:
DLT-USER-SECU:[TID]:<UID>:[CTAG];
the syntax of <UID> is not checked. The user is deleted if the <UID> exists in the database.
Notes:
1. A userid cannot be deleted when that user is logged in. If you try to delete a userid and the user is
logged in, an error message indicating that the user is logged in will be received.
Input Format DLT-UCP-NBR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> indicates an individual neighbor AID of the UCP; <AID> is the AID
from the “NBR” section on page 4-16
Input Example DLT-UCP-NBR:CISCO:NBR-8:CTAG;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section DLT-UCP-NBR Description (continued)
Section DLT-USER-SECU Description
Category Security
Security Superuser
Related
Messages
ACT-USER
CANC
CANC-USER
ED-PID
ED-USER-SECU
ENT-USER-SECU
REPT EVT SECU
RTRV-USER-SECU
Input Format DLT-USER-SECU:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<UID> is the user identifier and is a string; <UID> is any combination of up to
10 alphanumeric characters
Note CTC allows <UID> and <PID> of up to 20 characters. The 20 character
CTC-entered <UID> and <PID> are not valid TL1 <UID> and <PID>.
Input Example DLT-USER-SECU:PETALUMA:CISCO15:123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-42
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.27 ED-<OCN_TYPE>: Edit (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command edits the attributes (i.e., service parameters) and state of an OC-N facility. Allowable
states for a facility are Out Of Service (OOS), Out Of Service with Automatic In Service transitioning
(OOS-AINS), Out Of Service for Maintenance (OOS-MT), and In Service (IS).
The DCC transmit is bridged to both working and protect in a 1+1 configuration. On the receive side,
the active one is selected for DCC. The DCC is provisioned on the working port only in a 1+1
configuration.
All lines in a 1+1 BLSR must have the same mode. If you change the mode of a line that is in a 1+1
BLSR, an error message will be returned.
UNI-C DCC provisioning notes:
1. The attributes DCC(Y/N) and mode (SONET/SDH) remain the same in the ED/RTRV-OCN
commands when the DCC is used for UNI-C, in which case the port attribute UNIC is enables
(UNIC=Y).
2. If the DCC is created under regular SONET provisioning, and this port is used by UNI-C, the port
is converted as a UNI-C DCC automatically.
3. De-provisioning UNI-C IF/IB IPCC will free up DCC termination automatically.
4. The state of the T1 port cannot be changed to IS or OOS if a loopback has been operated upon the
line.
Section ED-<OCN_TYPE> Description
Category Ports
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ED-DS1
ED-EC1
ED-G1000
ED-T1
ED-T3
RMV-<MOD2_IO>
RST-<MOD2_IO>
RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-DS1
RTRV-EC1
RTRV-G1000
RTRV-T1
RTRV-T3
3-43
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.28 ED-<STS_PATH>: Edit (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C,
STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command edits the attributes associated with an STS path.
The SFBER, SDBER, RVRTV, and RVTM parameters only apply to UPSR.
Input Format ED-<OCN_TYPE>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[DCC=<DCC>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][PJMON=<PJMON>,]
[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,][MODE=<MODE>,][MUX=<MUX>,]
[SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<DCC> identifies an OCN port DCC connection; valid values for <DCC> are
shown in the “SDCC_MODE” section on page 4-86
<SYNCMSG> indicates if sync status messaging is enabled or disabled on the
facility; valid values for <SYNCMSG> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on
page 4-79
<SENDDUS> indicates that the facility will send out the DUS (do not use for
synchronization) value as the sync status message for that facility; valid values
are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<PJMON> identifies an OC-N port PJMON with a value range of [0, highest STS
number for the sonet card]; <PJMON> is an integer
<SFBER> identifies an OC-N port SFBER; valid values for <SFBER> are shown
in the “SF_BER” section on page 4-86
<SDBER> identifies an OC-N port SDBER; valid values for <SDBER> are
shown in the “SD_BER” section on page 4-85
Valid values for <MODE> are shown in the “OPTICAL_MODE” section on
page 4-80
<MUX> BLSR Extension Byte (supported only on OC48AS cards); valid values
for <MUX> are shown in the “MUX_TYPE” section on page 4-78
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time as measured in 15 minute
intervals, so a value of 4 translates to a soak time of 1 hour. The allowable range
is 0–192 intervals (maximum of 48 hours). <SOAK> is an integer.
<PST> is the primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST”
section on page 4-85
<SST> is the secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST”
section on page 4-87
Input Example ED-OC48:PENNGROVE:FAC-6-1:114:::DCC=Y,SYNCMSG=Y,SENDDUS=N,
PJMON=48,SFBER=1E-4,SDBER=1E-6,MODE=SONET,MUX=E2,
SOAK=10:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-<OCN_TYPE> Description (continued)
3-44
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
The path trace message is a 64 character string including the terminating CR (carriage return) and LF
(line feed) that is transported in the J1 byte of the SONET STS Path overhead. Both the EXPTRC and
TRC string can be provisioned by user with up to 62 character string.
The EXPTRC indicates the contents of the expected incoming path trace are provisioned by the user. The
TRC indicates the contents of the outgoing path trace message. The INCTRC indicates the contents of
the incoming path trace message.
The path trace mode has three modes: OFF, MANUAL, and AUTO. The path trace mode defaults to OFF.
The MANUAL mode performs the comparison of the received string with the user-entered expected
string. The AUTO mode performs the comparison of the present received string with an expected string
set to a previously received string. If there is a mismatch, TIM-P alarm is raised. When the path trace
mode is in OFF mode, there is no path trace processing, and all the alarm and state conditions are reset.
The TACC parameter edits an existing single STS or VT and changes it to a test access point. When an
editing command on TACC is executed, it assigns the STS for the first 2-way connection and STS=1 as
the second 2-way connection. For STS3C and STS12C, the next available STS of the same width is
chosen. For more information on TACC, refer to the “Test Access” section on page 1-17.
J1 is implemented on the DS1/DS1N, DS3E/DS3NE, DS3XM, EC1, OC3, OC48AS and OC192 cards.
DS3/DS3N, OC12, OC48, E100, and E1000 cards do not support path trace.
DS1/DS1N, DS3E/DS3NE, and DS3XM support both TRC and EXPTRC in the ED-STS-PATH
command.
EC1, OC3, OC48AS, and OC192 only support EXPTRC in the ED-STS-PATH command.
Note Each TL1 command must be less than or equal to 255 characters. Any command larger than 255
characters must be split into multiple commands. For example, if you use the ED-<STS_PATH>
command to edit the J1 EXPTRC/TRC message, UPSR attributes, and TACC attributes and the
command exceeds 255 characters the command will not be processed. You must use multiple
ED-<STS_PATH> commands instead.
Note An STS TAP created in a DS3XM card cannot be used to connect to an STS with a non-VT structured
payload, for example, DS3. If created, traffic cannot be monitored.
Note An STS TAP created in a DS3 card cannot be used to connect to an STS with a non-DS3 payload, for
example, VT structured. If created, traffic cannot be monitored.
Error conditions:
1. If sending this command to edit SFBER or SDBER or RVRTV or RVTM for the non UPSR STS
path, an error message will be returned.
2. If sending this command to edit the EXPTRC string with the AUTO path trace mode
(TRCMODE=AUTO), an error message will be returned.
3. If sending this command to edit TRC on any card other than DS3(N)E, DS1(N), and DS3XM cards,
an error message (TRC-not allowed for monitor paths. Incorrect card type.) will be returned.
4. This command is allowed to edit EXPTRC on DS1(N), DS3(N)E, DS3XM, EC1, OC3, OC48AS,
and OC192 cards.
5. If sending this command to edit both TACC and any other attribute(s), the (Parameters Not
compatible) error message will be returned.
3-45
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
6. If sending this command to edit TACC on an AID with cross-connections, an error message (STS in
Use) will be returned.
7. TACC creation will also be denied on the protect ports/cards for 1:1, 1:N, and 1+1.
8. The VFAC AID is only valid on slots containing an ML1000-2 or ML100T-12 card. TACC is not
supported for the ML1000-2 or ML100T-12 cards.
9. After the BLSR switching, provisioning of the J1 trace string or trace mode is not allowed on the
protection path.
10. TACC creation is allowed on PCA for two-fiber and four-fiber BLSR.
11. TACC is not supported on G1000/MXP/TXP/ML1000-2 and ML100T-12 cards.
Section ED-<STS_PATH> Description
Category STS and VT Paths
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
RTRV-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH>
3-46
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.29 ED-BITS: Edit Building Integrated Timing Supply
This command edits the BITS reference attributes.
Input Format ED-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>:::[SFBER=<SFBER>,]
[SDBER=<SDBER>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,]
[SWPDIP=<SWPDIP>,][HOLDOFFTIMER=<HOLDOFFTIMER>,]
[EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,][TRC=<TRC>,][TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,]
[TACC=<TACC>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<SRC> is the access identifier from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
<SFBER> identifies an STS path SFBER which only applies to UPSR; valid
values for <SFBER> are shown in the “SF_BER” section on page 4-86
<SDBER> identifies an STS path SDBER which only applies to UPSR; valid
values for <SDBER> are shown in the “SD_BER” section on page 4-85
<RVRTV> identifies a revertive mode which only applies to UPSR; valid values
for <RVRTV> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> identifies a revertive time which only applies to UPSR; valid values for
<RVTM> are shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85.
<RVTM> is not allowed to be set while <RVRTV> is N.
<SWPDIP> On-Off switch for UPSR Payload Defect Level switching. Valid
values for <SWPDIP> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<HOLDOFFTIMER> Hold-off timer for UPSR DRI; <HOLDOFFTIMER> is an
integer
<EXPTRC> indicates the expected path trace message (J1) contents. The
EXPTRC is any 64 character string, including the terminating CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed); <EXPTRC> is a string
<TRC> identifies the path trace message to be transmitted. The TRC is any
combination of 64 characters, including the terminating CR and LF. The trace
byte (J1) continuously transmits a 64 byte string, one byte at a time. A null value
defaults to the NE transmitting null characters (Hex 00); <TRC> is a string
<TRCMODE> indicates the path trace mode, and defaults to the OFF mode;
valid values for <TRCMODE> are shown in the “TRCMODE” section on
page 4-94
<TACC> is the AID “TACC” section on page 4-29
<PST> is the primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST”
section on page 4-85
<SST> is the secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST”
section on page 4-87
Input Example ED-STS1:FERNDALE:STS-2-1-4:115:::SFBER=1E-3,SDBER=1E-5,RVRTV=Y,
RVTM=1.0,SWPDIP=Y,HOLDOFFTIMER=2000,EXPTRC=“EXPTRCSTRING”,
TRC=“TRCSTRING”,TRCMODE=OFF,TACC=8:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-<STS_PATH> Description (continued)
3-47
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Section ED-BITS Description
Category Synchronization
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-NE-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-SYNCN
RLS-SYNCNSW
Input Format ED-BITS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[LINECDE=<LINECDE>,][FMT=<FMT>,]
[LBO=<LBO>,][SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][AISTHRSHLD=<AISTHRSHLD>]
[:<PST>];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “BITS” section on page 4-18
<LINECDE> is a line code; valid values for <LINECDE> are shown in the
“LINE_CODE” section on page 4-70
<FMT> is the frame format; valid values for <FMT> are shown in the
“FRAME_FORMAT” section on page 4-69
<LBO> indicates BITS line build out. The default value is 0-133. Valid values
for <LBO> are shown in the “BITS_LineBuildOut” section on page 4-42
<SYNCMSG> indicates if this BITS facility supports synchronization status
message; <SYNCMSG> defaults to (Y) and valid values are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<AISTHRSHLD> is the AIS Threshold. Valid values for <AISTHRSHLD>
shown in the “SYNC_CLOCK_REF_QUALITY_LEVEL” section on page 4-89
<PST> is a state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
Input Example ED-BITS:SONOMA:BITS-2:779:::LINECDE=AMI,FMT=ESF,LBO=0-133,
SYNCMSG=Y,AISTHRSHLD=PRS:IS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-48
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.30 ED-BLSR: Edit Bidirectional Line Switched Ring
This command edits the BLSR attributes.
Notes:
1. Only the RVRTV, RVTM, SRVRTV, SRVTM attributes can be edited for the 4-Fiber BLSR.
2. Only the RVRTV and RVTM attributes can be edited for the 2-Fiber BLSR.
Error conditions:
1. If the system fails on getting IOR, a SDBE (Status, Internal Data Base Error) error message will be
returned.
2. If the NE returns nothing for the required BLSR (BLSR-#, AID), a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request)
error message will be returned.
3. If sending this command to modify any attribute other than RVRTV, RVTM, SRVRTV, and SRVTM
on the 4-Fiber BLSR, an IDNV (Input, Data Not Valid) error message will be returned.
4. If sending this command to modify any attribute other than RVRTV or RVTM on the 2-fiber BLSR,
an IDNV (Input, Data Not Valid) error message will be returned.
5. Both RINGID and NODEID can be edited using the ED-BLSR command starting with Release 3.2.
Section ED-BLSR Description
Category BLSR
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-BLSR
ENT-BLSR
REPT ALM RING
REPT EVT RING
RTRV-ALM-RING
RTRV-BLSR
RTRV-COND-RING
3-49
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.31 ED-CLNT: Edit Client
This command edits client facility attributes.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Input Format ED-BLSR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[RINGID=<RINGID>,]
[NODEID=<NODEID>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,]
[SRVRTV=<SRVRTV>,][SRVTM=<SRVTM>][:];
where:
<AID> identifies the BLSR of the NE and is from the “BLSR” section on
page 4-18 (the AID “ALL” or “BLSR ALL” is not allowed for editing BLSR).
This command only supports a single BLSR AID
<RINGID> identifies the BLSR ring ID of the NE. It ranges from 0–9999.
<RINGID> is an integer
<NODEID> identifies the BLSR node ID of the NE. It ranges from 0–31.
<NODEID> is an integer
<RVRTV> identifies the revertive mode and valid values are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> identifies the revertive time; valid values for <RVTM> are shown in
the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
<SRVRTV> identifies the span revertive mode for 4F BLSR only and valid
values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<SRVTM> identifies the span revertive time for 4F BLSR only; valid values for
<SRVTM> are shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
Input Example ED-BLSR:PETALUMA:BLSR-43:123:::RINGID=43,NODEID=3,RVRTV=Y,
RVTM=2.0,SRVRTV=Y,SRVTM=5.0;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-BLSR Description (continued)
Section ED-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
RTRV-CLNT
RTRV-ALM-CLNT
RTRV-COND-CLNT
RST-CLNT
RMV-CLNT
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
3-50
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format ED-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,]
[ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,][ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,]
[ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,][COMM=<COMM>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>]
[SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<AID> is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<SFBER> identifies the SFBER for the SONET payload; valid values are shown
in the “SF_BER” section on page 4-86
<SDBER> identifies the SDBER for the SONET payload; valid values are shown
in the “SD_BER” section on page 4-85
<ALSMODE> indicates if the Automatic Laser Shutdown is enabled or disabled;
valid values are shown in the ALS_MODE” section on page 4-41
<ALSRCINT> indicates the ALS recovery interval. Range is 100–300 seconds;
<ALSRCINT> is an integer
<ALSRCPW> indicates the ALS recovery pulse width. The range is 2–100
seconds, in increments of 100ms, e.g. 30.1; <ALSRCPW> is a float
<COMM> indicates if the GCC or DCC is enabled or disabled. The GCC can be
enabled only if the digital wrapper has been enabled for the card. The default is
NONE. Valid values are shown in the “COMM_TYPE” section on page 4-46.
Rules for a MXP/TXP Client port are; only the DCC can be provisioned, if the
termination mode is not transparent and the payload is SONET. On a MXP/TXP
DWDM port, the DCC can be enabled only if the G.709 is not enabled and if the
payload is SONET and the termination mode is not transparent. On a MXP/TXP
DWDM port, the GCC can be enabled if there is no DCC and the G.709 flag is
enabled.
<MACADDR> identifies the MAC address for the 10GEthernet payload;
<MACADDR> is a string
<SYNCMSG> indicates that the facility be enabled to provide the
synchronization clock. This does not apply to a TXP card. This applies to an
MXP card, only if the payload is SONET and the card termination mode is as
follows: TRANSPARENT - All Client ports are available for all timing
selections. All Trunk ports are not available. Valid values are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
LINE - All ports are available for all-timing selections.
<SENDDUS> indicates that the facility send out a Do not Use for Sync message.
This does not apply to a TXP card. This applies to an MXP card, only if the
payload is SONET and the card termination mode is as follows:
TRANSPARENT - All Client ports are available for all timing selections. All
Trunk ports are not available.
LINE - All ports are available for all-timing selections. Valid values are shown
in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
Section ED-CLNT Description (continued)
3-51
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.32 ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>:ED CRS (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C,
STS24C, STS 48C, STS192C)
This command edits the state of an STS cross-connection.
Input Format
(continued)
<RLASER> indicates if the laser should be restarted. This is applicable only if
the ALSMODE is not automatic; valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF”
section on page 4-79
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time as measured in 15–minute
intervals. A value of 4 translates to a soak time of one hour. The allowable range
is 0–192 intervals (maximum of 48–hours). <SOAK> is an integer
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on page 4-87
Input Example ED-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-1-1:100:::SFBER=1E-4,SDBER=1E-5,ALSMODE=Y,
ALSRCINT=30,ALSRCPW=35.1,COMM=DCC,
MACADDR=00-0E-AA-BB-CC-FF,SYNCMSG=Y,SENDDUS=Y,RLASER=Y,
SOAK=10:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-CLNT Description (continued)
Section ED-CRS-<STS_PATH> Description
Category Cross Connections
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH> ENT-CRS-VT1
DLT-CRS-VT1 RTRV-CRS
ED-CRS-VT1 RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH> RTRV-CRS-VT1
Input Format ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<SRC>,<DST>:<CTAG>:::[ADD=<ADD>,]
[REMOVE=<REMOVE>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<SRC> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
<DST> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
<ADD> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
<REMOVE> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST” section
on page 4-87
Input Example ED-CRS-STS1::STS-1-1-1,STS-2-1-1:1:::ADD=STS-13-1-1,
REMOVE=STS-2-1-1:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-52
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.33 ED-CRS-VT1: Edit Cross Connection VT1
This command edits a VT cross-connection.
Note It is not possible to use both ADD and REMOVE at the same time.
Section ED-CRS-VT1 Description
Category Cross Connections
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH> ENT-CRS-VT1
DLT-CRS-VT1 RTRV-CRS
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH> RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH> RTRV-CRS-VT1
Input Format ED-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:<SRC>,<DST>:<CTAG>::::[ADD=<ADD>,]
[REMOVE=<REMOVE>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<SRC> is the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<DST> is the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<ADD> is the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<REMOVE> is the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST” section
on page 4-87
Input Example ED-CRS-VT1::VT1-1-1-1-1-1,VT1-2-1-1-1-1:1:::ADD=VT1-3-1-1-1-1,
REMOVE=VT1-2-1-1-1-1:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-53
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.34 ED-DAT: Edit Date and Time
This command edits the date and the time
3.4.35 ED-DS1: Edit DS1
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command edits the test access attribute for DS1 access on a DS3XM card.
Note This command is not allowed if the card is a protecting card.
Section ED-DAT Description
Category System
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ALM-MSG-ALL RTRV-HDR
APPLY RTRV-INV
COPY-RFILE RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INIT-SYS RTRV-TOD
REPT EVT FXFR SET-TOD
Input Format ED-DAT:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::[<DATE>],[<TIME>];
where:
<DATE> identifies the date and is a string
<TIME> identifies the time and is a string
Input Example ED-DAT:CISCO::1234::99-12-21,14-35-15;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-DS1 Description
Category Ports
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-EC1 RTRV-DS1
ED-G1000 RTRV-EC1
ED-T1 RTRV-G1000
ED-T3 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RST-<MOD2_IO>
3-54
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.36 ED-DWDM: Edit Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
The command edits an already pre-provisioned/provisioned MXP/TXP card. It changes the operating
parameters for the card.
The rules for provisioning a regeneration group are: a regeneration group can be created only between a
pair of TXP cards. The peer slot should contain a card of the same type, and should not have an existing
regeneration group for the same slot. The termination mode should be identical for the cards. All the
client port level settings should be identical for the cards. Setting the PEERID=Null will remove an
existing regeneration group. The two TXP cards should be set to transparent termination mode to
successfully create a regeneration group.
The rules for provisioning the payload field are as follows: For a TXP card, the SONET/10GE (Ethernet)
applies. The port has to be in OOS state for a payload change to be successful. There should be no Trace
enabled for the port. To set the Payload to 10GE, the termination mode should already be in Transparent
mode. Issue a separate ED-DWDM command to set it to Transparent mode prior to setting the payload
to 10GE. The MXP card does not support 10GE payload. To change the payload type for the MXP card,
all the ports should be in OOS state. The payload cannot be changed if any of the ports are a part of a Y
cable protection group or are used as the timing source. There should be no DCC enabled on any ports.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Input Format ED-DS1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[:::TACC=<TACC>];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier of a DS1 access on the DS3XM card and is from
the “DS1” section on page 4-20
<TACC> defines the STS as a test access port with a selected unique TAP
number. The TAP number ranges from 0–999. When TACC is 0, the TAP is
deleted. <TACC> is an integer
Input Example ED-DS1:PETALUMA:DS1-2-6-12:123:::TACC=8;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-DS1 Description (continued)
Section ED-DWDM Description
Category DWDM
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
RTRV-DWDM
3-55
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.37 ED-EC1: Edit Electrical Carrier
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command edits the attributes of an EC1.
Notes:
1. This command is not allowed if the card is a protecting card.
2. The state of the T1 port cannot be changed to IS or OOS if a loopback has been operated upon the
line.
Input Format ED-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PEERID=<PEERID>,]
[TERMMODE=<TERMMODE>,][PAYLOAD=<PAYLOAD>,][PWL=<PWL>];
where:
<AID> is from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<PEERID> is from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<TERMMODE> indicates the termination mode of the card; valid values are
shown in the “TERM_MODE” section on page 4-93
<PAYLOAD> is the type of payload carried; valid values are shown in the
“PAYLOAD” section on page 4-83
<PWL> is the provisioned wavelength; valid values are shown in the
“OPTICAL_WLEN” section on page 4-81
Input Example ED-DWDM:VA454-22:SLOT-1:100:::PEERID=SLOT-2,TERMMODE=TRANS,
PAYLOAD=SONET,PWL=1546.52;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-DWDM Description (continued)
Section ED-EC1 Description
Category Ports
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-DS1 RTRV-DS1
ED-G1000 RTRV-EC1
ED-T1 RTRV-G1000
ED-T3 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RST-<MOD2_IO>
3-56
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.38 ED-EQPT: Edit Equipment
This command edits the attributes for a given equipment slot in the NE. If the card is in an equipment
slot, this command is allowed only on the working AID.
The PROTID parameter indicates the unique identifier of the protection group (the protect card).
“NULL” is a special value of the PROTID parameter and indicates absence of a protection group. For
1:1 protection type, RVRTV and RVTM parameters can be changed. For 1:1 protection type, if the
PROTID parameter is entered as “NULL”, the protection group is deleted.
ED-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-2:<CTAG>:::PROTID=NULL;
For 1:N protection type, if the PROTID is “NULL”, the AIDs in the list are removed from the protection
group. If all the working cards are in the AID list, the protection group is deleted.
Example: if Slot-1, Slot-2 and Slot-4 were the only working cards in the protection group. The following
command will remove Slot-4 from the protection group:
ED-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-4:<CTAG>:::PROTID=NULL;
The protection group still has Slot-1 and Slot-2 as working cards.
The following command will remove all the other working cards in the above example and consequently,
delete the protection group itself:
ED-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-2&SLOT-1:<CTAG>:::PROTID=NULL;
The ED-EQPT command can be successfully executed on an already provisioned card to add a working
card to or remove one from a protection group. This command is not valid on a protect card. Only cards
can be added to or removed from a protection group. Protection type is immutable and is determined at
the time of creation of a protection group (while adding the first working card). Once provisioned, the
equipment type cannot be edited either.
Examples of adding an existing card to a protection group using the ED-EQPT command:
1:1 protection group
Input Format ED-EC1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PJMON=<PJMON>,][LBO=<LBO>,]
[SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<AID> is a facility AID of an EC1 port and is from the “FACILITY” section on
page 4-22
<PJMON> is a SONET pointer number (0 or 1) of an EC1 port and is an integer
Valid values for <LBO> are shown in the “E_LBO” section on page 4-62
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time as measured in 15 minute
intervals, so a value of 4 translates to a soak time of 1 hour. The allowable range
is 0–192 intervals (maximum of 48 hours). <SOAK> is an integer
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST” section
on page 4-87
Input Example ED-EC1:CISCO:FAC-1-1:123:::PJMON=0,LBO=0-225,SOAK=10:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-EC1 Description (continued)
3-57
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
ED-EQPT::SLOT-2:12:::PROTID=SLOT-1,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=9.0;
1:N protection group
ED-EQPT::SLOT-2:12:::PROTID=SLOT-3,PRTYPE=1-N,RVTM=6.5;
Error conditions for editing a 1:1 or 1:N protection group may be:
1. Editing the PRTYPE or PROTID (non-NULL value) parameters.
2. Editing RVRTV or RVTM when no protection group exists.
3. Editing RVRTV for 1:N protection.
4. Failed to remove, currently switched to protect.
Section ED-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Input Format ED-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PROTID=<PROTID>,]
[PRTYPE=<PRTYPE>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>][:];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<PROTID> is the protecting card slot number of the protection group.
<PROTID> is the AID from the “UCP” section on page 4-17
<PRTYPE> is the protection group type; valid values for <PRTYPE> are shown
in the “PROTECTION_GROUP” section on page 4-84
<RVRTV> is the revertive mode: valid values for <RVRTV> are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> is the revertive time; valid values for <RVTM> are shown in the
“REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
Input Example ED-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-2:123:::PROTID=SLOT-1,PRTYPE=1-1,RVRTV=Y,
RVTM=9.0;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-58
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.39 ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>: Edit Facility Protection Group (OC3, OC12, OC48,
OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command edits the optical facility protection.
Notes:
1. This command can be used on both protecting and working AIDs.
Section ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> Description
Category SONET Line Protection
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
Input Format ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PROTID=<PROTID>,]
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,][PSDIRN=<PSDIRN>][:];
where:
<AID> is the facility AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<PROTID> is the protection group identifier (protection group name) and is a
string; <PROTID> can have a maximum of 32 characters
<RVRTV> identifies a revertive mode; valid values for <RVRTV> are shown in
the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> identifies a revertive time; valid values for <RVTM> are shown in the
“REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
<PSDIRN> identifies the switching mode; valid values for <PSDIRN> are shown
in the “UNI_BI” section on page 4-97
Input Example ED-FFP-OC3:PETALUMA:FAC-1-1:1:::PROTID=PROT_NAME,RVRTV=Y,
RVTM=1.0,PSDIRN=BI;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-59
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.40 ED-FFP-CLNT: Edit Facility Protection Group Client
This command edits a Y cable protection group on client facilities.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Section ED-FFP-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT
RTRV-CLNT
RTRV-ALM-CLNT
RTRV-COND-CLNT
DLT-FFP-CLNT
ENT-FFP-CLNT
Input Format ED-FFP-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PROTID=<PROTID>,]
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,][PSDIRN=<PSDIRN>][:];
where:
<AID> identifies a port in a protection group and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<PROTID> is a protection group identifier (protection group name). It defaults
to the protecting port AID of the protection group. It is a string and can have a
maximum length of 32 characters. <PROTID> is a string
<RVRTV> identifies a revertive mode. The retrieve behavior defaults to N
(non-revertive mode); valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on
page 4-79
<RVTM> identifies a revertive time. The revertive time defaults to 5.0 minutes;
valid values are shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
<PSDIRN> identifies the switching mode and defaults to UNI. Release 4.0
MXP/TXP cards do not support BI-DIRECTIONAL switching. Valid values for
<PSDIRN> are shown in the “UNI_BI” section on page 4-97
Input Example ED-FFP-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-1-1:100:::PROTID=DC-METRO,RVRTV=N,
RVTM=1.0,PSDIRN=BI;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-60
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.41 ED-G1000: Edit G1000
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command edits the attributes related to a G1000 port.
Note The state OOS-AINS is not supported on the G1000.
Section ED-G1000 Description
Category Ports
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-DS1 RTRV-DS1
ED-EC1 RTRV-EC1
ED-T1 RTRV-G1000
ED-T3 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RST-<MOD2_IO>
Input Format ED-G1000:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[MFS=<MFS>,][FLOW=<FLOW>,]
[OPTICS=<OPTICS>,][ALS=<ALS>,][TRANS=<TRANS>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<AID> is the AID facility from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
Valid values for <MFS> are shown in the “MFS_TYPE” section on page 4-71
Valid values for <FLOW> are shown in the AWG_STATUS” section on
page 4-42
<OPTICS> GBIC type; valid values are shown in the “OPTICS” section on
page 4-82
<ALS> automatic laser shutdown; valid values are shown in the
ALS_RESTART” section on page 4-41
<TRANS> transponder mode; valid values are shown in the “TRANS_MODE”
section on page 4-94
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST” section
on page 4-87
Input Example ED-G1000:TID:FAC-1-1:CTAG:::MFS=1548,FLOW=ON,OPTICS=COPPER,
ALS=AUTO_RESTART,TRANS=NONE:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-61
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.42 ED-NE-GEN: Edit Network Element General
This command edits the node attributes of the NE.
Notes:
1. Only the IPADDR, IPMASK, DEFRTR, IIOP PORT and node name can be modified with this
command.
2. The node name can be a maximum of 20 characters. If the entered name exceeds 20 characters, an
IPNV (Node Name Too Long) error message is returned.
3. The feature of setting a timing source has been supported since ONS 15454 R3.2.
4. An existing timing source can be removed by setting the address to 0.0.0.0.
Section ED-NE-GEN Description
Category System
Security Superuser
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL RTRV-HDR
APPLY RTRV-INV
COPY-RFILE RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-DAT RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INIT-SYS RTRV-TOD
REPT EVT FXFR SET-TOD
Input Format ED-NE-GEN:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[NAME=<NAME>,][IPADDR=<IPADDR>,]
[IPMASK=<IPMASK>,][DEFRTR=<DEFRTR>,][IIOPPORT=<IIOPPORT>,]
[NTP=<NTP>];
where:
<NAME> indicates the node name and is a string
<IPADDR> indicates the node IP address and is a string
<IPMASK> indicates the node IP mask and is a string
<DEFRTR> indicates the node default router and is a string
<IIOPPORT> indicates the node IIOPPORT and is an integer
<NTP> indicates the node’s NTP timing origin address and is a string
Input Example ED-NE-GEN:CISCO::123:::NAME=NODENAME,IPADDR=192.168.100.52,
IPMASK=255.255.255.0,DEFRTR=192.168.100.1,IIOPPORT=57790,
NTP=192.168.100.52;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-62
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.43 ED-NE-SYNCN: Edit Network Element Synchronization
This command edits the synchronization attributes of the NE.
Notes:
1. Although mixed mode timing is supported in this release, it is not recommended. See the “Mixed
Mode Timing Support” section on page 1-14 for more information.
2. The existing external and line modes have the same functionality in all ONS 15454 3.x releases:
External mode: the node derives its timing from the BITS inputs.
Line mode: the node derives its timing from the SONET line(s).
Mixed mode: the node derives its timing from the BITS input or SONET lines.
Section ED-NE-SYNCN Description
Category Synchronization
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL RLS-SYNCNSW
APPLY RTRV-ALM-BITS
COPY-RFILE RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
ED-BITS RTRV-BITS
ED-DAT RTRV-COND-BITS
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-COND-SYNCN
ED-SYNCN RTRV-HDR
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-INV
INIT-SYS RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-NE-GEN
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-NE-IPMAP
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-SYNCN
REPT EVT FXFR RTRV-TOD
REPT EVT SYNCN SET-TOD
Input Format ED-NE-SYNCN:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[TMMD=<TMMD>,]
[SSMGEN=<SSMGEN>,][QRES=<QRES>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,]
[RVTM=<RVTM>];
where:
<TMMD> is the timing mode; valid values for <TMMD> are shown in the
“TIMING_MODE” section on page 4-93
<SSMGEN> is the SSM message set; valid values for <SSMGEN> are shown
in the “SYNC_GENERATION” section on page 4-90
<QRES> is the quality of the RES; valid values for <QRES> are shown in the
“SYNC_QUALITY_LEVEL” section on page 4-90
<RVRTV> is the revertive mode; valid values for <RVRTV> are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> is the revertive time; valid values for <RVTM> are shown in the
“REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
3-63
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.44 ED-OCH: Edit Optical Channel
Cisco ONS 15454 only for MXP and TXP cards.
This command edits the attributes (service parameters) and state of an OCH facility.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Input Example ED-NE-SYNCN:CISCO::123:::TMMD=LINE,SSMGEN=GEN1,
QRES=ABOVE-PRS,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=8.0;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-NE-SYNCN Description (continued)
Section ED-OCH Description
Category DWDM
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
RTRV-OCH
RTRV-ALM-OCH
RTRV-COND-OCH
RST-OCH
RMV-OCH
3-64
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format ED-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[RDIRN=<RDIRN>,]
[EXPWLEN=<EXPWLEN>,][VOAATTN=<VOAATTN>,]
[VOAPWR=<VOAPWR>,][CALOPWR=<CALOPWR>,][SFBER=<SFBER>,]
[SDBER=<SDBER>,][ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,][ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,]
[ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,][COMM=<COMM>,][GCCRATE=<GCCRATE>,]
[OSFBER=<OSFBER>,][OSDBER=<OSDBER>,][DWRAP=<DWRAP>,]
[FEC=<FEC>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,][SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,]
[SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,][RLASER=<RLASER>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:
[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “CHANNEL” section on page 4-19
<RDIRN> applicable in a future release
<EXPWLEN> applicable in a future release
<VOAATTN> indicates the value of calibrated attenuation for the VOA. It is
expressed in Dbm. The range is -24.0 to +2.0Dbm for MXP/TXP cards.
<VOAATTN> is a float
<VOAPWR> applicable in a future release
<CALOPWR> applicable in a future release
<SFBER> identifies the SFBER for the SONET payload; valid values are shown
in the “SF_BER” section on page 4-86
<SDBER> identifies the SDBER for the SONET payload; valid values are
shown in the “SD_BER” section on page 4-85
<ALSMODE> indicates if the Automatic Laser Shutdown is enabled or
disabled; valid values are shown in the ALS_MODE” section on page 4-41
<ALSRCINT> indicates the ALS recovery interval. Range is 100–300 seconds;
<ALSRCINT> is an integer
<ALSRCPW> indicates the ALS recovery pulse width. The range is 2–100
seconds, in increments of 100ms, e.g. 30.1; <ALSRCPW> is a float
<COMM> indicates if the GCC or DCC is enabled or disabled. The GCC can be
enabled only if the digital wrapper has been enabled for the card. The default is
NONE. Valid values are shown in the “COMM_TYPE” section on page 4-46.
Rules for a MXP/TXP Client port are; only the DCC can be provisioned, if the
termination mode is not transparent and the payload is SONET. On a MXP/TXP
DWDM port, the DCC can be enabled only if the G.709 is not enabled and if the
payload is SONET and the termination mode is not transparent. On a
MXP/TXP DWDM port, the GCC can be enabled if there is no DCC and the
G.709 flag is enabled.
<GCCRATE> indicates the data rate of the GCC traffic. Valid values are shown
in the “GCCRATE” section on page 4-69. The default is 192Kbps. For
MXP/TXP cards this applies only to the DWDM port. The 576K option is not
supported for this release.
<OSFBER> identifies the SFBER for the OTN level. Applicable only if the
G.709 is enabled; valid values are shown in the “SF_BER” section on page 4-86
Section ED-OCH Description (continued)
3-65
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format
(continued)
<OSDBER> identifies the SDBER for the OTN level. Applicable only if the
G.709 is enabled; valid values are shown in the “SD_BER” section on page 4-85
<DWRAP> is the G.709 digital wrapper. It is either on or off. The system default
is ON. For MXP/TXP, this applies only to the DWDM port. To enable G.709
there should be no GCC on the DWDM port. To disable G.709 there should be
no GCC on the DWDM port. The FEC should be turned to off; valid values are
shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<FEC> is the Forward Error Correction. It can be enabled only if the G.709 is
turned ON. It is either on or off. The system default is ON. For MXP/TXP this
applies only to the DWDM port. The FEC level PM and thresholds apply if the
FEC is turned on; valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<MACADDR> identifies the MAC address for the 10GE payload;
<MACADDR> is a string
<SYNCMSG> indicates that the facility be enabled to provide the
synchronization clock. This does not apply to a TXP card. This applies to an
MXP card, only if the payload is SONET and the card termination mode is as
follows:
TRANSPARENT - All Client ports are available for all timing selections. All
Trunk ports are not available.
LINE - All ports are available for all-timing selections.
<SENDDUS> indicates that the facility send out a Do not Use for Sync
message. This does not apply to a TXP card. This applies to an MXP card, only
if the payload is SONET/SDH and the card termination mode is as follows:
TRANSPARENT - All Client ports are available for all timing selections. All
Trunk ports are not available.
LINE - All ports are available for all-timing selections.
Valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RLASER> indicates if the laser should be restarted. This is applicable only if
the ALSMODE is not automatic; valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF”
section on page 4-79
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time as measured in 15–minute
intervals. A value of 4 translates to a soak time of one hour. The allowable range
is 0–192 intervals (maximum of 48–hours). <SOAK> is an integer
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on
page 4-87
Input Example ED-OCH:CISCO:CHAN-6-2:114:::RDIRN=W-E,EXPWLEN=1530.32,
VOAATTN=2.5,VOAPWR=7.5,CALOPWR=0,SFBER=1E-5,SDBER=1E-6,
ALSMODE=Y,ALSRCINT=30,ALSRCPW=35.1,COMM=DCC,
GCCRATE=192K,OSFBER=1E-5,OSDBER=1E-6,DWRAP=Y,FEC=Y,
MACADDR=00-0E-AA-BB-CC-DD,SYNCMSG=N,SENDDUS=Y,RLASER=Y,
SOAK=10:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-OCH Description (continued)
3-66
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.45 ED-PID: Edit Password
This command allows a user to change his or her own password.
The password cannot be null. It will be echoed as clear text as the message is parsed only after the
complete message is entered and terminated.
Notes:
1. Passwords are masked for the following security commands: ACT-USER, ED-PID,
ENT-USER-SECU and ED-USER-SECU. Access to a TL1 session via any means will have the
password masked. The CTC Request History and Message Log will also show the masked
commands. When a password-masked command is re-issued by double-clicking the command from
CTC Request History, the password will still be masked in the CTC Request History and Message
Log. The actual password that was previously issued will be sent to the NE. To use a former
command as a template only, single-click the command in CTC Request History. The command will
be placed in the Command Request text box, where you can edit the appropriate fields prior to
re-issuing it.
2. The password will not appear in the TL1 log on the NE.
3. You must use the ED-USER-SECU command to change the empty password (Superuser CISCO15
default empty password) to a non-empty, valid password. The ED-PID command cannot be used to
change the empty password to a valid password.
4. For the ED-PID command:
ED-PID:[TID]:<UID>:[CTAG]::<OLDPID>,<NEWPID>;
the syntax of <OLDPID> is not checked. The <NEWPID> is required to follow Telcordia standards
(i.e., 10 characters maximum including 1 letter, 1 number, and any one of the following characters:
#, %, or +). The <OLDPID> must match what is in the database.
Section ED-PID Description
Category Security
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ACT-USER
CANC
CANC-USER
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-USER-SECU
ENT-USER-SECU
REPT EVT SECU
RTRV-USER-SECU
3-67
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.46 ED-SYNCN: Edit Synchronization
This command edits the synchronization reference list used to determine the sources for the NE's
reference clock and the BITS output clock. For each clock, up to three synchronization sources may be
specified (e.g., PRIMARY, SECOND, THIRD).To view or edit the system timing mode, use the
RTRV-NE-SYNCN or ED-NE-SYNCN commands.
Note To retrieve/set the timing mode, SSM message Set or Quality of RES information, use the
RTRV-NE-SYNCN and ED-NE-SYNCN commands.
Input Format ED-PID:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>::<OLDPID>,<NEWPID>;
where:
<UID> is the user identifier and is a string; <UID> is any combination of up to
10 alphanumeric characters
<OLDPID> is the old password and is a string; <OLDPID> is any combination
of up to 10 alphanumeric characters. The syntax of <OLDPID> is not checked
for backwards compatibility
<NEWPID> is the user login password and is a string; <NEWPID> is a
minimum of 6, maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters including at least one
digit and one special character (%, #, or +)
Note CTC allows <UID> and <PID> of up to 20 characters. The 20 character
CTC-entered <UID> and <PID> are not valid TL1 <UID> and <PID>.
Input Example ED-PID:CISCO:UID:123::OLDPWD,NEWPWD;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-PID Description (continued)
Section ED-SYNCN Description
Category Synchronization
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-NE-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-SYNCN
RLS-SYNCNSW
3-68
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.47 ED-T1: Edit T1
This command edits the attributes related to a DS1/T1 port.
Notes:
1. This command is not allowed if the card is a protecting card.
2. If sending this command to edit TACC and any other attribute(s), and the port having the
cross-connection, the (Parameters Not compatible) error message will be returned.
3. Editing TACC via an ED-xxx command is only allowed when there is no circuit/cross-connection
on this port and the port/VT does not have a test access point (TAP or TACC number). Otherwise,
an error message (e.g. VT in Use) will be returned.
4. TACC creation will also be denied on the protect ports/cards.
5. The state of the T1 port cannot be changed to IS or OOS if a loopback has been operated upon the
line.
Input Format ED-SYNCN:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PRI=<PRI>,][SEC=<SEC>,]
[THIRD=<THIRD>][:];
where:
<AID> is the synchronization reference to be modified and is from the
“SYNC_REF” section on page 4-28
<PRI> is the primary reference of the synchronization and is the AID from the
“SYN_SRC” section on page 4-27
<SEC> is the secondary reference of the synchronization and is the AID from the
“SYN_SRC” section on page 4-27
<THIRD> is the third reference of the synchronization and is the AID from the
“SYN_SRC” section on page 4-27
Input Example ED-SYNCN:BOYES:SYNC-NE:112:::PRI=INTERNAL,SEC=INTERNAL,
THIRD=INTERNAL;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-SYNCN Description (continued)
Section ED-T1 Description
Category Ports
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-DS1 RTRV-DS1
ED-EC1 RTRV-EC1
ED-G1000 RTRV-G1000
ED-T3 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RST-<MOD2_IO>
3-69
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.48 ED-T3: Edit T3
This command edits the attributes related to a DS3/T3 port.
Notes:
1. This command is not allowed if the card is a protecting card.
2. Both FMT and Line code are not supported for T3/DS3 facility. They are supported on both the
DS3XM and DS3E card. The unframed value of the framing format is only supported on the DS3E
facility.
3. If sending this command to edit TACC and any other attribute(s), and the port having the
cross-connection or the port/VT has a test access point (TAP or TACC number), the (Parameters Not
compatible) error message will be returned.
4. Editing TACC via an ED-xxx command is only allowed when there is no circuit/cross-connection
on the port and the port/VT does not have a test access point (TAP or TACC number). Otherwise, an
error message (e.g. VT in Use) will be returned.
5. TACC creation will also be denied on the protect ports/cards.
6. The state of the T1 port cannot be changed to IS or OOS if a loopback has been operated upon the
line.
Input Format ED-T1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[LINECDE=<LINECDE>,][FMT=<FMT>,]
[LBO=<LBO>,][TACC=<TACC>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<LINECDE> is a line code; valid values for <LINECDE> are shown in the
“LINE_CODE” section on page 4-70
<FMT> is a frame format; valid values for <FMT> are shown in the
“FRAME_FORMAT” section on page 4-69
<LBO> is a line build out; valid values for <LBO> are shown in the
“LINE_BUILDOUT” section on page 4-70
<TACC> defines the STS as a test access port with a selected unique TAP
number. The TAP number ranges from 0–999. When TACC is 0, the TAP is
deleted; <TACC> is an integer.
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time as measured in 15 minute
intervals, so a value of 4 translates to a soak time of 1 hour. The allowable range
is 0–192 intervals (maximum of 48 hours); <SOAK> is an integer
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST” section
on page 4-87
Input Example ED-T1:CISCO:FAC-2-1:1223:::LINECDE=AMI,FMT=ESF,LBO=0-131,
TACC=8,SOAK=10:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-T1 Description (continued)
3-70
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Section ED-T3 Description
Category Ports
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-DS1 RTRV-DS1
ED-EC1 RTRV-EC1
ED-G1000 RTRV-G1000
ED-T1 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RST-<MOD2_IO>
Input Format ED-T3:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[FMT=<FMT>,][LINECDE=<LINECDE>,]
[LBO=<LBO>,][TACC=<TACC>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<AID> indicates a facility AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<FMT> is a frame format and the unframed value of the framing format is only
supported for the DS3E; valid values for <FMT> are shown in the
“DS_LINE_TYPE” section on page 4-61
<LINECDE> is a line code; valid values for <LINECDE> are shown in the
“DS_LINE_CODE” section on page 4-61
<LBO> is a line buildout; valid values for <LBO> are shown in the “E_LBO”
section on page 4-62
<TACC> defines the STS as a test access port with a selected unique TAP
number. The TAP number ranges from 0–999. When TACC is 0, the TAP is
deleted; <TACC> is an integer
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time as measured in 15 minute
intervals, so a value of 4 translates to a soak time of 1 hour. The allowable range
is 0–192 intervals (maximum of 48 hours); <SOAK> is an integer
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST” section
on page 4-87
Input Example ED-T3:CISCO:FAC-1-2:123:::FMT=C-BIT,LINECDE=B3ZS,LBO=0-225,
TACC=8,SOAK=10:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-71
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.49 ED-TRC-CLNT: Edit Trace Client
This command edits trace-related attributes on client facilities.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Section ED-TRC-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
RTRV-TRC-CLNT
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
RTRV-CLNT
Input Format ED-TRC-CLNT:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>:::[EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,]
[TRC=<TRC>,][TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,]TRCLEVEL=<TRCLEVEL>,
[TRCFORMAT=<TRCFORMAT>];
where:
<SRC> is the AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and must not be
null
<EXPTRC> indicates the expected path trace message (OTUK-path,J0-section,
for example) contents. The <EXPTRC> is any 64-character string, including the
termination CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed). <EXPTRC> is a string and
a null value is equivalent to ALL
<TRC> identifies the path trace message to be transmitted. The TRC is any
combination of 64 characters, including the terminating CR and LF. The trace
byte (OTUK-path,J0-section, for example) continuously transmits a 64-byte
string, one byte at a time. A null value defaults to the NE transmitting null
characters (Hex 00). <TRC> is a string and a null value is equivalent to ALL
<TRCMODE> identifies the trace mode and defaults to the OFF mode; valid
values are shown in the “TRCMODE” section on page 4-94 and a null value is
equivalent to ALL
<TRCLEVEL> indicates the level of trace. A null value defaults to J0-Section
SONET. This is the only applicable level for the client port. Valid values are
shown in the “TRCLEVEL” section on page 4-94 and a null value is equivalent
to ALL
Valid values for <TRCFORMAT> are shown in the “TRCFORMAT” section on
page 4-94. A null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example ED-TRC-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-6-1:10:::EXPTRC= “AAA”,TRC=“AAA”,
TRCMODE=MAN,TRCLEVEL=PATH,TRCFORMAT=64-BYTE;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-72
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.50 ED-TRC-OCH: Edit Trace Optical Channel Facilities
The command edits trace-related optical channel facilities.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Section ED-TRC-OCH Description
Category DWDM
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
RTRV-TRC-OCH
RTRV-DWDM
ED-DWDM
RTRV-OCH
Input Format ED-TRC-OCH:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>:::[EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,]
[TRC=<TRC>,][TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,]TRCLEVEL=<TRCLEVEL>,
[TRCFORMAT=<TRCFORMAT>];
where:
<SRC> is the AID from the “CHANNEL” section on page 4-19 and must not be
null
<EXPTRC> indicates the expected path trace message (OTUK-path,J0-section,
for example) contents. The <EXPTRC> is any 64-character string, including the
termination CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed). <EXPTRC> is a string and
a null value is equivalent to ALL
<TRC> identifies the path trace message to be transmitted. The TRC is any
combination of 64 characters, including the terminating CR and LF. The trace
byte (OTUK-path, J0-section, for example) continuously transmits a 64-byte
string, one byte at a time. A null value defaults to the NE transmitting null
characters (Hex 00). <TRC> is a string and a null value is equivalent to ALL
<TRCMODE> identifies the trace mode and defaults to the OFF mode; valid
values are shown in the “TRCMODE” section on page 4-94
<TRCLEVEL> indicates the level of trace. A null value defaults to J0 Section. If
G.709 is not enabled and the payload is SONET/SDH, the only applicable level
is SONET SECTION, which is the J0 byte. If the G.709 is enabled, the TTI
monitoring is allowed on all PATH, and SEC. Valid values are shown in the
“TRCLEVEL” section on page 4-94
Valid values for <TRCFORMAT> are shown in the “TRCFORMAT” section on
page 4-94
Input Example ED-TRC-OCH:CISCO:CHAN-6-2:10:::EXPTRC=“AAA”,TRC=“AAA”,
TRCMODE=MAN,TRCLEVEL=PATH,TRCFORMAT=64-BYTE;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-73
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.51 ED-UCP-CC: Edit Unified Control Plane Control Channel
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command edits UCP IP control channel attributes.
Notes:
1. If sending this command with invalid data, an IIAC (Status, Invalid Data) error message is returned.
2. If sending this command to provision MTU, CRCMD, or both while the IPCC type is routed
(CCTYPE=ROUTED), an IIAC (Routed CC Is Not Allowed to Provision MTU & CRCMD) error
message is returned.
Section ED-UCP-CC Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-IF REPT EVT UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-NBR
Input Format ED-UCP-CC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[LOCALIPCC=<LOCALIPCC>,]
[REMOTEIPCC=<REMOTEIPCC>,][LMPHELLOINT=<LMPHELLOINT>,]
[LMPHELLODEADINT=<LMPHELLODEADINT>,][MTU=<MTU>,]
[CRCMD=<CRCMD>][:];
where:
<AID> indicates an individual IPCC ID; <AID> is the AID from the “IPCC”
section on page 4-16
<LOCALIPCC> indicates the local IP address of the control channel and is a
string
<REMOTEIPCC> indicates the remote IP address of the control channel and is
a string
<LMPHELLOINT> indicates the LMP (line management protocol) interval (in
milliseconds) and is an integer. It is the time between hello messages sent by this
node.
<LMPHELLODEADINT> indicates the control channel time-out interval (in
milliseconds) by the neighbor if the neighbor does not receive the hello
message; <LMPHELLODEADINT> is an integer
<MTU> indicates the MTU size of this control channel and is an integer
<CRCMD> indicates the CRC mode for this control channel. It is applicable to
IPCCs in SDCC type.Valid values for <CRCMD> are shown in the
“UCP_CRC_MODE” section on page 4-97
3-74
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.52 ED-UCP-IF: Edit Unified Control Plane Interface
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command edits UCP interface attributes.
Note If you send invalid data with this command, an IIAC (Status, Invalid Data) error message is returned.
Input Example ED-UCP-CC:CISCO:CC-9:CTAG:::LOCALIPCC=172.20.209.31,
REMOTEIPCC=172.20.209.15,LMPHELLOINT=1,LMPHELLODEADINT=5,
MTU=1500,CRCMD=16-BIT;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-UCP-CC Description (continued)
Section ED-UCP-IF Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-IF REPT EVT UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-NBR
Input Format ED-UCP-IF:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[TNATYPE=<TNATYPE>,]
[TNAADDR=<TNAADDR>,][CORENETWORKID=<CORENETWORKID>][:];
where:
<AID> indicates the interface port index of the data link; <AID> is the AID
from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<TNATYPE> indicates the TNA (transport network administered) type; valid
values for <TNATYPE> are shown in the “UCP_TNA_TYPE” section on
page 4-97
<TNAADDR> indicates the TNA (transport network administered) IP address
and is a string
<CORENETWORKID> is an integer
Input Example ED-UCP-IF:CISCO:FAC-2-1:CTAG:::TNATYPE=IPV4,
TNAADDR=172.20.209.73,CORENETWORKID=9;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-75
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.53 ED-UCP-NBR: Edit Unified Control Plane Neighbor
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command edits a UCP neighbor.
The default value of the node name can be overwritten by the TL1 user to a string in a maximum size of
20 characters. If the node name includes non-identified TL1 characters (e.g. space), the text string format
with the double quotes is required.
Example:
ENT-UCP-NBR::NBR-18:CTAG:::NBRIX=18,NODEID=192.168.101.18,
NAME=NeibhgorName,NDEN=N,HELLOEN=Y,HELLOINT=5, REFREDEN=Y;
Notes:
1. If this command is sent twice or input with invalid data, a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request) error
message is returned.
2. If sending this command without neighbor node name in the “NAME” field, an IIAC (Neighbor
Name Cannot Be Empty) error message is returned.
3. If sending this command to set the hello interval while the RSVP hello is disabled, an IIAC
(HELLOINT Is Not Allowed If HELLOEN Is Disabled) error message is returned.
Section ED-UCP-NBR Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-IF REPT EVT UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-NBR
3-76
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.54 ED-UCP-NODE: Edit Unified Control Plane Node
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command edits the UCP node level attributes.
The nodeid is the unique number used to identify the local node in LMP, RSVP messages sent to the
neighbors. It defaults to the local ethernet interface address (ISA).
The retry initial interval (in seconds) is used for that have been released by the net work side. This
interval has a range of 60 seconds (1 minute) to 1800 seconds (30 minutes), with a default value of 180
seconds.
The retry max interval (in seconds) is used for released circuits. The node will back off exponentially
from the initial retry interval to this maximum value of 600 seconds (10 minutes).
The restart time is used to be signaled to neighbors. It indicates the time taken by this node (in seconds)
to restart. This timer has a range of 1 second to 10 seconds with a default of 5 seconds.
The recovery time is used to be signaled to neighbors. It indicates the time taken by this node (in
seconds) to re-sync path, reservation state with a given neighbor. This timer has a range of 300 seconds
(5 minutes) to 1800 seconds (30 minutes) and a default value of 600 seconds (10 minutes).
The transmit interval is used to retransmit un-acknowledged messages. This timer has a range of 1
second to 7 seconds with a default value of 1 second.
Input Format ED-UCP-NBR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[NAME=<NAME>,]
[HELLOEN=<HELLOEN>,][HELLOINT=<HELLOINT>,]
[REFREDEN=<REFREDEN>][:];
where:
<AID> indicates an individual neighbor index of the UCP. An available
neighbor index will be assigned internally while sending this command without
AID; <AID> is the AID from the “NBR” section on page 4-16
<NAME> indicates the neighbor node name. It defaults to the ASCII
representation of the node ID in this command. The default value of this node
name can be overwritten by the TL1 user to a string in a maximum size of 20
characters. If the node name includes non-identified TL1 characters (e.g. space),
the text string format with the double quotes is required. Node name is a string.
The default value is “defaults to the nodeid ASCII representation”. <NAME> is
a string. The default value is “the ASCII representation of the nodeid”.
<NAME> is a string
<HELLOEN> indicates if the RSVP hello enabled to this neighbor or not; valid
values for <HELLOEN> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<HELLOINT> indicates the interval between hello messages to neighbor;
<HELLOINT> is an integer
<REFREDEN> indicates if the refresh reduction is enabled or not; valid values
for <REFREDEN> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
Input Example ED-UCP-NBR:CISCO:NBR-8:CTAG:::NAME=NODE-B,HELLOEN=Y,
HELLOINT=20,REFREDEN=N;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-UCP-NBR Description (continued)
3-77
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
The refresh interval is used to refresh path, reservation state. This interval has a range of 30 seconds to
4060800 seconds (47 days) with a default value of 30 seconds.
The timeout RESV CONF interval is used to wait for a RESV CONF message in response to a RESV
message. This interval has a range of 10–180 seconds with a default value of 60 seconds.
The Destination Deletion progress is a timeout interval while the destination is in the progress of cleanly
deleting a call. This interval has a range of 1–180 seconds with a default value of 60 seconds.
Notes:
1. If the retry initial interval is set to zero, it will be interpreted as having the retry procedure disable.
2. The retry maximum interval has to be set to a higher value than the initial retry interval.
Section ED-UCP-NODE Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-IF REPT EVT UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-NBR
3-78
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format ED-UCP-NODE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[NODEID=<NODEID>,]
[INITRETRY=<INITRETRY>,][MAXRETRY=<MAXRETRY>,]
[RESTARTTM=<RESTARTTM>,][RECOVTM=<RECOVTM>,]
[RXMTINT=<RXMTINT>,][RFRSHINT=<RFRSHINT>,]
[RESVTIMEOUT=<RESVTIMEOUT>,]
[RESVCONFTIMEOUT=<RESVCONFTIMEOUT>,]
[SOURCEDIP=<SOURCEDIP>,][DESTINATIONDIP=<DESTINATIONDIP>][:];
where:
<NODEID> indicates the node IP address and is a string
<INITRETRY> indicates the circuit retry initial interval (in seconds) and is an
integer
<MAXRETRY> indicates the circuit maximum retry initial interval (in seconds)
and is an integer
<RESTARTTM> indicates the restart time taken by this local node;
<RESTARTTM> is an integer and the default value is 5 seconds.
<RECOVTM> indicates the circuit retry maximum interval (in seconds) and is
an integer
<RXMTINT> indicates the interval for re-transmitting un-acknowledged
messages and is an integer
<RFRSHINT> indicates the interval for refreshing path, reservation state and is
an integer
<RESVTIMEOUT> indicates the timeout interval for waiting for a reservation
message in response to a PATH message; <RESVTIMEOUT> is an integer
<RESVCONFTIMEOUT> indicates the timeout interval for waiting for a RESV
CONF message in response to a RESV message; <RESVCONFTIMEOUT> is
an integer
<SOURCEDIP> indicates the timeout interval of the SourceDip (Source
Deletion in Progress) while the source is in the process of cleanly deleting a call;
<SOURCEDIP> is an integer
<DESTINATIONDIP> indicates the timeout interval of the DestinationDip
(Destination Deletion in Progress) while the destination is in the process of
cleanly deleting a call; <DESTINATIONDIP> is an integer
Input Example ED-UCP-NODE:CISCO::CTAG:::NODEID=192.168.100.52,INITRETRY=180,
MAXRETRY=600,RESTARTTM=5,RECOVTM=600,RXMTINT=1,
RFRSHINT=30,RESVTIMEOUT=60,RESVCONFTIMEOUT=60,
SOURCEDIP=60,DESTINATIONDIP=60;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-UCP-NODE Description (continued)
3-79
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.55 ED-USER-SECU: Edit User Security
This command edits a user's privileges, password, or ID. Only a Superuser may perform this operation.
Privilege levels are described in the ENT-USER-SECU command.
Notes:
1. Passwords are masked for the following security commands: ACT-USER, ED-PID,
ENT-USER-SECU and ED-USER-SECU. Access to a TL1 session via any means will have the
password masked. The CTC Request History and Message Log will also show the masked
commands. When a password-masked command is re-issued by double-clicking the command from
CTC Request History, the password will still be masked in the CTC Request History and Message
Log. The actual password that was previously issued will be sent to the NE. To use a former
command as a template only, single-click the command in CTC Request History. The command will
be placed in the Command Request text box, where you can edit the appropriate fields prior to
re-issuing it.
2. The <UID> can be any combination of up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
3. The <PID> is a string of up to 10 characters where at least 2 are non-alphabetic with at least one
special character (+, %, or #).
4. Although the CTC allows both <UID> and <PID> of up to 20 characters, the CTC-entered users
(<UID>, <PID>) are not valid TL1 users (e.g., if issuing an ACT-USER command and using the
CTC-entered <UID> that is greater than 10 characters long, TL1 will respond with DENY.
5. For the ED-USER-SECU command;
ED-USER-SECU:[TID]:<UID>:[CTAG]::[<NEWUID>],[<NEWPID>],,[<UAP>]:;
a. The syntax of <NEWPID> is checked.
b. If the <NEWPID> is specified, the syntax is checked.
c. The syntax of <UID> is not checked.
d. Old users can change their password without changing their userid, but the new password must
meet the new requirements.
e. The <NEWPID> is required when changing the <USERID>.
Currently, when <NEWUID> is specified, <NEWPID> is not optional; however, it is possible to
change a userid without changing the password by providing the same password. Users are not
allowed to keep their old password if the old password does not meet the new syntax requirements;
for example,
<USERID> = DODI2345
<PASSWORD> = DODI#234 /*PASSWORD ALREADY MEETS REQUIREMENTS*/
> ED-USER-SECU::DODI2345:1::DODI3456,DODI#234,,PROV;
ED-USER-SECU::DODI2345:1::DODI3456,DODI#234,,PROV;
TCCP 1970-01-02 13:15:35
M 1 COMPLD
;
<NEWUSERID> = DODI3456
<PASSWORD> = DODI#234
<USERID> = CISCO40
<PASSWORD> = CISCO40 /*PASSWORD DOES NOT MEET REQUIREMENTS*/
3-80
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
> ED-USER-SECU::CISCO40:1::CISCO40,,PROV;
ED-USER-SECU::CISCO40:1::CISCO40,,PROV;
TCCP 1970-01-02 13:14:24
M 1 DENY
IIFM
/* INVALID PASSWORD */
;
6. You must use the ED-USER-SECU command to change the empty password (Superuser CISCO15
default empty password) to a non-empty, valid password. The ED-PID command cannot be used to
change the empty password to a valid password.
Section ED-USER-SECU Description
Category Security
Security Superuser
Related
Messages
ACT-USER
CANC
CANC-USER
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-PID
ENT-USER-SECU
REPT EVT SECU
RTRV-USER-SECU
Input Format ED-USER-SECU:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>::[<NEWUID>],[<NEWPID>],,
[<UAP>][:];
where:
<UID> is the user identifier and is a string. The minimum <UID> size is 6, the
maximum UID size is 10
<NEWUID> is the new user identifier and is a string. The minimum <UID> size
is 6, the maximum PID size is 10
<NEWPID> is a new password and is a string; <NEWPID> is a minimum of 6,
maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters including at least one digit and one
special character (%, #, or +).
<UAP> is a user access privilege; valid values for <UAP> are shown in the
“PRIVILEGE” section on page 4-83
Note CTC allows <UID> and <PID> of up to 20 characters. The 20 character
CTC-entered <UID> and <PID> are not valid TL1 <UID> and <PID>.
Input Example ED-USER-SECU:PETALUMA:CISCO15:123::NEWUID,NEWPID,,MAINT;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-81
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.56 ED-VT1: Edit Virtual Tributary
This command edits the attributes associated with a VT1 path.
Both RVRTV and RVTM parameters only apply to UPSR.
The TACC parameter edits an existing single STS or VT and changes it to a test access point. When an
editing command on TACC is executed, it assigns the STS for the first 2-way connection and STS=1 as
the second 2-way connection.
Error conditions:
1. Sending this command to edit RVRTV or RVTM for the non-UPSR VT path, an error message will
be returned.
2. If sending this command to edit both TACC and any other attribute(s), the (Parameters Not
compatible) error message will be returned.
3. This command is only allowed whenever there are no circuits/cross-connections (no UPSR
connections) on that AID.
4. If sending this command to edit TACC on an AID with circuits or cross-connections, or if the
port/VT has a test access point (TAP or TACC number), an error message (e.g., VT in Use) will be
returned.
5. TACC creation will also be denied on the protect ports/cards.
6. TACC creation is allowed on PCA for two-fiber and four-fiber BLSR.
7. TACC is not supported on G1000/MXP/TXP/ML1000-2 and ML100T-12 cards.
Section ED-VT1 Description
Category STS and VT Paths
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
RTRV-VT1
Input Format ED-VT1:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>:::[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,]
[HOLDOFFTIMER=<HOLDOFFTIMER>,][TACC=<TACC>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<SRC> is an access identifier from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<RVRTV> identifies revertive mode which only applies to UPSR; valid values
for <RVRTV> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> identifies revertive time; valid values for <RVTM> are shown in the
“REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
<HOLDOFFTIMER> is an integer
<TACC> is the AID from the “TACC” section on page 4-29
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST” section
on page 4-87
3-82
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.57 ENT-BLSR: Enter BLSR
This command creates either a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR.
On successful creation of the BLSR, all cross-connections using the protection bandwidth of the BLSR
will be automatically converted to PCA cross-connections.
<RINGID> defaults to AID number (# in the AID format of BLSR-#)
Input examples:
Four-fiber BLSR:
ENT-BLSR:PETALUMA:BLSR-2:123:::RINGID=2,NODEID=3,MODE=4F,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=5.0,
SRVRTV=Y,SRVTM=5.0,EASTWORK=FAC-5-1,WESTWORK=FAC-6-1,EASTPROT=FAC-12-1,
WESTPROT=FAC-13-1:;
Two-fiber BLSR:
ENT-BLSR:PETALUMA:BLSR-4:123:::RINGID=4,NODEID=6,MODE=2F,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=5.0,
EASTWORK=FAC-5-1,WESTWORK=FAC-6-1:;
Error conditions:
1. If the system fails on getting IOR, a SDBE (Status, Internal Data Base Error) error message is
returned.
2. If the NE returns nothing for the required BLSR (BLSR-# AID), a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request)
error message is returned.
3. In RINGID is different from the AID number, a SDNC (Status, Input Ringid Is Not Consistent with
NE Data) error message is returned.
4. Both <EASTPROT> and <WESTPROT> are optional, but required for 4-fiber BLSR creation.
5. Four-fiber BLSR is only supported on OC48 and OC192 cards. Two-fiber BLSR is only supported
on OC12, OC48 and OC192 cards. Any attempt to create a BLSR on any other card combination
results in a “BLSR Creation Failed” error message.
6. If sending this command to create 4-fiber BLSR on OC12 cards, or 2-fiber BLSR on OC3 cards, an
IIAC (Input, Invalid work/prot port) error message will be returned.
7. If sending this command to create a BLSR on an NE that already has two BLSRs, a SRQN (BLSR
Creation Failed) error message will be returned because one NE is only allowed to have two BLSRs
in this release.
8. If sending this command to create a BLSR on a port with 1+1,a SRQN (BLSR Creation Failed) error
message will be returned.
Input Example ED-VT1:CISCO:VT1-2-1-3-1-4:123:::RVRTV=Y,RVTM=1.0,
HOLDOFFTIMER=2000,TACC=8:OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ED-VT1 Description (continued)
Section ENT-BLSR Description
Category BLSR
Security Provisioning
3-83
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
DLT-BLSR RTRV-ALM-RING
ED-BLSR RTRV-BLSR
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT RING
Input Format ENT-BLSR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[RINGID=<RINGID>,]
NODEID=<NODEID>,MODE=<MODE>,[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,]
[RVTM=<RVTM>,][SRVRTV=<SRVRTV>,][SRVTM=<SRVTM>,]
EASTWORK=<EASTWORK>,WESTWORK=<WESTWORK>,
[EASTPROT=<EASTPROT>,][WESTPROT=<WESTPROT>];
where:
<AID> identifies the BLSR of the NE. “ALL” or “BLSR-ALL” AID is not
allowed for editing BLSR. This command only supports a single BLSR AID.
<AID> is the AID from the “BLSR” section on page 4-18
<RINGID> identifies the BLSR ring ID of the NE. It ranges from 0–9999.
<RINGID> is an integer and the default value is “# of AID BLSR-#”
<NODEID> identifies the BLSR node ID of the NE and is an integer. It ranges
from 0–31
<MODE> identifies the BLSR mode; valid values for <MODE> are shown in
the “BLSR_MODE” section on page 4-42
<RVRTV> identifies the revertive mode and defaults to Y (revertive mode).
Valid values for <RVRTV> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79.
The default value is Y.
<RVTM> identifies the revertive time and defaults to 5.0. Valid values for
<RVTM> are shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85; the
default value is 5.0
<SRVRTV> identifies the span revertive mode for 4-fiber BLSR only.
<SRVRTV> defaults to Y (revertive mode); valid values are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79. The default value is Y.
<SRVTM> identifies the span revertive time for 4-fiber BLSR only. <SRVTM>
defaults to 5.0 and valid values are shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section
on page 4-85. The default value is 5.0
<EASTWORK> identifies the east working facility and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<WESTWORK> identifies the west working facility and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<EASTPROT identifies the east protecting facility and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<WESTPROT> identifies the west protecting facility and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
Input Example ENT-BLSR:PETALUMA:BLSR-2:123:::RINGID=2,NODEID=1,MODE=4F,
RVRTV=Y,RVTM=5.0,SRVRTV=Y,SRVTM=5.0,EASTWORK=FAC-5-1,
WESTWORK=FAC-6-1,EASTPROT=FAC-12-1,WESTPROT=FAC-13-1;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ENT-BLSR Description (continued)
3-84
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.58 ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>: Enter Cross Connection (STS1, STS3C, STS6C,
STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command creates an STS cross-connection with a cross-connection type (CCT).
When a UPSR cross-connection is created, the path presented by the first AID is configured to be the
preferred path. For example, the AID (F1) of the cross-connection (created by
ENT-CRS-STS1::F1&F2,T1:123;) is the preferred path.
Notes:
1. The default cross-connection type is 2-way
2. If a path is already in a connection, it cannot be in another connection even if the other is a 1-way
and the new one will be 1-way the other direction.
3. This command does not support creating multiple STS cross-connections.
4. The UPSR cross STS connection can be created by using “&” in the AID fields of this command.
a. The following command is used to create a 1-way selector or 2-way selector and bridge with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1
ENT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1:<CTAG>::[<CCT>];
b. The following command is used to create a 1-way bridge or 2-way selector and bridge with:
from point: F1
to points: T1, T2
ENT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:F1,T1&T2:<CTAG>::[<CCT>];
c. The following command is used to create a 1-way subtending UPSR connection or 2-way
subtending UPSR connection with:
from point: F1, F2
to points: T1, T2
ENT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1&T2:<CTAG>::[<CCT>];
d. The following command is used to create a 2-way selector and bridge with:
from point: F1,F2 (F1 is the working side, F2 is the protect side)
selector points: S1, S2 (S1 is the working side, S2 is the protect side)
ENT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:F1&F2,S1&S2:<CTAG>::2WAY;
e. The following command is used to create a UPSR IDRI Cross-Connection:
ENT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:A&B,C&D:<CTAG>::2WAYDC;
A–Path on ring X to which traffic from ring Y is bridged
B–Path on ring X to which traffic from the same ring is bridged
C–Path on ring Y to which traffic from ring X is bridged
D–Path on ring Y to which traffic from the same ring is bridged
A, B, C, and D have a positional meaning. Connection type 2WAYDC is used for UPSR IDRI
cross-connections.
3-85
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
f. The following command is used to create a UPSR DRI Cross-Connection:
ENT-CRS-{STS_PATH}:[<TID>]:A&B,C:<CTAG>::2WAYDC;
A–Path on ring X to which traffic from ring Y is bridged
B–Path on ring X to which traffic from the same ring is bridged
C–Traffic to and from ring Y
A, B, C, and D have a positional meaning. Connection type 2WAYDC is used for UPSR DRI
cross-connections.
5. All A&B AIDs in the TL1 cross-connection command are in the format of
WorkingAID&ProtectAID.
6. To establish a cross-connection on a 2-fiber protection path or on a 4-fiber protection channel, the
PCA connection type (1WAYPCA or 2WAYPCA) is required.
7. If you send a PCA cross-connection type on the non-PCA AIDs, the IIAC error message is returned.
8. If you send a non-PCA cross-connection type on the PCA AIDs, the IIAC error message is returned.
9. The facility AID is only valid on slots holding a G1000-4 card (ONS 15454).
10. The virtual facility AID (VFAC) is only valid on slots holding the ML-series card.
Section ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH> Description
Category Cross Connections
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
DLT-CRS-VT1
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ED-CRS-VT1
ENT-CRS-VT1
RTRV-CRS
RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-CRS-VT1
Input Format ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<SRC>,<DST>:<CTAG>::[<CCT>]::
[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<SRC> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
<DST> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
<CCT> identifies the cross-connection type; valid values for <CCT> are shown
in the “CCT” section on page 4-45
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST” section
on page 4-87
Input Example ENT-CRS-STS1:BODEGA:STS-5-1-1,STS-12-1-5:116::2WAY::OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-86
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.59 ENT-CRS-VT1: Enter STS Cross Connection VT1
This command creates a VT1 cross connect. When a UPSR cross-connection is created, the path
presented by the first AID is configured to be the preferred path.
For example, the first AID (F1) of the cross-connection (created by ENT-CRS-VT1::F1&F2,T1:123;) is
the preferred path.
Notes:
1. The default cross-connection type is 2-way.
2. If a path is already in a connection, it cannot be in another connection even if the other is a 1-way
and the new one will be 1-way the other direction.
3. This command does not support creating multiple VT cross-connections.
4. The UPSR VT cross-connection can be created by using “&” in the AID fields of this command.
a. The following command is used to create a 1-way selector or 2-way selector and bridge with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1
ENT-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1:<CTAG>::[<CCT>];
b. The following command is used to create a 1-way bridge or 2-way selector and bridge with:
from point: F1
to points: T1, T2
ENT-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:F1,T1&T2:<CTAG>::[<CCT>];
c. The following command is used to create a 1-way subtending UPSR connection or 2-way
subtending UPSR connection with:
from point: F1, F2
to points: T1, T2
ENT-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1&T2:<CTAG>::[<CCT>];
d. The following command is used to create a 2-way selector and bridge with:
from points: F1, F2 (F1 is the working side, F2 is the protect side)
selector points: S1, S2 (S1 is the working side, S2 is the protect side)
ENT-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:F1&F2,S1&S2:<CTAG>::2WAY;
5. All a&b AIDs in the TL1 cross-connection command are in the format of
WorkingAID&ProtectAID.
6. To establish a cross-connection on a 2-fiber protection path or on a 4-fiber protection channel, the
PCA connection type (1WAYPCA or 2WAYPCA) is required.
7. If you send a PCA cross-connection type on the non-PCA AIDs, an IIAC error message is returned.
8. If you send a non-PCA cross-connection type on the PCA AIDs, an IIAC error message is returned.
9. 1-way monitor cross-connects cannot be created. 1WAYMON value for CCT parameter is not
supported. However, such cross-connects can be retrieved through the RTRV-CRS-VT1 and
RTRV-CRS commands.
3-87
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.60 ENT-EQPT: Enter Equipment
This command enters the card type and attributes for a given equipment slot in the NE. It also
automatically enters all facilities supported by the card, assigning default values to all facility and path
attributes.
The command supports optional parameters: RVTM (revertive time), RVRTV (revertive behavior),
PROTID (unique protection ID) and PRTYPE (protection type) for configuring the card in an equipment
protection group. PRTYPE can be 1:1 and 1:N. These parameters can only be entered for a working AID.
The protect card must already be provisioned before creating the protection group.
1:1 protection involves the odd slot protecting the even slot. The work-protect pair is as follows (2-1,
4-3, 6-5, 16-17, 14-15, 12-13). DS1, DS3, DS3XM, DS3N, DS3E, EC1 and other electrical cards support
1:1 protection. The value of PROTID is the protecting slot and is of the form “slot-x”. This command
creates a 1:1 protection group. If the command has the optional parameters for creating a protection
group and the protection group cannot be created due to an error condition, provisioning of the
equipment fails.
The PROTID slot must be provisioned first.
To create 1:1 with the ENT-EQPT command, the working card should not be provisioned first, so the
AID type field should be presented in ENT-EQPT for the AID on this <AID>.
Section ENT-CRS-VT1 Description
Category Cross Connections
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
DLT-CRS-VT1
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ED-CRS-VT1
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-CRS
RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-CRS-VT1
Input Format ENT-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>::[<CCT>]::[<PST>],[<SST>];
where:
<FROM> indicates an identifier at one end of the VT cross connection and is the
AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<TO> indicates an identifier at the other end of the VT cross-connection and is
the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<CCT> identifies the cross-connection type; valid values for <CCT> are shown
in the “CCT” section on page 4-45
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values for <SST> are shown in the “SST” section
on page 4-87
Input Example ENT-CRS-VT1:CISCO:VT1-2-3-7-2,VT1-4-4-5-2:1234::1WAY::OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-88
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
The following is an example for a 1:1 protection group:
ENT-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-1:<CTAG>::DS1;
ENT-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-2:<CTAG>::DS1:PROTID=SLOT-1,PRTYPE=1-1,RVTM=5.0,
RVRTV=Y;
1:N protection is always revertive. For 1:N protection, the protect slot can only be Slot 3 or Slot 15. For
a protect card in Slot 3, the working cards can be in any of the slots on Bank A. Slot 15 is for protection
in Bank B. A DSXN (DS1N or DS3N) card must be provisioned in the protect slot. A 1:1 protection
cannot be upgraded to 1:N protection. This command creates a 1:N protection group or adds a new card
to an existing 1:N protection group. Multiple working AIDs can be entered in a protection group.
The following is an example of provisioning a 1:N protection group with the ENT-EQPT command:
ENT-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-3:<CTAG>::DS1N;
ENT-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-2&SLOT-1:<CTAG>::DS1:PROTID=SLOT-3,PRTYPE=1-N;
The following is an example of provisioning a 1:N protection group with the ED-EQPT command:
ENT-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-1&SLOT-2:<CTAG>::DS1;
ENT-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-3:<CTAG>::DS1N;
ED-EQPT:[<TID>]:SLOT-2&SLOT-1:<CTAG>:::PROTID=SLOT-1,PRTYPE=1-N;
If the provisioning fails for some AIDs, PRTL responses will be provided indicating failed AIDs. If the
provisioning fails for all the AIDs, a DENY response will be provided. For both CMPLD and PRTL
responses on creating protection group query, the protection group has been created for the successful
AID(s) query.
The following is an example for 1:N protection. The RVRTV parameter is not valid for 1:N protection.
ENT-EQPT:[<TID]>:SLOT-2:<CTAG>:::PROTID=SLOT-3,PRTYPE=1-N,RVTM=5.0;
Both ENT-EQPT and ED-EQPT commands can provision all working AIDs (1-5) together for 1:N by
using listed AIDs.
The ENT-EQPT command provisions a new card and adds it to the protection group. The ED-EQPT
command adds the already provisioned cards to the protection group.
Protect AID should already be provisioned for either command because protection group parameters are
not supported for the protect AID.
The ENT-EQPT command provisions an equipment successfully on an empty slot if the equipment type
is compatible with the slot number. This command can have the optional parameters in the “f” block to
provision a card as a working card. It has the effect of adding the protection behavior at the time of
provisioning itself. For the protection provisioning to succeed, the protect card should have already been
provisioned. Trying to execute ENT-EQPT to provision a protection group on an already provisioned
card will result in an error.
An example to provision a 1:1 protection group:
ENT-EQPT::SLOT-1:12::DS3;// provision the protect card
ENT-EQPT::SLOT-2:12::DS3:PROTID=SLOT-1,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=8.0; //provision a card and add it
to the protection group.
An example to provision a 1:N protection group:
ENT-EQPT::SLOT-3:12::DS3N;//provision the protect card
ENT-EQPT::SLOT-1:12::DS3:PROTID=SLOT-3,RVTM=7.5,PRTYPE=1-N;//provision a card and add
it to protection group.
3-89
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Notes:
1. Sending this command to provision a DS3NE card on Slot {1,2,4,5,6,12,13,14,16,or 17}, the DS3E
card type is presented.
2. Sending this command to provision a DS3N card on Slot {1,2,4,5,6,12,13,14,16,17}, the DS3 card
type is presented.
3. Sending this command to provision a DS1N card on Slot-{1,2,4,5,6,12,13,14,16,17}, the DS1 card
type is presented.
Error conditions for creating 1:1 or 1:N protection groups are:
1. AID sent to a non-working slot; the working cards must be in even slots for 1:1 and in the same bank
for 1:N and not in Slot 3 or Slot 15 (ONS 15454).
2. Invalid AID chosen for protection slot.
3. Working AID is already in protection group.
4. AID is a protect AID.
5. The protect card has a circuit.
6. The equipment type does not match with the allowed AID.
7. The slot is already provisioned.
8. The protecting slot is not provisioned.
9. Multiple working AIDs for 1:1 protection.
Section ENT-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
3-90
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.61 ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>: Enter Facility Protection Group (OC3, OC12, OC48,
OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command creates an optical 1+1 protection.
Notes:
1. Protect AID must not be provisioned with traffic.
2. Work AID can be provisioned with traffic.
3. PROTID is a string and can have a maximum length of 32 characters.
4. In this release, 1+1 provisioning between an OC12-4 card and an OC12 card is allowed but is not
correct. This provisioning will not be allowed in a future release.
Input Format ENT-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<AIDTYPE>:[PROTID=<PROTID>,]
[PRTYPE=<PRTYPE>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>][:];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<AIDTYPE> is the AID card type; valid values for <AIDTYPE> are shown in
the “EQUIPMENT_TYPE” section on page 4-66
<PROTID> is the protecting card slot identifier of the protection group and is
the AID from the “PRSLOT” section on page 4-16
<PRTYPE> is the protection group type; valid values for <PRTYPE> are shown
in the “PROTECTION_GROUP” section on page 4-84
<RVRTV> is the revertive mode; valid values for <RVRTV> are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> is the revertive time; valid values for <RVTM> are shown in the
“REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
Input Example ENT-EQPT:PETALUMA:SLOT-12:118::DS1:PROTID=SLOT-13,
PRTYPE=1-1,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=8.5:;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ENT-EQPT Description (continued)
Section ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> Description
Category SONET Line Protection
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
3-91
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.62 ENT-FFP-CLNT: Enter Facility Protection Group Client
This command creates Y cable protection on client facilities
Notes:
1. A Y cable protection group can be created between the client ports of either two TXP cards or two
MXP cards.
2. Y cable protection cannot be part of a regeneration group.
3. Only the working ports can be provisioned with DCC and timing reference (if DCC is present on a
card, tat card cannot be a protect card).
4. The cards must have the same payload.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Input Format ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>:[<TID>]:<WORK>,<PROTECT>:<CTAG>:::
[PROTID=<PROTID>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,]
[PSDIRN=<PSDIRN>][:];
where:
<WORK> identifies a working port and is the AID from the “FACILITY” section
on page 4-22
<PROTECT> identifies a protection port and is the AID from the “FACILITY”
section on page 4-22
<PROTID> is the protection group identifier (protection group name);
<PROTID> defaults to the protecting port AID of the protection group, it is a
string and can have a maximum length of 32 characters.
<RVRTV> identifies a revertive mode and defaults to N (non-revertive mode);
valid values for <RVRTV> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> identifies a revertive time and defaults to 5.0 minutes; valid values for
<RVTM> are shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
<PSDIRN> identifies the switching mode and defaults to UNI; valid values for
<PSDIRN> are shown in the “UNI_BI” section on page 4-97
Input Example ENT-FFP-OC3:PETALUMA:FAC-2-1,FAC-1-1:1:::PROTID=PROT_NAME,
RVRTV=Y,RVTM=1.0,PSDIRN=BI;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> Description (continued)
Section ENT-FFP-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Provisioning
3-92
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.63 ENT-UCP-CC: Enter Unified Control Plane Control Channel
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command creates a UCP IP control channel.
If the CCTYPE is SCCC, the SDCC of the port should be created.
The LMP Hello parameters, CRC mode and MTU can be left NULL. The defaults will be assigned by
the node.
The UCP remote cannot be provisioned by the user. The local CCID will be allocated by the node.
Related
Messages
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
ED-FFP-CLNT
RTRV-DWDM
ED-DWDM
OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT
RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT
RTRV-COND-CLNT
RTRV-ALM-CLNT
Input Format ENT-FFP-CLNT:[<TID>]:<WORKAID>,<PROTAID>:<CTAG>:::
[PROTTYPE=<PROTTYPE>,][PROTID=<PROTID>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,]
[RVTM=<RVTM>,][PSDIRN=<PSDIRN>][:];
where:
<WORKAID> identifies a working port and is the AID from the “FACILITY”
section on page 4-22
<PROTAID> identifies a protection port and is the AID from the “FACILITY”
section on page 4-22
<PROTTYPE> identifies the type of facility protection; valid values are shown
in the “PROTTYPE” section on page 4-84
<PROTID> protection group identifier (protection group name). Defaults to the
protecting port AID of the protection group. Is is a string and can have a
maximum length of 32 characters; <PROTID> is a string
<RVRTV> identifies the revertive mode. Defaults to N (non-revertive mode);
valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> identifies the revertive time. Defaults to 5.0 minutes; valid values are
shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
<PSDIRN> identifies the switching mode and defaults to UNI. Release 4.0
MXP/TXP cards do not support BI-DIRECTIONAL switching. Valid values for
<PSDIRN> are shown in the “UNI_BI” section on page 4-97
Input Example ENT-FFP-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-1-1,FAC-2-1:100:::PROTTYPE=Y-CABLE,
PROTID=DC-METRO-1,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=1.0,PSDIRN=BI;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ENT-FFP-CLNT Description (continued)
3-93
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
If the CCTYPE is routed, the remote IPCC defaults to its neighbor’s nodeID.
Examples:
ENT-UCP-CC::CC-12:CTAG:::NBRIX=1,CCTYPE=SDCC,PORT=FAC-6-1,
LOCALCCID=12,LOCALIPCC=172.20.209.73,REMOTEIPCC=192.168.100.18,
LMPHELLOINT=2,LMPHELLODEADINT=6,MTU=1500,CRCMD=32-BIT;
ENT-UCP-CC::CC-15:CTAG:::NBRIX=8,CCTYPE=ROUTED,LOCALCCID=15,
LOCALIPCC=172.20.209.73,REMOTEIPCC=192.168.100.18,LMPHELLOINT=2,
LMPHELLODEADINT=6,MTU=1500,CRCMD=16-BIT;
ENT-UCP-CC::CC-16:CTAG:::NBRIX=8,CCTYPE=ROUTED,LOCALCCID=16,
LOCALIPCC=172.20.209.73,LMPHELLOINT=2,LMPHELLODEADINT=6,
MTU=1500,CRCMD=16-BIT;
Notes:
1. If this command is sent twice, or input with invalid data, a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request) error
message is returned.
2. If sending this command to provision MTU, CRCMD, or both while the IPCC type is routed
(CCTYPE=ROUTED), an IIAC (Routed CC Is Not Allowed to Provision MTU and CRCMD) error
message is returned.
3. The LMPHELLODEADINT interval has to be larger than the hello interval and is normally set to 3
times the hello interval. Its range is 3 seconds to 30 seconds with a default of 15 seconds.
4. If sending this command to provision a ROUTED IPCC no matter if the neighbor discovery (NDEN)
is Enabled or Disabled, the REMOTEIPCC has to be specified by the user with non zeros, otherwise,
an error message will be returned.
5. If sending this command to provision an SDCC IPCC while the neighbor discovery (NDEN=Y) is
Enabled, the REMOTEIPCC defaults to 0.0.0.0, and the user is not allowed to specify
REMOTEIPCC, otherwise, and error message (SROF, Cannot specify Remote IPCC for
SDCC-IPCC when ND is enabled) will be returned.
6. If sending this command to provision an SDCC IPCC while the neighbor discovery (NDEN=N) is
Disabled, the REMOTEIPCC defaults to its neighbor's node ID (IP address).
7. If sending this command to provision an SDCC IPCC with a complete result, the SDCC of the
specified SONET line is created (or enabled) automatically with a DB change reporting (if the DB
change report is enabled).
8. If sending this command to provision more than 16 IPCC over one NE, a (Cannot create IPCC. Max.
number (16) reached) error message is returned.
Section ENT-UCP-CC Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-IF REPT EVT UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-IF
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-NBR
3-94
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format ENT-UCP-CC:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::[NBRIX=<NBRIX>,]
[CCTYPE=<CCTYPE>,][PORT=<PORT>,][LOCALCCID=<LOCALCCID>,]
[LOCALIPCC=<LOCALIPCC>,][REMOTCCID=<REMOTECCID>,]
[REMOTEIPCC=<REMOTEIPCC>,][LMPHELLOINT=<LMPHELLOINT>,]
[LMPHELLODEADINT=<LMPHELLODEADINT>,][MTU=<MTU>,]
[CRCMD=<CRCMD>,][TUNMD=<TUNMD>][:];
where:
<AID> indicates an individual IPCC ID and is the AID from the “IPCC” section
on page 4-16. The default value is “local IPCC ID”
<NBRIX> indicates a neighbor within the local node and is an integer
<CCTYPE> indicates the type of the control channel; valid values for
<CCTYPE> are shown in the “UCP_IPCC_TYPE” section on page 4-97
<PORT> indicates the port which the control channel is configured, while the
CCTYPE is the type of SDCC. <PORT> is the AID from the “FACILITY”
section on page 4-22 and the default value is “applicable only if it is SDCC
type”
<LOCALCCID> indicates the local control channel ID and is an integer. The
default value is “local UCP node id”
<LOCALIPCC> indicates the local IP address of the control channel and is a
string. The default value is “local node id’s node name”
<REMOTECCID> indicates the local control channel ID and is an integer. The
default value is “zero (0) – undefined until discovery by LMP”
<REMOTEIPCC> indicates the remote IP address of the control channel and is
a string. The default value is “0.0.0.0 – undefined for SDCC IPCC and
discovered by LMP
<LMPHELLOINT> indicates the LMP (line management protocol) interval (in
milliseconds). It is the time between hello messages sent by this node, defaults
to 5 (with the range of 1–10). <LMPHELLOINT> is an integer and the default
value is “5 seconds – (1–10 seconds)”
<LMPHELLODEADINT> indicates the control channel time-out interval (in
milliseconds) by the neighbor if the neighbor does not receive the hello
message, and defaults to 15 (with the range of 3–30). This interval has to be at
least as large as the hello interval and is normally set to 3 times the hello
interval. It’s range is 3–30 seconds with a default of 15 seconds.
<LMPHELLODEADINT> is an integer and it’s default value is “15 seconds –
(3–30 seconds)”
<MTU> indicates the MTU size of this control channel. <MTU> is an integer
and it’s default value is “1500 bytes”
<CRCMD> indicates the CRC mode for this control channel. It is applicable to
IPCCs in SDCC type. Valid values for <CRCMD> are shown in the
“UCP_CRC_MODE” section on page 4-97
<TUNMD> indicates the IP Tunneling option. It defaults to disabled and valid
values are shown in the “UCP_CC_TUN_MD” section on page 4-96
Section ENT-UCP-CC Description (continued)
3-95
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.64 ENT-UCP-IF: Enter Unified Control Plane Interface
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command creates a UCP interface.
The CCID can be set to zero to request the use of any control channel to the neighbor for this UCP
interface/data link.
The local interface ID (LOCALIFID) is used by LMP/RSVP (Line Management Protocol/Resource
Reservation Protocol). If zero is passed in as the local Interface ID of the data link, then the node assigns
a value for it. If the user specifies a non-zero value, then the node checks if that Interface ID is available
and uses it.
If the UCP interface/data link control channel type is SDCC type, the local interface ID should be the
same as CCID. Otherwise, an error message will be returned by the node.
The remote interface ID is allowed to be unspecified (by passing zero) if the NDEN is Enabled and there
is a SDCC IPCC specified for this UPC Interface with the same Interface Index, or when Routed IPCC
is used for this data link.
Examples:
ENT-UCP-IF::FAC-2-3:CTAG:::NBRIX=8,CCID=2,LOCALIFID=0,REMOTEIFID=4,
TNATYPE=IPV4,TNAADDR=172.20.209.162,CORENETWORKID=3;
ENT-UCP-IF::FAC-2-4:CTAG:::NBRIX=8,CCID=1,LOCALIFID=0,REMOTEIFID=4,
TNATYPE=NSAP,TNAADDR=0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F1011121314,
CORENETWORKID=3;
Note If this command is sent twice, or inputs invalid data, a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request) error message is
returned.
Input Example ENT-UCP-CC:CISCO:CC-9:CTAG:::NBRIX=8,CCTYPE=SDCC,PORT=
FAC-2-1,LOCALCCID=9,LOCALIPCC=172.20.209.162,REMOTCCID=2,
REMOTEIPCC=172.20.209.73,LMPHELLOINT=1,LMPHELLODEADINT=5,
MTU=1500,CRCMD=16-BIT,TUNMD=DISABLED;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ENT-UCP-CC Description (continued)
Section ENT-UCP-IF Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-IF REPT EVT UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-IF
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-NBR
3-96
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.65 ENT-UCP-NBR: Enter Unified Control Plane Neighbor
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command creates a UCP neighbor.
The default value of the node name can be overwritten by the TL1 user to a string in a maximum size of
20 characters. If the node name includes non-identified TL1 characters (e.g. space), the text string format
with the double quotes is required.
Notes:
1. If this command is sent twice or inputs invalid data, a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request) error message
is returned.
2. If sending this command without neighbor node name in the “NAME” field, an IIAC (Neighbor
Name Can Not be Empty) error message is returned.
3. If sending this command with nodeid while the neighbor discovery is enabled (NDEN=Y), an IIAC
(NODEID Is Not Allowed If NDEN Is Enabled) error message is returned.
Input Format ENT-UCP-IF:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[NBRIX=<NBRIX>,][CCID=<CCID>,]
[LOCALIFID=<LOCALIFID>,][REMOTEIFID=<REMOTEIFID>,]
[TNATYPE=<TNATYPE>,][TNAADDR=<TNAADDR>,]
[CORENETWORKID=<CORENETWORKID>][:];
where:
<AID> indicates the interface port index of the data link and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<NBRIX> indicates a neighbor within the local node and is an integer
<CCID> indicates the control channel ID. It can be set to zero to request the use
of any control channel to the neighbor for this UCP interface/ data link. <CCID>
is an integer. A null value defaults to “any control channel to the neighbor”
<LOCALIFID> indicates the local interface ID used by LMP/RSVP (Line
Management Protocol/Resource reservation Protocol). If this attribute value is
assigned by the UI, it will be ignored. <LOCALIFID> is an integer
<REMOTEIFID> indicates the remote interface ID on the neighbor's side. If this
attribute value is passed by UI, it will be ignored. <REMOTEIFID> is an integer
<TNATYPE> indicates the TNA (Transport Network Administered) type and
defaults to IPv4. Valid values for <TNATYPE> are shown in the
“UCP_TNA_TYPE” section on page 4-97. The default value is “IPv4
<TNAADDR> indicates the TNA (Transport Network Administered) IP address
and defaults to IPv4 0.0.0.0. <TNAADDR> is a string. The default value is “0”
<CORENETWORKID> indicates the core network ID and defaults to one (1).
<CORENETWORKID> is an integer and the default value is “1”
Input Example ENT-UCP-IF:CISCO:FAC-2-1:CTAG:::NBRIX=12,CCID=16,LOCALIFID=16,
REMOTEIFID=0,TNATYPE=IPV4,TNAADDR=172.20.209.162,
CORENETWORKID=7;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ENT-UCP-IF Description (continued)
3-97
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
4. If sending this command to set the hello interval while the RSVP hello is disabled, an IIAC
(HELLOINT Is Not Allowed If HELLOEN Is Disabled) error message is returned.
5. If provisioning a neighbor with disabled neighbor discovery (NDEN=N), and NULL nodeid, a
SROF (UCP Neighbor's NodeID cannot be null when Neighbor Discovery is disabled) is returned.
6. If sending this command to create a neighbor with the neighbor node name string longer than 64
characters, an IIAC (Node Name Too Long) error message is returned.
Section ENT-UCP-NBR Description
Category UCP
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-IF REPT EVT UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-IF
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-IF
3-98
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format ENT-UCP-NBR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[NBRIX=<NBRIX>,]
[NODEID=<NODEID>,]NAME=<NAME>,[NDEN=<NDEN>,]
[HELLOEN=<HELLOEN>,][HELLOINT=<HELLOINT>,]
[REFREDEN=<REFREDEN>,][NUMRXMTS=<NUMRXMTS>][:];
where:
<AID> indicates an individual neighbor index of the UCP. An available
neighbor index will be assigned internally while sending this command without
AID; <AID> is the AID from the “NBR” section on page 4-16
<NBRIX> indicates a neighbor within the local node. <NBRIX > is an integer
and the default value is “the number of the AID (NBR-#). Or undefined zero (0)”
<NODEID> indicates the neighbor node ID as received in RSVP, LMP
messages from that node and is a string
<NAME> indicates the neighbor node name, it has to be specified by the user.
If the node name includes non-identified TL1 characters (e.g. space), the text
string format with the double quotes is required. <NAME> is a string
<NDEN> indicates if the neighbor discovery is enabled or not for this neighbor
and it defaults to enable (Y). The default value is “Y”. Valid values for <NDEN>
are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<HELLOEN> indicates if the RSVP hello is enabled to this neighbor or not and
defaults to enable (Y). The default value is “Y”. Valid values for <HELLOEN>
are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<HELLOINT> indicates the interval between hello messages to neighbor and
defaults to 5. The default value is “5”. <HELLOINT> is an integer
<REFREDEN> indicates if the refresh reduction is enabled or not and defaults
to enable (Y). The default value is “Y”. Valid values for <REFREDEN> are
shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<NUMRXMTS> indicates the maximum number of retransmits of each
message and defaults to 3. The default value is “3”. <NUMRXMTS> is an
integer
Input Example ENT-UCP-NBR:CISCO:NBR-8:CTAG:::NBRIX=8,NODEID=192.168.100.52,
NAME=NODE-A,NDEN=Y,HELLOEN=Y,HELLOINT=20,REFREDEN=Y,
NUMRXMTS=3;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ENT-UCP-NBR Description (continued)
3-99
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.66 ENT-USER-SECU: Enter User Security
This command adds a user account. Only a Superuser can do this. Each user is configured as being at
one of these four privilege levels:
1. Retrieve [RTRV]: Users possessing this security level can retrieve information from the node, but
cannot modify anything. The default idle time for Retrieve is unlimited.
2. Maintenance [MAINT]: Users possessing this security level can retrieve information from the node
and perform limited maintenance operations such as card resets, Manual/Force/Lockout on
cross-connects or in protection groups, and BLSR maintenance. The default idle time for
Maintenance is 60 minutes.
3. Provisioning [PROV]: Users possessing this security level can perform all maintenance actions, and
all provisioning actions except those restricted to superusers. The default idle time for Provisioning
is 30 minutes.
4. Superuser [SUPER]: Users possessing this security level can perform all PROV user actions, plus
creating/deleting user security profiles, setting basic system parameters such as time/date, node
name, and IP address, doing database backup & restore. The default idle time for Superuser is 15
minutes.
Notes:
1. Passwords are masked for the following security commands: ACT-USER, ED-PID,
ENT-USER-SECU and ED-USER-SECU. Access to a TL1 session via any means will have the
password masked. The CTC Request History and Message Log will also show the masked
commands. When a password-masked command is re-issued by double-clicking the command from
CTC Request History, the password will still be masked in the CTC Request History and Message
Log. The actual password that was previously issued will be sent to the NE. To use a former
command as a template only, single-click the command in CTC Request History. The command will
be placed in the Command Request text box, where you can edit the appropriate fields prior to
re-issuing it.
2. The <UID> can be any combination of up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
3. The <PID> is a string of up to 10 characters where at least 2 characters are non-alphabetic with at
least one special character (+, %, or #).
4. Although the CTC allows both <UID> and <PID> of up to 20 characters, the CTC-entered users
(<UID> and <PID>) may not be valid TL1 users (e.g. if issuing an ACT-USER command and using
the CTC-entered <UID> that is greater than 10 characters long, TL1 will respond with DENY (Can’t
Login) error message.
5. The TL1 password security is enforced as follows:
a. The password <PID> cannot be the same as or contain the userid (UID), for example, if the
userid is CISCO25 the password cannot be CISCO25#.
b. The password <PID> must have one non-alphabetic and one special (+, %, or #) character.
c. There is no password <PID> toggling; for example, if the current password is CISCO25#, the
new password cannot be CISCO25#
Section ENT-USER-SECU Description
Category Security
Security Superuser
3-100
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.67 EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>: Operate Protection Switch (OC12, OC48, OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command exercises the algorithm for switching from a working facility to a protection facility
without actually performing a switch. It is assumed that the facility being exercised is the working unit.
The exercise switching success or failure result will be indicated by an automatic alarm.
Exercise switch for the SONET protection line is not supported in this release. If sending this command
to the protection unit, an error message will be returned. In addition to all normal INPUT, EQUIPAGE,
PRIVILEGE error codes, the following error codes are also included in this command:
SNVS (Status, Not in Valid State)
SROF (Status, Requested Operation Failed)
SSRD (Status, Switch Request Denied)
Related
Messages
ACT-USER
CANC
CANC-USER
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-PID
ED-USER-SECU
REPT EVT SECU
RTRV-USER-SECU
Input Format ENT-USER-SECU:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>::<PID>,,<UAP>[:];
where:
<UID> is the user identifier. The minimum <UID> size is 6, the maximum
<UID> size is 10; <UID> is a string.
<PID> is a string.
<UAP> is the user access privilege value; valid values for <UAP> are shown in
the “PRIVILEGE” section on page 4-83
Input Example ENT-USER-SECU:PETALUMA:CISCO15:123::PSWD11#,,MAINT;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section ENT-USER-SECU Description (continued)
Section EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR> Description
Category SONET Line Protection
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
3-101
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.68 INH-MSG-ALL: Inhibit Message All
This command inhibits all REPT ALM and REPT EVT autonomous messages from being transmitted.
See the ALW-MSG-ALL to resume these autonomous messages. When a TL1 session starts, the REPT
ALM and REPT EVT messages are allowed by default.
Note If this command is used twice in the same session, the SAIN (Already Inhibited) error message is
reported.
Input Format EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>:[TID]:<AID>:[CTAG]::[<ST>];
where:
<AID> identifies the facility in the NE to which the switch request is directed.
<AID> is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22. <AID> must not be null.
<ST> is the BLSR switch type. the switch type is optional and for BLSR
protection switch only. <ST> defaults to RING switch type and valid values are
shown in the “SWITCH_TYPE” section on page 4-89. A null value is equivalent
to ALL.
Input Example EX-SW-OC48:CISCO:FAC-12-1:123::SPAN;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR> Description (continued)
Section INH-MSG-ALL Description
Category System
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL RTRV-HDR
APPLY RTRV-INV
COPY-RFILE RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-DAT RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INIT-SYS RTRV-TOD
REPT EVT FXFR SET-TOD
Input Format INH-MSG-ALL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>[::,,];
Input Example INH-MSG-ALL:PETALUMA::550;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-102
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.69 INH-MSG-DBCHG: Inhibit Database Change Message
This command disables REPT DBCHG.
3.4.70 INH-MSG-SECU: Inhibit Message Security
This command inhibits the REPT EVT SECU and REPT ALM SECU messages.
3.4.71 INH-PMREPT-ALL: Inhibit Performance Report All
This command inhibits all scheduled PM reporting. The inhibitance of the PM reporting is
session-based, which means the command is only effective to the TL1 session that issues this command.
By default, the scheduled PM reporting is inhibited by a TL1 session.
A TL1 session for which PM reports are inhibited will include an INHMSG-PMREPT condition when
issuing TL1 command RTRV-COND-ALL.
Section INH-MSG-DBCHG Description
Category Log
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-DBCHG
REPT DBCHG
RTRV-LOG
Input Format INH-MSG-DBCHG:[<TID>]::<CTAG>[::,,];
Input Example INH-MSG-DBCHG:CISCO::123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section INH-MSG-SECU Description
Category Security
Security Superuser
Related
Messages
ACT-USER ED-USER-SECU
ALW-MSG-SECU ENT-USER-SECU
CANC REPT EVT SECU
CANC-USER REPT EVT SESSION
DLT-USER-SECU RTRV-USER-SECU
ED-PID
Input Format INH-MSG-SECU:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example INH-MSG-SECU:PETALUMA::123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section INH-PMREPT-ALL Description
Category Performance
Security Retrieve
3-103
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.72 INH-SWDX-EQPT: Inhibit Switch Duplex Equipment
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command inhibits automatic or manual switching on a system containing duplex equipment. Use
the ALW-SWDX command to release the inhibit. This command is not used for SONET line protection
switching. For SONET line/path protection switching commands, use the OPR-PROTNSW and
RLS-PROTNSW commands. This command is not used for 1:1 and 1:N equipment protection switching,
use ALW-SWTOPROTN, ALW-SWTOWKG, INH-SWTOPROTN, INH-SWTOWKG commands.
Notes:
1. This command applies for XC, XCVT, or XC10G equipment units only in this release.
2. When sending this command to a TCC+/TCC2 card, an error message will occur because the NE
treats the TCC+/TCC2 as a non-revertive protection group without user control.
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INIT-REG-<MOD2> RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> SET-TH-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
Input Format INH-PMREPT-ALL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example INH-PMREPT-ALL:NE-NAME::123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section INH-PMREPT-ALL Description (continued)
Section INH-SWDX-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
ENT-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Input Format INH-SWDX-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::];
where:
<AID> is the XC/XCVT/XC10G equipment AID (Slot 8 or Slot 10) from the
“EQPT” section on page 4-21
Input Example INH-SWDX-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-1:1234;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-104
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.73 INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT: Inhibit Switch to Protection Equipment
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command inhibits automatic or manual switching of an equipment unit to protection. Use the
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT command to release the inhibit.
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT is used for non-SONET line cards (e.g. DS1, DS3, DS3XM and EC1 cards).
DS1 and DS3 cards have 1:1 and 1:N equipment protection. DS3XM and EC1 cards have only 1:1
equipment protection. When performing a lockout with this command, the traffic will be switched from
the unit specified by the AID, unless the working unit being protected has failed or is missing. When
performing a lock on with this command and the working unit specified in the AID is in standby, sending
this command will also initiate a traffic switch. When traffic is locked on a working unit or locked out
of the protection unit with this command, the protection unit will not carry traffic, even if the working
unit is pulled from the system.
Sending this command to a working unit in a 1:N protection group does not prevent a protection switch
from another working unit in the same protection group. All the working units must be sent this
command to prevent a protection switch. If the command is sent only to a subset of the working units,
only those working units will have traffic locked on.
The inhibit state is persistent over TCC+/TCC2 side switches and removal/reboot of all the units in the
protection group. The inhibit state can, but does not have to be persistent over a complete power cycle
of the NE.
The unit specified by the AID will raise the condition of INHSWPR when this command is sent.
Notes:
1. This command only supports one value of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. A command with any other
value is considered an incorrect use of the command. An IDNV (Input, Data Not Valid) error
message should be responsed.
2. This command is not used for the common control (TCC+/TCC2 or XC/XCVT/XC10G) cards. A
command on a common control card will receive an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message. To use the common control card switching commands, use the SW-DX-EQPT and
ALW-SWDX-EQPT commands.
3. This command is not used for SONET (OCN) cards. A command on a SONET card will receive an
IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error message. To use a SONET card switching command,
use the OPR-PROTNSW and RLS-PROTNSW commands.
4. If this command is used on a card that is not in a protection group, the SNVS (Status, Not in Valid
State) error message should be received.
5. If this command is used on a card that is already in the inhibit state, the SAIN (Status, Already
Inhibited) error message should be received.
6. If sending the inhibit switch to protection command to a working card when the protect card in the
same protection group has already raised the condition of INHSWWKG, the SPLD (Status,
Protection unit Locked) error message should be responsed.
7. If sending the inhibit switch to protection command to the protect card when a working card in the
same protection group has already raised the condition of INHSWWKG, the SWLD (Status,
Working unit Locked) error message should be responsed.
8. Sending the inhibit switch to protection command to an active protect card when the peer working
card is failed or missing, the SWFA (Status, Working unit Failed) error message should be
responsed.
3-105
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
9. The following situation(s) are allowed and will not generate any error response: sending this
command to missing cards as long as none of the previous error conditions apply.
3.4.74 INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT: Inhibit Switch to Working Equipment
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command inhibits automatic or manual switching of an equipment unit back to the working unit.
Use the ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT command to release the inhibit.
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT is used for non-SONET line cards (e.g. DS1, DS3, DS3XM and EC1 cards).
DS1 and DS3 cards have 1:1 and 1:N equipment protection. DS3XM and EC1 cards have only 1:1
equipment protection. When performing a lock-out with this command, the traffic will be switched from
the unit specified by the AID, unless the protection unit has failed or is missing. When performing a
lock-on with this command and the protection unit specified in the AID is in standby, sending this
command will initiate a traffic switch only when there is one working card in the protection group. In
the case where there is more than one working card in the protection group, an error will be generated
(see error conditions below). When traffic is locked on the protection unit or locked out of a working
unit with this command, the working unit will not carry traffic, even if the protection unit is pulled from
the system.
The inhibit state is persistent over TCC+/TCC2 side switches and removal/reboot of all the units in the
protection group. The inhibit state can but does not have to be persistent over a complete power cycle of
the NE.
The unit specified by the AID will raise the condition of INHSWWKG when this command is sent.
Section INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
ENT-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Input Format INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::<DIRN>];
where:
<AID> This parameter can either be the working unit for which switching to
protection is inhibited (lock on) or the protection unit for which carrying traffic
is to be inhibited (lockout); <AID> is from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<DIRN> is the direction of the switching. The command only supports one value
of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. This parameter defaults to BTH; valid values
for <DIRN> are shown in the DIRECTION, page 60
Input Example INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-2:123::BTH;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-106
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Notes:
1. The command only supports one value of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. A command with any other
value is considered an incorrect use of the command. An IDNV (Input, Data Not Valid) error
message should be responsed.
2. This command is not used for the common control (TCC+/TCC2 or XC/XCVT/XC10G) cards. A
command on a common control card will receive an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message. To use the common control card switching commands, use the SW-DX-EQPT and
ALW-SWDX-EQPT commands.
3. This command is not used for SONET (OCN) cards. A command on a SONET card will receive an
IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error message. To use a SONET card switching command,
use the OPR-PROTNSW and RLS-PROTNSW commands.
4. If this command is used on a card that is not in a protection group, the SNVS (Status, Not in Valid
State) error message should be received.
5. If this command is used on a card that is already in the inhibit state, the SAIN (Status, Already
Inhibited) error message should be received.
6. If sending this command to a working card when the protect card in the same protection group has
already raised the condition of INHSWPR, the SPLD (Status, Protection unit Locked) error message
should be received.
7. If sending the INH-SWTOWKG command to a protect card when a working card in the same
protection group has already raised the condition of INHSWPR, the SWLD (Status, Working unit
Locked) error message should be responsed.
8. If sending the INH-SWTOWKG command to an active working card when the protect card has failed
or is missing, the SPFA (Status, Protection unit Failed) error message should be received.
9. If sending the INH-SWTOWKG command to an active working card when the protect card is
already carrying traffic (this only occurs in a 1:N protection group with N greater than one), the
SPAC (Status, Protection unit Active) error message should be received.
10. The following situation is allowed and will not generate any error response: Sending this command
to missing cards as long as none of the previous error conditions apply.
Section INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
ENT-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
3-107
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::<DIRN>];
where:
<AID> This parameter can either be the protection unit for which switching back
to working is inhibited (lock-on) or the working unit for which carrying traffic is
to be inhibited (lockout); <AID> is from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<DIRN> is the direction of the switching. The command only supports one value
of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. This parameter defaults to BTH; valid values
for <DIRN> are shown in the DIRECTION, page 60
Input Example INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-2:123::BTH;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT Description (continued)
3-108
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.75 INIT-REG-<MOD2>: Initialize Register (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12, OC48,
OC192, OCH, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C,
T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command initializes the performance monitoring (PM) registers.
Notes:
1. The time period is always the current time period, and the previous time period counts are not
cleared; therefore, both <MONDAT> and <MONTM> are not supported in this command.
2. Both transmit and receive directions are allowed in DS1, other cards only support the receive
direction.
Section INIT-REG-<MOD2> Description
Category Performance
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL
INH-PMREPT-ALL
INIT-REG-G1000
REPT PM <MOD2>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
SET-TH-<MOD2>
Input Format INIT-REG-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::,,[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],
[<TMPER>][,,];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier. All the STS, VT1, facility and DS1 AIDs are
supported; <AID> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<LOCN> indicates the location, in reference to the entity identified by the AID,
valid values for <LOCN> are shown in the “LOCATION” section on page 4-71
<DIRN> is the direction of PM relative to the entity identified by the AID.
<DIRN> defaults to ALL, which means that the command initializes all the
registers irrespective of the PM direction. Valid values for <DIRN> are shown
in the “DIRECTION” section on page 4-60.
<TMPER> indicates the accumulation time period for the PM information; valid
values for <TMPER> are shown in the “TMPER” section on page 4-93. A null
value of <TMPER> defaults to 15-MIN. The default value is 15-MIN.
Input Example INIT-REG-OC3:CISCO:FAC-1-1:1234::,,NEND,BTH,15-MIN;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-109
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.76 INIT-SYS: Initialize System
This command initializes the specified card and its associated subsystem(s).
Notes:
1. The SLOT-ALL AID and the list AID are not allowed in this command.
2. Only one level of restart is supported in this command.
3. It is important that the standby TCC+/TCC2 should be up and running fully standby before this
command is sent on the active TCC+/TCC2 for a period of time. During this time, the system is
vulnerable to traffic outages caused by timing disruptions or other causes.
3.4.77 OPR-ACO-ALL: Operate Alarm Cutoff All
This command cuts off the office audible alarm indication without changing the local alarm indications.
This command does not have any effect on future alarms at the NE, it directs the NE to provide
conditioning only on those alarms that are currently active.
The ACO retires the Central Office (CO) alarm audible indicators without clearing the indicators that
show the trouble still exists. There is no need for a RLS-ACO command.
Section INIT-SYS Description
Category System
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL RTRV-HDR
APPLY RTRV-INV
COPY-RFILE RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-DAT RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-TOD
REPT EVT FXFR SET-TOD
Input Format INIT-SYS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier of the equipment unit or slot and is from the
“EQPT” section on page 4-21
Input Example INIT-SYS:HOTWATER:SLOT-8:201;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section OPR-ACO-ALL Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Maintenance
3-110
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.78 OPR-EXT-CONT: Operate External Control
This command operates an external control and closes the external control contact. The control can be
operated momentarily or continuously.
Notes:
1. The duration has two values in this release:
MNTRY: Momentary duration
CONTS: Continuos duration
2. In an automatic state, the contact could be opened or closed depending on the provisioned trigger.
3. RLS-EXT-CONT changes the state to automatic. Therefore, issuing an OPR-EXT-CONT command
when the control is manually open and then issuing a RLS-EXT-CONT will not revert the state back
to Manual Open.
4. A NULL value for the duration parameter defaults to MNTRY in this release.
5. The RLS-EXT-CONT is not allowed during the MNTRY duration, the command is allowed for the
CONTS duration. The length of the MNTRY duration is set to be 2 seconds on Cisco ONS 15454.
Caution Do not turn on external controls that activate a potential danger; such as, sprinklers or other controls
connected to possibly hazardous systems or equipment.
Related
Messages
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-ATTR-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT ENV RTRV-EXT-CONT
RLS-EXT-CONT SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV SET-ATTR-ENV
RTRV-ATTR-CONT
Input Format OPR-ACO-ALL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example OPR-ACO-ALL:CISCO::123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section OPR-ACO-ALL Description (continued)
Section OPR-EXT-CONT Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
OPR-ACO-ALL RTRV-ATTR-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT ENV RTRV-EXT-CONT
RLS-EXT-CONT SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV SET-ATTR-ENV
RTRV-ATTR-CONT
3-111
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.79 OPR-LPBK-<MOD2>: Operate Loopback (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC12, OC192,
OC3, OC48, OCH, STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C,
STS9C, T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command operates a signal loopback on an I/O card or on a cross-connect.
The optional [<LPBKTYPE>] defaults to FACILITY in this command if it is given to a port entity. It
defaults to CRS if given to an STS entity.
Notes:
1. The value CRS for the LPBKTYPE parameter is applicable only for the STS modifier. The
FACILITY and TERMINAL values are applicable to the ports.
2. The TERMINAL loopback type is not supported for the DS1 line of a DS3XM card.
3. Loopbacks are only allowed to be setup if the port/interface/STS_PATH is in OOS-MT or in
OOS-AINS state.
4. Cross-connect loopbacks cannot be applied:
to the destination end of a 1WAY cross-connects
to non-optical boards
to VT1.5
if a a terminal/facility loopback is already applied
on a protect card in 1+1 (working mode)
5. A cross-connect loopback can be applied only on one STS path of a cross-connect.
Input Format OPR-EXT-CONT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<CONTTYPE>],[<DURATION>];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier environment AID from the “ENV” section on
page 4-20 and must not be null
<CONTTYPE> is the type of control; valid values for <CONTTYPE> are shown
in the “CONTTYPE” section on page 4-59. A null value is equivalent to ALL.
Valid values for <DUR> are shown in the “DURATION” section on page 4-62.
A null value is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example OPR-EXT-CONT:CISCO:ENV-OUT-2:123::AIRCOND,CONTS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section OPR-EXT-CONT Description (continued)
Section OPR-LPBK-<MOD2> Description
Category Testing
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
RLS-LPBK-<MOD2>
3-112
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.80 OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>: Operate Protection Switch (OC3, OC12,
OC48, OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command initiates a SONET line protection switch request. User switch requests initiated with this
command remain active until they are released via the RLS-PROTNSW-OCN command or are
overridden by a higher priority protection switch request.
The switch commands; MAN (Manual Switch), FRCD (Forced Switch) and LOCKOUT (Lockout) are
supported by the ONS 15454.
Manual Switch of Protection Line (to Working Line). If the AID identifies the protection line, then (only
in the 1+1 architecture) service will be transferred from the protection line to the working line, unless a
request of equal or higher priority is in effect.
Manual Switch of Working Line (to Protection Line). If the AID identifies a working line, then service
will be switched from the working line to the protection line unless a request of equal or higher priority
is in effect.
Force Switch of Protection Line (to Working Line). If the AID identifies the protection line, then (only
in the 1+1 architecture) service will be transferred from the protection line to the working line unless a
request of equal or higher priority is in effect.
Force Switch of Working Line (to Protection Line). If the AID identifies a working line, then service
will be transferred from the working line to the protection line unless a request of equal or higher priority
is in effect. A lockout of protection and a signal fail of protection line have higher priority than this
switch command.
Lockout of Protection Line. If the AID identifies the protection line, this switch command will prevent
the working line from switching to protection line. If the working line is already on protection, then the
working line will be switched back to its original working line.
Lockout of Protection Line. If the AID identifies protection line, this switch command will prevent the
working line from switching to protection line. If the working line is already on protection, then the
working line will be switched back from protection line to its original working line.
Notes:
1. This command is not used for the common control (TCC+/TCC2 or XC/XCVT/XC10G) cards. A
query on a common control card will generate an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message. To use this command on the common control card switching commands, use the
SW-DX-EQPT and ALW-SWDX-EQPT commands.
Input Format OPR-LPBK-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>::,,,[<LPBKTYPE>];
where:
<SRC> is an access identifier from the “DS1” section on page 4-20. Valid values
for AID are facility, DS1, and STS.
<LPBKTYPE> is a loopback type; valid values for <LPBKTYPE> are shown in
the “LPBK_TYPE” section on page 4-71
Input Example OPR-LPBK-DS1:PTREYES:DS1-4-1-2-13:203::,,,FACILITY;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section OPR-LPBK-<MOD2> Description (continued)
3-113
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
2. Sending this command on non-SONET (OCN) cards, an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message should be received. To query on a non-SONET card switching command, use the
ALW-SWTOPROTN/SWTOWKG-EQPT and INH-SWTOPROTN/SWTOWKG-EQPT commands.
3. When sending this command to query on a card that is not in a protection group, the SNVS (Status,
Not in Valid State) error message should be received.
4. When sending this command to a working card that is failed or missing, the SROF (Protection
Switching Failed) error message should be received.
5. When sending this command to a protect card that is failed or missing, the SROF (Protection
Switching Failed) error message should be received.
6. When sending this command to a card that is already in protection with a higher priority, the SSRD
(Status, Switch Request Denied) error message should be received.
7. Sending this command to an OCN line with a switching mode that is already in mode, will return a
SAMS (Already in the Maintenance State) error message.
8. To get the protection switching state (manual, lockout, forced), use the RTRV-COND-ALL or
RTRV-ALM-ALL commands.
9. If the far end of the same span has a higher protection switching state, for example, the near end is
under Manual protection switching state, the far end is in the Forced protection switching state, the
near end protection switching state will be preemptive and shown as APS_CLEAR switching state
over the CTC/TL1 interface. The RTRV-PROTNSW-OCN command is used to retrieve the current
switching state of a SONET line.
10. If sending this command with EXERCISE or APS_CLEAR switch operation, an error SROF
(Invalid Protection Switch Operation) will be returned because these operations are not valid
according to GR-833-CORE.
The EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR> is the correct command to perform the EXERCISE switch over the
BLSR line.
11. Protection switch will be denied if SD/SF is already present on the switching path. If SD/SF is
generated on the switching path after the switch is performed, the switch will be overwritten by the
APS_CLEAR state. This does not apply for lockout of protection and forced switch which have
higher priority than SD/SF.
Section OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> Description
Category SONET Line Protection
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
3-114
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.81 OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>: Operate Protection Switch (STS1, STS3C,
STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command initiates a SONET path protection (UPSR) switch request. User switch requests initiated
with this command (forced switch, lockout, and manual switch) remain active until they are released
through the RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> command or overridden by a higher priority protection
switch request.
Notes:
1. This command applies to UPSR configuration only.
2. The VTAID should be working or protect AID only.
3. If you send this command on the Drop AID, a DENY (Invalid AID, should use working/protect AID)
message will be returned.
4. To get the protection switching state (manual, lockout, forced), use the RTRV-COND-ALL or
RTRV-ALM-ALL commands.
5. The GR-1400 does not allow the LOCKOUT_OF_WORKING on the UPSR WORKING path/AID.
Sending this command on the UPSR WORKING path, a SROF (Invalid Protection Switch
Operation) is returned.
6. If sending this command with EXERCISE or APS_CLEAR switch operation, an error SROF
(Invalid Protection Switch Operation) will be returned because these operations are not valid
according to GR-833-CORE.
7. Protection switch will be denied if SD/SF is already present on the switching path. If SD/SF is
generated on the switching path after the switch is performed, the switch will be overwritten by the
APS_CLEAR state. This does not apply for lockout of protection and forced switch which have
higher priority than SD/SF.
Input Format OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<SC>,
[<SWITCHTYPE>];
where:
<AID> identifies the facility in the NE to which the switch request is directed
and is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<SC> is the switch command on the facility; valid values for <SC> are shown
in the “SW” section on page 4-88
Valid values for <SWITCHTYPE> are shown in the “SWITCH_TYPE” section
on page 4-89
Caution MANWKSWBK, MANWKSWPR, FRCDWKSWBK, FRCDWKSWPR,
LOCKOUTOFPR, and LOCKOUTOFWK do not apply to BLSR
protection switching.
Input Example OPR-PROTNSW-OC48:PETALUMA:FAC-6-1:204::LOCKOUT,SPAN;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> Description (continued)
3-115
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.82 OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT: Operate Protection Switch Client
This command instructs the NE to initiate a Y cable protection switch request. User switch requests
initiated with this command remain active until they are released via the RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT
command or are overridden by a higher priority protection switch request.
The switch commands MAN (Manual Switch), FRCD (Forced Switch) and LOCKOUT (Lockout) switch
command are supported by the Cisco ONS 15454.
Manual Switch of Protection Line (to Working Line) -- If the AID identifies the protection line, then
service will be transferred from the protection line to the working line, unless a request of equal or higher
priority is in effect.
Manual Switch of Working Line (to Protection Line) -- If the AID identifies a working line, then service
will be switched from the working line to the protection line unless a request of equal or higher priority
is in effect.
Force Switch of Protection Line (to Working Line) -- If the AID identifies the protection line, then
service will be transferred from the protection line to the working line unless a request of equal or higher
priority is in effect.
Force Switch of Working Line (to Protection Line) -- If the AID identifies a working line, then service
will be transferred from the working line to the protection line unless a request of equal or higher priority
is in effect. A lockout of protection and a signal fail of protection line have higher priority than this
switch command.
Lockout of Protection Line -- If the AID identifies protection line, this switch command will prevent the
working line from switching to protection line. If the working line is already on protection, then the
working line will be switched back from protection line to its original working line.
Section OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> Description
Category UPSR Switching
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1
REPT SW
RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1
RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1
Input Format OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<SC>[:];
where:
<AID> identifies the entity in the NE to which the switch request is directed and
is from the “STS” section on page 4-24
<SC> is the switch command that is to be initiated on the paths; valid values for
<SC> are shown in the “SW” section on page 4-88
Input Example OPR-PROTNSW-STS1:CISCO:STS-2-1-1:123::MAN;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-116
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Lockout of Protection Line -- If the AID identifies protection line, this switch command will prevent the
working line from switching to protection line. If the working line is already on protection, then the
working line will be switched back from protection line to its original working line.
If this command is used against pre-provisioned cards, the SROF (Protection Switching Failed) error will
be returned.
3.4.83 OPR-PROTNSW-VT1: Operate Virtual Tributary Protection Switch VT1
This command initiates a SONET path protection (UPSR) switch request. User switch requests initiated
with this command (forced switch, lockout, and manual switch) remain active until they are released
through the RLS-PROTNSW-VT1 command or overridden by a higher priority protection switch
request.
Notes:
1. This command applies to UPSR configuration only.
2. The VTAID should be working or protect AID only.
3. If you send this command on the Drop AID, a DENY (Invalid AID, should use working/protect AID)
message will be returned.
4. To get protection switching state (manual, lockout, forced), use the RTRV-COND-ALL or
RTRV-ALM-ALL commands.
5. The GR-1400 does not allow the LOCKOUT_OF_WORKING on the UPSR WORKING path/AID.
Sending this command on the UPSR WORKING path, a SROF (Invalid Protection Switch
Operation) is returned.
Section OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
ED-FFP-CLNT
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
RTRV-COND-CLNT
RTRV-ALM-CLNT
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
ED-FFP-CLNT
ENT-FFP-CLNT
Input Format OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<SC>[:];
where:
<AID> is the AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
Valid values for <SC> are shown in the “SW” section on page 4-88
Input Example OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-1-1:100::FRCD;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-117
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
6. If sending this command with EXERCISE or APS_CLEAR switch operation, an error SROF
(Invalid Protection Switch Operation) will be returned because these operations are not valid
according to GR-833-CORE.
Sending this command with CLEAR switch operation is not a valid operation per GR-833, the NE
will clear the state of the line. This behavior will be corrected in a future release.
3.4.84 OPR-SYNCNSW: Operate Synchronization Switch
This command initiates a switch to the reference specified by the synchronization reference number if
the reference supplied is valid.
For manual types of switches the reference to which you want to switch should be of the same quality
as the active reference source, otherwise the command will fail.
If you want to switch to a reference of lower quality, use the forced switch option.
The Operate Synchronization Switches are released by the RLS-SYNCNSW command or are overridden
by a synchronization reference failure.
Once the switch is effective, a minor alarm “MANSWTOPRI” (Manual Switch to Primary or Secondary
Reference...) will be raised for Manual switches and alarms like “FRCDSWTOPRI” (Forced Switch to
Primary or Secondary Reference...) will be raised for Forced switches.
Section OPR-PROTNSW-VT1 Description
Category UPSR Switching
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
REPT SW
RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1
RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1
Input Format OPR-PROTNSW-VT1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<SC>[:];
where:
<AID> identifies the entity in the NE to which the switch request is directed and
is from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<SC> is the switch command that is to be initiated on the paths; valid values for
<SC> are shown in the “SW” section on page 4-88
Input Example OPR-PROTNSW-VT1:CISCO:VT1-5-2-4-1:123::MAN;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section OPR-SYNCNSW Description
Category Synchronization
Security Maintenance
3-118
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.85 REPT ALM <MOD2ALM>: Report Alarm (CLNT, DS1, E100, E1000, EC1,
FSTE, G1000, GIGE, OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, POS, STS1, STS12C, STS192C,
STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C, STS9C, T1, T3, UDCDCC, UDCF, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
Reports an alarm condition against a facility or a path.
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
ED-SYNCN RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-NE-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-SYNCN
RLS-SYNCNSW
Input Format OPR-SYNCNSW:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>::<SWITCHTO>,[<SC>];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “SYNC_REF” section on page 4-28. THe
default value is SYNC-NE.
<SWITCHTO> identifies the new synchronization reference that will be used
and is the AID from the “SYNCSW” section on page 4-29
<SC> is the switch command to be issued. Only manual (MAN) and forced
(FRCD) switches are allowed for this command. Valid values for <SC> are
shown in the “SW” section on page 4-88. The default value is “MAN”
Input Example OPR-SYNCNSW:CISCO:SYNC-NE:3::PRI,MAN;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section OPR-SYNCNSW Description (continued)
Section REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-ENV
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-ALM-BITS RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-ENV RTRV-COND-UCP
3-119
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.86 REPT ALM BITS: Report Alarm Building Integrated Timing Supply
Reports an alarm condition on a BITS facility.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
** ATAG REPT ALM <MOD2ALM>
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>],
[<AIDDET>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<NTFCNCDE> indicates a 2-letter notification code; valid values for
<NTFCNCDE> are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> indicates an alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE>
are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
<AIDDET> specifies the AID type; valid values for <AIDDET> are shown in the
“EQPT_TYPE” section on page 4-63, <AIDDET> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
** 100.100 REPT ALM CLNT
“FAC-2-1:MJ,LOS,SA,,,,:\“LOSS OF SIGNAL\”,OC12”
;
Section REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> Description (continued)
Section REPT ALM BITS Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-ENV
ED-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-EQPT
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RLS-SYNCNSW RTRV-COND-UCP
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-NE-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-SYNCN
3-120
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.87 REPT ALM COM: Report Alarm COM
Reports an alarm condition when an AID cannot be given, for example, a fan failure is reported using
this message.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
** ATAG REPT ALM BITS
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “BITS” section on page 4-18
<NTFCNCDE> identifies a 2-letter notification code; valid values for
<NTFCNCDE> are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> indicates an alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE>
are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
** 100.100 REPT ALM BITS
“BITS-1:MJ,SYNC,SA,,,,:\“LOSS OF TIMING\””
;
Section REPT ALM BITS Description (continued)
Section REPT ALM COM Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-ENV
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-ALM-BITS RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-ENV RTRV-COND-UCP
3-121
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.88 REPT ALM ENV: Report Alarm Environment
Reports a customer-defined condition on an environmental alarm input.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
** ATAG REPT ALM COM
“[<AID>]:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> indicates the alarm without AID; <AID> is a string and is optional
<NTFCNCDE> indicates a notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE>
are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> indicates an alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE>
are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
** 100.100 REPT ALM COM
“COM:MJ,FAN,NSA,,,,:\“FAN FAILURE\””
;
Section REPT ALM COM Description (continued)
Section REPT ALM ENV Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-ACO-ALL RTRV-ALM-RING
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ATTR-CONT
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ATTR-ENV
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT ENV RTRV-COND-RING
RLS-EXT-CONT RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-UCP
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-EXT-CONT
RTRV-ALM-BITS SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV SET-ATTR-ENV
RTRV-ALM-EQPT
3-122
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.89 REPT ALM EQPT: Report Alarm Equipment
Reports an alarm condition against an equipment unit or slot.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
** ATAG REPT ALM ENV
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<ALMTYPE>,,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies an environmental input and is from the “ENV” section on
page 4-20
<NTFCNCDE> identifies a 2-letter notification code; valid values for
<NTFCNCDE> are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<ALMTYPE> abbreviated code identifying the alarm; valid values for
<ALMTYPE> are shown in the “ENV_ALM” section on page 4-62
<DESC> is the alarm message; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
** 100.100 REPT ALM ENV
“ENV-IN-1:MJ,OPENDR,,,\“OPEN DOOR\””
;
Section REPT ALM ENV Description (continued)
Section REPT ALM EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT RTRV-ALM-ALL
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT RTRV-ALM-BITS
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-ENV
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-ALM-RING
ENT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
INH-SWDX-EQPT RTRV-ALM-UCP
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-RING
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-UCP
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-EQPT
REPT EVT COM SW-DX-EQPT
REPT EVT EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> SW-TOWKG-EQPT
3-123
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.90 REPT ALM RING: Report Alarm Ring
Reports an alarm condition against a ring object for BLSR.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
** ATAG REPT ALM EQPT
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDITION>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>],
[<AIDDET>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the equipment AID SLOT from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are
shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDITION> is the type of alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE>
are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
<AIDDET> specifies the type of AID; valid values for <AIDDET> are shown
in the “EQPT_TYPE” section on page 4-63, <AIDDET> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
** 100.100 REPT ALM EQPT
“SLOT-7:MJ,CONTR,NSA,,,,:\“CONTROLLER FAILURE\”,TCC”
;
Section REPT ALM EQPT Description (continued)
Section REPT ALM RING Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-BLSR RTRV-ALM-ENV
ED-BLSR RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-BLSR
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT RING RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-BITS RTRV-COND-UCP
3-124
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.91 REPT ALM SYNCN: Report Alarm Synchronization
Reports an alarm condition against a synchronization reference.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
** ATAG REPT ALM RING
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is from the “BLSR” section on page 4-18
<NTFCNCDE> indicates a 2-letter notification code; valid values for
<NTFCNCDE> are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> indicates a BLSR alarm; valid values for <CONDTYPE> are
shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
** 100.100 REPT ALM RING
“BLSR-999:MJ,PRC-DUPID,SA,,,,:\“DUPLICATE NODE ID\”,”
;
Section REPT ALM RING Description (continued)
Section REPT ALM SYNCN Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-ENV
ED-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-EQPT
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM COM RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RLS-SYNCNSW RTRV-COND-UCP
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-NE-SYNC
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-SYNCN
3-125
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.92 REPT ALM UCP: Report Alarm Unified Control Plane
Reports an alarm condition against a UCP object.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
** ATAG REPT ALM SYNCN
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies a synchronization reference with alarm condition and is from
the “SYNC_REF” section on page 4-28
<NTFCNCDE> indicates a 2-letter notification code; valid values for
<NTFCNCDE> are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> indicates an alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE>
are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
** 100.100 REPT ALM SYNCN
“SYNC-NE:MJ,MAN,SA,,,,:\“MANUAL SWITCH\”,”
;
Section REPT ALM SYNCN Description (continued)
Section REPT ALM UCP Description
Category UCP
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC REPT ALM RING
DLT-UCP-IF REPT ALM SYNCN
DLT-UCP-NBR REPT ALM UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-COND-ALL
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-COND-BITS
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-COND-ENV
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-COND-RING
ENT-UCP-NBR RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-UCP
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-UCP-CC
REPT ALM COM RTRV-UCP-IF
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-UCP-NBR
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-UCP-NODE
REPT ALM EQPT
3-126
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.93 REPT DBCHG: Report Database Change Message
Reports any changes on the NE that result from:
1. TL1 provisioning commands or their GUI equivalents containing the verbs: ALW, DLT, ED, ENT,
INH, INIT, OPR, RLS, SET, and SW (for example, DLT-EQPT, ENT-CRS-STS1)
2. External event such as a board insertion.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
** ATAG REPT ALM UCP
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies a UCP object with alarm condition and is from the “ALL
section on page 4-10
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are
shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values for
<CONDTYPE> are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
** 100.100 REPT ALM UCP
“CC-1:MJ,LMP-HELLODOWN,SA,,,,:
\“LMP HELLO FSM ON CONTROL CHANNEL DOWN\”,”
;
Section REPT ALM UCP Description (continued)
Section REPT DBCHG Description
Category Log
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-DBCHG
INH-MSG-DBCHG
RTRV-LOG
3-127
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT DBCHG
“TIME=<TIME>,DATE=<DATE>,[SOURCE=<SOURCE>,]
[USERID=<USERID>,]DBCHGSEQ=<DBCHGSEQ>:<COMMAND>:<VT>”
;
where:
<TIME> is the time of the message triggered by the NE; <TIME> is a time
<DATE> is the date of the message triggered by the NE; <DATE> is a date
<SOURCE> is an input command CTAG if present; <SOURCE> is an integer
and is optional
<USERID> is the user name or user identifier; <USERID> is a string and is
optional
<DBCHGSEQ> is a sequential number of the DBCHG message; <DBCHGSEQ>
is an integer
<COMMAND> is the input command or substitute; <COMMAND> is a string
<VT> is the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 001 REPT DBCHG
“TIME=14-35-46,DATE=99-07-28,SOURCE=123,USERID=CISCO15,
DBCHGSEQ=456:ENT-CRS-VT1:VT1-4-1-2-6-4”
;
Section REPT DBCHG Description (continued)
3-128
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.94 REPT EVT <MOD2ALM>: Report Event (CLNT, DS1, E100, E1000, EC1, FSTE,
G1000, GIGE, OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, POS, STS1, STS12C, STS192C,
STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C, STS9C, T1, T3, UDCDCC, UDCF, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
Reports the occurrence of a non-alarmed event.
Section REPT EVT <MOD2ALM> Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT <MOD2ALM>
“<AID>:<CONDTYPE>,[<CONDEFF>],,,[<LOCN>],,[<MONVAL>],
[<THLEV>],[<TMPER>]:[<DESC>],[<AIDDET>]”
;
where:
<AID> indicates an event with the condition type and is from the ALL” section
on page 4-10
<CONDTYPE> indicates an event with the condition type and is a string
<CONDEFF> is the effect of the condition on the NE; valid values are shown in
the “COND_EFF” section on page 4-47, <CONDEFF> is optional
<LOCN> indicates the location; valid values for <LOCN> are shown in the
“LOCATION” section on page 4-71, <LOCN> is optional
<MONVAL> is the monitored value and is a float; <MONVAL> is an integer
and is optional
<THLEV> is the threshold value and is a float; <THLEV> is an integer and is
optional
<TMPER> is the accumulation time period for the PM information; valid values
for <TMPER> are shown in the “TMPER” section on page 4-93. <TMPER> is
optional
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
<AIDDET> specifies the type of AID; valid values for <AIDDET> are shown
in the “EQPT_TYPE” section on page 4-63, <AIDDET> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT DS1
“FAC-5-1:WKSWPR,TC,,,FEND,,12,13,15-MIN:
\“WORKING SWITCH TO PROTECTION\”,OC48”
;
3-129
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.95 REPT EVT BITS: Report Event BITS
Reports a non-alarmed event against a BITS facility.
Section REPT EVT BITS Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
ED-SYNCN RTRV-BITS
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-SYNCN
RLS-SYNCNSW
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT BITS
“<AID>:<CONDTYPE>,[<CONDEFF>],,,,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> indicates an access identifier and is from the “BITS” section on
page 4-18
<CONDTYPE> indicates a condition type and the valid values are shown in the
“CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<CONDEFF> indicates an effect of the condition on the NE; valid values for are
shown in the “COND_EFF” section on page 4-47, <CONDEFF> is optional
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT BITS
“BITS-1:SSM-STU,TC,,,,,,,:\“SYNCHRONIZED - TRACEABILITY
UNKNOWN\””
;
3-130
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.96 REPT EVT COM: Report Event COM
Reports a non-alarmed event against an NE when there is no AID associated with it.
Section REPT EVT COM Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-ALM-BITS RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-ENV RTRV-COND-UCP
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT COM
“[<AID>]:<CONDTYPE>,[<CONDEFF>],,,,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> indicates this event is from the NE. <AID> is a string and is optional.
<CONDTYPE> indicates an event condition type. Valid values are shown in the
“CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<CONDEFF> indicates an effect of the condition on the NE; valid values for
<CONDEFF> are shown in the “COND_EFF” section on page 4-47,
<CONDEFF> is optional
<DESC> is the description message for the condition; <DESC> is a string and is
optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT COM
“COM:CLDRESTART,TC,,,,,,,:\“COLD RESTART\”,”
;
3-131
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.97 REPT EVT ENV: Report Event Environment
Reports the occurrence of a non-alarmed event against an environment alarm input.
Section REPT EVT ENV Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-ACO-ALL RTRV-ATTR-ENV
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-EXT-CONT
RLS-EXT-CONT SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV SET-ATTR-ENV
RTRV-ATTR-CONT
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT ENV
“<AID>:<ALMTYPE>,[<CONDEFF>],,,,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies an environmental input and is from the “ENV” section on
page 4-20
<ALMTYPE> is an abbreviated code identifying the alarm and the valid values
are shown in the “ENV_ALM” section on page 4-62
<CONDEFF> indicates an effect of the condition on the NE; valid values for
<CONDEFF> are shown in the “COND_EFF” section on page 4-47,
<CONDEFF> is optional
<DESC> is an alarm message; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT ENV
“ENV-IN-2:OPENDR,TC,,,,,,,:\“OPEN DOOR\””
;
3-132
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.98 REPT EVT EQPT: Report Event Equipment
Reports the occurrence of a non-alarmed event against an equipment unit or slot.
Section REPT EVT EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
ENT-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT EQPT
“<AID>:<CONDTYPE>,[<CONDEFF>],,,,,,,:[<DESC>],[<AIDDET>]”
;
where:
<AID> indicates an equipment AID SLOT and is from the “EQPT” section on
page 4-21
<CONDTYPE> indicates an event condition type; <CONDTYPE> defaults to
EQPT and the valid values are shown in the “CONDITION” section on
page 4-47
<CONDEFF> indicates an effect of the condition on the NE; valid values for
<CONDEFF> are shown in the “COND_EFF” section on page 4-47,
<CONDEFF> is optional
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
<AIDDET> specifies the type of AID; valid values for <AIDDET> are shown
in the “EQPT_TYPE” section on page 4-63, <AIDDET> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT EQPT
“SLOT-7:PLUGIN,TC,,,,,,,:\“EQUIPMENT PLUG-IN\”,TCC”
;
3-133
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.99 REPT EVT FXFR: Report Event Software Download
Reports the FTP software download status of the start, completion, and completed percentage.
Notes:
1. The FXFR_RSLT is only sent when the FXFR_STATUS is COMPLD.
2. The BYTES_XFRD is only sent when the FXFR_STATUS is IP or COMPLD.
Section REPT EVT FXFR Description
Category System
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL APPLY
COPY-RFILE ED-DAT
ED-NE-GEN ED-NE-SYNCN
INH-MSG-ALL INIT-SYS
RTRV-HDR RTRV-INV
RTRV-MAP-NETWORK RTRV-NE-GEN
RTRV-NE-IPMAP RTRV-NE-SYNCN
RTRV-TOD SET-TOD
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT FXFR
“<FILENAME>,<FXFR_STATUS>,[<FXFR_RSLT>],[<BYTES_XFRD>]”
;
where:
<FILENAME> when a package is being transferred between the FTP server and
the controller cards, the <FILENAME> field will contain the string “active”.
Following the transfer, if there is a second controller card on the node, the file
will be copied over to the second card. While this is happening, REPT EVT
FXFR messages will be generated with a filename of “standby”. <FILENAME>
is a string
<FXFR_STATUS> indicates the file transferred status; START, or IP (In
Progress), or COMPLD. Valid values for <FXFR_STATUS> are shown in the
“TX_STATUS” section on page 4-95
<FXFR_RSLT> indicates the file transferred result; SUCCESS or FAILURE.
Valid values for <FXFR_RSLT> are shown in the “TX_RSLT” section on
page 4-95 and <FXFR_RSLT> is optional
<BYTES_XFRD> indicates the transferred byte count; <BYTES_XFRD> is a
string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT FXFR
“NEW.PKG,COMPLD,SUCCESS,21215147”
;
3-134
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.100 REPT EVT IOSCFG: Report Event IOS Config File
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Reports the status of copying the IOS configuration file when the COPY-IOSCFG command is issued.
Notes:
1. You can identify if this message is caused by an IOS config file downloading/uploading/merging by
looking at the SRC and DEST field in the message. Refer to the COPY-IOSCFG command for more
details.
2. There is no success/failure in the message to indicate the success or failure of the merge process
when merging the startup IOS config file to the running config file.
Section REPT EVT IOSCFG Description
Category IOS
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
COPY IOSCFG
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT IOSCFG
“<AID>:<SRC>,<DEST>,<STATUS>,[<RESULT>]”
;
where:
<AID> slot AID for the equipment and is from the AID “EQPT” section on
page 4-21
<SRC> specifies where the IOS config file is copied from and is a string
<DEST> specifies where the IOS config file is copied to and is a string
<STATUS> indicates the status of COPY-IOSCFG: Start, IP (In Process), or
COMPLD; valid values are shown in the “TX_STATUS” section on page 4-95
<RESULT> indicates the result of COPY-IOSCFG: Success or Failure; valid
values are shown in the “TX_RSLT” section on page 4-95 and <RESULT> is
optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT IOSCFG
“SLOT-1:STARTUP,IOS-CONFIG-FILE-IN-NETWORK,COMPLD,SUCCESS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-135
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.101 REPT EVT RING: Report Event Ring
Reports the occurrence of a non-alarmed event against a ring object for BLSR.
In this release, the BLSR-UPDATED condition has been added and will be reported as a transient
message, not a standing condition/alarm.
Note When a change is made to a BLSR, including creating a new circuit, the circuit will not have BLSR
protection until after the BLSR-UPDATED message is received.
Section REPT EVT RING Description
Category BLSR
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-BLSR
ED-BLSR
ENT-BLSR
REPT ALM RING
RTRV-ALM-RING
RTRV-BLSR
RTRV-COND-RING
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT RING
“<AID>:<CONDTYPE>,[<CONDEFF>],,,,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is from the “BLSR” section on page 4-18
<CONDTYPE> indicates an event condition type; valid values for
<CONDTYPE> are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<CONDEFF> is the effect of the condition on the NE; valid values for
<CONDEFF> are shown in the “COND_EFF” section on page 4-47
<DESC> is the condition description; <CONDDESR> is a string and is
optional
Output Example TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT RING
“BLSR-88:BLSR-RESYNC,TC,,,,,,,:\“BLSR TABLESRESYNCHRONIZED\”,”
;
3-136
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.102 REPT EVT SECU: Report Event Security
Reports the occurrence of a non-alarmed security event against the NE.
Based on TR-NWT-000835 in TR-NWT-000835 and the AID of the security alarm should be the
Connection Identifier (CID) which is not supported in this release. The COM or UID is an acceptable
substitute for the AID here. CID’s will be supported in a future release.
For the rule of single failure, single message/alarm, the security alarm will not be reported as
REPT ALM COM, because it is reported as REPT ALM SECU.
Because the NE sends this security message as a transient message, to make all TL1 autonomous
messages consistent, the TL1 agent reports the security message into REPT EVT SECU.
Section REPT EVT SECU Description
Category Security
Security Retrieve
Related Messages ACT-USER
CANC
CANC-USER
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-PID
ED-USER-SECU
ENT-USER-SECU
RTRV-USER-SECU
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT SECU
“<AID>:<CONDTYPE>,[<CONDEFF>],,,,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies an entity with the condition and defaults to “COM”; <AID>
is a string
<CONDTYPE> is the condition type and valid values are shown in the
“CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<CONDEFF> indicates an effect of the condition on the NE and valid values
are shown in the “COND_EFF” section on page 4-47; <CONDEFF> is
optional
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output Example TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT SECU
“COM:INTRUSION,TC,,,,,,,:\“SECURITY-INVALID LOGIN
(SEE AUDIT TRIAL)\””
;
3-137
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.103 REPT EVT SESSION: Report Event Session
Reports a non-alarmed event related to establishing a session with the NE.
Notes:
1. The WARN field may contain different information depending on the type of session-related event.
2. If a session is terminated for any reason (except a user timeout), this message is sent to indicate the
reason for the session termination.
Section REPT EVT SESSION Description
Category Security
Security Retrieve
Related Messages ACT-USER ED-USER-SECU
ALW-MSG-SECU ENT-USER-SECU
CANC INH-MSG-SECU
CANC-USER REPT EVT SECU
DLT-USER-SECU RTRV-USER-SECU
ED-PID
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT SESSION
“<AID>:<EXP>,[<PCN>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies the NE with which a session is being attempted; <AID> is a
string
<EXP> indicates whether the password is “alive” (i.e., no password updating
is required at the moment), has expired, or is about to expire. For release 4.0,
this value is always NO. Valid values are shown in the “EXP” section on
page 4-68
<PCN> not applicable in this release (R4.0)
Output Example TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT SESSION
AID:EXP,PCN”
;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT SESSION
“<WARN>”
;
where:
<WARN> free format text containing additional information about the
security event. <WARN> is a string
Output Example TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT SESSION
“/* WARN */”
;
3-138
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.104 REPT EVT SYNCN: Report Event Synchronization
Reports the occurrence of a non-alarmed event against a synchronization entity.
Section REPT EVT SYNCN Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
ED-SYNCN RTRV-BITS
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-SYNCN
RLS-SYNCNSW
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT SYNCN
“<AID>:<CONDTYPE>,[<CONDEFF>],,,,,,,:[<DESC>],[<AIDDET>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies the synchronization entity with the condition and is from the
“SYNC_REF” section on page 4-28
<CONDTYPE> indicates the condition type; <CONDTYPE> defaults to
SYNCN and the valid values are shown in the “CONDITION” section on
page 4-47
<CONDEFF> indicates the effect of the condition on the NE; valid values for
<CONDEFF> are shown in the “COND_EFF” section on page 4-47,
<CONDEFF> is optional
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
<AIDDET> specifies the type of AID; valid values for <AIDDET> are shown
in the “EQPT_TYPE” section on page 4-63, <AIDDET> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT SYNCN
“SYNC-NE:SWTOINT,SC,,,,,,,:\“SWITCH TO INTERNAL CLOCK\”,TCC”
;
3-139
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.105 REPT EVT UCP: Report Event Unified Control Plane
Reports the occurrence of a non-alarmed even against a UCP object.
Section REPT EVT UCP Description
Category UCP
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC ENT-UCP-NBR
DLT-UCP-IF REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-IF
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-IF
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT EVT UCP
“<AID>:[<CONDTYPE>],<CONDEFF>,,,,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies a UCP object with alarm condition and is from the “ALL
section on page 4-10
<CONDTYPE> is the type of condition to be retrieved. Valid values for
<CONDTYPE> are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47;
<CONDTYPE> is optional
<CONDEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid
values for <CONDEFF> are shown in the “COND_EFF” section on page 4-47
<DESC> is a condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100.100 REPT EVT UCP
“CC-1:LMP-HELLODOWN,TC,,,,,,,:\“LMP HELLO FSM ON CONTROL
CHANNEL DOWN\”,”
;
3-140
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.106 REPT PM <MOD2>: Report Performance Monitoring (CLNT, DS1, EC1,
OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C,
STS6C, STS9C, T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
Reports autonomous monitoring statistics as a result of the schedule created by SCHED-PMREPT.
Section REPT PM <MOD2> Description
Category Performance
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INH-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INIT-REG-<MOD2> SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> SET-TH-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT PM <MOD2>
“<AID>:<MONTYPE>,<MONVAL>,<VLDTY>,<LOCN>,<DIRN>,
<TMPER>,<MONDAT>,<MONTM>”
;
where:
<AID> access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<MONTYPE> type of monitored parameter; valid values are shown in the
ALL_MONTYPE” section on page 4-33
<MONVAL> measured value of monitored parameter; <MONVAL> is a string
<VLDTY> validity indicator for the reported PM data; valid values for
<VLDTY> are shown in the “VALIDITY” section on page 4-98
<LOCN> indicates the location; valid values are shown in “LOCATION”
section on page 4-71
<DIRN> direction of PM relative to the entity identified by the AID; valid
values are shown in the “DIRECTION” section on page 4-60
<TMPER> indicates the accumulation time period for the PM data; valid values
are shown in the “TMPER” section on page 4-93
<MONDAT> is the date of the beginning of the PM period specified by the
TMPER parameter; <MONDAT> is a string
<MONTM> is the beginning time of day of the PM period specified by the
TMPER parameter; <MONTM> is a string
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 100 REPT PM CLNT
“FAC-3-1:CVL,10,PRTL,NEND,BTH,15-MIN,05-25,14-46”
;
3-141
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.107 REPT SW: Report Switch
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Reports the autonomous switching of a unit in a duplex equipment pair to the standby state and its mate
unit to the active state. An automatic report for the occurrence or clearance of an alarm or event that
triggers the switch may be associated with the message.
3.4.108 RLS-EXT-CONT: Release External Control
This command releases a forced contact state and returns the control of the contact to an AUTOMATIC
control state. In AUTOMATIC control state, the contact could be opened or closed depending on triggers
that may or may not be provisioned in the NE. Therefore, issuing an RLS might not produce any contact
state change.
The NE defaults to having no triggers provisioned for external controls which consequently produces
default open contacts. An NE with this default provisioning will always produce an open contact with a
RLS-EXT-CONT command.
Notes:
1. The duration is not supported, it defaults to CONTS.
2. In an automatic state, the contact could be opened or closed depending on the provisioned trigger.
Therefore, issuing an OPR-EXT-CONT command followed by an RLS-EXT-CONT command might
not produce any contact state change.
Section REPT SW Description
Category UPSR Switching
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1
RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1
RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1
Output Format SID DATE TIME
A ATAG REPT SW
“<ACTID>,<STDBYID>”
;
where:
<ACTID> identifies the equipment unit that has been placed in the active state.
Parameter grouping cannot be used with this parameter; <ACTID> is the AID
from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<STDBYID> identifies the equipment unit that was placed in the standby state.
Parameter grouping cannot be used with this parameter; <STDBYID> is the
AID from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 001 REPT SW
“SLOT-8,SLOT-10”
;
3-142
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3. The RLS-EXT-CONT is not allowed during the MNTRY duration. The command is allowed for the
CONTS duration. The length of MNTRY duration is set to be 2 seconds.
3.4.109 RLS-LPBK-<MOD2>: Release Loopback (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC12, OC192,
OC3, OC48, OCH, STS1, STS12C, STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C,
STS9C, T1,T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command releases a signal loopback on an I/O card or a cross-connect.
Notes:
1. The value CRS for the LPBKTYPE parameter is applicable only for the STS modifier. The
FACILITY and TERMINAL values for LPBKTYPE parameter are applicable to the ports.
2. The optional [<LPBKTYPE>] field defaults to the current existing loopback type.
3. The TERMINAL loopback type is not supported for a DS3XM card.
Section RLS-EXT-CONT Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
OPR-ACO-ALL RTRV-ATTR-ENV
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-EXT-CONT
REPT EVT ENV SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV SET-ATTR-ENV
RTRV-ATTR-CONT
Input Format RLS-EXT-CONT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::,];
where:
<AID> identifies the external control being released and is from the “ENV”
section on page 4-20
Input Example RLS-EXT-CONT:CISCO:ENV-OUT-2:123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RLS-LPBK-<MOD2> Description
Category Testing
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
OPR-LPBK-<MOD2>
Input Format RLS-LPBK-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>::,,,[<LPBKTYPE>];
where:
<SRC> is an access identifier from the “DS1” section on page 4-20; valid values
for AID are facility, DS1, and STS
<LPBKTYPE> indicates the loopback type; valid values for <LPBKTYPE> are
shown in the “LPBK_TYPE” section on page 4-71
3-143
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.110 RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>: Release Protection Switch (OC3, OC12,
OC48, OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command releases a SONET line protection switch request.
The release of a protection switch request is applicable only to the OPR-PROTNSW protection switch
commands, the user-initiated switch protection commands.
Notes:
1. This command is not used for the common control (TCC+/TCC2 or XC/XCVT/XC10G) cards.
Sending a command on a common control card will generate an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access
Identifier) error message. To query the common control card switching commands, use
SW-DX-EQPT, ALW-SWDX-EQPT commands.
2. When sending this command on non-SONET (OCN) cards, an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access
Identifier) error message should be responsed. To use this command on a non-SONET card
switching command, use ALW-SWTOPROTN/SWTOWKG-EQPT and
INH-SWTOPROTN/SWTOWKG-EQPT commands.
3. When sending this command to query on a card that is not in a protection group, the SNVS (Status,
Not in Valid State) error message should be responsed.
4. When sending this command to a working card that is failed or missing, the SWFA (Status, Working
unit Failed) error message should be responsed.
5. When sending this command to a protect card that is failed or missing, the SPFA (Status, Protection
unit Failed) error message should be responsed.
6. When sending this command to a card that is not in protection, the SNPR (Status, Not in Protection
State) error message should be responsed.
7. Sending this command to an OCN line that is already in clear mode will return a SAMS (Already in
Clear Maintenance State) error message.
8. To get the protection switching state (manual, lockout, forced), use the RTRV-COND-ALL or
RTRV-ALM-ALL command.
Input Example RLS-LPBK-DS1:PTREYES:DS1-4-1-2-13:203::,,,FACILITY;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RLS-LPBK-<MOD2> Description (continued)
Section RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> Description
Category SONET Line Protection
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
EX-SW-<OCN_TYPE>
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
3-144
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.111 RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>: Release Protection Switch (STS1,
STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command releases a SONET path protection switch request that was established with the
OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> command. This command assumes that only one user-initiated switch
is active per AID.
Notes:
1. This command applies to UPSR configuration only.
2. The VTAID should be working or protect AID only.
3. If sending this command on the Drop AID, a DENY (Invalid AID, should use working/protect AID)
message will be returned.
4. To get the protection switching state (manual, lockout, forced), use the RTRV-COND-ALL or
RTRV-ALM-ALL command.
Input Format RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::];
where:
<AID> identifies the facility in the NE to which the switch request is directed
and is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
Input Example RLS-PROTNSW-OC48:PETALUMA:FAC-6-1:209;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> Description (continued)
Section RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> Description
Category UPSR Switching
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1
REPT SW
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1
RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1
Input Format RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::];
where:
<AID> identifies the entity in the NE to which the switch request is directed and
is from the “STS” section on page 4-24
Input Example RLS-PROTNSW-STS1:CISCO:STS-2-1:123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-145
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.112 RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT: Release Protection Switch Client
This command releases a Y cable protection switch on client facilities.
3.4.113 RLS-PROTNSW-VT1: Release Protection Switch VT1
This command releases a SONET path protection switch request that was established with the
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1 command. This command assumes that only one user-initiated switch is active
per AID.
Notes:
1. This command applies to UPSR configuration only.
2. The VTAID should be working or protect AID only.
3. Sending this command on the Drop AID, a DENY (Invalid AID, should use working/protect AID)
message will be returned.
4. To get the protection switching state (manual, lockout, forced), use the RTRV-COND-ALL or
RTRV-ALM-ALL command.
Section RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
ED-FFP-CLNT
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
RTRV-COND-CLNT
RTRV-ALM-CLNT
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
ED-FFP-CLNT
ENT-FFP-CLNT
Input Format RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::];
where:
<AID> is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
Input Example RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-1-1:100;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RLS-PROTNSW-VT1 Description
Category UPSR Switching
Security Maintenance
3-146
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.114 RLS-SYNCNSW: Release Synchronization Switch
This command releases the previous synchronization reference provided by the OPR-SYNCNSW
command.
In a non-revertive system, the use of the RLS-SYNCNSW command may not be appropriate. All the
switching between synchronization references should be initiated with the OPR-SYNCNSW command.
Once a switch is released, a minor alarm “MANSWTOPRI”, (Manual Switch to Primary Reference or
Secondary...) or “FRDCSWTOPRI” (Forced Switch to Primary Reference or Secondary...), will be
cleared.
Related
Messages
OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1
REPT SW
RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1
Input Format RLS-PROTNSW-VT1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::];
where:
<AID> identifies the entity in the NE to which the switch request is directed and
is from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
Input Example RLS-PROTNSW-VT1:CISCO:VT1-4-2-3-1:123;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RLS-PROTNSW-VT1 Description (continued)
Section RLS-SYNCNSW Description
Category Synchronization
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
ED-SYNCN RTRV-BITS
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN
Input Format RLS-SYNCNSW:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “SYNC_REF” section on page 4-28. The
default value is SYNC-NE.
Input Example RLS-SYNCNSW:CISCO:SYNC-NE:3;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-147
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.115 RMV-<MOD2_IO>: Remove (CLNT, DS1, EC1, G1000, OC12, OC192, OC3,
OC48, OCH, T1, T3)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command removes a facility from service.
3.4.116 RST-<MOD2_IO>: Restore (CLNT, DS1, EC1, G1000, OC12, OC192, OC3,
OC48, OCH, T1, T3)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command provisions a facility in service.
Section RMV-<MOD2_IO> Description
Category Ports
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-DS1
ED-DS1 RTRV-EC1
ED-EC1 RTRV-FSTE
ED-G1000 RTRV-G1000
ED-T1 RTRV-GIGE
ED-T3 RTRV-POS
INIT-REG-G1000 RTRV-T1
RST <MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
Input Format RMV-<MOD2_IO>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<CMDMODE>],[<PST>],
[<SST>];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<CMDMODE> is the command mode; valid values are shown in the
“CMD_MODE” section on page 4-46
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on page 4-87
Input Example RMV-EC1:CISCO:FAC-1-1:1::NORM,OOS,AINS;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RST-<MOD2_IO> Description
Category Ports
Security Maintenance
3-148
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.117 RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>: Retrieve (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the attributes (i.e., service parameters) and the state of an OC-N facility.
Both RINGID and BLSRTYPE identify the OCN port connected with a BLSR. These attributes are only
presented for the OC12, OC48, OC192 ports within a BLSR connection. The RTRV-BLSR command
with the AID BLSR-RINGID, can provide more information on this BLSR.
Note This command does not show the WVLEN attribute if the OCN port has zero value on WVLELN.
UNI-C DCC provisioning notes:
1. The attributes DCC(Y/N) and mode (SONET/SDH) remain the same in the ED/RTRV-OCN
commands when the DCC is used for UNI-C, in which case the port attribute UNIC is enabled
(UNIC=Y).
2. UNI-C DCC termination ca not be deleted by the regular DCC de-provisioning command.
3. If the DCC is created under regular SONET provisioning, and this port is used by UNI-C, the port
is converted as an UNI-C DCC automatically.
4. De-provisioning UNI-C IF/IB IPCC will free up DCC termination automatically.
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-DS1
ED-DS1 RTRV-EC1
ED-EC1 RTRV-FSTE
ED-G1000 RTRV-G1000
ED-T1 RTRV-GIGE
ED-T3 RTRV-POS
INIT-REG-G1000 RTRV-T1
RMV <MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
Input Format RST-<MOD2_IO>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10
Input Example RST-EC1:CISCO:FAC-1-1:1;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RST-<MOD2_IO> Description (continued)
Section RTRV-<OCN_TYPE> Description
Category Ports
Security Retrieve
3-149
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RST-<MOD2_IO>
ED-DS1 RTRV-DS1
ED-EC1 RTRV-EC1
ED-G1000 RTRV-G1000
ED-T1 RTRV-T1
ED-T3 RTRV-T3
RMV-<MOD2_IO>
Input Format RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and
must not be null.
Input Example RTRV-OC48:PENNGROVE:FAC-6-1:236;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:,,[<ROLE>],[<STATUS>]:[DCC=<DCC>,][TMGREF=<TMGREF>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,]
[PJMON=<PJMON>,][SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,]
[MODE=<MODE>,][WVLEN=<WVLEN>,][RINGID=<RINGID>,]
[BLSRTYPE=<BLSRTYPE>,][MUX=<MUX>,][UNIC=<UNIC>,]
[CCID=<CCID>,][NBRIX=<NBRIX>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:
<PST>,[<SST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<ROLE> identifies the OCN port role (e.g. WORK or PROT); valid values for
<ROLE> are shown in the “SIDE” section on page 4-87, <ROLE> is optional
<STATUS> identifies the OCN port status (e.g. Active or Standby); valid values
for <STATUS> are shown in the “STATUS” section on page 4-87, <STATUS> is
optional
<DCC> identifies the OCN port DCC connection and defaults to N; valid values
for <DCC> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79, <DCC> is
optional
<TMGREF> identifies if an OCN port has timing reference and defaults to N;
valid values for <TMGREF> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79,
<TMGREF> is optional
<SYNCMSG> indicates if sync status messaging is enabled or disabled on the
facility; <SYNCMSG> defaults to Y and the valid values are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79. <SYNCMSG> is optional.
<SENDDUS> indicates that the facility will send out the DUS (do not use for
synchronization) value as the sync status message for that facility; <SENDDUS>
defaults to N and the valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on
page 4-79. <SENDDUS> is optional
<PJMON> identifies the OCN port PJMON; <PJMON> defaults to 0 (zero), is
an integer and is optional
Section RTRV-<OCN_TYPE> Description (continued)
3-150
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format
(continued)
<SFBER> identifies the OCN port SFBER and defaults to 1E-4; valid values for
<SFBER> are shown in the “SF_BER” section on page 4-86, <SFBER> is
optional
<SDBER> identifies the OCN port SDBER and defaults to 1E-7; valid values for
<SDBER> are shown in the “SD_BER” section on page 4-85, <SDBER> is
optional
<MODE> identifies the OCN port mode (e.g. SONET, SDH) and defaults to
SONET; valid values for <MODE> are shown in the “OPTICAL_MODE”
section on page 4-80, <MODE> is optional
<WVLEN> identifies the OCN port wavelength; <WVLEN> is wavelength in nm
(nanometer) for unit, e.g. WVLEN=1310.00 means it operates at 1310 nm in the
DWM application. <WVLEN> is a float and is optional
<RINGID> identifies the BLSR RINGID with which the port is connected. The
<RINGID> ranges from 0–9999; <RINGID> is an integer and is optional
<BLSRTYPE> identifies the BLSR type with which the port is connected. Valid
values for <BLSRTYPE> are shown in the “BLSR_TYPE” section on page 4-43
and <BLSRTYPE> is optional.
<MUX> BLSR Extension Byte. Valid values for <MUX> are shown in the
“MUX_TYPE” section on page 4-78; <MUX> is optional.
<UNIC> indicates if the port connects to the UCP; valid values are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <UNIC> is optional
<CCID> indicates the UCP control channel ID; <CCID> is an integer and is
optional
<NBRIX> indicates the UCP neighbor ID. <NBRIX> is an integer and is
optional
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time measured in 15 minute intervals.
<SOAK> is an integer and is optional
<PST> primary state; valid values for <PST> are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on page 4-87
and <SST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-6-1:,,WORK,ACT:DCC=N,TMGREF=N,SYNCMSG=Y,SENDDUS=N,
PJMON=48,SFBER=1E-4,SDBER=1E-6,MODE=SONET,WVLEN=1310.00,
RINGID=43,BLSRTYPE=WESTWORK,MUX=E2,UNIC=Y,CCID=8,
NBRIX=2,SOAK=10:OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-<OCN_TYPE> Description (continued)
3-151
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.118 RTRV-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C,
STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the attributes associated with an STS path.
The SFBER, SDBER, RVRTV, RVTM, SWPDIP, HOLDOFFTIMER, AND UPSRPTHSTATE
parameters only apply to UPSR.
The path trace message is a 64 character string including the terminating CR (carriage return) and LF
(line feed) that is transported in the J1 byte of the SONET STS Path overhead.
The EXPTRC indicates the contents of the expected incoming path trace are provisioned by the user in
the ED-STS_PATH command. The TRC indicates the contents of the outgoing path trace message. The
INCTRC indicates the contents of the incoming path trace message.
The path trace mode has three modes: OFF, MANUAL, and AUTO. The mode defaults to OFF. The
MANUAL mode performs the comparison of the received string with the user entered expected string.
The AUTO mode performs the comparison of the present received string with an expected string set to
a previously received string. If there is a mismatch, the TIM-P alarm is raised. When the path trace mode
is in OFF mode, there is no path trace processing, and all the alarm and state conditions are reset.
When the expected string is queried under the OFF path trace mode, the expected string is a copy of the
provisioned string or NULL. When an expected string is queried under the MANUAL path trace mode,
the expected string is a copy of the user entered string. When an expected string is queried under the
AUTO path trace mode, the expected string is a copy of the acquired received string or NULL if the
string has not been acquired.
When the incoming string is queried under the OFF path trace mode, the incoming string is NULL. When
an incoming string is queried under the MANUAL or AUTO path trace mode, the incoming string is a
copy of the received string or NULL if the string has not been received.
J1 (EXPTRC) is implemented on the DS1/DS1N, DS3E/DS3NE, DS3XM, EC1, OC3, OC48AS and
OC192.
TRC and INCTRC are supported on DS1(N), DS3(N)E, and DS3XM cards.
Notes:
1. An optional parameter BLSRPTHTYPE is introduced into this command to provide more options to
retrieve J1/C2 of a particular BLSR path. This field is valid only if the queried AID port has BLSR.
The BLSRPTHTYPE defaults to “non-pca” path type if the BLSR is switched, or defaults to all
BLSR path types if there is no BLSR switching.
2. Sending this command while BLSRPTHTYPE=PCA, whether there is BLSR switch or not, the PCA
path J1/C2 data will be returned (if there is PCA circuit on the AID). Sending this command with
an STS AID without circuits and no BLSR switched on the STS, an error message will be returned.
3. An optional output parameter BLSRPTHSTATE is introduced into this command output. Each J1/C2
output data of this command will include the BLSR path state information.
4. After the BLSR switching, the J1/IPPM/C2 data can be retrieved over the protection path, to
provision J1 trace string, trace mode, or threshold is not allowed on the protection path.
Section RTRV-<STS_PATH> Description
Category STS and VT Paths
Security Retrieve
3-152
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
ED-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH>
Input Format RTRV-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::
[BLSRPTHTYPE=<BLSRPTHTYPE>][:];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
and must not be null
<BLSRPTHTYPE> indicates the BLSR path type only if the port is on the
BLSR. It defaults to “non-pca”. Valid values are shown in the
“BLSR_PTH_TYPE” section on page 4-43. A null value defaults to “non-pca”
Input Example RTRV-STS1:FERNDALE:STS-2-1-4:238:::BLSRPTHTYPE=NON-PCA;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[LEVEL=<LEVEL>,][SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,]
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,][SWPDIP=<SWPDIP>,]
[HOLDOFFTIMER=<HOLDOFFTIMER>,]
[EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,][TRC=<TRC>,][INCTRC=<INCTRC>,]
[TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,][TACC=<TACC>,]
[UPSRPTHSTATE=<UPSRPTHSTATE>,][C2=<C2>,]
[BLSRPTHSTATE=<BLSRPTHSTATE>]:[<PST>],[<SST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
<LEVEL> indicates the rate of the cross connected channel; valid values for
<LEVEL> are shown in the “STS_PATH” section on page 4-88, <LEVEL> is
optional
<SFBER> identifies the STS path SFBER which only applies to UPSR;
<SFBER> defaults to 1E-4 and valid values are shown in the “SF_BER” section
on page 4-86, <SFBER> is optional
<SDBER> identifies the STS path SDBER which only applies to UPSR;
<SDBER> defaults to 1E-6 and valid values are shown in the “SD_BER” section
on page 4-85, <SDBER> is optional
<RVRTV> identifies a revertive mode which only applies to UPSR and defaults
to N (non-revertive mode) when a UPSR STSp is created; valid values for
<RVRTV> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <RVRTV> is
optional
<RVTM> identifies a revertive time which only applies to UPSR and defaults to
empty because <RVRTV> is N when a UPSR STSp is created; valid values for
<RVTM> are shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85 and
<RVTM> is optional
Section RTRV-<STS_PATH> Description (continued)
3-153
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format
(continued)
Valid values for <SWPDIP> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79;
<SWDIP> is optional
<HOLDOFFTIMER> is an integer and is optional
<EXPTRC> indicates the expected path trace message (J1) contents. The
EXPTRC is any 64 character string, including the terminating CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed); <EXPTRC> defaults to null when a UPSR STSp is
created. <EXPTRC> is a string and is optional
<TRC> identifies the path trace message to be transmitted. The TRC is any
combination of 64 characters, including the terminating CR (carriage return)
and LF (line feed). The trace byte (J1) continuously transmits a 64 byte string,
one byte at a time. A null value defaults to the NE transmitting null characters
(Hex 00); <TRC> defaults to null when a UPSR STSp is created. <TRC> is a
string and is optional
<INCTRC> identifies the incoming path trace message contents. The INCTRC
is any combination of 64 characters; <INCTRC> defaults to null when UPSR
STSp is created. <INCTRC> is a string and is optional
<TRCMODE> indicates the path trace mode, and defaults to the OFF mode
when a UPSR STSp is created; valid values for <TRCMODE> are shown in
the“TRCMODE” section on page 4-94 and <TRCMODE> is optional
<TACC> is the AID from the “TACC” section on page 4-29 and is optional
Valid values for <UPSRPTHSTATE> are shown in the “STATUS” section on
page 4-87
<C2> indicates C2 Byte Hex Code; valid values are shown in the “C2_BYTE”
section on page 4-44
<BLSRPTHSTATE> indicates the BLSR path state only if the port is on the
BLSR; valid values are shown in the “BLSR_PTH_STATE” section on
page 4-43
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on
page 4-87. <SST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“STS-2-1-4::LEVEL=STS1,SFBER=1E-3,SDBER=1E-5,RVRTV=Y,
RVTM=1.0,SWPDIP=Y,HOLDOFFTIMER=2000,
EXPTRC=“EXPTRCSTRING”,TRC=“TRCSTRING”,
INCTRC=“INCTRCSTRING”,TRCMODE=AUTO,TACC=8,
UPSRPTHSTATE=ACT,C2=0X04,
BLSRPTHSTATE=PROTPTHACT:OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-<STS_PATH> Description (continued)
3-154
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.119 RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM>:Retrieve Alarm (CLNT, DS1, E100, E1000, EC1,
FSTE, G1000, GIGE, OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, POS, STS1, STS12C, STS192C,
STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C, STS9C, T1, T3, UDCDCC, UDCF, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves and sends the current status of alarm conditions. The alarm condition or severity
to be retrieved can be specified by using the input parameters as a filter.
Notes:
1. VT1-n-n-n replaces PS_VT1-n-n-n for the VT1 alarm AID.
2. The [<AIDTYPE>] shows STS1 for STS alarms.
Section RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-ALM-BITS RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-ENV RTRV-COND-UCP
Input Format RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],
[<CONDTYPE>],[<SRVEFF>][,,,];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10 and must
not be null
<NTFCNCDE> is the 2-letter notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE>
are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is
equivalent to ALL.
<CONDTYPE> is the alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE> are
shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to
ALL.
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86. A null
value is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-ALM-OC12:ELDRIDGE:FAC-5-1:225::MN,SD,SA;
3-155
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.120 RTRV-ALM-ALL: Retrieve Alarm All
This command retrieves and sends the current status of all active alarm conditions. The alarm condition
or severity to be retrieved is specified using the input parameters as a filter.
According to GR-833, the RTRV-ALM-ALL command only reports EQPT, RING, COM, and rr (T1, T3,
OCN, EC1, STSN, VT1, and DS1) alarms.
To retrieve all the NE alarms, issue all of the following commands:
RTRV-ALM-ALL
RTRV-ALM-ENV
RTRV-ALM-BITS
RTRV-ALM-RING
RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:
[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<AIDTYPE> is the type of access identifier; valid values for <AIDTYPE> are
shown in the “MOD2ALM” section on page 4-73, <AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is the 2-letter notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE>
are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> is the alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE> are
shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-5-1,OC12:MJ,SD,SA,,,,:\“BER AT SIGNAL DEGRADE LEVEL\”,”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> Description (continued)
Section RTRV-ALM-ALL Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
3-156
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-ALM-BITS RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-ENV RTRV-COND-UCP
Input Format RTRV-ALM-ALL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],[<CONDITION>],
[<SRVEFF>][,,,];
where:
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are
shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is equivalent
to ALL.
<CONDITION> is the type of alarm condition; valid values for <CONDITION>
are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is
equivalent to ALL.
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86. A null
value is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-ALM-ALL:COTATI::229::MN,PWRRESTART,NSA;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“[<AID>],[<AIDTYPE>]:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:
[<DESC>],[<AIDDET>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the ALL”
section on page 4-10, <AID> is optional
<AIDTYPE> is the type of access identifier; valid values for <AIDTYPE> are
shown in the “MOD2B” section on page 4-74, <AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are
shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> is the single type of alarm condition being reported on this
particular line; valid values are shown in the “CONDITION” section on
page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
<AIDDET> is the supplementary equipment identification; <AIDDET> is a
string and is optional
Section RTRV-ALM-ALL Description (continued)
3-157
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.121 RTRV-ALM-BITS: Retrieve Alarm Building Integrated Timing Supply
This command retrieves and sends the current status of alarm conditions associated with the BITS
facility. The alarm condition or severity retrieved is specified using the input parameters as a filter.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“SLOT-2,EQPT:MN,PWRRESTART,NSA,,,,:\“POWER FAIL RESTART\”,
DS1-14”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ALM-ALL Description (continued)
Section RTRV-ALM-BITS Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-ALL
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-ENV
ED-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-EQPT
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM COM RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-COND-UCP
RLS-SYNCNSW RTRV-NE-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-SYNCN
3-158
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-ALM-BITS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],
[<CONDTYPE>],[<SRVEFF>][,,,];
where:
<AID> is an identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the AID “BITS”
section on page 4-18; <AID> must not be null
<NTFCNCDE> is a 2-letter notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE>
are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is
equivalent to ALL.
<CONDTYPE> is an alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE> are
shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to
ALL.
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86. A null
value is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-ALM-BITS:ELVERANO:BITS-1:228::CR,LOS,SA;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:
[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the “BITS”
section on page 4-18
<AIDTYPE> is the type of access identifier; valid values for <AIDTYPE> are
shown in the “MOD2B” section on page 4-74 and <AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is the 2-letter notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE>
are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> is the alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE> are
shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“BITS-1,BITS:CR,LOS,SA,,,,:\“LOSS OF SIGNAL\”,”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ALM-BITS Description (continued)
3-159
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.122 RTRV-ALM-ENV: Retrieve Alarm Environment
This command retrieves the environmental alarms.
Section RTRV-ALM-ENV Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-ACO-ALL RTRV-ALM-RING
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ATTR-CONT
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ATTR-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT ENV RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RLS-EXT-CONT RTRV-COND-UCP
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-EXT-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ALL SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-BITS SET-ATTR-ENV
RTRV-ALM-EQPT
Input Format RTRV-ALM-ENV:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],[<ALMTYPE>];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “ENV” section on page 4-20; <AID>
must not be null
Note For RTRV-ALM-ENV, only ENV-IN-{1-4} is a valid AID for ONS 15454
and only ENV-IN-{1-6} is a valid AID for ONS 15327. ENV-OUT-{1,6} is
not a valid AID for RTRV-ALM-ENV.
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are
shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is equivalent
to ALL.
<ALMTYPE> is the alarm type for the environmental alarm; valid values for
<ALMTYPE> are shown in the “ENV_ALM” section on page 4-62. A null
value is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-ALM-ENV:CISCO:ENV-IN-1:123::MJ,OPENDR;
3-160
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.123 RTRV-ALM-EQPT: Retrieve Alarm Equipment
This command retrieves and sends the current status of alarm conditions associated with the equipment
units. The alarm condition or severity to be retrieved is specified using the input parameters as a filter.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<ALMTYPE>,,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “ENV” section on page 4-20
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are
shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<ALMTYPE> is the alarm type for the environmental alarm; valid values for
<ALMTYPE> are shown in the “ENV_ALM” section on page 4-62
<DESC> is the alarm message; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“ENV-IN-1:MJ,OPENDR,,,\“OPEN DOOR\””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ALM-ENV Description (continued)
Section RTRV-ALM-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM>
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT RTRV-ALM-ALL
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-BITS
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-ENV
ED-EQPT RTRV-ALM-RING
ENT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
INH-SWDX-EQPT RTRV-ALM-UCP
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-RING
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-UCP
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-EQPT
REPT ALM UCP SW-DX-EQPT
REPT ALM COM SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
REPT EVT EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
3-161
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-ALM-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],[<CONDTYPE>],
[<SRVEFF>][,,,];
where:
<AID> is an identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the “EQPT”
section on page 4-21; <AID> must not be null
<NTFCNCDE> is the 2-letter notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE>
are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is
equivalent to ALL.
<CONDTYPE> is the alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE> are
shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to
ALL.
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86. A null value
is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-ALM-EQPT:TWOROCK:SLOT-7:227::MJ,HITEMP,NSA;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“[<AID>],[<AIDTYPE>]:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:
[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the “EQPT”
section on page 4-21; <AID> is optional
valid values for <AIDTYPE> are shown in the “MOD2B” section on page 4-74;
<AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is a 2-letter notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE>
are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> is an alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE> are
shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is a condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“SLOT-7,EQPT:MJ,HITEMP,NSA,,,,:\“HI TEMPERATURE\”,”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ALM-EQPT Description (continued)
3-162
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.124 RTRV-ALM-RING: Retrieve Alarm Ring
This command retrieves and sends the current status of all active alarm conditions against a ring object
for BLSR. The alarm condition or severity to be retrieved can be specified by using the input parameters
as a filter.
Section RTRV-ALM-RING Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-BLSR RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-BLSR RTRV-ALM-ENV
ENT-BLSR RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM COM RTRV-BLSR
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT RING RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-UCP
RTRV-ALM-ALL
Input Format RTRV-ALM-RING:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],
[<CONDITION>],[<SRVEFF>][,,,];
where:
<AID> identifies a BLSR RING ID with alarm condition and is the AID from the
“BLSR” section on page 4-18; <AID> is a string and a null value is equivalent to
ALL.
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are shown
in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78 and a null value is equivalent ALL.
<CONDITION> indicates a BLSR alarm condition; valid values for
<CONDITION> are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47 and a
null value is equivalent to ALL.
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86 and a null
value is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-ALM-RING:CISCO:BLSR-999:123::MJ,PRC-DUPID,SA;
3-163
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.125 RTRV-ALM-SYNCN: Retrieve Alarm Synchronization
This command retrieves and sends the current status of alarm conditions associated with a
synchronization facility. The alarm condition or severity to be retrieved can be specified by using the
input parameters as a filter.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies a BLSR RING ID with alarm condition and is from the “BLSR”
section on page 4-18
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are shown
in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> indicates a BLSR alarm condition; valid values for
<CONDTYPE> are shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is a condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“BLSR-999:MJ,PRC-DUPID,SA,,,,:\“DUPLICATE NODE ID\”,”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ALM-RING Description (continued)
Section RTRV-ALM-SYNCN Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
3-164
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-ALL
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-ENV
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM COM RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-COND-UCP
RLS-SYNCNSW RTRV-NE-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-SYNCN
Input Format RTRV-ALM-SYNCN:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],
[<CONDTYPE>],[<SRVEFF>][,,,];
where:
<AID> identifies the access identifier from the “SYNC_REF” section on
page 4-28, <AID> must not be null
<NTFCNCDE> is the 2-letter notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE>
are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is
equivalent to ALL.
<CONDTYPE> is the alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE> are
shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to
ALL.
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86. A null value
is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-ALM-SYNCN:FULTON:SYNC-NE:226::CR,FAILTOSW,SA;
Section RTRV-ALM-SYNCN Description (continued)
3-165
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.126 RTRV-ALM-UCP: Retrieve Alarm Unified Control Plane
This retrieves and sends the current status of all active alarm conditions against a UCP object. The alarm
condition or severity to be retrieved can be specified by using the input parameters as a filter.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,
<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the “SYN” section
on page 4-26
<AIDTYPE> is the type of access identifier: valid values for <AIDTYPE> are
shown in the “MOD2B” section on page 4-74 and <AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is the 2-letter notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE>
are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> is the alarm condition; valid values for <CONDTYPE> are
shown in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
for <SRVEFF> are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“SYNC-NE,SYNCN:CR,FAILTOSW,SA,,,,:
\“FAILURE TO SWITCH TO PROTECTION\”,”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ALM-SYNCN Description (continued)
Section RTRV-ALM-UCP Description
Category UCP
Security Retrieve
3-166
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM>
DLT-UCP IF RTRV-ALM-ALL
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-ALM-ENV
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-RING
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-COND-ALL
ENT-UCP-NBR RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT ALM COM RTRV-COND-RING
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-UCP
REPT ALM RING RTRV-UCP-CC
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-UCP-IF
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-UCP-NBR
REPT EVT COM RTRV-UCP-NODE
REPT EVT UCP
Input Format RTRV-ALM-UCP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],
[<CONDTYPE>],[<SRVEFF>][,,,];
where:
<AID> identifies a UCP object with alarm condition; <AID> is from the “UCP”
section on page 4-17 and must not be null
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values <NTFCNCDE> are shown in
the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is equivalent to ALL
<CONDTYPE> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown
in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to ALL
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86. A null value is equivalent
to ALL
Input Example RTRV-ALM-UCP:CISCO:CC-1:123::MJ,LMP-HELLODOWN,SA;
Section RTRV-ALM-UCP Description (continued)
3-167
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.127 RTRV-ATTR-CONT: Retrieve Attribute Control
This command retrieves and sends the attributes associated with an external control. These attributes are
used when an external control is operated or released. To set these attributes, use the SET-ATTR-CONT
command.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<CONDTYPE>,<SRVEFF>,,,,:[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies a UCP object with alarm condition; <AID> is from the “UCP”
section on page 4-17
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<CONDTYPE> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown
in the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86
<DESC> is a condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“CC-1:MJ,LMP-HELLODOWN,SA,,,,:\
“LMP HELLO FSM ON CONTROL CHANNEL DOWN\”,”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ALM-UCP Description (continued)
Section RTRV-ATTR-CONT Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-ATTR-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT ENV RTRV-EXT-CONT
RLS-EXT-CONT SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV SET-ATTR-ENV
Input Format RTRV-ATTR-CONT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::<CONTTYPE>];
where:
<AID> identifies the external control for which attributes are being set; <AID>
is from the “ENV” section on page 4-20 and must not be null
<CONTTYPE> is the type of external control; valid values for <CONTTYPE>
are shown in the “CONTTYPE” section on page 4-59. A null value is equivalent
to ALL
Input Example RTRV-ATTR-CONT:CISCO:ENV-OUT-2:123::AIRCOND;
3-168
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.128 RTRV-ATTR-ENV: Retrieve Attribute Environment
This command retrieves the attributes associated with an environmental alarm.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:[<CONTTYPE>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies the external control for which attributes are being set and is
from the “ENV” section on page 4-20
<CONTTYPE> is the type of external control; valid values are shown in the
“CONTTYPE” section on page 4-59 and <CONTTYPE> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“ENV-OUT-2:AIRCOND”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ATTR-CONT Description (continued)
Section RTRV-ATTR-ENV Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-ATTR-CONT
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT ENV RTRV-EXT-CONT
RLS-EXT-CONT SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV SET-ATTR-ENV
Input Format RTRV-ATTR-ENV:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],[<ALMTYPE>];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “ENV” section on page 4-20 and must
not be null
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code for the environmental alarm; valid
values are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is
equivalent to ALL
<ALMTYPE> is the alarm type for the environmental alarm; valid values are
shown in the “ENV_ALM” section on page 4-62. A null value is equivalent to
ALL
Input Example RTRV-ATTR-ENV:CISCO:ENV-IN-1:123::MJ,OPENDR;
3-169
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.129 RTRV-BITS: Retrieve Building Integrated Timing Supply
This command retrieves the BITS configuration command.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:[<NTFCNCDE>],[<ALMTYPE>],[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “ENV” section on page 4-20
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code for the environmental alarm; valid
values are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78, <NTFCNCDE>
is optional
<ALMTYPE> is the alarm type for the environmental alarm; valid values are
shown in the “ENV_ALM” section on page 4-62, <ALMTYPE> is optional
<DESC> is the alarm description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“ENV-IN-1:MJ,OPENDR,\“OPEN DOOR\””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-ATTR-ENV Description (continued)
Section RTRV-BITS Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RLS-SYNCNSW
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN
Input Format RTRV-BITS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is a bit access identifier from the “BITS” section on page 4-18 and must
not be null
Input Example RTRV-BITS:SONOMA:BITS-1:782;
3-170
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[LINECDE=<LINECDE>,][FMT=<FMT>,][LBO=<LBO>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][AISTHRSHLD=<AISTHRSHLD>]:[<PST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “BITS” section on page 4-18
<LINECDE> is a line code; valid values for <LINECDE> are shown in the
“LINE_CODE” section on page 4-70, <LINECDE> is optional
<FMT> is a frame format; valid values are shown in the “FRAME_FORMAT”
section on page 4-69, <FMT> is optional
<LBO> indicates BITS line build-out; valid values are shown in the
“BITS_LineBuildOut” section on page 4-42, <LBO> is optional
<SYNCMSG> indicates a sync messaging; <SYNCMSG> defaults to (Y) and
valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79, <SYNCMSG> is
optional
<AIRTHRSHLD> is the AIS threshold. Valid values are shown in the
“SYNC_CLOCK_REF_QUALITY_LEVEL” section on page 4-89;
<AIRTHRSHLD> is optional
<PST> is the state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85,
<PST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“BITS-1::LINECDE=AMI,FMT=ESF,LBO=0-133,SYNCMSG=Y,
AISTHRSHLD=PRS:IS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-BITS Description (continued)
3-171
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.130 RTRV-BLSR: Retrieve Bidirectional Line Switched Ring
This command retrieves the BLSR information of the NE. A two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR can be
retrieved.
Output examples:
4F BLSR
“BLSR-43::RINGID=43,NODEID=3,MODE=4F,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=5.0,SRVRTV=Y,
SRVTM=5.0,EASTWORK=FAC-5-1,WESTWORK=FAC-6-1,EASTPROT=FAC-12-1,
WESTPROT=FAC-13-1
2F BLSR
“BLSR-12::RINGID=12,NODEID=2,MODE=2F,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=5.0,EASTWORK=FAC-5-1,
WESTWORK=FAC-6-1”
Error conditions:
1. Only ALL, null, or single “BLSR-#” in the AID in is allowed in this command.
2. A NULL AID defaults to the AID ALL.
3. If the system fails on getting IOR, a SDBE (Status, Internal Data Base Error) error message will be
returned.
4. If the NE does not have BSLR, the TL1 session will return the COMPLD error message with empty
information to the user.
Section RTRV-BLSR Description
Category BLSR
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-BLSR
ED-BLSR
ENT-BLSR
REPT ALM RING
REPT EVT RING
RTRV-ALM-RING
RTRV-COND-RING
Input Format RTRV-BLSR:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> identifies the BLSR of the NE. Only ALL, NULL, or single “BLSR-#” in
<AID> is allowed; <AID> is from the “BLSR” section on page 4-18. A null value
is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-BLSR:PETALUMA:ALL:123;
3-172
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“[<AID>]::[RINGID=<RINGID>,][NODEID=<NODEID>,]
[MODE=<MODE>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,]
[SRVRTV=<SRVRTV>,][SRVTM=<SRVTM>,]
[EASTWORK=<EASTWORK>,][WESTWORK=<WESTWORK>,]
[EASTPROT=<EASTPROT>,][WESTPROT=<WESTPROT>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies the BLSR of the NE and is from the “BLSR” section on
page 4-18
<RINGID> identifies the BLSR ID of the NE and ranges from 0–9999;
<RINGID> is an integer
<NODEID> identifies the BLSR node ID of the NE and ranges from 0–31;
<NODEID> is an integer
<MODE> identifies the BLSR mode and can be 2-fiber or 4-fiber; valid values
for <MODE> are shown in the “BLSR_MODE” section on page 4-42
<RVRTV> identifies the revertive mode; valid values are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
<RVTM> identifies the revertive time; valid values are shown in the
“REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85
<SRVRTV> identifies the span revertive mode; valid values are shown in the
“ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <SRVRTV> is optional
<SRVTM> identifies the span revertive time; valid values are shown in the
“REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85. <SRVTM> is optional.
<EASTWORK> identifies the east working facility and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<WESTWORK> identifies the west working facility and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<EASTPROT> identifies the east protecting facility and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22; <EASTPROT> is optional
<WESTPROT> identifies the west protecting facility and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22; <WESTPROT> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“BLSR-43::RINGID=43,NODEID=3,MODE=4F,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=5.0,
SRVRTV=Y,SRVTM=5.0,EASTWORK=FAC-5-1,WESTWORK=FAC-6-1,
EASTPROT=FAC-12-1,WESTPROT=FAC-13-1”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-BLSR Description (continued)
3-173
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.131 RTRV-CLNT: Retrieve Client
This command retrieves client facility attributes.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Section RTRV-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-CLNT
RTRV-ALM-CLNT
RTRV-COND-CLNT
RST-CLNT
RMV-CLNT
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
Input Format RTRV-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-1-1:100;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:,,[<ROLE>],<STATUS>:[COMM=<COMM>,][SFBER=<SFBER>,]
[SDBER=<SDBER>,][ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,]
[ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,][ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,]
[LSRSTAT=<LSRSTAT>,][CLEI=<CLEI>,][PN=<PARTNUM>,]
[SN=<SERIALNUM>,][VENDOR=<VENDOR>,]
[VENDORREV=<VENDORREV>,][OPTICS=<OPTICS>,]
[MACADDR=<MACADDR>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:<PST>,[<SST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the facility AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<ROLE> identifies an OCn port role (i.e. WORK or PROT); valid values for are
shown in the “SIDE” section on page 4-87
<STATUS> identifies an OCn port status (i.e. Active or Standby); valid values
are shown in the “STATUS” section on page 4-87
<COMM> indicates if the GCC or DCC is enabled or disabled. The GCC can be
enabled only if the digital wrapper has been enabled for the card. The default is
NONE. Valid values are shown in the “COMM_TYPE” section on page 4-46.
Rules for a MXP/TXP Client port are; only the DCC can be provisioned, if the
termination mode is not transparent and the payload is SONET. On a MXP/TXP
DWDM port, the DCC can be enabled only if the G.709 is not enabled and if the
payload is SONET and the termination mode is not transparent. On a MXP/TXP
DWDM port, the GCC can be enabled if there is no DCC and the G.709 flag is
enabled.
3-174
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format
(continued)
<SFBER> signal fail bit error ration that defaults to 1E-7; valid values are shown
in the “SF_BER” section on page 4-86 and <SFBER> is optional
<SDBER> signal degrade bit error ratio that defaults to 1E-7; valid values are
shown in the “SD_BER” section on page 4-85 and <SDBER> is optional
<ALSMODE> automatic laser shutdown mode that defaults to DISABLED;
valid values are shown in the ALS_MODE” section on page 4-41 and
<ALSMODE> is optional
<ALSRCINT> ALS interval; <ALSRCINT> is an integer and is optional
<ALSRCPW> ALS pulse width; <ALSRCPW> is a float and is optional
<SYNCMSG> indicates that the facility be enabled to provide the
synchronization clock. This does not apply to a TXP card. This applies for a
MXP card only if the payload is SONET/SDH and the card termination mode is
as follows:
TXP–no ports are available for timing selection.
MXP–TRANSPARENT–all client ports are available for all timing selections.
All trunk ports are not available.
LINE–all ports are available for all timing selections. Valid values are shown in
the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <SYNCMSG> is optional
<SENDDUS> indicates that the facility be enabled to provide the
synchronization clock. This does not apply to a TXP card. This applies for a
MXP card only if the payload is SONET/SDH and the card termination mode is
as follows:
TXP–no ports are available for timing selection.
MXP–TRANSPARENT–All client ports are available for all timing selections.
All trunk ports are not available.
LINE–All ports are available for all timing selections. Valid values are shown in
the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <SENDDUS> is optional
<LSRSTAT> indicates the laser status; valid values are shown in the
“UP_DOWN” section on page 4-98 and <LSRSTAT> is optional
<CLEI> is the CLEI code for the SFP for the MXP card; <CLEI> is a string and
is optional
<PARTNUM> is the part number for the SFP for the MXP card; <PARTNUM>
is a string and is optional
<SERIALNUM> is the serial number of the SFP for the MXP card;
<SERIALNUM> is a string and is optional
<VENDOR> is the vendor name for the SFP in a MXP card; <VENDOR> is a
string and is optional
<VENDORREV> is the vendor SFP revision number; <VENDORREV> is a
string and is optional
Section RTRV-CLNT Description (continued)
3-175
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.132 RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>: Retrieve Condition (CLNT, DS1, E100, E1000,
EC1, FSTE, G1000, GIGE, OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OCH, POS, STS1, STS12C,
STS192C, STS24C, STS3C, STS48C, STS6C, STS9C, T1, T3, UDCDCC, UDCF, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the current standing condition and state associated with an entity.
Output Format
(continued)
<OPTICS> is the wavelength reach information for the SFP MXP card;
<OPTICS> is a string and is optional
<MACADDR> identifies the MAC address for the 10GE payload;
<MACADDR> is a string and is optional
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time as measured in 15-minute
intervals. A value of 4 equals a soak time of 1 hour. The allowable range is 0–480
intervals. <SOAK> is an integer and is optional
<PST> is the primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on
page 4-85
<SST> is the secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on
page 4-87 and <SST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-1-1:,,ROLE,ACT:COMM=DCC,SFBER=1E-4,SDBER=1E-6,
ALSMODE=Y,ALSRCINT=30,ALSRCPW=35.1,SYNCMSG=Y,SENDDUS=Y,
LSRSTAT=UP,CLEI=ABC,PN=123,SN=123,VENDOR=CISCO,
VENDORREV=111,OPTICS=LR,MACADDR=00-11-22-33-44-55,SOAK=10:
IS,AINS””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-CLNT Description (continued)
Section RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM> Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-ENV
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-BITS RTRV-COND-UCP
3-176
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<TYPEREQ>][,,,];
where:
<AID> is the identifier that has an alarm condition; <AID> is from the ALL”
section on page 4-10 and must not be null
<TYPEREQ> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-COND-T3:TID:FAC-2-1:229::LOS;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:[<NTFCNCDE>],<TYPEREP>,[<SRVEFF>],
[<OCRDAT>],[<OCRTM>],,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the ALL” section
on page 4-10
Valid values for <AIDTYPE> are shown in the “MOD2ALM” section on
page 4-73, <AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78, <NTFCNCDE> is optional
<TYPEREP> is the condition itself; valid values are shown in the
“CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86, <SRVEFF> is optional
<OCRDAT> is a date and is optional
<OCRTM> is a time and is optional
<DESC> is a condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-2-1,T3:CR,LOS,SA,01-01,16-00-20,,,\“LOS OF SIGNAL\””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM> Description (continued)
3-177
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.133 RTRV-COND-ALL: Retrieve Condition All
This command retrieves the current standing condition for all entities.
According to GR-833, the RTRV-COND-ALL command only reports EQPT, COM, and rr (T1, T3, OCN,
EC1, STSN, VT1, and DS1) alarms.
To retrieve all the NE conditions, issue all of the following commands:
RTRV-COND-ALL
RTRV-COND-ENV
RTRV-COND-BITS
RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-COND-ALL does not return all conditions that are returned by other, more specific RTRV-COND
commands. Instead it returns a subset of those conditions. This is a requirement from section 6.2.1.8.4
of GR-253-CORE. The specific requirements are R6-288, R6-289 and R6-290. Section 6.2.1.8.4 states
a retrieval that returns ALL conditions from a node (RTRV-COND-ALL) must omit any conditions that
are “same root cause” as other raised conditions. The section also states any retrieval of a subset of the
conditions from a node, regardless of how the subsetting occurs, should not omit these “same root cause”
conditions. RTRV-COND-STS1, for example, must include “same root cause” conditions in the set it
returns, while RTRV-COND-ALL must not.
Section RTRV-COND-ALL Description
Category Fault
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-ENV
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-RING
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-BITS RTRV-COND-UCP
Input Format RTRV-COND-ALL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::[<TYPEREQ>][,,,];
where:
<TYPEREQ> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-COND-ALL:TID::229::LOS;
3-178
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:[<NTFCNCDE>],<TYPEREP>,[<SRVEFF>],
[<OCRDAT>],[<OCRTM>],,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an identifier that has an alarm condition; <AID> is from the ALL”
section on page 4-10
<AIDTYPE> is the type of access identifier; valid values are shown in the
“MOD2B” section on page 4-74, <AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78, <NTFCNCDE> is optional
<TYPEREP> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86, <SRVEFF> is optional
<OCRDAT> is a date and is optional
<OCRTM> is a time and is optional
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-2-1,OC3:CR,LOS,SA,01-01,16-02-15,,,\“LOS OF SIGNAL\””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-COND-ALL Description (continued)
3-179
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.134 RTRV-COND-BITS: Retrieve Condition Building Integrated Timing
Supply
This command retrieves the standing conditions on BITS.
Section RTRV-COND-BITS Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-ALL
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-ENV
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-COND-UCP
RLS-SYNCNSW RTRV-NE-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-SYNCN
Input Format RTRV-COND-BITS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<TYPEREQ>][,,,];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “BITS” section on page 4-18 and must
not be null
<TYPEREQ> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-COND-BITS:TID:BITS-1:229::LOS;
3-180
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:[<NTFCNCDE>],<TYPEREP>,[<SRVEFF>],
[<OCRDAT>],[<OCRTM>],,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the “BITS”
section on page 4-18
<AIDTYPE> is the type of AID. It is always reported as BITS; valid values are
shown in the “MOD2B” section on page 4-74, <AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78, <NTFCNCDE> is optional
<TYPEREP> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86, <SRVEFF> is optional
<OCRDAT> is a date and is optional
<OCRTM> is a time and is optional
<DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“BITS-1,BITS:CR,LOS,SA,01-01,16-02-15,,,\“LOS OF SIGNAL\””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-COND-BITS Description (continued)
3-181
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.135 RTRV-COND-ENV: Retrieve Environmental Condition
This command retrieves the environmental conditions.
Section RTRV-COND-ENV Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-ATTR-CONT
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-ATTR-ENV
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT ENV RTRV-COND-RING
RLS-EXT-CONT RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-UCP
RTRV-ALM-ALL RTRV-EXT-CONT
RTRV-ALM-BITS SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV SET-ATTR-ENV
Input Format RTRV-COND-ENV:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],[<ALMTYPE>]
[,,,];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “ENV” section on page 4-20 and must
not be null
Note For RTRV-COND-ENV, only ENV-IN-{1-4} is a valid AID for ONS 15454
and only ENV-IN-{1-6} is a valid AID for ONS 15327. ENV-OUT-{1,6} is
not a valid AID for RTRV-COND-ENV.
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is equivalent to ALL.
<ALMTYPE> is the condition type for the environmental conditions; valid
values are shown in the “ENV_ALM” section on page 4-62. A null value is
equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-COND-ENV:CISCO:ENV-IN-1:123::MJ,OPENDR;
3-182
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.136 RTRV-COND-EQPT: Retrieve Condition Equipment
This command retrieves the equipment conditions.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<NTFCNCDE>,<ALMTYPE>,[<OCRDAT>],
[<OCRTM>],,,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier and is from the “ENV” section on page 4-20
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<ALMTYPE> is an alarm type for the environmental alarm; valid values are
shown in the “ENV_ALM” section on page 4-62
<OCRDAT> is a date and is optional
<OCRTM> is a time and is optional
<DESC> is the description of the condition; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“ENV-IN-1:MJ,OPENDR,01-01,16-02-15,,,,\“OPEN DOOR\””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-COND-ENV Description (continued)
Section RTRV-COND-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Retrieve
3-183
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM>
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT RTRV-ALM-ALL
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-ALM-BITS
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-ENV
ED-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ENT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-RING
INH-SWDX-EQPT RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT RTRV-ALM-UCP
INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM COM RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-RING
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-UCP
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-EQPT
REPT ALM UCP SW-DX-EQPT
REPT EVT COM SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
REPT EVT EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Input Format RTRV-COND-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<TYPEREQ>][,,,];
where:
<AID> is an identifier that has an alarm condition; <AID> is from the “EQPT”
section on page 4-21 and must not be null
<TYPEREQ> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-COND-EQPT:TID:SLOT-1:229::LOS;
Section RTRV-COND-EQPT Description (continued)
3-184
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:[<NTFCNCDE>],<TYPEREP>,[<SRVEFF>],
[<OCRDAT>],[<OCRTM>],,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the “EQPT”
section on page 4-21
<AIDTYPE> is the type of the AID. It is always reported as EQPT for the
equipment condition; valid values are shown in the “MOD2B” section on
page 4-74, <AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78, <NTFCNCDE> is optional
<TYPEREP> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86, <SRVEFF> is optional
<OCRDAT> is a date and is optional
<OCRTM> is a time and is optional
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“SLOT-1,EQPT:CR,LOS,SA,01-01,16-02-15,,,\“LOS OF SIGNAL\””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-COND-EQPT Description (continued)
3-185
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.137 RTRV-COND-RING: Retrieve Condition Ring
This command retrieves the current standing condition against a ring object for BLSR. The condition
BLSR-UPDATED has been added and is always reported as a transient message, not a standing
condition/alarm.
Note When a change is made to a BLSR, including creating a new circuit, the circuit will not have BLSR
protection until after the BLSR-UPDATED message is received.
Section RTRV-COND-RING Description
Category BLSR
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-BLSR RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-BLSR RTRV-ALM-ENV
ENT-BLSR RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-BLSR
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT RING RTRV-COND-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-UCP
RTRV-ALM-ALL
Input Format RTRV-COND-RING:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>::[<TYPEREQ>][,,,];
where:
<AID> identifies a BLSR ID with alarm condition; <AID> is a string and a null
value is equivalent to ALL
Valid values for <TYPEREQ> are shown in the “CONDITION” section on
page 4-47 and a null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-COND-RING:CISCO:RING-88:123::RING-MISMATCH;
3-186
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.138 RTRV-COND-SYNCN: Retrieve Condition Synchronization
This command retrieves the synchronization condition.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:[<NTFCNCDE>],<TYPEREP>,[<SRVEFF>],[<OCRDAT>],
[<OCRTM>],,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies a BLSR ID with alarm condition; <AID> is from the “BLSR”
section on page 4-18
Valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on
page 4-78. <NTFCNCDE> is optional.
Valid values for <TYPEREP> are shown in the “CONDITION” section on
page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86. <SRVEFF> is optional.
<OCRDAT> is a date and is optional
<OCRTM> is a time and is optional
<DESC> is a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“BLSR-88:MN,RING-MISMATCH,SA,01-01,16-02-15,,,
\“FAR END OF FIBER IS PROVISIONED WITH DIFFERENT RING ID\”,”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-COND-RING Description (continued)
Section RTRV-COND-SYNCN Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
3-187
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-ALL
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-ENV
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-ALM-EQPT
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-ALM-RING
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
REPT ALM COM RTRV-ALM-UCP
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
REPT ALM RING RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT EVT COM RTRV-COND-RING
REPT EVT SYNCN RTRV-COND-UCP
RLS-SYNCNSW RTRV-NE-SYNCN
RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM> RTRV-SYNCN
Input Format RTRV-COND-SYNCN:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<TYPEREQ>][,,,];
where:
<AID> is an identifier that has an alarm condition; <AID> is from the
“SYNC_REF” section on page 4-28 and must not be null
<TYPEREQ> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47. A null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-COND-SYNCN:TID:SYNC-NE:229::LOS;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:[<NTFCNCDE>],<TYPEREP>,[<SRVEFF>],
[<OCRDAT>],[<OCRTM>],,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the identifier that has an alarm condition and is from the “SYN”
section on page 4-26
<AIDTYPE> is the type of AID. It is always reported as SYNCN; valid values
are shown in the “MOD2B” section on page 4-74, <AIDTYPE> is optional
<NTFCNCDE> is the notification code; valid values for <NTFCNCDE> are
shown in the “NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78, <NTFCNCDE> is optional
<TYPEREP> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86, <SRVEFF> is optional
<OCRDAT> is a date and is optional
<OCRTM> is a time and is optional
<DESC> is the condition description; <DESC> is a string and is optional
Section RTRV-COND-SYNCN Description (continued)
3-188
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.139 RTRV-COND-UCP: Retrieve Condition Unified Control Plane
This command retrieves the current standing condition against a UCP object.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“SYNC-NE,SYNCN:MJ,FRNGSYNC,SA,01-01,16-02-15,,,
\“FREE RUNNING SYNCHRONIZATION MODE\””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-COND-SYNCN Description (continued)
Section RTRV-COND-UCP Description
Category UCP
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC RTRV-ALM-<MOD2ALM>
DLT-UCP IF RTRV-ALM-ALL
DLT-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-ALM-ENV
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-ALM-RING
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-ALM-UCP
ENT-UCP-IF RTRV-COND-<MOD2ALM>
ENT-UCP-NBR RTRV-COND-ALL
REPT ALM <MOD2ALM> RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT ALM COM RTRV-COND-EQPT
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-RING
REPT ALM EQPT RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT ALM RING RTRV-UCP-CC
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-UCP-IF
REPT ALM UCP RTRV-UCP-NBR
REPT EVT COM RTRV-UCP-NODE
REPT EVT UCP
Input Format RTRV-COND-UCP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<TYPEREQ>][,,,];
where:
<AID> identifies a UCP object with alarm condition; <AID> is from the “UCP”
section on page 4-17 and must not be NULL
<TYPEREQ> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47 and a NULL value is equivalent to
ALL
Input Example RTRV-COND-UCP:CISCO:CC-18:123::LMP-HELLODOWN;
3-189
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.140 RTRV-CRS: Retrieve Cross Connect
This command retrieves all the cross-connections based on the required CRSTYPE (for all STS
connections), STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C and VT).
Notes:
1. A NULL AID defaults to ALL (NE).
2. A NULL CRSTYPE defaults to all the existing cross-connections.
3. The level in the output field is an optional field, and is used to indicate the bandwidth of the STS
cross-connection.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:[<NTFCNCDE>],<TYPEREP>,[<SRVEFF>],[<OCRDAT>],
[<OCRTM>],,,[<DESC>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies a UCP object with alarm condition; <AID> is from the “UCP”
section on page 4-17
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78 and <NTFCNCDE> is optional
<TYPEREP> is the type of condition to be retrieved; valid values are shown in
the “CONDITION” section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is the effect on service caused by the alarm condition; valid values
are shown in the “SERV_EFF” section on page 4-86 and <SRVEFF> is optional
<OCRDAT> is a date and is optional
<OCRTM> is a time and is optional
<DESC> is a condition description, a string and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“CC-18:MN,LMP-HELLODOWN,SA,01-01,16-02-15,,,
\“LMP HELLO FSM ON CONTROL CHANNEL DOWN\“,”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-COND-UCP Description (continued)
Section RTRV-CRS Description
Category Cross Connections
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH> ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
DLT-CRS-VT1 ENT-CRS-VT1
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH> RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ED-CRS-VT1 RTRV-CRS-VT1
3-190
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-CRS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[CRSTYPE=<CRSTYPE>][:];
where:
<AID> indicates the access identifier. It can be a facility AID, an STS AID, a
VT AID, or ALL AID. The ALL AID defaults to NE, which reports all the
existing cross-connections of the NE. <AID> is from the ALL” section on
page 4-10 and must not be NULL
<CRSTYPE> specifies the cross-connection type. It is STS or VT or both. It
defaults to all existing cross-connections. Valid values for <CRSTYPE> are
shown in the “CRS_TYPE” section on page 4-60 and a NULL value is
equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-CRS:CISCO:ALL:123:::CRSTYPE=STS;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<FROM>,<TO>:<CCT>,<MOD>::<PST>,[<SST>]”
;
where:
<FROM> identifies an entity at one end of the cross-connection; <FROM> is
from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<TO> identifies an entity at the other end of the cross-connection; <TO> is from
the ALL” section on page 4-10
<CCT> identifies the cross-connection type; valid values are shown in the
“CCT” section on page 4-45
Valid values for <MOD> are shown in the “MOD2” section on page 4-72
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on
page 4-87 and <SST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“STS-6-1,STS-12-4:2WAY,STS3C::OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-CRS Description (continued)
3-191
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.141 RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve Cross Connect (STS1, STS3C, STS6C,
STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves any connections associated with the entered AID(s) or AID range. The
information on both ends is returned along with the type of connection.
Notes:
1. The UPSR STS cross-connection can be retrieved by using “&” in the AID fields of this command.
a. To retrieve a 1-way selector or 2-way selector and bridge cross-connection with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1
the output will be:
1-way
“F1&F2,T1:CCT,STS3C”
2-way
If retrieved on point F1 or F2, the output format is the same as the 1-way output.
If retrieved on point T1, the output will be:
“T1,F1&F2:CCT,STS3C”
b. To retrieve a 1-way bridge or 2-way selector and bridge cross-connection with:
from point: F1
to points: T1, T2
the output will be:
1-way
“F1,T1&T2:CCT,STS3C”
2-way
“T1&T2,F1:CCT,STS3C”
c. To retrieve a 1-way subtending UPSR connection or 2-way subtending UPSR cross-connection
with:
from point: F1, F2
to points: T1, T2
the output will be:
1-way:
“F1&F2,T1&T2:CCT,STS3C”
2-way:
If retrieved on point F1 or F2, the output format is the same as the 1-way output.
If retrieved on point T1 or T2, the output will be:
“T1&T2,F1&F2:CCT,STS3C”
3-192
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
d. To retrieve a 2-way selector and bridge cross-connection with:
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>::F1&F2,S1&S2:<CTAG>::2WAY;
from points: F1, F2 (F1 is the working side, F2 is the protect side)
selector: S1, S2 (s1 is the working side, S2 is the protect side)
the output will be:
If retrieved on point F1 or F2, the output will be:
“F1&F2,S1&S2:CCT,STS3C”
If retrieved on selector S1 or S2, the output will be:
“S1&S2,F1&F2:CCT,STS3C”
e. To retrieve a UPSR IDRI cross-connect with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1, T2
the output will be:
“F1&F2,T1&T2:CCT,STS3C”
f. To retrieve a UPSR DRI cross-connect with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1
the output will be:
“F1&F2,T1:CCT,STS3C”
2. All A&B AIDs in the TL1 cross-connection command are in the format of
WorkingAID&ProtectAID.
3. <STS_PATH> does not include STS for the RTRV-CRS command because STS is not a standard
designator as defined by GR-833 A-2.
4. Both the 1WAYPCA and 2WAYPCA is used to specify a PCA cross-connection.
5. The facility AID is only valid on slots with a G1000-4 card.
6. The virtual facility AID (VFAC) is only valid on slots holding the ML-series card.
Section RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH> Description
Category Cross Connections
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
DLT-CRS-VT1
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ED-CRS-VT1
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ENT-CRS-VT1
RTRV-CRS
RTRV-CRS-VT1
3-193
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is from the AID “CrossConnectID” section on page 4-14
Input Example RTRV-CRS-STS3C:KENWOOD:STS-6-1-1:223;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<CROSSCONNECTID>,<CROSSCONNECTID1>:<CCT>,<MOD>::
<PST>,[<SST>]”
;
where:
<CROSSCONNECTID> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on
page 4-14
<CROSSCONNECTID1> is the AID from the “CrossConnectID” section on
page 4-14
<CCT> identifies the cross-connection type; valid values are shown in the
“CCT” section on page 4-45
Valid values for <MOD> are shown in the “MOD2” section on page 4-72
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on
page 4-87
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“STS-6-1-1,STS-12-1-4:2WAY,STS3C::OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH> Description (continued)
3-194
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.142 RTRV-CRS-VT1: Retrieve Cross Connect Virtual Tributary
This command retrieves the VT cross-connection information.
Notes:
1. The UPSR VT cross-connection can be retrieved by using “&” in the AID fields of this command.
a. To retrieve a 1-way selector or 2-way selector and bridge cross-connection with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1
the output will be:
1-way:
“F1&F2,T1:CCT”
2-way:
If retrieved on point F1 or F2, the output form is the same as the 1-way output.
If retrieved on T1, the output will be:
“T1,F1&F2:CCT”
b. To retrieve a 1-way bridge or 2-way selector and bridge cross-connection with:
from point: F1
to points: T1, T2
the output will be:
1-way:
“F1,T1&T2:CCT”
2-way:
“T1&T2,F1:CCT”
c. To retrieve a 1-way subtending UPSR connection or 2-way subtending UPSR cross-connection
with:
from point: F1, F2
to points: T1, T2
the output will be:
1-way:
“F1&F2,T1&T2:CCT”
2-way:
If retrieved on point F1 or F2, the output format is the same as the 1-way output.
If retrieved on point T1 or T2, the output will be:
“T1&T2,F1&F2:CCT”
d. To retrieve a 2-way selector bridge cross-connection with:
ENT-CRS-VT1::F1&F2,S1&S2:<CTAG>::2WAY;
from points F1, F2 (F1 is the working side, F2 is the protect side)
selector: S1, S2 (S1 is the working side, S2 is the protect side)
3-195
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
the output will be:
If retrieved on point F1 or F2, the output will be:
“F1&F2,S1&S2:CCT”
If retrieved on selector S1 or S2, the output will be:
“S1&S2,F1&F2:CCT”
e. To retrieve a UPSR IDIR cross-connect with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1, T2
The output will be:
“F1&F2,T1&T2:CCT”
f. To retrieve a UPSR DRI cross-connect with:
from points: F1, F2
to points: T1
The output will be:
“F1&F2,T1:CCT”
2. All A&B AIDs in the TL1 cross-connection command are in the format of
WorkingAID&ProtectAID
3. Both 1WAYPCA and 2WAYPCA is used to specify a PCA cross-connection.
Section RTRV-CRS-VT1 Description
Category Cross Connections
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
DLT-CRS-VT1
ED-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ED-CRS-VT
ENT-CRS-<STS_PATH>
ENT-CRS-VT1
RTRV-CRS
RTRV-CRS-<STS_PATH>
Input Format RTRV-CRS-VT1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> identifies VT to check for connection membership. <AID> can be
Facility, VT or ALL. The ALL AID defaults to NE which reports all the existing
cross-connections of the NE. <AID> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10
and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-CRS-VT1:CISCO:VT1-1-1-1-1:1234;
3-196
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.143 RTRV-DS1: Retrieve DS1
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command retrieves the test access attributes on a DS1 layer of a DS3XM card.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<VT>,<VT1>:<CCT>::<PST>,[<SST>]
;
where:
<VT> is the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<VT1> is the AID from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
Valid values for <CCT> are shown in the “CCT” section on page 4-45
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on
page 4-87 and <SST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“VT1-1-1-1-1-1,VT1-4-1-4-5-2:1WAY::OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-CRS-VT1 Description (continued)
Section RTRV-DS1 Description
Category Ports
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RST-<MOD2_IO>
ED-DS1 RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-EC1 RTRV-EC1
ED-G1000 RTRV-G1000
ED-T1 RTRV-T1
ED-T3 RTRV-T3
RMV-<MOD2_IO>
Input Format RTRV-DS1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier of a DS1 layer entity on the DS3XM card; <AID>
is from the “DS1” section on page 4-20 and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-DS1:PETALUMA:DS1-2-6-12:123;
3-197
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.144 RTRV-DWDM: Retrieve Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
This command retrieves DWDM card-level attributes.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
<AID>::[TACC=<TACC>]
;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “DS1” section on page 4-20
<TACC> defines the STS as a test access port with a selected unique TAP
number. The TAP number ranges from 0–999; <TACC> is an integer and is
optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“DS1-2-6-12::TACC=8”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-DS1 Description (continued)
Section RTRV-DWDM Description
Category DWDM
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-DWDM
ED-CLNT
RTRV-CLNT
ED-OCH
RTRV-OCH
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
DLT-FFP-CLNT
RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT
Input Format RTRV-DWDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is access identifier from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21 and must not
be null
Input Example RTRV-DWDM:VA454-22:SLOT-1:100;
3-198
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<AIDTYPE>,<EQUIP>,,[<STATUS>]:[PEERID=<PEERID>,]
[TERMMODE=<TERMMODE>,][PAYLOAD=<PAYLOAD>,]
[CARDNAME=<CARDNAME>,][PWL=<PWL>,]
[TWL1=<TWL1>,][TWL2=<TWL2>,]:[<PST>],[<SST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<AIDTYPE> specifies the type of AID; valid values are shown in the
“EQPT_TYPE” section on page 4-63 and <AIDTYPE> is a string
<EQUIP> indicates if the equipment unit is physically present; valid values are
shown in the “EQUIP” section on page 4-66
<STATUS> indicates a status. SONET card status is shown on its card level; valid
values are shown in the “STATUS” section on page 4-87 and <STATUS> is
optional
<PEERID> is the regeneration group peer card slot. <PEERID> is the AID from
the “EQPT” section on page 4-21 and is optional
<TERMMODE> is the termination mode of the card; valid values are shown in
the “TERM_MODE” section on page 4-93 and <TERMMODE> is optional
<PAYLOAD> is the type of payload carried; valid values are shown in the
“PAYLOAD” section on page 4-83 and <PAYLOAD> is optional
<CARDNAME> is the name of the card as assigned in the manufacturing
information; <CARDNAME> is a string and is optional
<PWL> provisioned wavelength; valid values are shown in the
“OPTICAL_WLEN” section on page 4-81 and <PWL> is optional
<TWL1> tunable wavelength 1; valid values are shown in the
“OPTICAL_WLEN” section on page 4-81 and <TWL1> is optional
<TWL2> tunable wavelength 1; valid values are shown in the
“OPTICAL_WLEN” section on page 4-81 and <TWL2> is optional
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
and <PST> is optional
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on page 4-87
and <SST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“SLOT-1:TRANS-10G,EQUIP,,ACT:PEERID=SLOT-2,TERMMODE=TRANS,
PAYLOAD=SONET,CARDNAME=TRUNK-1,PWL=1530.33,TWL1=1530.33,
TWL2=1531.12:IS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-DWDM Description (continued)
3-199
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.145 RTRV-EC1: Retrieve EC1
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command retrieves the facility status of an EC1 card.
Section RTRV-EC1 Description
Category Ports
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RST-<MOD2_IO>
ED-DS1 RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-EC1 RTRV-DS1
ED-G1000 RTRV-G1000
ED-T1 RTRV-T1
ED-T3 RTRV-T3
RMV-<MOD2_IO>
Input Format RTRV-EC1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-EC1:CISCO:FAC-1-1:1234;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[PJMON=<PJMON>,][LBO=<LBO>,][RXEQUAL=<RXEQUAL>,]
[SOAK=<SOAK>]:<PST>,[<SST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the facility AID of an EC1 port and is from the “FACILITY” section
on page 4-22
<PJMON> is the SONET pointer monitor attribute of an EC1 port; <PJMON> is
an integer and is optional
<LBO> is the line build-out value of an EC1 port; valid values for <LBO> are
shown in the “E_LBO” section on page 4-62, <LBO> is optional
Valid values for <RXEQUAL> are shown in the “EXT_RING” section on
page 4-68, <RXEQUAL> is optional
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time measured in 15 minute intervals;
<SOAK> is an integer and is optional
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on page 4-87
and <SST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-1-1::PJMON=0,LBO=0-225,RXEQUAL=Y,SOAK=10:OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-200
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.146 RTRV-EQPT: Retrieve Equipment
This command retrieves protection group information and status information for all the cards.
This command returns the PRTYPE, PROTID, RVTM, and RVRTV parameters for a card inside of a
protection group by the following scenario:
1. A working AID/card within a 1:1 protection group should return PRTYPE, PROTID, RVTM and
RVRTV.
2. A protection/AID card within a 1:1 protection group should return PRTYPE, RVTM and RVRTV.
3. A working AID/card within a 1:N protection group should return PRTYPE, PROTID, RVTM and
RVRTV=Y.
4. A protection AID/card of a 1:1 protection group should return PRTYPE, RVTM and RVRTV=Y.
5. An unprotected AID/card, the AID type, equip (equip/unequip), status (act/standby) and state
(IS/OOS) values.
Error conditions:
1. The equipment is not provisioned.
Section RTRV-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Input Format RTRV-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21 and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-EQPT:MIRABEL:SLOT-12:230;
3-201
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<AIDTYPE>,<EQUIP>,[<ROLE>],[<STATUS>]:
[PROTID=<PROTID>,][PRTYPE=<PRTYPE>,]
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,] [CARDNAME=<CARDNAME>,]
[IOSCFG=<IOSCFG>]:[<PST>],[<SST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the equipment unit identifier and is from the“EQPT” section on
page 4-21
<AIDTYPE> is a string
<EQUIP> indicates if the equipment unit is physically present; valid values are
shown in the “EQUIP” section on page 4-66
<ROLE> indicates if the card is a working unit or a protecting unit; valid values
are shown in the “SIDE” section on page 4-87, <ROLE> is optional
<STATUS> indicates a status. SONET card status is shown on it’s line/port level.
Valid values for <STATUS> are shown in the “STATUS” section on page 4-87,
<STATUS> is optional
<PROTID> indicates the protecting identifier; <PROTID> is from the
“PRSLOT” section on page 4-16 and is optional
<PRTYPE> indicates the protection type; valid values are shown in the
“PROTECTION_GROUP” section on page 4-84, <PRTYPE> is optional
<RVRTV> indicates a revertive mode; valid values are shown in the ON_OFF”
section on page 4-79, <RVRTV> is optional
<RVTM> indicates the revertive time; valid values for <RVTM> are shown in the
“REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85, <RVTM> is optional
<CARDNAME> is a string and is optional
<IOSCFG> displays the information about startup IOS config file for the
ML1000-2 and ML100T-12 cards. An example of this field is
“TL1,11.22.33.44//DIR/IOS.CONF,2002/1/1 9:1:1 EST”. The following
information is included in this field:
1) Where the config file is from: TL1, or CTC/CTM/CLI/TCC;
2) The host (IP address)/directory/file name, if the config file is downloaded from
the network;
3) When the startup config file is created (by copying from the network, for
example).
This field only applies to ML1000-2 and ML100T-12 cards. <IOSCFG> is a
String. <IOSCFG> is optional.
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85,
<PST> is optional
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on
page 4-87, <SST> is optional
Section RTRV-EQPT Description (continued)
3-202
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.147 RTRV-EXT-CONT: Retrieve External Control
This command retrieves the control state of an external control. The command can be used to audit the
result of an OPR-EXT-CONT or a RLS-EXT-CONT command.
Notes:
1. If the CONTTYPE is null, the existing conttype on this AID will be returned.
2. The duration is not supported, it defaults to CONTS.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“SLOT-12:DS1,EQUIP,,ACT:PROTID=SLOT-13,PRTYPE=1-1,RVRTV=Y,
RVTM=8.5,CARDNAME=DESCRIPTION,IOSCFG=
“IOS CONFIG INFO FOR ML SERIES CARD”:OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-EQPT Description (continued)
Section RTRV-EXT-CONT Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-ACO-ALL RTRV-ATTR-CONT
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-ATTR-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT ENV SET-ATTR-CONT
RLS-EXT-CONT SET-ATTR-ENV
RTRV-ALM-ENV
Input Format RTRV-EXT-CONT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::<CONTTYPE>];
where:
<AID> is from the “ENV” section on page 4-20 and must not be null.
Note For this command only ENV-OUT-{1-2} is a valid AID.
Valid values for <CONTTYPE> are shown in the “CONTTYPE” section on
page 4-59. A null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-EXT-CONT:CISCO:ENV-OUT-2:123::AIRCOND;
3-203
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.148 RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>: Retrieve Facility Protection Group (OC3, OC12,
OC48, OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the optical facility protection information.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:[<CONTTYPE>],<DUR>,[<CONTSTATE>]”
;
where:
<AID> identifies the external control for which control state is being retrieved
and is from the “ENV” section on page 4-20
<CONTTYPE> is the type of control for which control state is being retrieved;
valid values are shown in the “CONTTYPE” section on page 4-59,
<CONTTYPE> is optional
<DUR> is the duration for which the external control can be operated; valid
values are shown in the “DURATION” section on page 4-62
<CONTSTATE> is the control of the external control; valid values are shown in
the “CONT_MODE” section on page 4-59, <CONTSTATE> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“ENV-OUT-2:AIRCOND,CONTS,OPEN
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-EXT-CONT Description (continued)
Section RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> Description
Category SONET Line Protection
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
Input Format RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is the optical facility AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-FFP-OC3:PETALUMA:FAC-1-1:1;
3-204
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.149 RTRV-FFP-CLNT: Retrieve Facility Protection Group Client
This command retrieves Y cable protection on client facilities.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<WORK>,<PROTECT>::[PROTID=<PROTID>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,]
[RVTM=<RVTM>,][PSDIRN=<PSDIRN>]”
;
where:
<WORK> identifies the working port and is the AID from the “FACILITY”
section on page 4-22
<PROTECT> identifies the protection port and is the AID from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<PROTID> is a protection group identifier (protection group name). It defaults
to the protecting port of the protection group; <PROTID> is a string, it is
optional and can have a maximum length of 32 characters
<RVRTV> identifies a revertive mode and defaults to N (non-revertive mode);
valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79, <RVRTV> is
optional
<RVTM> identifies the revertive time and defaults to 5.0 minutes; valid values
are shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85, <RVTM> is
optional
<PSDIRN> indicates the switch mode and defaults to UNI. valid values are
shown in the “UNI_BI” section on page 4-97, <PSDIRN> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-2-1,FAC-1-1::PROTID=PROT_NAME,RVRTV=Y,
RVTM=1.0,PSDIRN=BI”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> Description (continued)
Section RTRV-FFP-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ENT-FFP-CLNT
ED-FFP-CLNT
DLT-FFP-CLNT
RTRV-CLNT
ED-CLNT
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
3-205
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-FFP-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and
must not be null
Input Example RTRV-FFP-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-1-1:100;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<WORKAID>,<PROTAID>::[PROTTYPE=<PROTTYPE>,]
[PROTID=<PROTID>,][RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,]
[PSDIRN=<PSDIRN>]”
;
where:
<WORKAID> identifies a working port and is the AID from the “FACILITY”
section on page 4-22
<PROTAID> identifies a protection port and is the AID from the “FACILITY”
section on page 4-22
<PROTTYPE> identifies the type of facility protection; valid values are shown
in the “PROTTYPE” section on page 4-84 and <PROTTYPE> is optional
<PROTID> protection group identifier (protection group name). Defaults to the
protecting port AID of the protection group. Is is a string and can have a
maximum length of 32 characters; <PROTID> is a string and is optional
<RVRTV> identifies the revertive mode. Defaults to N (non-revertive mode);
valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <RVRTV> is
optional
<RVTM> identifies the revertive time. Defaults to 5.0 minutes; valid values are
shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85 and <RVTM> is
optional
<PSDIRN> identifies the switching mode and defaults to UNI; valid values are
shown in the “UNI_BI” section on page 4-97 and <PSDIRN> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-1-1,FAC-2-1::PROTTYPE=Y-CABLE,PROTID=DC-METRO,RVRTV=N,
RVTM=1.0,PSDIRN=BI”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-FFP-CLNT Description (continued)
3-206
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.150 RTRV-FSTE: Retrieve Fast Ethernet
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the front end port information of the ML100T-12 Ethernet card.
Section RTRV-FSTE Description
Category Ports
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-DS1 RTRV-DS1
ED-EC1 RTRV-EC1
ED-G1000 RTRV-G1000
ED-T1 RTRV-GIGE
ED-T3 RTRV-POS
INIT-REG-G1000 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RST-<MOD2_IO>
Input Format RTRV-FSTE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is the facility AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and must
not be null
Input Example RTRV-FSTE:TID:FAC-1-1:CTAG;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[ADMINSTATE=<ADMINSTATE>,][LINKSTATE=<LINKSTATE>,]
[MTU=<MTU>,][FLOWCTRL=<FLOWCTRL>,][DUPLEX=<DUPLEX>,]
[SPEED=<SPEED>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<ADMINSTATE> administration type; valid values are shown in the
“UP_DOWN” section on page 4-98. <ADMINSTATE> is optional
<LINKSTATE> link protocol; valid values are shown in the “UP_DOWN”
section on page 4-98. <LINKSTATE> is optional
<MTU> maximum transport unit; <MTU> is an integer and is optional
<FLOWCTRL> flow control; valid values are shown in the “FLOW” section on
page 4-69. <FLOWCTRL> is optional
<DUPLEX> duplex mode; valid values are shown in the “ETHER_DUPLEX”
section on page 4-67. <DUPLEX> is optional
<SPEED> Ethernet speed; valid values are shown in the “ETHER_SPEED”
section on page 4-68. <SPEED> is optional
3-207
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.151 RTRV-G1000: Retrieve G1000 Facility
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command retrieves the G1000 facilities configuration.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-1-1::ADMINSTATE=DOWN,LINKSTATE=DOWN,MTU=1500,
FLOWCTRL=SYMMETRIC,DUPLEX=AUTO,SPEED=AUTO”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-FSTE Description (continued)
Section RTRV-G1000 Description
Category Ports
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV_<OCN_TYPE>
ED-DS1 RTRV-DS1
ED-EC1 RTRV-EC1
ED-G1000 RTRV-FSTE
ED-T1 RTRV-GIGE
ED-T3 RTRV-POS
INIT-REG-G1000 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RST-<MOD2_IO>
Input Format RTRV-G1000:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-G1000:TID:FAC-1-1:CTAG;
3-208
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.152 RTRV-GIGE: Retrieve Gigabit Ethernet
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the front end port information for the ML1000-2 Ethernet card.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[MFS=<MFS>,][FLOW=<FLOW>,][LAN=<LAN>,]
[OPTICS=<OPTICS>]:<PST>,[<SST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
Valid values for <MFS> are shown in the “MFS_TYPE” section on page 4-71;
<MFS> is optional
Valid values for <FLOW> are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79;
<FLOW> is optional
Valid values for <LAN> are shown in the “FLOW” section on page 4-69; <LAN>
is optional
Valid values for <OPTICS> are shown in the “OPTICS” section on page 4-82;
<OPTICS> is optional
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on
page 4-87; <SST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-1-1::MFS=9032,FLOW=N,LAN=ASYMMETRIC,
OPTICS=UNKNOWN:OOS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-G1000 Description (continued)
Section RTRV-GIGE Description
Category Ports
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV_<OCN_TYPE>
ED-DS1 RTRV-DS1
ED-EC1 RTRV-EC1
ED-G1000 RTRV-FSTE
ED-T1 RTRV-G1000
ED-T3 RTRV-POS
INIT-REG-G1000 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RST-<MOD2_IO>
3-209
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-GIGE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-GIGE:TID:FAC-1-1:CTAG;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[ADMINSTATE=<ADMINSTATE>,][LINKSTATE=<LINKSTATE>,]
[MTU=<MTU>,][FLOWCTRL=<FLOWCTRL>,][OPTICS=<OPTICS>,]
[DUPLEX=<DUPLEX>,][SPEED=<SPEED>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<ADMINSTATE> administration type; valid values are shown in the
“UP_DOWN” section on page 4-98. <ADMINSTATE> is optional
<LINKSTATE> link protocol; valid values are shown in the “UP_DOWN”
section on page 4-98. <LINKSTATE> is optional
<MTU> maximum transport unit; <MTU> is an integer and is optional
<FLOWCTRL> flow control; valid values are shown in the “FLOW” section on
page 4-69. <FLOWCTRL> is optional
<OPTICS> is the optics type; valid values are shown in “OPTICS” section on
page 4-82. <OPTICS> is optional
<DUPLEX> duplex mode; valid values are shown in the “ETHER_DUPLEX”
section on page 4-67. <DUPLEX> is optional
<SPEED> Ethernet speed; valid values are shown in the “ETHER_SPEED”
section on page 4-68. <SPEED> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-1-1::ADMINSTATE=DOWN,LINKSTATE=DOWN,MTU=1500,
FLOWCTRL=SYMMETRIC,OPTICS=1000_BASE_SX,DUPLEX=AUTO,
SPEED=AUTO”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-GIGE Description (continued)
3-210
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.153 RTRV-HDR: Retrieve Header
This command retrieves the header of a TL1 response message. Used by TL1 clients to determine if the
link to the NE is still active and if the NE is responding to commands.
3.4.154 RTRV-INV: Retrieve Inventory
This command retrieves a listing of the equipment inventory. For each unit in the system, it identifies the
unit's firmware numbers and the unit's CLEI code.
Section RTRV-HDR Description
Category System
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL REPT EVT FXFR
APPLY RTRV-INV
COPY-RFILE RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-DAT RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-TOD
INIT-SYS SET-TOD
Input Format RTRV-HDR:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example RTRV-HDR:SONOMA::232;
Section RTRV-INV Description
Category System
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL REPT EVT FXFR
APPLY RTRV-HDR
COPY-RFILE RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-DAT RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-TOD
INIT-SYS SET-TOD
Input Format RTRV-INV:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21 and must
not be null
Input Example RTRV-INV:OCCIDENTAL:SLOT-15:301;
3-211
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,<AIDTYPE>::[PN=<PN>,][HWREV=<HWREV>,]
[FWREV=<FWREV>,][SN=<SN>,][CLEI=<CLEI>][TWL1=<TWL1>,]
[TWL2=<TWL2>,][PLUGINVERNDORID=<PLUGINVERNDORID>,]
[PLUGINPN=<PLUGINPN>,][PLUGINHWREV=<PLUGINHWREV>,]
[PLUGINFWREV=<PLUGINFWREV>,][PLUGINSN=<PLUGINSN>,]
[ILOSSREF=<ILOSSREF>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<AIDTYPE> specifies the type of AID and is a string
<PN> is the HW part number; <PN> is a string and is optional
<HWREV> is the HW Rev; <HWREV> is a string and is optional
<FWREV> is the firmware Rev; <FWREV> is a string and is optional
<SN> is the serial number; <SN> is a string and is optional
<CLEI> is a string and is optional
<TW1> tunable wavelength 1; valid values are shown in the
“OPTICAL_WLEN” section on page 4-81 and <TW1> is optional
<TW2> tunable wavelength 2; valid values are shown in the
“OPTICAL_WLEN” section on page 4-81 and <TW2> is optional
<PLUGINHWREV> applicable in a future release
<PLUGINFWREV> applicable in a future release
<PLUGINSN> applicable in a future release
<ILOSSREF> applicable in a future release
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“SLOT-15,OC3-IR-4::PN=87-31-00002,HWREV=004K,
FWREV=76-99-00009-004A,SN=013510,CLEI=NOCLEI,TWL1=1546.12,
TWL2=1546.92,PLUGINVERNDORID=012345,PLUGINPN=ABCDE,
PLUGINHWREV=ABCDE,PLUGINFWREV=01-02-03,
PLUGINSN=01234,ILOSSREF=1.0”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-INV Description (continued)
3-212
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.155 RTRV-LOG: Retrieve Log
This command retrieves the alarm log of the NE.
Note The only option reported for LOGNM is ALARM.
Section RTRV-LOG Description
Category Log
Security Superuser
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-DBCHG
INH-MSG-DBCHG
REPT DBCHG
Input Format RTRV-LOG:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<LOGNM>;
where:
<LOGNM> is the log name - ALARM; <LOGNM> is a string and must not be
null
Input Example RTRV-LOG:CISCO::123::ALARM;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,<ALMNUMBER>:CURRENT=<CURRENT>,
[PREVIOUS=<PREVIOUS>,]<CONDITION>,<SRVEFF>,[TIME=<OCRTIME>,]
[DATE=<OCRDAT>]:<ALMDESCR>”
;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<ALMNUMBER> is an alarm number of the log and is an integer
<CURRENT> is a current severity; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78
<PREVIOUS> is a previous severity; valid values are shown in the
“COND_EFF” section on page 4-47, <PREVIOUS> is optional
<CONDITION> is a condition; valid values are shown in the “CONDITION”
section on page 4-47
<SRVEFF> is a service effect; valid values are shown in the “SERV_EFF”
section on page 4-86
<OCRTIME> is the time an alarm is triggered and is optional
<OCRDAT> is the date an alarm is triggered and is optional
<ALMDESCR> is the alarm description and is a string
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-3-1,18:CURRENT=MJ,PREVIOUS=CL,EOC,NSA,
TIME=16-33-04,DATE=1971-02-03:\“SDCC TERMINATION FAILURE\””
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-213
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.156 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK: Retrieve Map Network
This command retrieves all the NE attributes which are reachable from the GNE (gateway NE). The NE
attributes include the node IP address (IPADDR), node name (TID), and the product type of the NE
(PRODUCT).
Note The product type field in the response will be displayed as “unknown” for nodes that are not running
the 4.0 version software.
3.4.157 RTRV-NE-GEN: Retrieve Network Element General
This command retrieves the general NE attributes.
The ETHIPADDR/ETHIPMASK are used to show the Ethernet interface address and mask. Both default
to the node’s IP address and mask.
Section RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Description
Category Network
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
RTRV-NE-IPMAP
Input Format RTRV-MAP-NETWORK:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example RTRV-MAP-NETWORK:CISCO::123;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<IPADDR>,<NODENAME>,<PRODUCT>”
;
where:
<IPADDR> indicates the node IP address and is a string
<NODENAME> indicates the node name (TID) and is a string
<PRODUCT> indicates the product type of the NE; valid values are shown in
the “PRODUCT_TYPE” section on page 4-84
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“172.20.222.225,TID-000,15454”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-NE-GEN Description
Category System
Security Retrieve
3-214
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL REPT EVT FXFR
APPLY RTRV-HDR
COPY-RFILE RTRV-INV
ED-DAT RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-TOD
INIT-SYS SET-TOD
Input Format RTRV-NE-GEN:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example RTRV-NE-GEN:CISCO::123;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“[IPADDR=<IPADDR>,][IPMASK=<IPMASK>,][DEFRTR=<DEFRTR>,]
[IIOPPORT=<IIOPPORT>,][NTP=<NTP>,][ETHIPADDR=<ETHIPADDR>,]
[ETHIPMASK=<ETHIPMASK>,][NAME=<NAME>,][SWVER=<SWVER>,]
[LOAD=<LOAD>,][PROTSWVER=<PROTSWVER>,]
[PROTLOAD=<PROTLOAD>,][DEFDESC=<DEFDESC>]
[PLATFORM=<PLATFORM>]”
;
where:
<IPADDR> indicates the node IP address; <IPADDR> is a string and is optional
<IPMASK> indicates the node IP mask; <IPMASK> is a string and is optional
<DEFRTR> indicates the node default router; <DEFRTR> is a string and is
optional
<IIOPPORT> indicates the node IIOP port; <IIOPPORT> is an integer and is
optional
<NTP> indicates the node’s NTP timing source address; <NTP> is a string and
is optional
<ETHIPADDR> indicates the node’s Ethernet IP address; <ETHIPADDR> is a
string and is optional
<ETHIPMASK> indicates the node’s Ethernet IP mask; <ETHIPMASK> is a
string and is optional
<NAME> is the node name; <NAME> is a string and is optional
<SWVER> is the software version; <SWVER> is a string and is optional
<LOAD> is a string and is optional
<PROTSWVER> is protect software version; <PROTSWVER> is a string and
is optional
<PROTLOAD> is a string and is optional
<DEFDESC> is a string and is optional
<PLATFORM> is the NE platform type; <PLATFORM> is a string and is
optional
Section RTRV-NE-GEN Description (continued)
3-215
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.158 RTRV-NE-IPMAP: Retrieve Network Element IPMAP
This command retrieves the IP address and node name of the NEs that have the DCC connection with
this NE.
Note This command only reports the active DCC link. If there is no active DCC link on the port (or the node),
the command will return COMPLD without IPMAP information.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“IPADDR=192.168.100.52,IPMASK=255.255.255.0,DEFRTR=192.168.100.1,
IIOPPORT=57970,NTP=192.168.100.52,ETHIPADDR=172.20.208.225,
ETHIPMASK=255.255.255.0,NAME=“NODENAME”,SWVER=2.01.03,
LOAD=02.13-E09A-08.15,PROTSWVER=2.01.02,
PROTLOAD=02.12-E09A-09.25,DEFDESC=\“NE DEFAULTS FEATURE\”,
PLATFORM=15454-ANSI”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-NE-GEN Description (continued)
Section RTRV-NE-IPMAP Description
Category Network
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL RTRV-INV
ED-DAT RTRV-MAP-NEWORK
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-TOD
INIT-SYS SET-TOD
RTRV-HDR
Input Format RTRV-NE-IPMAP:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is the port of an NE carrying the DCC connection; <AID> is from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and a null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-NE-IPMAP:CISCO:FAC-12-1:123;
3-216
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.159 RTRV-NE-SYNCN: Retrieve Network Element Synchronization
This command retrieves the synchronization attributes of the NE.
Notes:
1. Although mixed mode timing is supported in this release, it is not recommended. See the “Mixed
Mode Timing Support” section on page 1-14 for more information.
2. The existing external and line modes have the same functionality in all 3.x releases:
External mode: the node derives its timing from the BITS inputs.
Line mode: the node derives its timing from the SONET line(s).
Mixed mode: the node derives its timing from the BITS input or SONET lines.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<IPADDR>,<NODENAME>”
;
where:
<AID> is the port of an NE carrying a DCC connection and is from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<IPADDR> indicates the NE IP address and is a string
<NODENAME> indicates the NE node name and is a string
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-12-1:172.20.208.225,NODENAME2”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-NE-IPMAP Description (continued)
Section RTRV-NE-SYNCN Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
3-217
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL REPT EVT SYNCN
APPLY RLS-SYNCNSW
COPY-RFILE RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-BITS RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
ED-DAT RTRV-BITS
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-COND-BITS
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-COND-SYNCN
ED-SYNCN RTRV-HDR
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-INV
INIT-SYS RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-NE-GEN
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-NE IPMAP
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-TOD
REPT EVT FXFR SET-TOD
Input Format RTRV-NE-SYNCN:[<TID>]::<CTAG>[::::];
Input Example RTRV-NE-SYNCN:CISCO::123;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“::[TMMD=<TMMD>,][SSMGEN=<SSMGEN>,][QRES=<QRES>,]
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>]”
;
where:
<TMMD> is a timing mode; valid values are shown in the “TIMING_MODE”
section on page 4-93, <TMMD> is optional
<SSMGEN> is an SSM generator; valid values are shown in the
“SYNC_GENERATION” section on page 4-90, <SSMGEN> is optional
<QRES> is a quality of RES; valid values are shown in the
“SYNC_QUALITY_LEVEL” section on page 4-90, <QRES> is optional
<RVRTV> is a revertive mode; valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section
on page 4-79, <RVRTV> is optional
<RVTM> is a revertive time; valid values are shown in the
“REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85, <RVTM> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“::TMMD=LINE,SSMGEN=GEN1,QRES=ABOVE-PRS,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=8.0”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-NE-SYNCN Description (continued)
3-218
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.160 RTRV-OCH: Retrieve Optical Channel
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command retrieves the attributes (service parameters) and state of an OCH facility.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Section RTRV-OCH Description
Category DWDM
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-OCH
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
RTRV-ALM-OCH
RTRV-COND-OCH
Input Format RTRV-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “CHANNEL” section on page 4-19 and
must not be null
Input Example RTRV-OCH:PENNGROVE:CHAN-6-2:236;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:,,,[<STATUS>],[<RDIRN>],[<OPTICALPORTTYPE>],[<POWER>],
[<EXPWLEN>],[<ACTWLEN>]:[ILOSS=<ILOSS>,]
[VOAMODE=<VOAMODE>,][VOAATTN=<VOAATTN>,]
[VOAPWR=<VOAPWR>,][VOAREFATTN=<VOAREFATTN>,]
[VOAREFPWR=<VOAREFPWR>,][REFOPWR=<REFOPWR>,]
[CALOPWR=<CALOPWR>,][SFBER=<SFBER>,][SDBER=<SDBER>,]
[ALSMODE=<ALSMODE>,][ALSRCINT=<ALSRCINT>,]
[ALSRCPW=<ALSRCPW>,][COMM=<COMM>,][GCCRATE=<GCCRATE>,]
[DWRAP=<DWRAP>,][FEC=<FEC>,][OSFBER=<OSFBER>,]
[OSDBER=<OSDBER>,][MACADDR=<MACADDR>,]
[SYNCMSG=<SYNCMSG>,][SENDDUS=<SENDDUS>,]
[LSRSTAT=<LSRSTAT>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:<PST>,[<SST>]”
;
3-219
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format
(continued)
where:
<AID> is an access identifier and is from the “CHANNEL” section on
page 4-19
Valid values for <STATUS> are shown in the “STATUS” section on page 4-87
and <STATUS> is optional
<RDIRN> applicable in a future release
<OPTICALPORTTYPE> applicable in a future release
<POWER> applicable in a future release
<EXPWLEN> applicable in a future release
<ACTWLEN> applicable in a future release
<ILOSS> applicable in a future release
<VOAMODE> applicable in a future release
<VOAATTN> identifies the transmit power attenuation for the variable optical
attenuation (VOA). It is expressed in Dbm. The range for MXP/TXP cards is
-24.0–=2.0 Dbm. <VOAATTN> is a string and is optional
<VOAPWR> applicable in a future release
<VOAREFATTN> applicable in a future release
<VOAREFPWR> applicable in a future release
<REFOPWR> applicable in a future release
<CALOPWR> applicable in a future release
<SFBER> identifies the SFBER for the SONET payload; valid values are shown
in the “SF_BER” section on page 4-86
<SDBER> identifies the SDBER for the SONET payload; valid values are
shown in the “SD_BER” section on page 4-85
<ALSMODE> indicates if the Automatic Laser Shutdown is enabled or
disabled; valid values are shown in the ALS_MODE” section on page 4-41 and
<ALSMODE> is optional
<ALSRCINT> indicates the ALS recovery interval. Range is 20–300 seconds;
<ALSRCINT> is an integer and is optional
<ALSRCPW> indicates the ALS recovery pulse width. The range is 2–100
seconds, in increments of 100ms, e.g. 30.1; <ALSRCPW> is a float and is
optional
<COMM> indicates if the GCC or DCC is enabled or disabled. The GCC can be
enabled only if the digital wrapper has been enabled for the card. The default is
NONE. Valid values are shown in the “COMM_TYPE” section on page 4-46.
Rules for a MXP/TXP Client port are; only the DCC can be provisioned, if the
termination mode is not transparent and the payload is SONET. On a MXP/TXP
DWDM port, the DCC can be enabled only if the G.709 is not enabled and if the
payload is SONET and the termination mode is not transparent. On a
MXP/TXP DWDM port, the GCC can be enabled if there is no DCC and the
G.709 flag is enabled. <COMM> is optional
Section RTRV-OCH Description (continued)
3-220
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format
(continued)
<GCCRATE> indicates the data rate of the GCC traffic. Valid values are shown
in the “GCCRATE” section on page 4-69. The default is 192Kbps. For
MXP/TXP cards this applies only to the DWDM port. The 576K option is not
supported for this release. <GCCRATE> is optional
<DWRAP> is the G.709 digital wrapper. It is either on or off. The system default
is ON. For MXP/TXP, this applies only to the DWDM port. To enable G.709
there should be no GCC on the DWDM port. To disable G.709 there should be
no GCC on the DWDM port. The FEC should be turned to off; valid values are
shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <DWRAP> is optional
<FEC> is the Forward Error Correction. It can be enabled only if the G.709 is
turned ON. It is either on or off. The system default is ON. For MXP/TXP this
applies only to the DWDM port. The FEC level PM and thresholds apply if the
FEC is turned on; valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
and <FEC> is optional
<OSFBER> identifies the SFBER for the OTN level. Applicable only if the
G.709 is enabled; valid values are shown in the “SF_BER” section on page 4-86
and <OSFBER> is optional
<OSDBER> identifies the SDBER for the OTN level. Applicable only if the
G.709 is enabled; valid values are shown in the “SD_BER” section on page 4-85
and <OSDBER> is optional
<MACADDR> identifies the MAC address for the 10GE payload;
<MACADDR> is a string
<SYNCMSG> indicates that the facility be enabled to provide the
synchronization clock. This does not apply to a TXP card. This applies to an
MXP card, only if the payload is SONET/SDH and the card termination mode
is as follows:
TRANSPARENT - All Client ports are available for all timing selections. All
Trunk ports are not available.
LINE - All ports are available for all-timing selections.
<SENDDUS> indicates that the facility send out a Do not Use for Sync
message. This does not apply to a TXP card. This applies to a MXP card, only
if the payload is SONET/SDH and the card termination mode is as follows:
TRANSPARENT - All Client ports are available for all timing selections. All
Trunk ports are not available.
LINE - All ports are available for all-timing selections.
Valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and
<SENDDUS> is optional
<LSRSTAT> indicates the laser status. If the laser has been shut down it shows
DOWN. If it has not been shut down it shows UP. Valid values are shown in the
“UP_DOWN” section on page 4-98 and <LSRSTAT> is optional
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time as measured in 15–minute
intervals. A value of 4 translates to a soak time of one hour. The allowable range
is 0–480 intervals. <SOAK> is an integer and is optional
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on
page 4-87
Section RTRV-OCH Description (continued)
3-221
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.161 RTRV-PM-<MOD2>: Retrieve Performance (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12,
OC48, OC192, OCH, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C,
STS192C, T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the values of PM parameters for a specified card type.
<MONTYPE>, <MONLEV>, <MONDAT> and <MONTM> are supported in this release.
<MONLEV> is in the format of LEV-DIRN. Valid values for <DIRN> are shown in the “DIRN” section
on page 4-61.
The format of <MONDAT> is MM-DD, where MM (month of the year) ranges from 1–12 and DD (day
of the month) ranges from 1–31.
The format for <MONTM> is HH-MM, where HH (hour of the day) ranges from 0–23 and MM (minute
of the hour) ranges from 0–59.
Notes:
1. If the <TMPER> is 1-DAY, <MONTM> is not applicable (null), and is treated as null if <MONTM>
is not null.
2. A null value for <MONLEV> defaults to 1-UP.
3. A null value for <MONDAT> defaults to the current date (MM-DD).
4. A null value for <MONTM> defaults to the current time (HH-MM).
5. Unless otherwise stated, DS1 cards are the only cards that support the BTH, RCV, and TRMT
directions. All other cards only support the RCV direction.
6. After the BLSR switching, the working path is switched out, the traffic goes through the protection
path, and the IPPM can be retrieved from the protection STS path.
7. If there is a STS PCA on the protection path, during the BLSR switching, the PCA path is
pre-emptive; sending this command on the protection path after BLSR switch, the command returns
the PMs off the protection path, not from the PCA path.
8. Retrieve the PM data for the OCH facility.
The rules are as follows: Client port only–Laser and SONET PM’s are applicable and will be
displayed. If the card payload is in SONET mode, then SONET PM’s will be displayed, provided
the MONLEV criteria is met.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“CHAN-6-1:,,,ACT,W_E,DROP,10.0,1530.33,1530.33:ILOSS=1.0,
VOAMODE=ATTN,VOAATTN=0.5,VOAPWR=0.0,VOAREFATTN=3.5,
VOAREFPWR=5.0,REFOPWR=10.5,CALOPWR=0,SFBER=1E-4,
SDBER=1E-5,ALSMODE=Y,ALSRCINT=30,ALSRCPW=40.1,
COMM=GCC,GCCRATE=192K,DWRAP=Y,FEC=Y,OSFBER=1E-5,
OSDBER=1E-4,MACADDR=00-0E-AA-BB-CC-FF,SYNCMSG=Y,
SENDDUS=Y,LSRSTAT=UP,SOAK=10:OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-OCH Description (continued)
3-222
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Trunk port Laser PM’s are always available. Laser PMs are only for Near End. If G.709 is enabled,
then the OTN PM’s will be displayed. If G.709 is enabled and FEC is enabled, then the FEC PM’s
will be displayed. If the card payload is in SONET mode, then SONET PM’s will be displayed. All
PM MONVALUES should pass the MONLEV filter criteria.
Section RTRV-PM-<MOD2> Description
Category Performance
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INH-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
INIT-REG-<MOD2> SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> SET-TH-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
Input Format RTRV-PM-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<MONTYPE>],
[<MONLEV>],[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>],[<DATE>],[<TIME>];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier. All the STS, VT1, FACILITY and DS1 AIDs are
supported; <AID> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10 and must not be null
<MONTYPE> indicates the type of the monitored parameter; valid values are
shown in the ALL_MONTYPE” section on page 4-33. A null value is
equivalent to ALL
<MONLEV> specifies the discriminating level for the requested monitored
parameter. <MONLEV> is in the format of LEVEL-DIRN where LEVEL is the
measured value of the monitored parameter (MONVAL) and valid values for
DIRN are shown in the “DIRN” section on page 4-61. A null value for
<MONLEV> defaults to 1-UP. <MONLEV> is a string
<LOCN> indicates the location; valid values are shown in the “LOCATION”
section on page 4-71. A null value defaults to NEND
<DIRN> is the direction of PM relative to the entity identified by the AID.
<DIRN> defaults to ALL, which means that the command initializes all the
registers irrespective of the PM direction. Valid values for <DIRN> are shown
in the “DIRECTION” section on page 4-60.
<TMPER> indicates the accumulation time period for the PM information. If
the <TMPER> is 1-DAY, <MONTM> is not applicable (null), and is treated as
null if <MONTM> is not null. Valid values for <TMPER> are shown in the
“TMPER” section on page 4-93. A null value defaults to 15-MIN
<DATE> is the beginning date of the PM or storage register period specified in
<TMPER>. The format of <MONDAT> is MM-DD, where MM (month of
year> ranges from 1–12 and DD (day of month) ranges from 1–31. A null value
for <MONDAT> defaults to the current date
<TIME> is the beginning time of day of the PM or storage register period
specified in <TMPER>. The format for <MONTM> is HH-MM, where HH
(hour of day) ranges from 0–23 and MM (minute of hour) ranges from 0–59. A
null value for <MONTM> defaults to the current time (HH-MM)
Input Example RTRV-PM-T1:TID:FAC-2-1:123::CVL,10-UP,NEND,BTH,15-MIN,04-11,12-45;
3-223
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:<MONTYPE>,<MONVAL>,[<VLDTY>],
[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>],[<MONDAT>],[<MONTM>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<AIDTYPE> specifies the type of AID; valid values are shown in the “MOD2B”
section on page 4-74, <AIDTYPE> is optional
<MONTYPE> indicates the type of monitored parameter; valid values are
shown in the ALL_MONTYPE” section on page 4-33
<MONVAL> is the measured value of the monitored parameter and is a string
<VLDTY> is the validity indicator of historical monitoring information; valid
values are shown in the “VALIDITY” section on page 4-98, <VLDTY> is
optional
<LOCN> indicates the location; valid values are shown in the “LOCATION”
section on page 4-71, <LOCN> is optional
<DIRN> is the direction of PM relative to the entity identified by the AID; valid
values are shown in the “DIRECTION” section on page 4-60, <DIRN> is
optional
<TMPER> indicates the accumulation time period for the PM information; valid
values are shown in the “TMPER” section on page 4-93, <TMPER> is optional
<MONDAT> is the beginning date of the PM or storage register period specified
in <TMPER>. The format of <MONDAT> is MM-DD, where MM (month of
year> ranges from 1–12 and DD (day of month) ranges from 1–31. <MONDAT>
is a string and is optional
<MONTM> is the beginning time of the day of the PM or storage register period
specified in <TMPER>. The format for <MONTM> is HH-MM, where HH
(hour of day) ranges from 0– 23 and MM (minute of hour) ranges from 0–59.
<MONTM> is a string and is optional.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-2-1,DS1-14:CVL,21,COMPL,NEND,BTN,15-MIN,04-11,12-45”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-PM-<MOD2> Description (continued)
3-224
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.162 RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve Performance Mode of PM Data
Collection (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the type of PM mode that has been previously set in the NE. This command can
be used to identify whether the PM parameters are Section, Line or Path type, and to identify whether or
not the PM are being collected by the NE.
This command returns the categories that are enabled only.
The PM mode and state of an entity is set by using the SET-PMMODE command.
Notes:
1. This near end monitoring of the intermediate-path PM (IPPM) only supports OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OC-48AS, OC-192, and EC-1 on STS Path.
2. The far end PM data collection is not supported by the current ONS 15454 in this release.
3. This release of software will support only the Path (P) mode type PM parameters with this
command, that is, this command will not be applicable for Line (L) and Section (S) mode types. It
should be noted that the PM monitoring for Line (L) and Section (S) are supported by the ONS
15454, and the storing PM data is always performed.
4. This command only returns the categories that are enabled (pmstate is ON), and does not return the
categories that are disabled (pmstate is OFF).
Section RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> Description
Category Performance
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INH-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
INIT-REG-<MOD2> SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-TH-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
Input Format RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<LOCN>;
where:
<AID> identifies the entity from where the PM mode is being retrieved; <AID>
is from the “STS” section on page 4-24 and must not be null
<LOCN> identifies the location from where the PM mode is being retrieved;
valid values are shown in the “LOCATION” section on page 4-71. <LOCN>
must not be null
Input Example RTRV-PMMODE-STS1:CISCO:STS-4-2:123::NEND;
3-225
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.163 RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>:Retrieve Performance Monitoring Schedule
(CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, OCH, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C,
STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the PM reporting schedule that was set for the NE by the SCHED-PMREPT
command.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:[<LOCN>],<MODETYPE>”
;
where:
<AID> identifies the entity from where the PM mode is being retrieved; <AID>
is from the “STS” section on page 4-24
<LOCN> identifies the location from where the PM mode is being retrieved;
valid values are shown in the “LOCATION” section on page 4-71. <LOCN> is
optional.
<MODETYPE> identifies whether or not the PM mode type is turned on or off;
valid values are shown in the “PM_MODE” section on page 4-83
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“STS-4-2:NEND,P”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> Description (continued)
Section RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2> Description
Category Performance
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INH-PMREP-ALL RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
INIT-REG-<MOD2> SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS-PATH>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-TH-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
Input Format RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10; <AID>
must not be null
Input Example RTRV-PMSCHED-OC3:CISCO-NODE:FAC-3-1:123;
3-226
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.164 RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL: Retrieve Performance Schedule All
This command retrieves all the PM reporting schedules that were set for the NE by the SCHED-PMREPT
command.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:<REPTINVL>,<REPTDAT>,<REPTTM>,
[<NUMINVL>],,[<MONLEV>],<LOCN>,,[<TMPER>],[<TMOFST>],
[<INHMODE>]”
;
where:
<AID> access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<AIDTYPE> type of access identifier; valid values are shown in the “MOD2”
section on page 4-72. <AIDTYPE> is optional
<REPTINVL> interval between PM reports; <REPTINVL> is a string
<REPTDAT> date for the next report; <REPTDAT> is a string
<REPTTM> the time of day for the next PM report; <REPTTM> is a string
<NUMINVL> remaining number of intervals over which PM is being reported;
<NUMINVL> is and integer and is optional
<MONLEV> discriminating level for the requested monitored parameter;
<MONLEV> is a string and is optional
<LOCN> location being performance-monitored and refers to the entity
identified by the AID; valid values are shown in the “LOCATION” section on
page 4-71
<TMPER> accumulation time period for the PM information; valid values are
shown in the “TMPER” section on page 4-93 and <TMPER> is optional
<TMOFST> is the time offset from the end of the last complete accumulation
time period to the beginning of the accumulation period specified by TMPER
parameter. <TMOFST> is a string and is optional
<INHMODE> describes whether the reporting of PM data is inhibited (via the
INH-PMREPT-ALL command) or is allowed (via the ALW-PMREPT-ALL
command); valid values are shown in the “INH_MODE” section on page 4-70
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-3-1,OC3:30-MIN,5-25,14-46,100,,1-UP,NEND,,15-MIN,0-0-15,ALW”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2> Description (continued)
Section RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL Description
Category Performance
Security Retrieve
3-227
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
INH-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
INIT-REG-<MOD2> SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-TH-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
Input Format RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL:CISCO-NODE::123;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:<REPTINVL>,<REPTDAT>,<REPTTM>,
[<NUMINVL>],,[<MONLEV>],<LOCN>,,[<TMPER>],<TMOFST>,
[<INHMODE>]”
;
where:
<AID> access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<AIDTYPE> type of access identifier; valid values are shown in the “MOD2”
section on page 4-72. <AIDTYPE> is optional
<REPTINVL> interval between PM reports; <REPTINVL> is a string
<REPTDAT> date for the next report; <REPTDAT> is a string
<REPTTM> the time of day for the next PM report; <REPTTM> is a string
<NUMINVL> remaining number of intervals over which PM is being reported;
<NUMINVL> is and integer and is optional
<MONLEV> discriminating level for the requested monitored parameter;
<MONLEV> is a string and is optional
<LOCN> location being performance-monitored and refers to the entity
identified by the AID; valid values are shown in the “LOCATION” section on
page 4-71
<TMPER> accumulation time period for the PM information; valid values are
shown in the “TMPER” section on page 4-93 and <TMPER> is optional
<TMOFST> is the time offset from the end of the last complete accumulation
time period to the beginning of the accumulation time period specified by the
TMPER parameter; <TMOFST> is a string
<INHMODE> describes whether the reporting of PM data is inhibited (via the
INH-PMREPT-ALL command) or is allowed (via the ALW-PMREPT-ALL
command); valid values are shown in the “INH_MODE” section on page 4-70
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-3-1,OC3:30-MIN,5-25,14-46,100,,1-UP,NEND,,15-MIN,0-0-15,ALW”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL Description (continued)
3-228
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.165 RTRV-POS: Retrieve Packet Over SONET
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the back end port information for the ML-series Ethernet cards when the back
end port is working in POS mode.
Note Because the back end port is virtual, the Virtual Facility (VFAC) AID should be used when issuing the
command.
Section RTRV-POS Description
Category Ports
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV_<OCN_TYPE>
ED-DS1 RTRV-DS1
ED-EC1 RTRV-EC1
ED-G1000 RTRV-FSTE
ED-T1 RTRV-G1000
ED-T3 RTRV-GIGE
INIT-REG-G1000 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO> RTRV-T3
RST-<MOD2_IO>
Input Format RTRV-POS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and
must not be null
Input Example RTRV-POS:TID:VFAC-1-1:CTAG;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[ADMINSTATE=<ADMINSTATE>,][LINKSTATE=<LINKSTATE>,]
[MTU=<MTU>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<ADMINSTATE> administration speed; valid values are shown in the
“UP_DOWN” section on page 4-98 and <ADMINSTATE> is optional
<MTU> maximum transport unit; <MTU> is an integer and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“VFAC-1-1::ADMINSTATE=DOWN,LINKSTATE=DOWN,MTU=1500”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-229
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.166 RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>: Retrieve Protection Switch (OC3, OC12,
OC48, OC192)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the switching state of a SONET line specified in the AID.
Section RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE> Description
Category SONET Line Protection
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> RLS-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>
ENT-FFP-<OCN_TYPE> RTRV-FFP-<OCN_TYPE>
EX-SW-<OCN_BLSR>
Input Format RTRV-PROTNSW-<OCN_TYPE>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> indicates the entity in the NE and is from the “FACILITY” section on
page 4-22; <AID> must not be null
Input Example RTRV-PROTNSW-OC48:CISCO:FAC-5-1:123;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<SC>,[<SWITCHTYPE>]”
;
where:
<AID> indicates the entity in the NE and is from the “FACILITY” section on
page 4-22
<SC> is the switch operation on the path/AID; valid values are shown in the
“SW” section on page 4-88
Valid values for <SWITCHTYPE> are shown in the “SWITCH_TYPE” section
on page 4-89: <SWITCHTYPE> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-5-1:MAN,MANWKSWBK”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-230
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.167 RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve Protection Switch (STS1,
STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the switching state of a SONET UPSR STS path specified in the AID. Because
the GR-1400 does not allow the LOCKOUT_OF_WORKING on the UPSR WORKING path/AID, the
AID:LOCKOUT,LOCKOUTOFWK” is not presented in this protection switch retrieval result.
Section RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> Description
Category UPSR Switching
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1 RLS-PROTNSW-VT1
REPT SW RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1
Input Format RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> indicates the entity in the NE and is from the “STS” section on
page 4-24; <AID> must not be null
Input Example RTRV-PROTNSW-STS1:CISCO:STS-5-1:123;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<SC>,[<SWITCHTYPE>]”
;
where:
<AID> is from the “STS” section on page 4-24
<SC> is the switch operation on the path/AID; valid values are shown in the
“SW” section on page 4-88
Valid values for <SWITCHTYPE> are shown in the “SWITCH_TYPE” section
on page 4-89: <SWITCHTYPE> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“STS-5-1:MAN,MANWKSWBK”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-231
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.168 RTRV-PROTNSW-CLNT: Retrieve Protection Switch Client
This command retrieves protection switch status of client facilities.
Section RTRV-PROTNSW-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-PROTNSW-CLNT
RLS-PROTNSW-CLNT
RTRV-FFP-CLNT
ED-FFP-CLNT
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
RTRV-COND-CLNT
RTRV-ALM-CLNT
DLT-FFP-CLNT
ENT-FFP-CLNT
Input Format RTRV-PROTNSW-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
Input Example RTRV-PROTNSW-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-1-1:100;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<SC>,[<SWITCHTYPE>]”
;
where:
<AID> is from the “STS” section on page 4-24
Valid values for <SC> are shown in the “SW” section on page 4-88
Valid values for <SWITCHTYPE> are shown in the “SWITCH_TYPE” section
on page 4-89
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-1-1:FRCD,MANWKSWBK”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-232
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.169 RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1: Retrieve Protection Switch VT1
This command retrieves the switching state of a SONET UPSR VT path specified in the AID. Because
the GR-1400 does not allow the LOCKOUT_OF_WORKING on the UPSR WORKING path/AID, the
AID:LOCKOUT,LOCKOUTOFWK” is not presented in this protection switch retrieval result.
3.4.170 RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH>: Retrieve Path Trace (STS1, STS3C, STS6C,
STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the contents of the SONET path trace message that is transported in the J1 byte
of the SONET STS Path.
The path trace message is a 64-character string with the last two characters reserved for the terminating
CR (carriage return) and the LF (line feed). The message can be an incoming path trace message, an
expected incoming path trace message, or an outgoing path trace message which is inserted into the path
overhead of the outgoing signal.
Section RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1 Description
Category UPSR Switching
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
OPR-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH> RLS-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1 RLS-PROTNSW-VT1
REPT SW RTRV-PROTNSW-<STS_PATH>
Input Format RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> indicates the entity in the NE and is from the “VT1_5” section on
page 4-30; <AID> must not be null
Input Example RTRV-PROTNSW-VT1:CISCO:VT1-5-1-1-2:123;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<SC>,[<SWITCHTYPE>]”
;
where:
<AID> indicates the entity in the NE and is from the “VT1_5” section on
page 4-30
<SC> is the switch operation on the path/AID; valid values are shown in the
“SW” section on page 4-88
Valid values for <SWITCHTYPE> are shown in the “SWITCH_TYPE” section
on page 4-89: <SWITCHTYPE> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“VT1-5-1-1-2:MAN,MANWKSWBK”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-233
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
The path trace mode has three modes: OFF, MANUAL, and AUTO. The path trace mode defaults to OFF
mode. The MANUAL mode performs the comparison of the received string with the user-entered
expected string. The AUTO mode performs the comparison of the present received string with an
expected string set to a previously received string. If there is a mismatch, the TIM-P alarm is raised.
When the path trace mode is in OFF mode, there is no path trace processing, and all the alarm and state
conditions are reset.
When the expected string is queried under the OFF path trace mode, the expected string is a copy of the
provisioned string or NULL. When an expected string is queried under the MANUAL path trace mode,
the expected string is a copy of the user-entered string. When an expected string is queried under the
AUTO path trace mode, the expected string is a copy of the acquired received string or NULL if the
string has not been acquired.
When the incoming string is queried under the OFF path trace mode, the incoming string is NULL. When
an incoming string is queried under the MANUAL or AUTO path trace mode, the incoming string is a
copy of the received string or NULL if the string has not been received.
When the transmitted string is queried under the OFF, MANUAL or AUTO path trace mode, the
transmitted string is the provisioned transmit string.
Notes:
1. A null value for the <MSGTYPE> defaults to INCTRC.
2. Only the NEND of the <LOCN> value is supported. A null value of the <LOCN> defaults to NEND.
3. Sending a FEND of the <LOCN> with this command, an “unsupported locn value” error message
will display.
4. J1 (EXPTRC/INCTRC) is implemented on the DS1/DS1N, DS3E/DS3NE, DS3XM, EC1, OC3,
OC48AS and OC192 cards.
5. TRC is supported only on DS1(N), DS3(N)E, and DS3XM cards.
Section RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH> Description
Category STS Paths
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-<STS_PATH>
Input Format RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::
[<MSGTYPE>][:<LOCN>];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “STS” section on page 4-24 and must not
be null
<MSGTYPE> is the type of trace message to be retrieved; valid values are shown
in the “MSGTYPE” section on page 4-77 and a null value defaults to INCTRC.
A null value is equivalent to ALL.
<LOCN> is the location of the trace message; valid values are shown in the
“LOCATION” section on page 4-71. A null value is equivalent to ALL.
Input Example RTRV-PTHTRC-STS1:CISCO:STS-2-1:123::EXPTRC:NEND;
3-234
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.171 RTRV-SYNCN: Retrieve Synchronization
This command retrieves the synchronization reference list used to determine the sources for the NE's
reference clock and the BITS output clock. For each clock, up to three synchronization sources may be
specified (e.g. PRIMARY, SECOND, THIRD).
Notes:
1. To retrieve/set the timing mode, SSM message Set or Quality of RES information, use the
RTRV-NE-SYNCN and ED-NE-SYNCN commands.
2. The output example shown here is under line timing mode.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<TRACMSG>”
;
where:
<TRACMSG> is the Path Trace message returned to the requester. The message
should be up 64 characters in length.The user is allowed to enter up to 62
characters, the last two characters are reserved for the terminating CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed); <TRACMSG> is a string
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“TRACMSG”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH> Description (continued)
Section RTRV-SYNCN Description
Category Synchronization
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-BITS RLS-SYNCNSW
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-BITS
ED-SYNCN RTRV-ALM-SYNCN
OPR-SYNCNSW RTRV-BITS
REPT ALM BITS RTRV-COND-BITS
REPT ALM SYNCN RTRV-COND-SYNCN
REPT EVT BITS RTRV-NE-SYNCN
REPT EVT SYNCN
Input Format RTRV-SYNCN:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> identifies the synchronization reference to retrieve; <AID> is from the
“SYNC_REF” section on page 4-28, is listable and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-SYNCN:BOYES:SYNC-NE:234;
3-235
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.172 RTRV-T1: Retrieve T1 Facility
This command retrieves the DS-1 facilities configuration.
(The facilities are on the XTC card for the ONS 15327)
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>:<REF>,<REFVAL>,[<QREF>],[<STATUS>],[<PROTECTSTATUS>]”
;
where:
<AID> is the synchronization reference to be modified and is from the
“SYNC_REF” section on page 4-28
<REF> is the rank of the synchronization reference and is from the “SYNCSW”
section on page 4-29
<REFVAL> is the value of the synchronization reference and is from the
“SYN_SRC” section on page 4-27
<QREF> is the quality of the reference source; valid values are shown in the
“SYNC_CLOCK_REF_QUALITY_LEVEL” section on page 4-89, <QREF> is
optional
<STATUS> is the active status of the synchronization source; valid values are
shown in the “STATUS” section on page 4-87, <STATUS> is optional
<PROTECTSTATUS> indicates whether the working or protect card (in a
protection group) provides timing. This parameter has no significance if the
reference source is BITS or INTERNAL and is left blank. Valid values are
shown in the “SIDE” section on page 4-87 and <PROTECTSTATUS> is
optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“SYNC-NE:PRI,FAC-1-2,PRS,ACT,WORK”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-SYNCN Description (continued)
Section RTRV-T1 Description
Category Ports
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RST <MOD2_IO>
ED-DS1 RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-EC1 RTRV-DS1
ED-G1000 RTRV-EC1
ED-T1 RTRV-G1000
ED-T3 RTRV-T3
RMV <MOD2_IO>
3-236
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-T1:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and
must not be null
Input Example RTRV-T1:TID:FAC-2-1:1223;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[LINECDE=<LINECDE>,][FMT=<FMT>,]
[LBO=<LBO>,][TACC=<TAP>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:<PST>,[<SST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<LINECDE> is a line code; valid values are shown in the “LINE_CODE” section
on page 4-70, <LINECDE> is optional
<FMT> is a frame format; valid values are shown in the “FRAME_FORMAT”
section on page 4-69, <FMT> is optional
<LBO> is a line buildout; valid values are shown in the “LINE_BUILDOUT”
section on page 4-70, <LBO> is optional
<TAP> defines the STS as a test access port with a selected unique TAP number.
The TAP number ranges from 1–999. When TACC is 0, the TAP is deleted.
<TAP> is from the “TACC” section on page 4-29 and <TAP> is optional
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time measured in 15 minute intervals;
<SOAK> is an integer and is optional
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on page 4-87
and <SST> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-2-1::LINECDE=AMI,FMT=ESF,LBO=0-131,
TACC=8,SOAK=10:OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-T1 Description (continued)
3-237
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.173 RTRV-T3: Retrieve T3
This command retrieves the facility properties of a DS3 and a DS3XM card.
(The facilities are on the XTC card for the ONS 15327)
Notes:
1. CTC can set the FMT attribute of a DS3(N)E line to autoprovision to set the framing based on the
framing is coming in. This would result in the FMT field being blanked out for a few seconds
blanked forever for a preprovisioned DS3(N)E card on CTC.
2. The autoprovision is not considered a valid DS3 framing type. It is used only to trigger an autosense
and subsequent autoprovisioning of a valid DS3 framing type (unframed, M23, C-BIT).
3. TL1 does not have the autoprovision mode according to GR-199. TL1 maps/returns the
autoprovision to be the unframed framing type.
Section RTRV-T3 Description
Category Ports
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<OCN_TYPE> RST-<MOD2_IO>
ED-DS1 RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>
ED-EC1 RTRV-DS1
ED-G1000 RTRV-EC1
ED-T1 RTRV-G1000
ED-T3 RTRV-T1
RMV-<MOD2_IO>
Input Format RTRV-T3:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> is the access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and
must not be null
Input Example RTRV-T3:CISCO:FAC-1-2:123;
3-238
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.174 RTRV-TACC: Retrieve Test Access
This command retrieves details associated with a TAP. The TAP is identified by the TAP number. The
ALL input TAP value means that the command will return all the configured TACCs in the NE.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[FMT=<FMT>,][LINECDE=<LINECDE>,]
[LBO=<LBO>,][TACC=<TAP>,][SOAK=<SOAK>]:<PST>,[<SST>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22
<FMT> is a frame format; valid values are shown in the “DS_LINE_TYPE”
section on page 4-61, <FMT> is optional
<LINECDE> is a line code; valid values are shown in the “DS_LINE_CODE”
section on page 4-61, <LINECDE> is optional
<LBO> is a line buildout; valid values are shown in the “E_LBO” section on
page 4-62, <LBO> is optional
<TAP> defines the STS as a test access port with a selected unique TAP number.
The TAP number ranges from 1–999. When TACC is 0, the TAP is deleted.
<TAP> is from the “TACC” section on page 4-29 and is optional
<SOAK> OOS-AINS to IS transition soak time measured in 15 minute intervals;
<SOAK> is an integer and is optional
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on page 4-87
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-1-2::FMT=C-BIT,LINECDE=B3ZS,LBO=0-225,
TACC=8,SOAK=10:OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-T3 Description (continued)
Section RTRV-TACC Description
Category Test Access
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
CHG-ACCMD-<MOD_TACC>
CONN-TACC-<MOD_TACC>
DISC-TACC
3-239
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-TACC:[<TID>]:<TAP>:<CTAG>;
where:
<TAP> indicates the assigned numeric number for the AID being used as a TAP.
The TAP number must be an integer with a range of 1–999. The ALL TAP value
means that the command will return all the configured TACCs in the NE. <TAP>
is a string and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-TACC:CISCO:241:CTAG;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<TAP>:<TACC_AID1>,<TACC_AID2>,[<MD>],[<E_CONN>],[<F_CONN>]”
;
where:
<TAP> indicates the assigned numeric number for the AID being used as a TAP;
<TAP> is a string
<TACC_AID1> is the STS or VT AID that was designated as a test access point
and assigned to the TAP; <TACC_AID1> is from the ALL” section on
page 4-10
<TACC_AID2> is the STS or VT AID that was designated as a test access point
and assigned to the TAP+1; <TACC_AID2> is from the ALL” section on
page 4-10
<MD> indicates the test access mode. It identifies the status of the circuit
connected to the TACC. Valid values are shown in the “TACC_MODE” section
on page 4-92
<E_CONN> indicates the E side STS or VT AID of a circuit connected to the
TACC or under test; <E_CONN> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10 and is
optional
<F_CONN> indicates the F side STS or VT AID of a circuit connected to the
TACC or under test; <F_CONN> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“241:STS-2-1,STS-2-2,MONE,STS-12-1,STS-13-1”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-TACC Description (continued)
3-240
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.175 RTRV-TH-<MOD2>: Retrieve Threshold (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12,
OC48, OC192, OCN, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C,
STS192C, T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the threshold level of one or more monitored parameters.
Notes:
1. After the BLSR switching, the working path is switched out, the traffic goes through the protection
path and the threshold can be retrieved from the protection path.
2. If there is a STS PCA on the protection path, during the BLSR switching, the PCA path is
pre-emptive; sending this command on the protection path after BLSR switch, the command returns
the PMs off the protection path, not from the PCA path.
The message is issued to retrieve the thresholds for PM and the alarm thresholds. If it is used to
retrieve the alarm thresholds, the time-period is not applicable.
The presentation rules are as follows: Client port only–Laser, Alarm and SONET Thresholds are
applicable and will be displayed. Laser and alarm thresholds are only for Near End. If the card
payload is in SONET mode, then SONET Thresholds will be displayed. The Receiver Temperature
Montypes (RXT) are only applicable to the Trunk Port. The Transceiver Voltage Montypes (XCVR)
are not applicable, though it is displayed or handled.
Laser and Alarm thresholds are always available. Laser and alarm thresholds are only for Near End.
If G.709 is enabled, then the OTN thresholds will be displayed. If G.709 is enabled and FEC is
enabled, then the FEC thresholds will be displayed. If the card payload is in SONET mode, then
SONET Thresholds will be displayed. The Transceiver Voltage Montypes (XCVR) are not
applicable, though it is displayed or handled.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Section RTRV-TH-<MOD2> Description
Category Performance
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
INH-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
INIT-REG-<MOD2> RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INIT-REG-G1000 SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-TH-<MOD2>
3-241
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Input Format RTRV-TH-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::
[<MONTYPE>],[<LOCN>],<TMPER>[::];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the ALL” section on page 4-10 and must not
be null
<MONTYPE> is the monitored type and defaults to CVL; valid values are
shown in the ALL_MONTYPE” section on page 4-33. A null value is
equivalent to ALL.
Note <MONTYPE> defaults to: CVL for OCN, EC1 and DSN, ESP for STSp,
UASV for VT1, AISSP for DS1 layer of DS3XM. LOCN defaults to NEND.
TMPER defaults to 15 minutes.
<LOCN> is the location; valid values are shown in the “LOCATION” section on
page 4-71. A null value is equivalent to ALL
<TMPER> indicates the accumulation time period; valid values are shown in the
“TMPER” section on page 4-93 and <TMPER> must not be null
Input Example RTRV-TH-T3:CISCO:FAC-1-3:1234::CVL,NEND,15-MIN;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>,[<AIDTYPE>]:<MONTYPE>,[<LOCN>],,<THLEV>,[<TMPER>]”
;
where:
<AID> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<AIDTYPE> specifies the type of AID; valid values are shown in the “MOD2B”
section on page 4-74, <AIDTYPE> is optional
<MONTYPE> indicates the monitored type; valid values are shown in the
ALL_MONTYPE” section on page 4-33
<LOCN> is a location; valid values are shown in the “LOCATION” section on
page 4-71, <LOCN> is optional
<THLEV> is the threshold value and is a float; <THLEV> is an integer
<TMPER> is the accumulation time period for the PM information; valid values
are shown in the “TMPER” section on page 4-93, <TMPER> is optional
Output
Example
TID-0001998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-1-3,DS3:CVL,NEND,,1,15-MIN”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-TH-<MOD2> Description (continued)
3-242
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.176 RTRV-TOD: Retrieve Time of Day
This command retrieves the system date and time at the instant when the command was executed. The
time returned is in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Section RTRV-TOD Description
Category System
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL REPT EVT FXFR
APPLY RTRV-HDR
COPY-RFILE RTRV-INV
ED-DAT RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INIT-SYS SET-TOD
Input Format RTRV-TOD:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Input Example RTRV-TOD:CAZADERO::230;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<YEAR>,<MONTH>,<DAY>,<HOUR>,
<MINUTE>,<SECOND>,<TMTYPE>”
;
where:
<YEAR> is the current calendar year and is a string
<MONTH> is the month of the year and ranges from 01–12; <MONTH> is a
string
<DAY> is the day of the month and ranges from 01–31; <DAY> is a string
<HOUR> is the hour of the day and ranges from 00–23; <HOUR> is a string
<MINUTE> is the minute of the hour and ranges from 00–59; <MINUTE> is a
string
<SECOND> is the second of the minute and ranges from 00–59; <SECOND> is
a string
<TMTYPE> identifies the time zone and is a string
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“1998,05,08,17,01,33,UTC”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-243
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.177 RTRV-TRC-<OCN_BLSR>: Retrieve Trace Client (OC12, OC192, OC48)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command retrieves the valid J1 expected trace string, retrieved trace string, trace mode, C2 byte,
and STS bandwidth of the OCn port only if the port has a BLSR.
Note This command only applies to OC48AS and OC192 cards.
Note Sending this command over unsupported BLSR path trace cards, or unequipmented cards will result in
a J1 Trace Not Supported On This Card (IIAC) error.
Section RTRV-TRC-<OCN_BLSR> Description
Category BLSR
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-<STS_PATH>,
RTRV-PTHTRC-<STS_PATH>
Input Format RTRV-TRC-<OCN_BLSR>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<AID> is the AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and must not be
null
Input Example RTRV-TRC-OC48:CISCO:FAC-6-1:238;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[LEVEL=<LEVEL>,][EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,][INCTRC=<INCTRC>,]
[TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,][C2=<C2>]”
;
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “STS” section on page 4-24
<LEVEL> indicates the rate of the cross connected channel; valid values are
shown in the “STS_PATH” section on page 4-88. <LEVEL> is optional
<EXPTRC> indicates the expected path trace message (J1) contents.
<EXPTRC> is any 64-character string, including the terminating CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed). <EXPTRC> is a string and is optional
<INCTRC> indicates the incoming path trace message contents. <INCTRC> is
any 64-character string, including the CR and LF. <INCTRC> is a string and is
optional
<TRCMODE> indicates the trace mode; valid values are shown in the
“TRCMODE” section on page 4-94 and <TRCMODE> is optional
<C2> indicates C2 Byte Hex Code; valid values are shown in the “C2_BYTE”
section on page 4-44 and <C2> is optional
3-244
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.178 RTRV-TRC-CLNT: Retrieve Trace Client
This command retrieves the SONET J0 Section sent trace string, expected trace string, received trace
string, trace mode, and the trace level for the client facility.
The following rules apply: Client port–only J0 Section trace applies. The J0 Section trace applies only
if the card termination mode is not transparent and the payload is SONET/SDH.
Depending on the settings, the following filtering applies: If no TRCLEVEL is provided, all
TRCLEVELS are reported as applicable. If TRCLEVEL is provided and no MSGTYPE is provided, all
applicable MSGTYPES for the given level is displayed. If no MSGTYPE is provided, all MSGTYPES
are reported as applicable. If a MSGTYPE is provided without a TRCLEVEL, then the given MSGTYPE
for all TRCLEVELS are displayed.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“STS-6-1-25::LEVEL=STS1,EXPTRC=“EXPTRCSTRING”,INCTRC=
“INCTRCSTRING”,TRCMODE=AUTO,C2=0X04”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-TRC-<OCN_BLSR> Description (continued)
Section RTRV-TRC-CLNT Description
Category DWDM
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-TRC-CLNT
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
ED-CLNT
RTRV-CLNT
Input Format RTRV-TRC-CLNT:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>::[<MSGTYPE>],
[<TRCLEVEL>][::];
where:
<SRC> is the AID from the “FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and must not be
null
<MSGTYPE> is the type of trace message to be retrieved. Valid values for
<MSGTYPE> are shown in the “MSGTYPE” section on page 4-77. A null value
is equivalent to ALL
<TRCLEVEL> is the level at which the trace information is handled. Valid
values are shown in the “TRCLEVEL” section on page 4-94 and a null value is
equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-TRC-CLNT:CISCO:FAC-2-1:100::EXPTRC,J0-SEC;
3-245
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.179 RTRV-TRC-OCH: Retrieve Trace Optical Channel
This command retrieves the sent trace string, expected trace string, received trace string, trace mode, and
the trace level for the SONET J0 Section, the TTI PATH and SECTION monitoring levels of the DWDM
facility.
The following rules apply: Client port–only the J0 Section trace applies. The J0 Section trace applies
only if the card termination mode is not transparent and the payload is SONET/SDH. On the DWDM
port the J0 Section trace, the TTI Path, Section trace monitoring point traces are allowed. The J0 Section
trace is allowed only if the payload for the card is set to SONET/SDH. The J0 Section trace is allowed
only if the card termination mode is not transparent. The TTI Path, Section trace is allowed only if the
G.709 (DWRAP) is enabled.
Depending on the settings, the following filtering applies: If no TRCLEVEL is provided, all
TRCLEVELS are reported as applicable. If TRCLEVEL is provided and no MSGTYPE is provided, all
applicable MSGTYPES for the given level is displayed. If no MSGTYPE is provided, all MSGTYPES
are reported as applicable. If a MSGTYPE is provided with out a TRCLEVEL, then the given
MSGTYPE for all TRCLEVELS are displayed.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“[TRCLEVEL=<TRCLEVEL>,][EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,][TRC=<TRC>,]
[INCTRC=<INCTRC>,][TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,]
[TRCFORMAT=<TRCFORMAT>]”
;
where:
Valid values for <TRCLEVEL> are shown in the “TRCLEVEL” section on
page 4-94 and <TRCLEVEL> is optional
<EXPTRC> expected path trace message to be retrieved; <EXPTRC> is a string
and is optional
<TRC> trace message sent; <TRC> is a string and is optional
<INCTRC> incoming trace message to be retrieved; <INCTRC> is a string and
is optional
Valid values for <TRCMODE> are shown in the ALS_MODE” section on
page 4-41 and <TRCMODE> is optional
Valid values for <TRCFORMAT> are shown in the “TRCFORMAT” section on
page 4-94 and <TRCFORMAT> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“TRCLEVEL=J0-SEC,EXPTRC=“AAA”,TRC=“AAA”,INCTRC=“AAA”,
TRCMODE=MAN,TRCFORMAT=16-BYTE”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-TRC-CLNT Description (continued)
3-246
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Section RTRV-TRC-OCH Description
Category DWDM
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-TRC-OCH
ED-DWDM
RTRV-DWDM
ED-OCH
RTRV-OCH
Input Format RTRV-TRC-OCH:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>::[<MSGTYPE>],[<TRCLEVEL>][::];
where:
<SRC> is the AID from the “CHANNEL” section on page 4-19 and must not be
null
<MSGTYPE> is the type of trace message to be retrieved. Valid values for
<MSGTYPE> are shown in the “MSGTYPE” section on page 4-77. A null value
is equivalent to ALL
<TRCLEVEL> is the level at which the trace information is handled. Valid
values are shown in the “TRCLEVEL” section on page 4-94 and a null value is
equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-TRC-OCH:CISCO:CHAN-2-2:100::EXPTRC,PATH;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“[TRCLEVEL=<TRCLEVEL>,][EXPTRC=<EXPTRC>,][TRC=<TRC>,]
[INCTRC=<INCTRC>,][TRCMODE=<TRCMODE>,]
[TRCFORMAT=<TRCFORMAT>]”
;
where:
<TRCLEVEL> level at which the trace information is handled; valid values are
shown in the “TRCLEVEL” section on page 4-94 and <TRCLEVEL> is optional
<EXPTRC> expected path trace message to be retrieved; <EXPTRC> is a string
and is optional
<TRC> trace message sent; <TRC> is a string and is optional
<INCTRC> incoming trace message to be retrieved; <INCTRC> is a string and
is optional
<TRCMODE> indicates the trace mode; valid values are shown in the
“TRCMODE” section on page 4-94 and <TRCMODE> is optional
<TRCFORMAT> is the size of the trace message. In SONET/SDH mode, only 1
or 16 bytes are applicable for the J0 section trace. The TT1 level trace is only 64
bytes. Valid values are shown in the “TRCFORMAT” section on page 4-94 and
<TRCFORMAT> is optional
3-247
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.180 RTRV-UCP-CC: Retrieve Unified Control Plane Control Channel
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command creates a UCP IP control channel attributes.
The ALL AID is used for UCP retrieving command input only. A NULL AID in the IPCC’s retrieval
command defaults to the ALL AID, which returns all the IPCCs of the node.
Retrieve all of the UCP IPCCs example:
RTRV-UCP-CC:::A;
Notes:
1. If the control channel is not found, a SRQN (Status, Invalid Request) error message is returned.
2. If the IPCC type is ROUTED (CCTYPE=ROUTED), both MTU and CRCMD fields are grayed out.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“TRCLEVEL=SEC,EXPTRC=“AAA”,TRC=“AAA”,INCTRC=“AAA”,
TRCMODE=MAN,TRCFORMAT=64-BYTE”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-TRC-OCH Description (continued)
Section RTRV-UCP-CC Description
Category UCP
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC ENT-UCP-NBR
DLT-UCP-IF REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR REPT EVT UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-IF
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-IF
Input Format RTRV-UCP-CC:[<TID>]:[<AID >]:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> indicates an individual IPCC ID. The ALL AID is used for UCP retrieving
command input only. A NULL AID in the IPCCs retrieval command defaults to the
ALL AID which returns all the IPCCs of the node. <AID> is from the “IPCC”
section on page 4-16 and a null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-UCP-CC:CISCO:CC-9:CTAG;
3-248
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“[<AID>]::NBRIX=<NBRIX>,CCTYPE=<CCTYPE>,[PORT=<PORT>,]
LOCALCCID=<LOCALCCID>,LOCALIPCC=<LOCALIPCC>,
REMOTECCID=<REMOTECCID>,[REMOTEIPCC=<REMOTEIPCC>,]
LMPHELLOINT=<LMPHELLOINT>,
OPERLMPHELLOINT=<OPERLMPHELLOINT>,
LMPHELLODEADINT=<LMPHELLODEADINT>,
OPERLMPHELLODEADINT=<OPERLMPHELLODEADINT>,
[TUNMD=<TUNMD>,][MTU=<MTU>,][CRCMD=<CRCMD>]”
;
where:
<AID> indicates an individual IPCC ID; <AID> is from the “IPCC” section on
page 4-16 and <AID> is optional
<NBRIX> indicates the neighbor node index and is an integer
<CCTYPE> indicates the type of the control channel; valid values are shown in
the “UCP_IPCC_TYPE” section on page 4-97
<PORT> indicates the port which the control channel is configured, while the
CCTYPE is the type of SDCC; <PORT> is from the “FACILITY” section on
page 4-22 and is optional
<LOCALCCID> indicates the local control channel ID and is an integer
<LOCALIPCC> indicates the local IP address of the control channel and is a
string
<REMOTECCID> indicates the remote control channel ID and is an integer
<REMOTEIPCC> indicates the remote IP address of the control channel;
<REMOTEIPCC> is a string and is optional
<LMPHELLOINT> indicates the provisioned interval between hello messages
sent by this node. <LMPHELLOINT> has a range of 1–10 seconds with a
default of 5 seconds; <LMPHELLOINT> is an integer
<OPERLMPHELLOINT> indicates the LMP hello interval negotiated between
a node and it’s neighbor and the negotiated value is used during operation. This
value is the negotiated, operational value of LMP Hello interval. This value is
initialized to the hello Interval at the time of IPCC creation and is updated after
the negotiation is done with the neighbor; <OPERLMPHELLOINT> is a float
<LMPHELLODEADINT> indicates the control channel time-out interval (in
milliseconds) by the neighbor if the neighbor does not receive the hello
message, and defaults to 15 (with the range of 3–30). This interval has to be at
least as large as the hello interval and is normally set to 3 times the hello
interval. Its range is 3 seconds to 30 seconds with a default of 15 seconds.
<LMPHELLODEADINT> is an integer
<OPERLMPHELLODEADINT> indicates the operational value of the LMP
interval negotiated between this node and its neighbor. This value is initialized
to the helloDeadInterval at the time of IPCC creation and is updated after the
negotiation is done with the neighbor; <OPERLMPHELLODEADINT> is a
float
Section RTRV-UCP-CC Description (continued)
3-249
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.181 RTRV-UCP-IF: Retrieve Unified Control Plane Interface
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command retrieves UCP interface attributes.
The local interface ID (LOCALIFID) is used by LMP/RSVP (Line Management Protocol/Resource
reservation Protocol). If zero is passed in as the local Interface ID of the data link, then the node assigns
a value for it. If the user specifies a non-zero value, then the node checks if that Interface ID is available
and uses it.
If the UCP interface/data link control channel type is SDCC type, the local interface ID should be same
as CCID.
Retrieve all of the UCP interfaces example:
RTRV-UCP-IF:::A;
Note If this command is sent twice or inputs invalid data, as SRQN (Status, Invalid Request) error message is
returned.
Output Format
(continued)
<TUNMD> indicates the IP tunneling option. It defaults to disabled; valid
values are shown in the “UCP_CC_TUN_MD” section on page 4-96 and
<TUNMD> is optional
<MTU> indicates the MTU size of this control channel; <MTU> is an integer
and is optional
<CRCMD> indicates the CRC mode for this control channel. It is applicable to
IPCCs in SDCC type; valid values are shown in the “UCP_CRC_MODE”
section on page 4-97 and <CRCMD> is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“CC-9::NBRIX=8,CCTYPE=SDCC,PORT=FAC-2-1,LOCALCCID=9,
LOCALIPCC=172.20.209.31,REMOTECCID=2,
REMOTEIPCC=172.20.209.15,LMPHELLOINT=10,
OPERLMPHELLOINT=10.00,LMPHELLODEADINT=30,
OPERLMPHELLODEADINT=30.00,TUNMD=DISABLED,
MTU=1500,CRCMD=16-BIT”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-UCP-CC Description (continued)
Section RTRV-UCP-IF Description
Category UCP
Security Retrieve
3-250
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC ENT-UCP-NBR
DLT-UCP-IF REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR REPT EVT UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-IF
Input Format RTRV-UCP-IF:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> indicates the interface port index of the data link; <AID> is from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and a null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-UCP-IF:CISCO:FAC-2-1:CTAG;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“[<AID>]::NBRIX=<NBRIX>,CCID=<CCID>,LOCALIFID=<LOCALIFID>,
REMOTEIFID=<REMOTEIFID>,TNATYPE=<TNATYPE>,
TNAADDR=<TNAADDR>,CORENETWORKID=<CORENETWORKID>”
;
where:
<AID> indicates the interface port index of the data link; <AID> is from the
“FACILITY” section on page 4-22 and is optional
<NBRIX> indicates a neighbor within the local node; <NBRIX> is an integer
<CCID> indicates the control channel ID and is an integer
<LOCALFID> indicates the local interface ID used by LMP/RSVP (line
management protocol/resource reservation protocol); <LOCALFID> is an
integer
<REMOTEFID> indicates the interface ID on the neighbor’s side and in an
integer
<TNATYPE> indicates the TNA (transport network administered) type; valid
values are shown in the “UCP_TNA_TYPE” section on page 4-97
<TNAADDR> indicates the TNA IP address and is a string
<CORENETWORKID> indicates the core network ID and is an integer
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“FAC-2-1::NBRIX=12,CCID=16,LOCALIFID=16,REMOTEIFID=5,
TNATYPE=IPV4,TNAADDR=172.20.209.73,CORENETWORKID=9”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-UCP-IF Description (continued)
3-251
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.182 RTRV-UCP-NBR: Retrieve Unified Control Plane Neighbor
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command retrieves a UCP neighbor.
The default value of the node name can be overwritten by the TL1 user to a string in a maximum size of
20 characters. If the node name includes non-identified TL1 characters (e.g. space), the text string format
with the double quotes is required.
The ALL AID is used for UCP retrieving command input only. A NULL AID in the retrieval command
defaults to the ALL AID, which returns all the UCP neighbors of the node.
Retrieve all the UCP neighbors example:
RTRV-UCP-NBR:::A;
Section RTRV-UCP-NBR Description
Category UCP
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC ENT-UCP-NBR
DLT-UCP-IF REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR REPT EVT UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NODE
ENT-UCP-IF
Input Format RTRV-UCP-NBR:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<AID> indicates an individual neighbor AID of the UCP; <AID> is from the
“NBR” section on page 4-16 and a null value is equivalent to ALL
Input Example RTRV-UCP-NBR:CISCO:NBR-8:CTAG;
3-252
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.183 RTRV-UCP-NODE: Retrieve Unified Control Plane Node
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command retrieves UCP node level attributes.
The NODEID is the unique number used to identify the local node in LMP, RSVP messages sent to the
neighbors. It defaults to the local ethernet interface address (ISA).
The retry initial interval (in seconds) is used for that have been released by the net work side. This
interval has a range of 60 seconds (1 minute) to 1800 seconds (30 minutes), with a default value of 180
seconds.
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<AID>::[NBRIX=<NBRIX>,][NODEID=<NODEID>,][NAME=<NAME>,]
[NDEN=<NDEN>,][HELLOEN=<HELLOEN>,][HELLOINT=<HELLOINT>,]
[REFREDEN=<REFREDEN>,][NUMRXMTS=<NUMRXMTS>]”
;
where:
<AID> indicates an individual neighbor AID of the UCP. The ALL AID and
NODEID (IP address, e.g. “AAA.BB.CC.D”) are used for UCP retrieving
command input only; <AID> is from the “NBR” section on page 4-16
<NBRIX> indicates a neighbor within the local node; <NBRIX> is an integer
and is optional
<NODEID> indicates the neighbor node ID as received in RSVP, LMP
messages from that node; <NODEID> is a string and is optional
<NAME> is a string and is optional
<NDEN> indicates if the neighbor discovery is enabled or not for this neighbor;
valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <NDEN> is
optional
<HELLOEN> indicates if the RSVP hello is enabled to this neighbor or not;
valid values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and
<HELLOEN> is optional
<HELLOINT> indicates the interval between hello messages to the neighbor;
<HELLOINT> is an integer and is optional
<REFREDEN> indicates if the refresh reduction is enabled or not; valid values
are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <REFREDEN> is
optional
<NUMRXMTS> indicates the maximum number of retransmits of each
message; <NUMRXMTS> is not editable, is an integer and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“NBR-8::NBRIX=8,NODEID=192.168.100.52,NAME=NODE-B,
NDEN=Y,HELLOEN=Y,HELLOINT=20,REFREDEN=N,NUMRXMTS=3”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-UCP-NBR Description (continued)
3-253
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
The retry max interval (in seconds) is used for released circuits. The node will back off exponentially
from the initial retry interval to this maximum value of 600 seconds (10 minutes).
The restart time is used to be signaled to neighbors. It indicates the time taken by this node (in seconds)
to restart. This timer has a range of 1 second to 10 seconds with a default of 5 seconds.
The recovery time is used to be signaled to neighbors. It indicates the time taken by this node (in
seconds) to re-sync path, reservation state with a given neighbor. This timer has a range of 300 seconds
(5 minutes) to 1800 seconds (30 minutes) and a default value of 600 seconds (10 minutes).
The transmit interval is used to retransmit un-acknowledged messages. This timer has a range of 1
second to 7 seconds with a default value of 1 second.
The refresh interval is used to refresh path, reservation state. This interval has a range of 30 seconds to
4060800 seconds (47 days) with a default value of 30 seconds.
The timeout RESV interval is used to wait for a reservation message in response to a PATH message.
This interval has a range of 10–180 seconds with a default value of 60 seconds.
The timeout RESV CONF interval is used to wait for a RESV CONF message in response to a RESV
message. This interval has a range of 10–180 seconds with a default value of 60 seconds.
The Source Deletion in progress is a timeout interval while the source is in the progress of cleanly
deleting a call. This interval has a range of 10–180 seconds with a default of 60 seconds.
The Destination Deletion progress is a timeout interval while the destination is in the progress of cleanly
deleting a call. This interval has a range of 10–180 seconds with a default value of 60 seconds.
Notes:
1. If the retry initial interval is set to zero, it will be interpreted as having the retry procedure disable.
2. The retry maximum interval has to be set to a higher value than the initial retry interval.
Section RTRV-UCP-NODE Description
Category UCP
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
DLT-UCP-CC ENT-UCP-NBR
DLT-UCP-IF REPT ALM UCP
DLT-UCP-NBR REPT EVT UCP
ED-UCP-CC RTRV-ALM-UCP
ED-UCP-IF RTRV-COND-UCP
ED-UCP-NBR RTRV-UCP-CC
ED-UCP-NODE RTRV-UCP-IF
ENT-UCP-CC RTRV-UCP-NBR
ENT-UCP-IF
Input Format RTRV-UCP-NODE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>[::::];
Input Example RTRV-UCP-NODE:CISCO::CTAG;
3-254
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“::[NODEID=<NODEID>,][INITRETRY=<INITRETRY>,]
[MAXRETRY=<MAXRETRY>,][RESTARTTM=<RESTARTTM>,]
[RECOVTM=<RECOVTM>,][RXMTINT=<RXMTINT>,]
[RFRSHINT=<RFRSHINT>,][RESVTIMEOUT=<RESVTIMEOUT>,]
[RESVCONFTIMEOUT=<RESVCONFTIMEOUT>,]
[SOURCEDIP=<SOURCEDIP>,][DESTINATIONDIP=<DESTINATIONDIP>]”
;
where:
<NODEID> indicates the node IP address, is a string and is optional
<INITRETRY> indicates the circuit retry initial interval (in seconds);
<INITRETRY> is an integer and is optional
<MAXRETRY> indicates the circuit retry maximum retry interval (in seconds);
<MAXRETRY> is an integer and is optional
<RESTARTTM> indicates the restart time taken by the local node;
<RESTARTTM> is an integer and is optional
<RECOVTM> indicates the time taken by the local node to re-synchronize the
path, reservation state with a given neighbor; <RECOVTM> is an integer and is
optional
<RXMTINT> indicates the interval for re-transmitting un-acknowledged
messages; <RXMTINT> is an integer and is optional
<RFRSHINT> indicates the interval for refreshing path, reservation state;
<RFRSHINT> is an integer and is optional
<RESVTIMEOUT> indicates the timeout interval for waiting for a reservation
message in response to a PATH message; <RESVTIMEOUT> is an integer and
is optional
<RESVCONFTIMEOUT> indicates the timeout interval for waiting for a RESV
CONF message in response to a RESV message; <RESVCONFTIMEOUT> is
an integer and is optional
<SOURCEDIP> indicates the timeout interval of the SourceDip (Source
Deletion in Progress) while the source is in the process of cleanly deleting a call;
<SOURCEDIP> is an integer and is optional
<DESTINATIONDIP> indicates the timeout interval of the DestinationDip
(Destination Deletion in Progress) while the destination is in the process of
cleanly deleting a call; <DESTINATIONDIP> is an integer and is optional
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“::NODEID=192.168.100.52,INITRETRY=180,MAXRETRY=600,
RESTARTTM=5,RECOVTM=600,RXMTINT=1,RFRSHINT=30,
RESVTIMEOUT=60,RESVCONFTIMEOUT=60,
SOURCEDIP=60,DESTINATIONDIP=60”
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-UCP-NODE Description (continued)
3-255
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.184 RTRV-USER-SECU: Retrieve User Security
This command retrieves the security information of a specified user or list of users. The keyword ALL
can be used to obtain a list of all users. For security reasons the password cannot be retrieved.
A Superuser can retrieve any user’s security information. A user with MAINT, PROV, or RTRV
privileges can only retrieve their own information.
Note When using the keyword ALL, all users created for the system are displayed. This includes users created
via CTC that are not legal and valid TL1 users (i.e., userids/passwords greater than 20 characters in
length). Although displayed via the RTRV-USER-SECU command, these users will not be able to log
into the TL1 environment.
Section RTRV-USER-SECU Description
Category Security
Security Superuser
Related
Messages
ACT-USER ED-PID
CANC ED-USER-SECU
CANC-USER ENT-USER-SECU
DLT-USER-SECU REPT EVT SECU
Input Format RTRV-USER-SECU:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>;
where:
<UID> the user ID or the keyword ALL. A non-superuser can only specify their
own user ID; <UID> is a string and must not be null
Input Example RTRV-USER-SECU::CISCO15:1;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<UID>:,<UAP>”
;
where:
<UID> the user ID that was retrieved; <UID> is a string
<UAP> the privilege of the user; valid values are shown in the “PRIVILEGE”
section on page 4-83
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“CISCO15:,SUPER”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-256
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.185 RTRV-VT1: Retrieve VT1
This command retrieves the attributes associated with a VT1 path.
Note RVRTV, RVTM, HOLDOFFTIMER and UPSRPTHSTATE parameters only apply to UPSR.
Section RTRV-VT1 Description
Category STS and VT Paths
Security Retrieve
Related
Messages
ED-VT1
Input Format RTRV-VT1:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>[::::];
where:
<SRC> is an access identifier from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30 and must
not be null
Input Example RTRV-VT1:CISCO:VT1-2-1-4-1-2:123;
Output Format SID DATE TIME
M CTAG COMPLD
“<VT>::[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,]
[HOLDOFFTIMER=<HOLDOFFTIMER>,][TACC=<TACC>]
[UPSRPTHSTATE=<UPSRPTHSTATE>]:[<PST>],[<SST>]”
;
where:
<VT> is an access identifier from the “VT1_5” section on page 4-30
<RVRTV> is a revertive mode which only applies to a UPSR VT1 path.
<RVRTV> defaults to N (non-revertive mode) when UPSR VT1 is created; valid
values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79 and <RVRTV> is
optional
<RVTM> is a revertive time which only applies to a UPSR VT1 path. <RVTM>
defaults to empty because <RVRTV> is N when UPSR VT1 is created. Valid
values are shown in the “REVERTIVE_TIME” section on page 4-85 and
<RVTM> is optional
<HOLDOFFTIMER> is an integer and is optional
<TACC> is from the “TACC” section on page 4-29 and is optional
<UPSRPTHSTATE> indicates if the VT_AID is the working or standby path of
a UPSR cross-connect; valid values are shown in the “STATUS” section on
page 4-87 and <UPSRPTHSTATE> is optional
<PST> primary state; valid values are shown in the “PST” section on page 4-85
and <PST> is optional
<SST> secondary state; valid values are shown in the “SST” section on page 4-87
and <SST> is optional
3-257
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.186 SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>: Schedule Performance Monitoring Report
(CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, OCH, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C,
STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C, T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command schedules/reschedules the NE to report the performance monitoring data for a line facility
or for an STS/VT path periodically, using the automatic REPT PM message. This command can also
remove the previously created schedule.
The automatic performance monitoring reporting scheduled by this command is inhibited by default.
ALW-PMREPT-ALL can be used to allow the NE to send the performance monitoring report.
INH-PMREPT-ALL can be used to stop the NE from sending the performance monitoring report. The
schedules created for the NE can be retrieved by RTRV-PMSCHED command.
The deletion of the schedule for the automatic performance monitoring reporting can be done by issuing
SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2> with the <NUMREPT> parameter equal to zero.
Notes:
1. The current maximum number of schedules allowed to be created for a NE is 1000. If this number
of schedules has been created for the NE, an error message “Reach Limits Of MAX Schedules
Allowed. Can Not Add More” will be returned if another schedule creation is attempted on the NE.
Frequent use of automatic performance monitoring reporting will significantly degrade the
performance of the NE.
2. A schedule cannot be created if the card associated with the schedule is not provisioned, or if the
cross-connection associated with the schedule has not been created. However, a schedule is allowed
to be deleted even if a card is not provisioned, or if the cross-connection has not been created.
3. The number of outstanding performance monitoring reports counter <NUMREPT> will not be
decremented, and the scheduled automatic performance monitoring reporting will not start if the
card associated with the schedule is not physically plugged into the slot.
4. An expired schedule would not be automatically removed. The SCHED-PMREPT command has to
be issued with the <NUMREPT> parameter equal to zero in order to delete the expired schedule.
5. Identical schedules for an NE is not allowed. Two schedules are considered identical if they have
the same AID, MOD2 type, performance monitor type, performance monitor level, location,
direction and time period.
An error message “Duplicate Schedule” is returned when trying to create a schedule which is a
duplicate of a existing schedule. However, if the existing schedule expires (with the parameter
<NUMINVL> equal to zero when retrieved by the RTRV-PMSCHED command, i.e., no more
performance monitoring reporting sent) the new schedule with the identical parameter will replace
the existing schedule.
Output
Example
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
M 001 COMPLD
“VT1-2-1-4-1-2::RVRTV=Y,RVTM=1.0,HOLDOFFTIMER=2000,
TACC=8,UPSRPTHSTATE=ACT:OOS,AINS”
;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section RTRV-VT1 Description (continued)
3-258
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
6. When a electrical or optical card is unprovisioned by the DLT-EQPT command, or a
cross-connection is deleted by the DLT-CRS command, the schedules associated with that card or
that cross-connection will be removed silently by the NE. This removal prevents another type of card
or cross-connection with the same AID to be provisioned on the NE, and prevents the NE from trying
to send automatic performance monitoring reports based on the existing schedules.
The card or cross connect can be unprovisioned or deleted through CTC. The schedules associated
with that card or that cross-connection will also be removed silently by the NE.
7. When creating schedules on an ONS 15327 XTC card, only schedules against the working XTC card
(in Slot 6) are allowed. An error message “Can Not Create Schedule On Protect Card” will be
returned if you try to create a schedule on protect XTC card in Slot 5.
8. When you create a PM schedule, the minimum report interval should not be less than five minutes.
Section SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2> Description
Category Performance
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
INH-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
INIT-REG-<MOD2> RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INIT-REG-G1000 RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-TH-<MOD2>
Input Format SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<SRC>:<CTAG>::[<REPTINVL>],
[<REPTSTATM>],[<NUMREPT>],,[<MONLEV>],[<LOCN>],,[<TMPER>],
[<TMOFST>];
where:
<SRC> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<REPTINVL> specifies how often a performance monitoring report is
generated. The format for <REPTINVL> is VAL-UN; valid values for VAL
(value) are:
1–31 if UN (units of time) is DAY
1–24 if UN is HR
1–1440 if UN is MIN
Examples are: 10-DAY, 12-HR, or 100-MIN. A null value for the input would
default to 15-MIN. <REPTINVL> is a string
Note The minimum time for processing PM schedules is every five minutes. A
<REPTINVL> value of less than five minutes will process every five
minutes.
<REPTSTATM> starting time for the performance monitoring report. The
format is HOD-MOH, where HOD (hour of day) ranges from 0–23, and MOH
(minute of hour) ranges from 0–59. If the input value of the starting time is
smaller than the current time; for example, the input value is 5-30 (5:30 in the
morning) and the current time is 10:30, then the reporting will be scheduled to
start at 5:30 the next day. A null value defaults to the current time of day;
<REPTSTATM> is a string
3-259
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.187 SET-ATTR-CONT: Set Attribute Control
This command sets the attributes associated with an external control. The attributes are used when an
external control is operated or released. To send the attributes, use the RTRV-ATTR-CONT command.
Notes:
1. If the <CONTTYPE> parameter is not specified, the control specified by <AID> is unprovisioned.
2. A control should be unprovisioned before it is reprovisioned to another type of control.
<NUMREPT> the number of reports that the schedule is expected to produce.
A value of 0 is used to delete an existing identical schedule (see Note 5 above).
If <NUMREPT> is null the schedule will be in effect forever until it is deleted.
The value of <NUMREPT> will continue to be decremented even though the
automatic performance monitoring reporting is inhibited; <NUMREPT> is an
integer
<MONLEV> discriminating level for the requested monitored parameter. It
applies to all MONTYPE of the scheduled performance monitoring report. The
format is LEV-DIRN; valid values for LEV are decimal numbers, and valid
values for DIRN are as follows: UP Monitored parameter with values equal to
or greater than the value of LEV will be reported. DN Monitored parameter with
values equal to or less than the value of LEV will be reported. The null input
defaults to 1-UP; <MONLEV> is a string
<LOCN> the location being performance-monitored. The valid value is NEND
or FEND. A null input defaults to NEND. FEND is not supported by all MOD2
types; valid values are shown in the “LOCATION” section on page 4-71
<TMPER> the accumulation time period. It defaults to 15-MIN; valid values are
shown in the “TMPER” section on page 4-93
<TMOFST> the time offset from the end of the last complete accumulation time
period to the beginning of the accumulation time period specified in TMPER.
The format for is DAY-HR-MIN, where DAYS (days) range from 0–99, HR
(hours) range from 0–23, and MIN (minutes) range from 0–59. A null value
defaults to 0-0-0. Grouping of this parameter is not supported. <TMOFST> is a
String.
Input Example SCHED-PMREPT-OC3:NE-NAME:FAC-3-1:
123::60-MIN,15-30,100,,1-UP,NEND,,15-MIN,0-0-15;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2> Description (continued)
Section SET-ATTR-CONT Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
OPR-ACO-ALL RTRV-ATTR-CONT
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-ATTR-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT ENV RTRV-EXT-CONT
RLS-EXT-CONT SET-ATTR-ENV
RTRV-ALM-ENV
3-260
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.188 SET-ATTR-ENV: Set Attribute Environment
This command sets the attributes associated with an external control.
Notes:
1. If the <NTFCNCDE>, <ALMTYPE>, and <ALMMSG> parameters are omitted, the environmental
alarm specified by <AID> is unprovisioned.
2. An alarm should be unprovisioned and you should wait for any raised alarm to clear before
reprovisioning the alarm to another alarm type.
Input Format SET-ATTR-CONT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>[::<CONTTYPE>];
where:
<AID> identifies the external control for which attributes are being retrieved
and is from the “ENV” section on page 4-20
<CONTTYPE> is the type of control for which the attribute is being retrieved;
valid values are shown in the “CONTTYPE” section on page 4-59. The default
value is MISC
Input Example SET-ATTR-CONT:CISCO:ENV-OUT-1:123::AIRCOND;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section SET-ATTR-CONT Description (continued)
Section SET-ATTR-ENV Description
Category Environment Alarms and Controls
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
OPR-ACO-ALL RTRV-ATTR-CONT
OPR-EXT-CONT RTRV-ATTR-ENV
REPT ALM ENV RTRV-COND-ENV
REPT EVT ENV RTRV-EXT-CONT
RLS-EXT-CONT SET-ATTR-CONT
RTRV-ALM-ENV
Input Format SET-ATTR-ENV:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],
[<ALMTYPE>],[<ALMMSG>];
where:
<AID> is an access identifier from the “ENV” section on page 4-20 and must not
be null
<NTFCNCDE> is a notification code; valid values are shown in the
“NOTIF_CODE” section on page 4-78. A null value is equivalent to ALL
<ALMTYPE> is an alarm type for the environmental alarm; valid values are
shown in the “ENV_ALM” section on page 4-62. A null value is equivalent to
ALL
<ALMMSG> is an alarm message and is a string. A null value is equivalent to
ALL
Input Example SET-ATTR-ENV:CISCO:ENV-IN-1:123::MJ,OPENDR,\“OPEN DOOR\”
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-261
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.189 SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>: Set Performance Mode of PM Data
Collection (STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C, STS192C)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command sets the mode and turns the PM data collection mode on or off. The Cisco ONS 15454 is
capable of collecting and storing section, line and path PM data.
The PM mode and state of an entity are retrieved by using the RTRV-PMMODE command.
Notes:
1. The near end monitoring of the intermediate-path PM (IPPM) only supports OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OC-48AS, OC-192, and EC-1 on STS Path.
2. The far end PM data collection is not supported for the ONS 15454 in this release.
3. This release of software will support only the Path (P) mode type PM parameters with this
command, that is, this command is not applicable for Line (L) and Section (S) mode types.
The PM monitoring for Line (L) and Section (S) are supported by the ONS 15454, and the storing
PM data is always performed.
Section SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> Description
Category Performance
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
INH-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INIT-REG-<MOD2> RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-TH-<MOD2>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
Input Format SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:
<CTAG>::<LOCN>,<MODETYPE>,[<PMSTATE>];
where:
<AID> identifies the entity where the PM mode is being set; <AID> is from the
“STS” section on page 4-24
<LOCN> identifies the location to which the PM mode is to be set and only
supports near end PM data collection; valid values are shown in the
“LOCATION” section on page 4-71
<MODETYPE> identifies the type of PM parameters; only the Path (P) PM
parameter is supported and valid values are shown in the “PM_MODE” section
on page 4-83
<PMSTATE> directs the named PM mode type to turn On or Off and a null value
defaults to On; valid values are shown in the “PM_STATE” section on page 4-83
Input Example SET-PMMODE-STS1:CISCO:STS-4-2:123::NEND,P,ON;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-262
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.190 SET-TH-<MOD2>: Set Threshold (CLNT, DS1, EC1, OC3, OC12,OC48,
OC192, OCH, STS1, STS3C, STS6C, STS9C, STS12C, STS24C, STS48C,
STS192C,T1, T3, VT1)
See Table 4-11 on page 4-6 for supported modifiers by platform.
This command sets the threshold for PM and sets the alarm thresholds for the MXP/TXP cards. If this
command is used to set the alarm thresholds, the time-period is not applicable.
The rules are as follows: The PM Thresholds have a default of NEND for the location. The Alarm
Thresholds do not require or interpret the location. The TMPER is not applicable to alarm thresholds.
The TMPER default is 15-MIN. The client ports only accept SONET, Laser and alarm MONTYPES. The
trunk ports accept SONET, Laser, alarm, FEC, OTN MONTYPES. The Receiver Temperature Montypes
(RXT) are only applicable to the trunk port. The Transceiver Voltage Montypes (XCVR) is not
applicable, though it is displayed or handled.
See the “Provisioning Rules for MXP_2.5G_10G and TXP_MR_10G Cards” section on page 1-8 for
specific MXP/TXP card provisioning rules.
Section SET-TH-<MOD2> Description
Category Performance
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ALW-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
INH-PMREPT-ALL RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL
INIT-REG-<MOD2> RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
REPT PM <MOD2> SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2>
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
RTRV-PMMODE-<STS_PATH>
Input Format SET-TH-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::
<MONTYPE>,<THLEV>,[<LOCN>],,[<TMPER>];
where:
<AID> indicates the access identifier. All the STS, VT1, Facility and DS1 AIDs
are supported and <AID> is from the ALL” section on page 4-10
<MONTYPE> is the monitored value; valid values are shown in the
ALL_MONTYPE” section on page 4-33
<THLEV> is the threshold value and is a float; <THLEV> is an integer
<LOCN> is the location; valid values are shown in the “LOCATION” section on
page 4-71
<TMPER> indicates the accumulation time period for the PM information; valid
values are shown in the “TMPER” section on page 4-93
Input Example SET-TH-T3:CISCO:FAC-1-1:123::CVL,12,NEND,,15-MIN;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-263
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.191 SET-TOD: Set Time of Day
This command sets the system date and time for the NE. The year should be entered using four digits
while the hour should be entered using a 24-hour time period (i.e., military time).
3.4.192 SW-DX-EQPT: Switch Duplex Equipment
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command switches an XC/XCVT/XC10G card with the mate card within the NE.
Note If sending a mode parameter with a value other than NORM, FRCD, or NULL, the IDNV (Input, Data
Not Valid) error message will be returned.
Section SET-TOD Description
Category System
Security Provisioning
Related
Messages
ALW-MSG-ALL RTRV-HDR
APPLY RTRV-INV
COPY-RFILE RTRV-MAP-NETWORK
ED-DAT RTRV-NE-GEN
ED-NE-GEN RTRV-NE-IPMAP
ED-NE-SYNCN RTRV-NE-SYNCN
INH-MSG-ALL RTRV-TOD
INIT-SYS
Input Format SET-TOD:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<YEAR>,<MONTH>,<DAY>,<HOUR>,
<MINUTE>,<SECOND>,[<DIFFERENCE>][:DST=<DST>];
where:
<YEAR> is the current calendar year and is an integer
<MONTH> is the month of the year and ranges from 01–12; <MONTH> is an
integer
<DAY> is the day of the month and ranges from 01–31; <DAY> is an integer
<HOUR> is the hour of the day and ranges from 00–23; <HOUR> is an integer
<MINUTE> is the minute of the hour and ranges from 00–59; <MINUTE> is an
integer
<SECOND> is the second of the minute and ranges from 00–59; second is an
integer
<DIFFERENCE> is the number of minutes off UTC and is an integer
<DST> identifies if the time is a Daylight Saving Time (Y) or not (N); valid
values are shown in the “ON_OFF” section on page 4-79
Input Example SET-TOD:CAZADERO::240::1998,05,08,13,18,55,480:DST=Y;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-264
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.193 SW-TOPROTN-EQPT: Switch to Protection Equipment
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command performs an equipment unit protection switch.
This command is used for non-SONET line cards (e.g. DS1, DS3, DS3XM, and EC1). DS1 and DS3
cards have 1:1 and 1:N equipment protection. DS3XM and EC1 cards have only 1:1 equipment
protection.
This command will switch the traffic from the working card specified in the AID to the protect card.
There is a priority for the switch to protection commands. In a 1:N protection group with N > 1, consider
two working cards - A and B. Card A is switched to the protect card with the SW-TOPROTN command.
If card B is pulled from the system, the protect card will carry the traffic of card B and card A will raise
the FAILTOSW condition and carry traffic. When card B is replaced and the revert timer expires, card B
will carry traffic and card A will switch to the protect card. The FAILTOSW condition on card A will be
cleared. Note:1:N protection groups in the system are always revertive.
In a revertive protection group, the unit specified by the AID will raise the standing condition of
WKSWPR if the command were executed without an error. In a non-revertive protection group, the unit
specified by the AID will raise the transient condition of WKSWPR if the command were executed
without an error.
Notes:
1. The default PROTID is the protecting unit if there is only one protection unit per protection group
in the NE, otherwise a DENY error message will be responsed.
2. This command only supports one value of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH or null. A command with
any other value is considered an incorrect use of the command. An IDNV (Input, Data Not Valid)
error message will be responsed.
Section SW-DX-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
Input Format SW-DX-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<MODE>][,];
where:
<AID> identifies the equipment (XC/XCVT/XC10G) unit in the NE that is to be
switched with its mate unit; <AID> is from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
Valid values for <MODE> are shown in the “CMD_MODE” section on
page 4-46
Input Example SW-DX-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-1:123::FRCD;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-265
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3. This command is not used for the common control (TCC+/TCC2 or XC/XCVT/XC10G) cards. A
command on a common control card will generate an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message. To use the common control card switching commands, use the SW-DX-EQPT and
ALW-SWDX-EQPT commands.
4. This command is not used for SONET (OCN) cards. A command on a SONET card will generate an
IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error message. To use a SONET card switching command,
use the OPR-PROTNSW and RLS-PROTNSW commands.
5. If this command is used on a card that is not in a protection group, the SNVS (Status, Not in Valid
State) error message will be responsed.
6. If this command is sent to a missing working card, the SWFA (Status, Working Unit Failed) error
message will be responsed.
7. If this command is used on a protection card, the IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message will be responsed.
8. If sending a mode parameter with a value other than NORM, FRCD, or null, the IDNV (Input, Data
Not Valid) error message will be responsed.
9. If sending the SW-TOPROTN command to a working card when the working card has raised
INHSWPR, the SWLD (Status, Working Unit Locked) error message will be responsed.
10. If sending the SW-TOPROTN command to a working card when the protection card has raised
INHSWPR, the SPLD (Status, Protection Unit Locked) error message will be responsed.
11. If sending the SW-TOPROTN command to an active working card when the protect card is already
carrying traffic. This only occurs in a 1:N protection group with N greater than one, the SNVS
(Status, Not in Valid State) error message will be responsed.
12. If sending the SW-TOPROTN command to an active working card when the protect card is failed or
missing, the SPFA (Status, Protection Unit Failed) error message will be responsed.
13. If sending this command to a standby working card, the SNVS (Status, Not in Valid State) error
message will be responsed.
Section SW-TOPROTN-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOWKG-EQPT
3-266
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
3.4.194 SW-TOWKG-EQPT: Switch to Working Equipment
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
This command switches the protected working unit back to working unit.
This command is used for non-SONET line cards (e.g. DS1, DS3, DS3XM, and EC1). DS1 and DS3
cards have 1:1 and 1:N equipment protection. DS3XM and EC1 cards have only 1:1 equipment
protection cards.
This command will switch the traffic from the protection card to the working card specified by the AID.
In a revertive protection group, the unit specified by the AID will clear the standing condition of
WKSWPR if the command were executed without an error. In a non-revertive protection group, the unit
specified by the AID will raise the transient condition of WKSWBK if the command were executed
without an error.
Notes:
1. This command only supports one value of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH or null. A command with
any other value is considered an incorrect use of the command. An IDNV (Input, Data Not Valid)
error message should be responsed
2. This command is not used for the common control (TCC+/TCC2 or XC/XCVT/XC10G) cards. A
command on a common control card will generate an IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message. To use the common control card switching commands, use the SW-DX-EQPT and
ALW-SWDX-EQPT commands.
3. This command is not used for SONET (OCN) cards. A command on a SONET card will generate an
IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error message. To use a SONET card switching command,
use the OPR-PROTNSW and RLS-PROTNSW commands.
Input Format SW-TOPROTN-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<MODE>],
[<PROTID>],[<DIRN>];
where:
<AID> is the parameter that specifies the working unit which will have traffic
switched to protection and is from the “EQPT” section on page 4-21
<MODE> is the parameter that will only support the NORM value. The null
value for <MODE> will default to NORM. Sending the FRCD value for
<MODE> will generate the same switching behavior as sending the NORM
value. Valid values are shown in the “CMD_MODE” section on page 4-46
<PROTID> identifies the protection unit to be switched when there is more than
one protection unit within the NE; <PROTID> is from the “PRSLOT” section on
page 4-16
<DIRN> is the direction of transmission in which switching is to be made. The
command only supports one value of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. This
parameter defaults to BTH; valid values for <DIRN> are shown in the
“DIRECTION” section on page 4-60
Input Example SW-TOPROTN-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-1:123::FRCD,SLOT-3,BTH;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
Section SW-TOPROTN-EQPT Description (continued)
3-267
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
4. If this command is used on a card that is not in a protection group, the SNVS (Status, Not in Valid
State) error message will be responsed.
5. If this command is sent to a missing working card, the SWFA (Status, Working Unit Failed) error
message will be responsed.
6. If this command is used on a protection card, the IIAC (Input, Invalid Access Identifier) error
message will be responsed.
7. If sending a mode parameter with a value other than NORM, FRCD, or null, the IDNV (Input, Data
Not Valid) error message will be responsed.
8. If sending the SW-TOWKG command to a working card when the working card has raised
INHSWWKG, the SWLD (Status, Working Unit Locked) error message will be responsed.
9. If sending the SW-TOWKG command to a working card when the protection card has raised
INHSWWKG, the SPLD (Status, Protection Unit Locked) error message will be responsed.
10. If sending the SW-TOWKG command to an active working card, the SNVS (Status, Not in Valid
State) error message will be responsed.
Section SW-TOWKG-EQPT Description
Category Equipment
Security Maintenance
Related
Messages
ALW-SWDX-EQPT INH-SWTOWKG-EQPT
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT REPT ALM EQPT
ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT REPT EVT EQPT
DLT-EQPT RTRV-ALM-EQPT
ED-EQPT RTRV-COND-EQPT
ENT-EQPT RTRV-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT SW-DX-EQPT
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT SW-TOPROTN-EQPT
Input Format SW-TOWKG-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<MODE>],[<DIRN>];
where:
<AID> identifies the working unit that is to be released from protection. <AID>
is from the “PRSLOT” section on page 4-16
<MODE> will only support the NORM value. The null value will default to
NORM. Sending the FRCD value will generate the same switching behavior as
sending the NORM value. Valid values for <MODE> are shown in the
“CMD_MODE” section on page 4-46
<DIRN> is the direction of transmission. The command only supports one value
of the <DIRN> parameter - BTH. This parameter defaults to BTH; valid values
for <DIRN> are shown in the “DIRECTION” section on page 4-60
Input Example SW-TOWKG-EQPT:CISCO:SLOT-2:123::FRCD,BTH;
Errors Errors are listed in Table 7-30 on page 7-20.
3-268
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
September 2004
Chapter 3 TL1 Command Descriptions
TL1 Commands
CHAPTER
4-1
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
4
TL1 Command Components
This chapter describes the components of TL1 commands and autonomous messages for the
Cisco ONS 15454 and the Cisco ONS 15327, Release 4.0, including:
TL1 default values
Modifier support by platform
Starting positions for an STS-Mc SPE
Access identifiers (AIDs)
Parameter types
4.1 TL1 Default Values
4.1.1 BLSR
4.1.2 Cross Connections
Table 4-1 BLSR Default Values
BLSR Default
RVRTV Y
RVTM 5.0 minutes
SRVRTV Y
SRVTM 5.0 minutes
Table 4-2 Cross Connections Default Values
Cross Connections Default
CCT 2WAY for both STSp and VT1 cross-connections
4-2
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
TL1 Default Values
4.1.3 Environment Alarms and Controls
4.1.4 Equipment
4.1.5 Performance
Table 4-3 Environment Alarms and Controls Default Values
Environment Alarms and
Controls Default
OPR-EXT-CONT CONTTYPE is set as one provisioned in the respective AID, there is not
default for it. It is only used as a filter if entered. DUR is always taken as
CONT.
RTRV-ATTR-CONT There is no default for CONTTYPE. It is only used as a filter if entered.
RTRV-ATTR-ENV There is no default for both NTFCNCDE and ALMTYPE, which are only
used as filters if entered.
RTRV-EXT-CONT CONTTYPE defaults to the conttype associated with the AID.
SET-ATTR-ENV NTFCNCDE defaults to NR. ALMTYPE defaults to NULL. ALMMSG
defaults to \“Env Alarm Input 1\”.
Table 4-4 Equipment Default Values
Equipment Default
ALW-SWTOPROTN-EQPT,
INH-SWTOPROTN-EQPT
and ALW-SWTOWKG-EQPT,
ING-SWTOWKG-EQPT
DIRN defaults to BTH
ENT-EQPT PROTID, PRTYPE, RVRTV and RVTM defaults to NULL
SW-DX-EQPT MODE defaults to NORM
SW-TOPROTN-EQPT and
SW-TOWKG-EQPT
MODE defaults to NORM
DIRN defaults to BTH
Table 4-5 Performance Default Values
Performance Default
INIT-REG-<MOD2> LOCN defaults to NEND (near end)
RTRV-PM-<MOD2> LOCN defaults to NEND
TMPER defaults to 15 minutes
4-3
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
TL1 Default Values
4.1.6 Ports
RTRV-TH-<MOD2> MONTYPE defaults to CVL for OCN, EC1, and DSN
MONTYPE defaults to ESP for STSp
MONTYPE defaults to UASV for VT1
MONTYPE defaults to AISSP for the DS1 layer of the DS3XM
card
LOCN defaults to NEND
TMPER defaults to 15 minutes
SET-PMMODE-<STS_PATH> PMSTATE defaults to ON
SET-TH-<MOD2> LOCN defaults to NEND
TMPER defaults to 15 minutes
Tabl e 4 -6 Po rts D e fa u l t Va l ue s
Ports Default
OCN Line DCC defaults to N
TMGREF defaults to N
SYNCMSG defaults to Y
SENDDUS defaults to N
PJMON defaults to 0
SFBER defaults to 1E-4
SDBER defaults to 1E-7
MODE defaults to SONET
PST defaults to OOS
EC1 Line PJMON defaults to 0 (zero)
LBO defaults to 0-225
RXEQUAL is Y
PST defaults to defaults to OOS
T1 Line (DS1/DS1N) LINECDE defaults to AMI
FMT defaults to D4
LBO defaults to 0-133
PST defaults to OOS
T3 Line (DS3, DS3E, DS3NE,
DS3XM)
DS3/T3 LINECDE defaults to 0-225
DS3 PST defaults to OOS
DS3E/DS3NE FMT defaults to UNFRAMED
DS3E/DS3NE LINECDE defaults to B3ZS
DS3E/DS3NE LBO defaults to 0-225
DS3 of DS3XM PST defaults to OOS
Table 4-5 Performance Default Values (continued)
Performance Default
4-4
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
TL1 Default Values
4.1.7 SONET Line Protection
4.1.8 STS and VT Paths
Table 4-7 SONET Line Protection Default Values
SONET Line Protection Default
EX-SW-<OCN> ST (switch type) is optional and for BLSR protection switch only
ST defaults to BLSR RING switch type
OCN Line Protection PROTID defaults to the protecting port of the protection group
(SLOT-#(OCN)PORT-#). It is a string that can have a maximum length of
32 characters
RVRTV defaults to N (non-revertive mode)
RVTM defaults to 5.0 minutes
PSDIRN defaults to UNI
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCN> ST (switch type) is optional and for BLSR protection switch only
ST defaults to BLSR RING switch type
Table 4-8 STS and VT Paths Default Values
STS and VT Paths Default
STS Path SFBER, SDBER, RVRTV, and RVTM apply to UPSR STS paths only
SFBER defaults to 1E-4
SDBER defaults to 1E-6
RVRTV defaults to N
RVTM defaults to empty because RVRTV is N when UPSR STSp is
created
J1 is implemented on DS1, DS1N, DS3, DS3E, DS3NE, DS3XM, EC1,
OC3, OC48AS AND OC192 cards
TRCMODE defaults to the OFF mode
EXPTRC defaults to a copy of the provisioned string or NULL when
TRCMODE is OFF mode
EXPTRC defaults to the user entered string when the TRCMODE is
MANUAL mode
EXPTRC defaults to a copy of the acquired received string or NULL if
the string has not been acquired when the TRCMODE is AUTO mode
INCTRC defaults to the incoming string (NULL) when the TRCMODE
is under OFF mode
INCTRC defaults to a copy of the received string or NULL if the string
has not been received when the TRCMODE is under MANUAL or AUTO
mode
VT Path RVRTV, RVTM apply to UPSR VT paths only
RVRTV defaults to N
RVTM defaults to empty because RVRTV is N when UPSR VT1 is
created
4-5
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
TL1 Default Values
4.1.9 Synchronization
4.1.10 Testing
Table 4-9 Synchronization Default Values
Synchronization Default
BITS LINECDE defaults to B8ZS
FMT defaults to ESF
SYNCMSG defaults to Y
PST defaults to OOS
NE-SYNCN TMMDE defaults to EXTERNAL
SSMGEN defaults to GEN1
QRES defaults to SAME-AS-DUS
RVRTV defaults to Y
RVTM defaults to 5.0 minutes
SYNCN PRI/SEC QREF defaults to PRS
PRI STATUS defaults to ACT
SEC STATUS defaults to STBY
THIRD QREF defaults to ST3
STATUS defaults to STBY
Table 4-10 Testing Default Values
Testing Default
OPR-LPBK LPBKTYPE defaults to FACILITY
RLS-LPBK LPBKTYPE defaults to current existing loopback type
4-6
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Modifier Support by Platform
4.2 Modifier Support by Platform
Table 4-11 details the TL1 modifiers supported on the ONS 15454 and ONS 15327 for commands that
have carets (< >) in part of their input format; for example, RTRV-<OCN_TYPE>. A “Yes” in the
ONS 15454 or ONS 15327 column indicates that a particular modifier is supported in that platform. A
“No” in the ONS 15454 or ONS 15327 column indicates that a particular modifier is not supported in
that platform. A “—” indicates that a particular modifier is not applicable to that platform.
Table 4-11 Modifier Support
Modifier ONS 15454 ONS 15327
DS1 Yes —
EC1 Yes —
T1 Yes Yes
T3 Yes Yes
VT1 Yes Yes
STS1 Yes Yes
STS3C Yes Yes
STS6C Yes Yes
STS9C Yes Yes
STS12C Yes Yes
STS24C Yes Yes
STS48C Yes Yes
STS192C Yes No
OC3 Yes Yes
OC12 Yes Yes
OC48 Yes Yes
OC192 Yes No
G1000 Yes Yes
GIGE Yes No
FSTE Yes No
POS Yes No
E100 Yes Yes
E1000 Yes Yes
CLNT Yes No
OCH (TXP, MXP) Yes No
4-7
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Starting Positions for an STS-Mc SPE
4.3 Starting Positions for an STS-Mc SPE
Table 4-12, Table 4-13, and Table 4-14 list possible starting positions for Cisco ONS 15454 and
Cisco ONS 15327 STS-Mc SPE. In each of the tables a “Y” indicates “Yes, this position is supported”
and an “N” indicates, “No, this position is not supported”. More information about the generic NE
support requirement can be found in GR-253-CORE: Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport
Systems: Common Generic Criteria.
Table 4-12 Starting Positions for an STS-Mc SPE in an OC-12 Signal
STS-1 Number STS-3c SPE STS-6c SPE STS-9c SPE STS-12c SPE
1 YYYY
4 YYYN
7 YYNN
10 YNYN
Table 4-13 Starting Positions for an STS-Mc SPE in an OC-48 Signal
STS-1
Number STS-3c SPE STS-6c SPE STS-9c SPE STS-12c SPE STS-24c SPE STS-48c SPE
1 YYYYYY
4 YYYNYN
7 YYNNYN
10 YNYNYN
13 YYYYYN
16 YYYNYN
19 YYYNYN
22 YNNNYN
25 YYYYYN
28 YYYNNN
31 YYNNNN
34 YNNNNN
37 YYYYNN
40 YYYNNN
43 YYNNNN
46 YNYNNN
4-8
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Starting Positions for an STS-Mc SPE
Table 4-14 Starting positions for an STS-Mc SPE in an OC-192 Signal
STS-1
Number STS-3c
SPE STS-6c
SPE STS-9c
SPE STS-12c
SPE STS-24c
SPE STS-48c
SPE STS-192c
SPE
1 YYYYYYY
4 YYYNNNN
7 YYNNNNN
10YNYNNNN
13YYYYNNN
16YYYNNNN
19YYYNNNN
22YNNNNNN
25YYYYNNN
28YYYNNNN
31YYNNNNN
34YNNNNNN
37YYYYNNN
40YYYNNNN
43YYNNNNN
46YNYNNNN
49YYYYYYN
52YYYNNNN
55YYYNNNN
58YNNNNNN
61YYYYNNN
64YYYNNNN
67YYNNNNN
70YNNNNNN
73YYYYNNN
76YYYNNNN
79YYNNNNN
82YNYNNNN
85YYYYNNN
88YYYNNNN
91YYYNNNN
94YNNNNNN
97YYYYYYN
100YYYNNNN
103YYNNNNN
4-9
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Starting Positions for an STS-Mc SPE
106YNNNNNN
109YYYYNNN
112YYYNNNN
115YYNNNNN
118YNYNNNN
121YYYYNNN
124YYYNNNN
127YYYNNNN
130YNNNNNN
133YYYYNNN
136YYYNNNN
139YYNNNNN
142YNNNNYN
145YYYYYNN
148YYYNNNN
151YYNNNNN
154YNYNNNN
157YYYYNNN
160YYYNNNN
163YYYNNNN
166YNNNNNN
169YYYYNNN
172YYYNNNN
175YYNNNNN
178YNNNNNN
181YYYYNNN
184YYYNNNN
187YYNNNNN
190YNYNNNN
Table 4-14 Starting positions for an STS-Mc SPE in an OC-192 Signal (continued)
STS-1
Number STS-3c
SPE STS-6c
SPE STS-9c
SPE STS-12c
SPE STS-24c
SPE STS-48c
SPE STS-192c
SPE
4-10
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4 Access Identifiers
The AID code directs an input command to its intended physical or data entity inside the NE. Equipment
modules and facilities are typical examples of entities addressed by the access code.
4.4.1 ALL
Table 4-15 ALL for ONS 15454 and ONS 15327
AID ONS 15454 ONS 15327
CrossConnect ID FACILITY
STS
VT
IPCC ALL
CC-{1–16}
NBR AAA.BBB.CC.DD
ALL
NBR-{1–16}
PRSLOT NULL
SLOT-1
SLOT-3
SLOT-5
SLOT-13
SLOT-15
SLOT-17
UCP IPCCAID
NBRAID
STSAID
AONS AONS-{W_E,E_W}
BAND BAND-{2-6,12-16}-{1-4}-ALL
BAND-{2-6,12-16}-{1-4}-{RX,TX}
BAND-{2-6,12-16}-{1}-ALL
BAND-{2-6,12-16}-{1}-{RX,TX}
BITS BITS-ALL
BITS-{1,2}
BITS-ALL
BITS-{1,2}
BLSR ALL
BLSR-{0-9999}
ALL
BLSR-ALL
BLSR-{0-9999}
CHANNEL CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-ALL
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{1-32}-ALL
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{1-32}-{RX,TX}
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-ALL
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{RX,TX}
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{2,3}
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{2,5}
COM Common Common
4-11
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
DS1 DS1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6}-{1-28} —
ENV ENV-IN-ALL
ENV-IN-{1-20}
ENV-IN-{1-32}
ENV-IN-{1-4}
ENV-IN-{1-6}
ENV-OUT-ALL
ENV-OUT-{1-16}
ENV-OUT-{1-2}
ENV-OUT-{1-4}
ENV-{IN,OUT}-{1-6}
6 Input, 2 Output
EQPT AIP
ALL
BP
FAN
SLOT-ALL
SLOT-{1-17}
SLOT-{1-6,12-17}
SLOT-ALL
SLOT-{1-8}
FACILITY FAC-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-1
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-ALL
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-11}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-1}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-12}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-14}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1}
FAC-{5,6,12,13}-{1}
FAC-{8,10}-{1}
VFAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-1}
FAC-{1-6}-ALL
FAC-{1-4}-{1} OC12, OC48
FAC-{5-6}-{1-3} XTC-14 DS3
FAC-{5-6}-{1-28}
XTC-14/XTC-28 DS1
FAC-{1-4}-{2} G1000-2
FAC-{1-4}-{1-4} OC3
LINE LINE-{1-6,12-17}-{1-2}-ALL
LINE-{1-6,12-17}-{1-2}-{RX,TX}
LINE-{1-6,12-17}-{1-3}-ALL
LINE-{1-6,12-17}-{1-3}-{RX,TX}
LINE-{8,10}-{1}-ALL
LINE-{8,10}-{1}-{RX,TX}
OSC ALL
OSC-{1-9999}
RFILE RFILE-DB
RFILE-PKG
Table 4-15 ALL for ONS 15454 and ONS 15327 (continued)
AID ONS 15454 ONS 15327
4-12
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
STS FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-1
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-ALL
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7,10}
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7}
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-{1-3}
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-1
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-ALL
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-{1-3}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-1
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-ALL
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,13,25,37}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,10,13,16,19,25,
28,37,40}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,10,13,16,19,22,25
}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,10-46}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,10}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,13,16,19,25,28,37
,40,43}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-12}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-48}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-ALL
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-12}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-1
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-ALL
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7,10-46}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1,4}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1-12}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-1
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,13,25,37-180}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,13,25,37}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,10,13,16,19,22,
25}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,10-190}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,10-46}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,13,16,19,25,28,37,
40,43}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,49,97,145}|STS-{5,6,
12,13}-1-{1-192}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1-48}
VFAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-1}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}Dynam
ically Allocated STSs
STS-{1-4}-1-ALL ALL AID
for Optical Cards
STS-{1-4}-1-1 STS48c for
OC48
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,13,25,37}
STS12c for OC48
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,7,13,19,...,43}
STS6c for OC48
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,7} STS6c for
OC12
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,4,7,10,...,46}
STS3c for OC48
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,4,7,10} STS3c
for OC3 and OC12
STS-{1-4}-1-{1-12} STS1 for
OC3, OC12
STS-{1-4}-1-{1-48} STS1 for
OC48
STS-{5-6}-ALL ALL AID for
XTC Cards
STS-{5-6}-{1} STS1 for
XTC-14/XTC-28 DS1
STS-{5-6}-{2-4} STS1 for
XTC-28 DS3
VFAC-{1-4}-{1-2}
SYN SYNC-NE SYNC-NE
Table 4-15 ALL for ONS 15454 and ONS 15327 (continued)
AID ONS 15454 ONS 15327
4-13
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
SYN_SRC BITS-1
BITS-2
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1}
FAC-{5,6,12,13}-{1}
INTERNAL
NONE
SYNC-NE
FAC-{1-4}-{1} OC12, OC48
FAC-{1-4}-{1-4} OC3
INTERNAL
SYNC-NE
SYNC-{BITS1,BITS2}
SYNC_REF SYNC-ALL
SYNC-NE
SYNC-{BITS1,BITS2}
SYNC-ALL
SYNC-NE
SYNC-{BITS1,BITS2}
SYNCSW INT
PRI
SEC
THIRD
INT
PRI
SEC
THIRD
TACC {0, 1-999} {0, 1-999}
UDC UDC-{F,DCC}-{A,B}
VT1_5 VT1-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4}
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4}
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-48}-{1-7}-{1-4}
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-7}-{1-2}
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-12}-1-{1-7}-{1-4}
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4}
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4}
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6}-{1-7}-{1-4}
VT1-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1-192}-{1-7}-{1-4}
VT1-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1-48}-{1-7}-{1-4}
ALL
VT1-{5-6}-{1-2}-{1-7}-{1-2}
XTC-14 DS1
VT1-{5-6}-{1-2}-{1-7}-{1-4}
XTC-28 DS1
VT1-{1-4}-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4
} OC3, OC12
VT1-{1-4}-{1-48}-{1-7}-{1-4
} OC48
WLEN WLEN-{W_E,E_W}-{1530.33,1531.12,1531
.90,1532.68,1534.25,1535.04,1535.82,1536.6
1,1538.19,1538.98,1539.77,1540.56,1542.14,
1542.94,1543.73,1544.53,1546.12,1546.92,,1
547.72,1548.51,1550.12,1550.92,1551.72,15
52.52,1554.13,1554.94,1555.75,1556.55,155
8.17,1558.98,1559.79,1560.61}
Table 4-15 ALL for ONS 15454 and ONS 15327 (continued)
AID ONS 15454 ONS 15327
4-14
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.2 CrossConnectID
(ONS 15454 only)
Table 4-16 CrossConnectID for ONS 15454
AID ONS 15454 Pattern
FACILITY FAC-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-1
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-ALL
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-11}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-1}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-12}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-14}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6}
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1}
FAC-{5,6,12,13}-{1}
FAC-{8,10}-{1}
VFAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-1}
4-15
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
STS FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-1
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-ALL
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7,10}
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7}
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-{1-3}
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-1
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-ALL
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-{1-3}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-1
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-ALL
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,13,25,37}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,10,13,16,19,25,
28,37,40}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,10,13,16,19,22,25}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,10-46}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,10}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,13,16,19,25,28,37,40,43}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-12}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-48}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-ALL
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-12}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-1
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-ALL
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7,10-46}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1,4}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1-12}
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-1
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,13,25,37-180}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,13,25,37}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,10,13,16,19,22,25}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,10-190}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,10-46}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,13,16,19,25,28,37,40,43}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,49,97,145}|STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1-192}
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1-48}
VFAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-1}
Table 4-16 CrossConnectID for ONS 15454 (continued)
AID ONS 15454 Pattern
4-16
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.3 IPCC
(ONS 15454 only)
IP Control Channel AIDs are used to access the IPCC of the UCP.
4.4.4 NBR
(ONS 15454 only)
UCP neighbor AIDs are used to access the neighbors of the UCP.
4.4.5 PRSLOT
(ONS 15454 only)
Valid protection slots for the electrical cards
Table 4-17 IPCC for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
ALL Indicates the whole IPCCs of the UCP. The “ALL” AID is used
for UCP retrieving command input only. A NULL AID in the
IPCCs retrieval command defaults to the ALL AID, which
returns all the IPCCs of the node
CC-{1-16} Indicates individual IPCC of the UCP
Table 4-18 NBR for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
AAA.BBB.CC.DD Indicates the UCP neighbor or IP address. It is a character
string.
ALL Indicates the whole neighbors of the UCP. It is used for UCP
retrieving command input only.
NBR-{1-16} Indicates an individual neighbor index (1-16) of the UCP. It is
optional in the ENT-UCP-NBR command which returns a
neighbor index.
Table 4-19 PRSLOT for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
NULL Indicates there is no protection group. Used when trying to
delete a protection group.
SLOT-1 The No.1 slot of an NE
SLOT-3 The No.3 slot of an NE
SLOT-5 The No.5 slot of an NE
SLOT-13 The No.13 slot of an NE
SLOT-15 The No.15 slot of an NE
4-17
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.6 UCP
(ONS 15454 only)
UCP alarm AID
4.4.7 AONS
(ONS 15454 only)
This AID is used to access the automatic optical node setup (AONS) application of the NE.
4.4.8 BAND
(ONS 15454 only)
The BAND AID is used to access Optical Multiplex Section (OMS) layer of Optical Network units.
SLOT-17 The No.17 slot of an NE
Table 4-19 PRSLOT for ONS 15454 (continued)
Pattern Description
Table 4-20 UCP for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
IPCCAID Indicates UCP Control Channel AIDs, in the type of
“CC-CCID”
NBRAID Indicates UCP Neighbor AIDs, in the type of
“CC-NEIGHBORID”
STSAID Indicates UCP STS Circuit AIDs, in the type of
“STS-SLOT#-STS#”
Table 4-21 AONS for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
AONS-{W_E,E_W} Automatic Optical Node Setup identifier (is per ring direction
based)
Table 4-22 BAND for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
BAND-{2-6,12-16}-{1-4}-ALL All the Channels in a Band OADM (1Bn, 4Bn) units
BAND-{2-6,12-16}-{1-4}-{RX,TX} The Receive/Transmit Channels in a Band OADM (1Bn, 4Bn)
units
BAND-{2-6,12-16}-{1}-ALL All the Channels in an Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
(4Ch) units
4-18
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.9 BITS
4.4.9.1 BITS for ONS 15454
AID for BITS
4.4.9.2 BITS for ONS 15327
AID for BITS
4.4.10 BLSR
4.4.10.1 BLSR for ONS 15454
BLSR AIDs are used to access the specific BLSR of the NE.
BAND-{2-6,12-16}-{1}-{RX,TX} The Receive/Transmit Channels in an Optical
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer (4Ch) units
Table 4-22 BAND for ONS 15454 (continued)
Pattern Description
Table 4-23 BITS for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
BITS-ALL BITS AIDS of both BITS-1 and BITS-2 in the RTRV-BITS
command
BITS-{1,2} Individual BITS AID
Table 4-24 BITS for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
BITS-ALL BITS AIDS of both BITS-1 and BITS-2 in the RTRV-BITS
command
BITS-{1,2} Individual BITS AID
Table 4-25 BLSR for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
ALL The whole BLSR of the NE
BLSR-ALL The whole BLSR of the NE
BLSR-{0-9999} Individual BLSR of the NE
4-19
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.10.2 BLSR for ONS 15327
BLSR AIDs are used to access the specific BLSR of the NE.
4.4.11 CHANNEL
(ONS 15454 only)
Accesses the Optical Channels (OCH) layer of Optical Network/Client units.
4.4.12 COM
4.4.12.1 COM for ONS 15454
Common
Table 4-26 BLSR for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
ALL The whole BLSR of the NE
BLSR-ALL The whole BLSR of the NE
BLSR-{0-9999} Individual BLSR of the NE
Table 4-27 CHANNEL Values
CHANNEL Values Description
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-ALL All the Channels of an Optical Transponder/Muxponder
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{1-32}-ALL All the Channels in an Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
(32Ch) units
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{1-32}-{RX,TX} The Receive/Transmit Channels in an Optical
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer (32Ch) units
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-ALL All the Channels in an OADM (1Ch, 2Ch, 4Ch) units and
Optical
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{RX,TX} The Receive/Transmit Channels in an OADM (1Ch, 2Ch,
4Ch) units and Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer (4Ch)
units
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{2,3} A single channel of an Optical Transponder/Muxponder.
The TXP uses CHAN-slot-2 for the 1 DWDM Facility.
CHAN-{1-6,12-17}-{2,5} A single channel of an Optical Transponder/Muxponder.
The TXP uses CHAN-slot-2 for the 1 DWDM facility.
MXP uses the CHAN-slot-5 for the 1 DWDM facility
Table 4-28 COM for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
COM Common
4-20
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.12.2 COM for ONS 15327
Common
4.4.13 DS1
(ONS 15454 only)
Used to access the DS-1 frame layer of the DS3XM.
4.4.14 ENV
4.4.14.1 ENV for ONS 15454
The environmental AID for the AIC/AICI card
ENV-IN-{1-4}—Environmental AID for AIC Card on the 15454. “IN” is used for Environmental
Alarms.
ENV-IN-{1-20}—Environmental AID for AICI Card on the 15454. “IN” is used for Environmental
Alarms.
ENV-IN-{1-32}—Environmental AID for AICI Card Extensions on the 15454. “IN” is used for
Environmental Alarms.
ENV-IN-ALL—All Environmental Alarm Input contacts
ENV-OUT-{1-4}—Environmental AID for AIC/AICI Card on the 15454. “OUT” is used for
Environmental Controls.
ENV-OUT-{1-16}—Environmental AID for AICI Card Extensions on the 15454. “OUT” is used for
Environmental Controls.
ENV-OUT-ALL—All Environmental Control Output contacts
Table 4-29 COM for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
COM Common
Table 4-30 DS1 for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
DS1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6}-{1-28} DS1 AID for the DX3XM card
Table 4-31 ENV for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
ENV-IN-ALL ENV-IN-{1-4} - Environmental aid for AIC/AICI Cards on the
15454. “IN” is used for Environmental Alarms.
ENV-IN-{1-20} Environmental aid for AICI Card on the 15454. “IN” is used for
Environmental Alarms.
4-21
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.14.2 ENV for ONS 15327
The environmental components within the XTC card.
ENV-IN-{1-6}—Environmental aid on the 15327. “IN” is used for Environmental Alarms.
ENV-OUT-{1-2}—Environmental aid on the 15327. “OUT” is used for Environmental Controls.
4.4.15 EQPT
4.4.15.1 EQPT for ONS 15454
Equipment AIDs are used to access specific cards. The OC48/OC192 cards can only use the high speed
slots (Slot 5, Slot 6, Slot 12, Slot 13).
Pattern Description
ENV-IN-{1-32} Environmental aid for AIC/AICI Cards on the 15454. “IN” is used
for Environmental Alarms.
ENV-IN-{1-4} Environmental aid for AIC Card on the 15454. “IN” is used for
Environmental Alarms.
ENV-OUT-ALL Environmental aid for AIC/AICI Cards on the 15454. “OUT” is
used for Environmental Controls.
ENV-OUT-{1-16} Environmental aid for AICI Extensions on the 15454. “OUT” is
used for Environmental Controls.
ENV-OUT-{1-4} Environmental aid for AIC/AICI Cards on the 15454. “OUT” is
used for Environmental Controls.
Table 4-31 ENV for ONS 15454 (continued)
Table 4-32 ENV for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
ENV-{IN,OUT}-{1-6} Environmental alarm AID. “IN” is used for environmental AID,
“OUT” is used for control AID.
ENV-IN-{1-6} Environmental AID for the 15327. “IN” is used for Environmental
Alarms.
ENV-OUT-{1-2} Environmental AID for 15327. “OUT” is used for Environmental
Controls.
Table 4-33 EQPT for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
AIP The AID for the AIP. It is used for RTRV-INV output only.
ALL The ALL AID is only used for the RTRV-INV input command. It
reports all of the inventory information of the whole NE: AIP, BP,
FAN and SLOT-ALL.
BP The AID for the backplane. It is used for RTRV-INV output only.
4-22
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.15.2 EQPT for ONS 15327
Equipment AIDs are used to access specific cards. The I/O cards can only use the I/O slots (Slots 1–4).
Slots 5a nd 6 are reserved for the XTC cards and Slots 7 and 8 are reserved for MIC cards.
4.4.16 FACILITY
4.4.16.1 FACILITY for ONS 15454
Facilities AIDs are used to access specific ports.
Pattern Description
FAN The AID for the fan tray. It is used for RTRV-INV output only.
SLOT-ALL All of the NE equipment AIDs
SLOT-{1-17} Individual equipment AID of an NE
SLOT-{1-6,12-17} Individual equipment AID of the I/O card units or slots
Table 4-33 EQPT for ONS 15454 (continued)
Table 4-34 EQPT for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
SLOT-ALL All of the NE equipment AIDs
SLOT-{1-8} Individual equipment AID of an NE
Table 4-35 FACILITY for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
FAC-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8} Facilities for an OC3-8 card
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-1 Facility AID for the 1 Client (CLNT) Port on a TXP card
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-ALL All the facilities of an I/O unit or slot
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-11} Facilities for the Ethernet Front-end ports on the ML100T-12 card.
Ports are numbered starting with 0 (i.e. first port is FAC-SLOT-0,
second port is FAC-SLOT-1, ..., last port is FAC-SLOT-11 for
ML100T-12 and first port is FAC-SLOT-0 and second port is
FAC-SLOT-1 for ML1000-2)
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-1} Facilities for the Ethernet Backend Ports on the ML1000-2 card.
Ports are 0-based, (i.e the first port is FAC-SLOT-0 and the second
port is FAC-SLOT-1)
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-12} Facilities AID for the EC1 and DS3 cards
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-14} Facilities for the DS1 card
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4} Facilities for the four-port OC3 card, four-port OC12 card, and
G1000-4
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6} Facilities for the DS3XM card
4-23
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.16.2 FACILITY for ONS 15327
Facilities AIDs are used to access specific ports.
4.4.17 LINE
(ONS 15454 only)
The LINE AID is used to access the Optical Transport Section (OTS) layer of optical network units.
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1} Facility AID for the one-port OC12, and OC48AS cards
FAC-{5,6,12,13}-{1} Facility AID for the OC48/OC192 card. The OC48/OC192 cards
can only use the high speed slots (Slot 5, Slot 6, Slot 12, Slot 13).
FAC-{8,10}-{1} Facility aid for the OSCM card. The OSCM cards can only use the
XC slots (Slot-8, Slot-10)
VFAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-1} Facilities for the backend POS ports on the ML-series card. Port
numbering is 0-based (i.e. the first POS port is VFAC-SLOT-0, the
second POS port is VFAC-SLOT-1)
Table 4-35 FACILITY for ONS 15454 (continued)
Pattern Description
Table 4-36 FACILITY for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
FAC-{1-6}-ALL All the facilities of an I/O unit or slot
FAC-{5-6}-{1-28} Facilities AID for the DS1 on the XTC card
FAC-{5-6}-{1-3} Facilities AID for the DS3 on the XTC card
FAC-{1-4}-{1} Facilities AID for the OC12 and OC48 cards
FAC-{1-4}-{2} Facilities aid for the G1000-2 card
FAC-{1-4}-{1-4} Facilities AID for the OC3 card
Table 4-37 LINE Values
LINE Values Description
LINE-{1-6,12-17}-{1-2}-ALL All the Lines in a OPT-PRE, OCS-CSM, AD-1B, AD-4B,
AD-1C, AD-2C, AD-4C units
LINE-{1-6,12-17}-{1-2}-{RX,TX} The receive/transmit Lines in a OPT-PRE, OCS-CSM,
AD-1B, AD-4B, AD-1C, AD-2C, AD-4C units
LINE-{1-6,12-17}-{1-3}-ALL All the Lines in a OPT-BST units
LINE-{1-6,12-17}-{1-3}-{RX,TX} The receive/transmit Lines in a OPT-BST units
LINE-{8,10}-{1}-ALL All the Channels in an Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
(32Ch) units
LINE-{8,10}-{1}-{RX,TX} The receive/transmit Channels in an Optical
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer (32Ch) units
4-24
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.18 OSC
(ONS 15454 only)
OSC AIDs are used to access the OSC’ of the NE
4.4.19 RFILE
4.4.19.1 RFILE for ONS 15454
(ONS 15454 only)
File transfer type
4.4.20 STS
4.4.20.1 STS for ONS 15454
SONET frame-level AID set
Table 4-38 OSC Values
OSC Values Description
ALL Indicates the whole OSCs of the NE
OSC-{1-9999} Individual OSC of the NE
Table 4-39 RFILE for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
RFILE-DB Transferring the system database
RFILE-PKG Transferring a software package
Table 4-40 STS for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4} Dynamically allocated STSs of all widths for the
G1000-4 card
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-1 STS12C AIDS for a 4-port OC12 card
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-ALL All the STSs for a 4-port OC12 card
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-
{1,4,7,10}
STS3C for a 4-port OC12 card
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7} STS6C AIDs for a 4-port OC12
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-4}-{1-3} STS1 AID for a 4-port OC3 card
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-1 STS3C for an 8-port OC3 card
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-ALL All the STSs for an 8-port OC3 card
4-25
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
STS-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-{1-3} STS1 AID for an 8-port OC3 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1 STS1 AID for a DS1 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-1 STS12C AID for a 1-port OC12 card
STS48C AID for an OC48AS card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-ALL All the STSs of an STS bandwidth on a single port
optical card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,13,25,37} STS12C AIDs for an OC48AS card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1,4,10,13,16,19,25,28,37,40} STS9C AID for an OC48AS card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,10,13,16,19,22,25} STS24C AID for an OC48AS card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,10-46} STS3C AID for an OC48AS card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,10} STS3C for a 1-port OC12 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7,13,16,19,25,28,37,40,
43}
STS6C AID for an OC48AS card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4,7} STS6C AID for an OC12 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1,4} STS9C AID for a 1-port OC12 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-12} STS1 AID for a 1-port OC12 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-48} STS1 AID for an OC48AS card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-ALL All the STSs for an STS1 bandwidth on any
electrical card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-12} STS1 AID for EC1 and DS2 cards
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-1 STS3C AID for a 4-port OC3 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-ALL All the STSs for a 4-port OC3 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1,4,7} STS6C AID for a 4-port OC12 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1,4} STS9C AID for a 4-port OC12 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1-12} STS1 AID for a 4-port OC12 card
STS-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6} STS1 AID for a DS3XM card
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-1 STS48C AID for an OC48 card
STS192 AID for an OC192 card
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,13,25,37-180} STS12C AID for an OC192 card
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,13,25,37} STS12C AIDs for an OC48 card
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,10,13,16,19,22,25} STS24C AID for an OC48 card
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,10-190} STS3C for an OC192 card
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,10-46} STS3C AID for an OC48 card
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,4,7,13,16,19,25,28,37,40,
43}
STS6C AID for an OC48 card
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1,49,97,145} STS48C AID for an OC192 card
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1-192} STS1 AID for an OC192 card
Table 4-40 STS for ONS 15454 (continued)
Pattern Description
4-26
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.20.2 STS for ONS 15327
SONET frame-level AID set
4.4.21 SYN
4.4.21.1 SYN for ONS 15454
Synchronization AIDs
STS-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1-48} STS1 AID for an OC48 card
VFAC-{1-6,12-17}-{0-1} Virtual facility AIDs for the ML-series cards back
end POS ports. Both the ML1000-2 and
ML100T-12 have two POS ports and are 0-based.
Table 4-40 STS for ONS 15454 (continued)
Pattern Description
Table 4-41 STS for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
FAC-{1-4}-{1-2} Dynamically allocated STSs of all widths for the G1000-2 card
STS-{1-4}-1--ALL All the STSs of an STS bandwidth on an optical card
STS-{1-4}-{1} STS48C AID for an OC48 card
STS12C for an OC12 card
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,13,25,37} STS12C AID for an OC48 card
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,7,13,19,...43} STS6C AID for an OC48 card
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,7} STS6C AID for an OC12 card
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,4,7,10,...,46} STS3C AID for an OC48 card
STS-{1-4}-1-{1,4,7,10} STS3C AID for an OC3 and OC12 card
STS-{1-4}-1-{1-12} STS1 AID for an OC3 and OC12 card
STS-{1-4}-1-{1-48} STS1 AID for an OC48 card
STS-{5-6}-ALL All the STSs of an STS bandwidth on an XTC card
STS-{5-6}-{1} STS1 AID for the DS1 in an XTC card
STS-{5-6}-{2-4} STS1 AID for the DS3 in an XTC-28 card
VFAC-{1-4}-{1-2} Dynamically allocated STSs of all widths for the back end ports of
M3000-1 and M300T-8 cards.
Table 4-42 SYN for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
SYNC-NE NE sync AID
4-27
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.21.2 SYN for ONS 15327
Synchronization AIDs
4.4.22 SYN_SRC
4.4.22.1 SYN_SRC for ONS 15454
Synchronization source
4.4.22.2 SYN_SRC for ONS 15327
Synchronization source
Table 4-43 SYN for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
SYNC-NE NE sync AID
Table 4-44 SYN_SRC for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
BITS-1 Sync source is BITS-1
BITS-2 Sync source is BITS-2
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4} Sync source is the optical card (four-port OC3 and four-port OC12)
facility
FAC-{1-6,12-17}-{1} Sync source is the optical card (one-port OC12 and OC48AS) facility
FAC-{5,6,12,13}-{1} Sync source is the optical card (OC48,OC192) facility
INTERNAL Set the SYN_SRC to be the system default value. The “Internal” value
of the SYN_SRC is only applied for the SYNC-NE AID on the
ED-SYNCN command.
NONE Set the SYNC_SRC value to the default value for BITS-OUT. The
“NONE” value of SYNC_SRC only applies to the BITS-1 and BITS-2
AID of the ED-SYNCN command.
SYNC-NE SYNC-NE source. It is only used for BITS-OUT in line timing mode.
Table 4-45 SYN_SRC for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
FAC-{1-4}-{1-4} Sync source is the optical card (OC3) facility
FAC-{1-4}-{1} Sync source is the optical card (OC12, OC48) facility
INTERNAL Set the SYN_SRC to be the system default value. The “Internal” value
of the SYN_SRC is only applied for the SYNC-NE AID on the
ED-SYNCN command.
4-28
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.23 SYNC_REF
4.4.23.1 SYNC_REF for ONS 15454
Synchronization AIDs
4.4.23.2 SYNC_REF for ONS 15327
Synchronization AIDs
SYNC-NE SYNC-NE source. It is only used in the alarm report or alarm retrieve
commands.
{BITS-1,BITS-2} BITS-1 or BITS-2 of the synchronization source
Table 4-45 SYN_SRC for ONS 15327 (continued)
Pattern Description
Table 4-46 SYNC_REF for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
ALL Equivalent to a combination of SYNC-ALL, BITS-1 and BITS-2.
This AID is valid only for the commands RTRV-ALM-SYNCN and
RTRV-COND-SYNCN
SYNC-ALL NE, BITS1 and BITS2 sync AIDs used for the RTRV-SYNCN
command only
SYNC-NE NE sync AID
SYNC-{BITS1,BITS2} BITS1 and BITS2 sync AIDs
Table 4-47 SYNC_REF for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
SYNC-ALL NE, BITS1 and BITS2 sync AIDs used for the RTRV-SYNCN
command only
SYNC-NE NE sync AID
SYNC-{BITS1,BITS2} BITS1 and BITS2 sync AIDs
4-29
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.24 SYNCSW
4.4.24.1 SYNCSW for ONS 15454
New synchronization reference that will be used
4.4.24.2 SYNCSW for ONS 15327
New synchronization reference that will be used
4.4.25 TACC
(ONS 15454 only)
Test access AID which indicates the TAP number
Table 4-48 SYNCSW for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
INT Internal clock. The “INT” value of the syncsw is only applied for the
SYNC-NE AID on the OPR-SYNCSW command.
PRI Primary timing reference
SEC Secondary timing reference
THIRD Third timing reference
Table 4-49 SYNCSW for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
INT Internal clock. The “INT” value of the syncsw is only applied for the
SYNC-NE AID on the OPR-SYNC-SW command.
PRI Primary timing reference
SEC Secondary timing reference
THIRD Third timing reference
Table 4-50 TACC for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
{0, 1-999} Indicates individual TAP number of the NE. The zero (0) TAP
number is used in the [<TACC>] field of the ED-rr test access
related commands. When [<TACC>] is zero (0), the TAP is
deleted.
4-30
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Access Identifiers
4.4.26 TAP
(ONS 15327 only)
Test access AID which indicates the TAP number
4.4.27 UDC
(ONS 15454 only)
UDC AIDs for F-UDC and DCC-UDC channels on the AICI card
4.4.28 VT1_5
4.4.28.1 VT1_5 for ONS 15454
Virtual termination AIDs
Table 4-51 TACC for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
{0, 1-999} Indicates individual TAP number of the NE. The zero (0) TAP
number is used in the [<TACC>] field of the ED-rr test access
related commands. When [<TACC>] is zero (0), the TAP is
deleted.
Table 4-52 UDC for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
UDC-{F,DCC}-{A,B} F-UDC and DCC-UDC AIDs for A and B channels
Table 4-53 VT1_5 for ONS 15454
Pattern Description
VT1-{1-4,14-17}-{1-8}-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4} 8-port OC3 card
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4} 1-port OC12 card
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-48}-{1-7}-{1-4} OC48AS card
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-1-{1-7}-{1-2} DS1 card
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-12}-1-{1-7}-{1-4} EC1 card
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4} 4-port OC12 card
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-4}-{1-3}-{1-7}-{1-4} 4-port OC3 card
VT1-{1-6,12-17}-{1-6}-{1-7}-{1-4} DS3XM card
VT1-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1-192}-{1-7}-{1-4} OC192 Card
VT1-{5,6,12,13}-1-{1-48}-{1-7}-{1-4} OC48 card
4-31
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.4.28.2 VT1_5 for ONS 15327
Virtual termination AIDs
4.5 Parameter Types
This section provides a description of all message parameter types defined for the TL1 messages used
in the ONS 15454 and ONS 15327. The TL1 message descriptions frequently refer to this section.
4.5.1 ATAG Description
The ATAG is used for message sequencing. There are three streams of autonomous messages and each
stream corresponds to a sequence. The sequence numbers increment by one for each autonomous
message within that stream. The format of ATAG differs for each stream. The three streams are:
1. Alarmed events:
These include REPT ALM and REPT EVT messages as well as the REPT SW autonomous message.
ATAG Format: x.y
where
x – sequence number of this alarmed event. This is an integer in the range of 0–9999.
y – sequence number of the previous alarmed event which is related to this alarmed event. This is
an integer in the range of 0-9999.
If there is no such previous related event, then y will be the same as x. For example, the first time
an alarm is raised you will receive the autonomous message:
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
* 1346.1346 REPT ALM T1
“FAC-1-1:MN,LOS,NSA,,,,:\“Loss Of Signal\”,DS1-14”
;
When this alarmed event/condition is cleared, you will receive the autonomous message:
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:31:00
A 1349.1346 REPT ALM T1
“FAC-1-1:CL,LOS,NSA,,,,:\“Loss Of Signal\”,DS1-14”
;
Table 4-54 VT1_5 for ONS 15327
Pattern Description
ALL All the VT cross-connections of the NE. This <ALL>
AID is only used for the RTRV-CRS-VT1 command.
VT1-{5-6}-1-{1-7}-{1-2} XTC-14 card VT aid set
VT1-{5-6}-1-{1-7}-{1-4 XTC-28 card VT aid set
VT1-{1-4}-1-{1-12}-{1-7}-{1-4} OC3 and OC12 card VT AID set
VT1-{1-4}-1-{1-48}-{1-7}-{1-4} OC48 card Vt aid set
4-32
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
Note The autonomous message CANC also has an ATAG in this format even though it is not an
alarmed event.
2. Database change messages:
The REPT DBCHG message falls into this category.
ATAG Format: x
where:
x – sequence number of the database change update message. This is an integer in the range of
0–9999. For example:
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A 96 REPT DBCHG
“TIME=18-01-05,DATE=1970-01-01,SOURCE=2,USERID=CISCO15,
DBCHGSEQ=96:ENT-EQPT:SLOT-3”
;
Note The ATAG is the same as the DBCHGSEQ field in the REPT DBCHG output.
3. PM Reports:
The REPT PM messages fall into this category.
ATAG format: x
where:
x – sequence number of the PM report. This is an integer in the range of 0–9999. For example:
TID-000 1998-06-20 14:30:00
A5 REPT PM DS1
“FAC-3-1:CVL,10,PRTL,NEND,BTH,15-MIN,05-25,14-46”
;
This sequence number is global across all existing PM schedules.
4.5.2 CTAG Description
The correlation tag (CTAG) is included in each command by the user and is repeated by the
NE in the response to allow the user to associate the command and response messages.
Note The valid values for a CTAG are strings of up to 6 characters comprised of identifiers (alphanumeric,
beginning with a letter) or decimal numerals (a string of decimal digits with an optional non-trailing “.”).
4.5.3 TID Description
The TID is the name of the NE where the command is addressed. TID is the Telcordia name for the
system.
4-33
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.4 Parameter Notes
1. If a parameter is set to a value that is inconsistent with something already in the database, and that
value is not changed to a consistent value then the command will be denied.
2. If a parameter is set to a value that is consistent with what is already in the database, but another
parameter in the same command is incompatible, then the command will be denied.
3. The correct way to issue a command where parameters may be in conflict is to:
a. First issue that command and change all relevant parameters to compatible values,
b. Then issue the command again to change the target values.
For example, OC-N is syncmsg=y, to change SDH to y, ED-OCN needs to be called to set
syncmsg=N, then called again to set SDH=y.
4. The attribute defaults have also been presented under RTRV commands, and they can be retrieved
only if the RTRV commands follow the card/entity original provision.
5. The default for an optional field of an ED command is either the provisioned default value or the
last provisioned value in the previous ED command.
4.5.5 ALL_MONTYPE
Monitoring type list
Table 4-55 ALL_MONTYPE Values
ALL_MONTYPE
Values Description
AISSP Alarm Indication Signal Seconds - Path
BBE-PM OTN - Background Block Errors - Path Monitor Point
BBE-SM OTN - Background Block Errors - Section Monitor Point
BBER-PM OTN - Background Block Error Ratio - Path Monitor Point expressed as 1/10th of
a percentage.
BBER-SM OTN - Background Block Error Ratio - Section Monitor Point expressed as 1/10th
of a percentage.
BIEC FEC - Bit Errors Corrected
CGV 8B10B - Code Group Violations
CVCPP Coding Violations - CP-Bit Path
CVL Coding Violations - Line
CVP Coding Violations - Path
CVS Coding Violations - Section
CVV Coding Violations - Section
ES-PM OTN - Errored Seconds - Path Monitor Point
ES-SM OTN - Errored Seconds - Section Monitor Point
ESCPP Errored Seconds - CP- Bit Path
ESL Errored Seconds - Line
4-34
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
ESP Errored Seconds - Path
ESR Errored Second - Ratio
ESR-PM Errored Seconds Ratio - Path monitor Point expressed as 1/10th of a percentage
ESR-SM Errored Seconds Ratio - Section monitor Point expressed as 1/10th of a
percentage
ESS Errored Seconds - Section
ESV Errored Seconds - VT Path
FC-PM OTN - Failure Count - Path Monitor Point
FC-SM OTN - Failure Count - Section Monitor Point
FCP Failure Count - Line
LAT-AVG Average Laser Temperature current in 1/256 degrees Celsius
LAT-HIGH Laser Temperature in 1/256 degrees Celsius Measured range
[-40.000 C, 125.000 C]
LAT-LOW Laser Temperature in 1/256 degrees Celsius Measured range
[-40.000 C, 125.000 C]
LAT-MAX Maximum Laser Temperature in 1/256 degrees Celsius Measured range
[-40.000 C, 125.000 C]
LAT-MIN Minimum Laser Temperature in 1/256 degrees Celsius Measured range
[-40.000 C, 125.000 C]
LBCL-AVG Average Laser Bias current in uA
LBCL-HIGH High Laser Bias current in uA
LBCL-LOW Low Laser Bias current in uA
LBCL-MAX Max Laser Bias current in uA
LBCL-MIN Minimum Laser Bias current in uA
LOSSL Loss of Signal Seconds - Line
NPJC-PDET PPJC-PDET:Negative Pointer Justification
NPJC-PGEN PPJC-PGEN:Negative Pointer Justification
OBED FEC - One Bit Errors Detected
OPR-AVG Average Receive Power in 1/10 uW
OPR-HIGH Receive power in 1/10 uW Measured value [-40.0 dBm,+30.0 dBm]
OPR-LOW Receive power in 1/10 uW Measured value [-40.0 dBm,+30.0 dBm]
OPR-MAX Maximum Receive Power in 1/10 uW
OPR-MIN Minimum Receive Power in 1/10 uW
OPT-AVG Average Transmit Power in 1/10 uW
OPT-HIGH Transmit power in 1/10 uW. Measured value [-40.0 dBm,+30.0 dBm]
OPT-LOW Transmit power in 1/10 uW. Measured value[-40.0 dBm,+30.0 dBm]
OPT-MAX Maximum Transmit Power in 1/10 uW
Table 4-55 ALL_MONTYPE Values (continued)
ALL_MONTYPE
Values Description
4-35
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
OPT-MIN Minimum Transmit Power in 1/10uW
OPWR-AVG Optical Power - Average Interval Value in 1/10th of dBm
OPWR-MAX Optical Power - Maximum Interval Value in 1/10th of dBm
OPWR-MIN Optical Power - Minimum Interval Value in 1/10th of dBm
PPJC-PDET PPJC-PDET:Positive Pointer Justification
PPJC-PGEN PPJC-PGEN:Positive Pointer Justification
PSC Protection Switching Count
PSC-R Protection Switching Count - Ring
PSC-S Protection Switching Count - Span
PSC-W Protection Switching Count - Working
PSD Protection Switching Duration
PSD-R Protection Switching Duration - Ring
PSD-S Protection Switching Duration - Span
PSD-W Protection Switching Duration - Working
RXT-AVG Average Receiver Temperature
RXT-HIGH High Alarm Threshold level for Receiver Temperature
RXT-LOW Low Alarm Threshold level for Receiver Temperature Measured range
[-40.000 C,125.000 C]
RXT-MAX Receiver Temperature Max PM value Measured range [-40.000 C, 125.000 C]
RXT-MIN Receiver Temperature Min PM value Measured range [-40.000 C, 125.000 C]
SASCPP Severely Errored Framing/AIS Second - CP-Bit Path
SASP Severely Errored Framing/AIS Seconds Path
SEFS Severely Errored Framing Seconds
SES-PM OTN - Severely Errored Second - Path
SES-SM OTN - Severely Errored Second - Section Monitor Point
SESCPP Severely Errored Second - CP-Bit Path
SESL Severely Errored Second - Line
SESP Severely Errored Second - Path
SESR-PM OTN - Severely Errored Second Ratio - Path Monitor Point expressed as 1/10th of
a percentage
SESR-SM OTN - Severely Errored Second Ratio - Section Monitor Point expressed as 1/10th
of a percentage
SESS Severely Errored Second - Section
SESV Severely Errored Second - VT Path
UAS-PM OTN - Unavailable Second - Path Monitor Point
UAS-SM OTN - Unavailable Second - Section Monitor Point
Table 4-55 ALL_MONTYPE Values (continued)
ALL_MONTYPE
Values Description
4-36
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
UASCPP Unavailable Second - CP-Bit Path
UASL Unavailable Second - Line
UASP Unavailable Second - Path
UASV Unavailable Second - VT Path
UCW FEC - Uncorrectable Words
ZBED FEC - Zero Bit Errors Detected
Table 4-55 ALL_MONTYPE Values (continued)
ALL_MONTYPE
Values Description
4-37
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.6 ALL_THR
Threshold list
Table 4-56 ALL_THR Value
ALL_THR Values Description
T-AISSP Alarm Indication Signal Seconds - Path
T-BBE-PM OTN TCA. Background Block Errors - Path Monitor Point
T-BBE-SM OTN TCA. Background Block Errors - Section Monitor Point
T-BBEHP Background Block Errors - High Order Path
T-BBEL Background Block Errors - Line
T-BBELP Background Block Errors - Low Order Path (VC3/VC12)
T-BBEM Background Block Errors- Multiplex Section
T-BBEP Background Block Errors - High Order Path
T-BBEPR Background Block Errors
T-BBER Background Block Errors - Regenerator Section
T-BBER-PM Background Block Errors - Path Level OTN
T-BBER-SM Background Block Errors - Section Level OTN
T-BBER-TCM1 Background Block Errors - Tandem1 Level OTN
T-BBER-TCM2 Background Block Errors - Tandem2 Level OTN
T-BBERS Background Block Errors - Regenerator Section
T-BBESR Background Block Errors
T-BBEV Background Block Errors
T-BIEC FEC TCA. Bit Errors Corrected
T-BYEC FEC TCA. Byte Errors Corrected
T-CSS Controlled Slipped Seconds
T-CVCPP Coding Violations - CP-Bit Path
T-CVL Coding Violations - Line
T-CVP Coding Violations - Path
T-CVS Coding Violations - Section
T-CVV Coding Violations - VT Path
T-EBHP EB - High Order Path
T-EBLP EB Low Order Path VC3/VC12
T-EBMS EB Multiplex Section
T-EBP EB Line Path
T-EBRS EB Regenerator Section
T-ES-PM OTN TCA. Errored Seconds - Path Monitor Point
T-ES-SM OTN TCA. Errored Seconds - Section Monitor Point
T-ESCPP Errored Seconds - CP-Bit Path
4-38
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
T-ESHP ED High Order Path VC4/VC4-nc
T-ESL Errored Seconds - Line
T-ESLP ES Low Order PAth VC3/VC12
T-ESMS ES Multiplex Section
T-ESP Errored Seconds - Path
T-ESR ES - Regenerator Section
T-ESR-PM ES - Regenerator Section - Path Level OTN
T-ESR-SM ES - Regenerator Section - Section Level OTN
T-ESR-TCM1 ES - Regenerator Section - Tandem1 Level OTN
T-ESR-TCM2 ES - Regenerator Section - Tandem2 Level OTN
T-ESRS ES Regenerator Section
T-ESS Errored Seconds - Section
T-ESV Errored Seconds - VT Path
T-FC-PM OTN TCA. Failure Count - Path Monitor Point
T-FC-SM OTN TCA. Failure Count - Section Monitor Point
T-FCHP FC High Order Path
T-FCLP FC Low Order Path
T-FCMS FC Multiplex Section
T-FCP Failure Count - Line
T-HOPWR Optical Power - High Threshold crossed in 1/10th of dBm
T-LAT-HWT Laser Level TCA. Laser Temperature in 1/256 degrees Celsius. Low/High
Warning Threshold
T-LAT-LWT Laser Level TCA. Laser Temperature in 1/256 degrees Celsius. Low/High
Warning Threshold
T-LBCL-HWT Laser Level TCA. Laser Bias current in uA. Low/High Warning Threshold
T-LBCL-LWT Laser Level TCA. Laser Bias current in uA. Low/High Warning Threshold
T-LOPWR Optical Power - Low Threshold crossed in 1/10th of dBm
T-LOSSL Loss of Signal Seconds - Line
T-OBED FEC TCA. One Bit Errors Detected
T-OPR-HWT Laser Level TCA. Receive power in 1/10 uW. Low/High Warning Threshold
T-OPR-LWT Laser Level TCA. Receive power in 1/10 uW. Low/High Warning Threshold
T-OPT-HWT Laser Level TCA. Transmit power in 1/10 uW. Low/High Warning Threshold
T-OPT-LWT Laser Level TCA. Transmit power in 1/10 uW. Low/High Warning Threshold
T-PJ-DET Pointer Justification Detected
T-PJ-DIFF Pointer Justification Diff
T-PJ-GEN Pointer Justification Generated
T-PJNEG PPJC-PDET:Negative Pointer Justification
Ta b l e 4 - 5 6 A L L _ T H R Value (continued)
ALL_THR Values Description
4-39
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
T-PJNEG-GEN PPJC-PGEN:Negative Pointer Justification
T-PJPOS PPJC-PDET:Positive Pointer Justification
T-PJPOS-GEN PPJC-PGEN:Positive Pointer Justification
T-PSC Protection Switching Count
T-PSC-R Protection Switching Count
T-PSC-S Protection Switching Count
T-PSC-W Protection Switching Count
T-PSD Protection Switching Duration
T-PSD-R Protection Switching Duration
T-PSD-S Protection Switching Duration
T-PSD-W Protection Switching Duration
T-RX-TEMP-MAX Receiver Temperature Max TCA (applicable to MXP/TXP cards)
T-RXT-HWT Receiver Temperature High Warning TCA
T-RXT-LWT Receiver Temperature Low Warning TCA
T-SASCPP Severely Errored Framing/AIS Second - CP-Bit Path
T-SASP Severely Errored Framing/AIS Seconds
T-SEFS Severely Errored Framing Seconds
T-SEFSRS SEFRS
T-SES-PM OTN TCA. Severely Errored Second - Path Monitor Point
T-SES-SM OTN TCA. Severely Errored Second - Section Monitor Point
T-SESCPP Severely Errored Second - CP-Bit Path
T-SESHP SES High Order Path
T-SESL Severely Errored Second - Line
T-SESLP SES Low Order Path
T-SESMS SES Multiplex Section
T-SESP Severely Errored Second - Path
T-SESR-PM SESR - Path Level OTN
T-SESR-SM SESR - Section Level OTN
T-SESR-TCM1 SESR - Tandem1 Level OTN
T-SESR-TCM2 SESR - Tandem2 Level OTN
T-SESRS SES Regeneration Section
T-SESS Severely Errored Second - Section
T-SESV Severely Errored Second - VT Path
T-UAS-PM OTN TCA. Unavailable Second - Path Monitor Point
T-UAS-SM OTN TCA. Unavailable Second - Path Monitor Point
T-UASCPP Unavailable Second - CP-Bit Path
Table 4-56 ALL_THR Value (continued)
ALL_THR Values Description
4-40
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.7 ALM_THR
Alarm Threshold list for MXP/TXP cards.
T-UASHP UA High Order Path
T-UASL Unavailable Second - Line
T-UASLP UA Low Order Path
T-UASMS UA Multiplex Section
T-UASP Unavailable Second - Path
T-UASV Unavailable Second - VT Path
T-UCW FEC TCA. UnCorrectable Words
T-ZBED FEC TCA. Zero Bit Errors Detected
Ta b l e 4 - 5 6 A L L _ T H R Value (continued)
ALL_THR Values Description
Table 4-57 ALM_THR Values
ALS_THR Values Description
LAT-HIGH Laser Temperature in 1/256 degrees Celsius Measured range [-40.000 C,
125.000 C]
LAT-LOW Laser Temperature in 1/256 degrees Celsius Measured range [-40.000 C,
125.000 C]
LBCL-HIGH Laser Bias current in uA as 1/10% High Warning Threshold, Low Warning
Threshold Measured value [0.0%, 100.0%]
LBCL-LOW Laser Bias current in uA as 1/10% High Warning Threshold, Low Warning
Threshold Measured value [0.0%, 100.0%]
OPR-HIGH Receive power in 1/10 uW Measured value [-40.0 dBm,+30.0 dBm]
OPR-LOW Receive power in 1/10 uW Measured value [-40.0 dBm,+30.0 dBm
OPT-HIGH Transmit power in 1/10 uW. Measured value [-40.0 dBm,+30.0 dBm]
OPT-LOW Transmit power in 1/10 uW. Measured value [-40.0 dBm,+30.0 dBm]
RXT-HIGH Receiver Temperature High Alarm Threshold Measured range [-40.000 C,
125.000 C]
RXT-LOW Receiver Temperature Low Alarm Threshold Measured range [-40.000 C,
125.000 C]
T-GAIN-HDEG Gain not reached - High Degrade Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dB
T-GAIN-HFAIL Gain not reached - Low Failure Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dB
T-GAIN-LDEG Gain not reached - Low Degrade Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dB
T-GAIN-LFAIL Gain not reached - Low Failure Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dB
T-OPWR-HDEG Optical Power - High Degrade Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dBm
T-OPWR-HFAIL Optical Power - High Failure Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dBm
T-OPWR-LDEG Optical Power - Low Degrade Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dBm
4-41
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.8 ALS_CFG
Specifies the type of check for ALS detection mode
4.5.9 ALS_MODE
This type specifies the working mode for the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) functionality.
4.5.10 ALS_RESTART
Automatic Laser Shutdown for the G1000 card
T-OPWR-LFAIL Optical Power - Low Failure Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dBm
T-VOA-HDEG VOA Attenuation - High Degrade Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dB
T-VOA-HFAIL VOA Attenuation - High Failure Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dB
T-VOA-LDEG VOA Attenuation - Low Degrade Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dB
T-VOA-LFAIL VOA Attenuation - Low Failure Threshold. It is in 1/10th of dB
XCVR-HIGH Transceiver voltage in 1/10 mV Measure value [0.0 mV, 10000.0 mV]
XCVR-LOW Transceiver voltage in 1/10 mV Measure value [0.0 mV, 10000.0 mV]
Table 4-57 ALM_THR Values (continued)
ALS_THR Values Description
Table 4-58 ALS_CFG Values
ALS_CFG Values Description
ALL The ALS is applied checking all the received signals (Line + OSC)
OSC The ALS is applied checking only the received OSC signal
RX The ALS is applied checking only the received Line signal
Table 4-59 ALS_MODE Values
ALS_MODE Values Description
AUTO Automatic
DISABLED Disabled
MAN Manual
MAN-RESTART Manual Restart for Test
Table 4-60 ALS_RESTART Values
ALS_RESTART Values Description
AUTO_RESTART Automatic Laser Shutdown Automatic Restart
4-42
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.11 AMPL_MODE
Defines the Amplifier control mode
4.5.12 AWG_STATUS
AWG status list
4.5.13 BITS_LineBuildOut
BITS Line buildout
4.5.14 BLSR_MODE
BLSR mode
MAN_RESTART Automatic Laser Shutdown Manual Restart
MAN_TEST_RESTART Automatic Laser Shutdown Restart Test
Table 4-60 ALS_RESTART Values
ALS_RESTART Values Description
Table 4-61 AMPL_MODE Values
AMPL_MODE Values Description
GAIN The Amplifier always maintains a fixed Gain
POWER The Amplifier maintains the Output Power to a fixed value
Table 4-62 AWG_STATUS Values
AWG_STATUS Values Description
ON The AWG is on
WARM-UP The AWG is warming up
Table 4-63 BITS_LineBuildOut Values
BITS_LineBuildOut
Values Description
0–133 BITS line buildout range is 0–133
134–266 BITS line buildout range is 134–266
267–399 BITS line buildout range is 267–399
400–533 BITS line buildout range is 400–533
534–655 BITS line buildout range is 534–655
4-43
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.15 BLSR_PTH_STATE
Indicates the BLSR path state only if the port is on the BLSR
4.5.16 BLSR_PTH_TYPE
Indicates the BLSR path TYPE only if the port is on the BLSR
4.5.17 BLSR_TYPE
BLSR type of an OCN port
Table 4-64 BLSR_MODE Values
BLSR_MODE Values Description
2F Two fiber BLSR
4F Four fiber BLSR
Table 4-65 BLSR_PTH_STATE Values
BLSR_PTH_STATE
Values Description
PCAPTHACT Indicates the BLSR ring un-switched and its PCA path is in the active state
PCAPTHSTB Indicates the BLSR ring switched and its PCA path is in the standby state
PROTPTHACT Indicates the BLSR ring switched and its protection path is in the active state
WKGPTHACT Indicates the BLSR ring un-switched and its working path is in the active state
WKGPTHSTB Indicates the BLSR ring switched and its working path is in the standby state
Table 4-66 BLSR_PTH_TYPE Values
BLSR_PTH_TYPE
Values Description
NON-PCA Indicates the AID is on the working path, or the XC created protection path
PCA Indicates the AID is on the BLSR PCA path
Table 4-67 BLSR_TYPE Values
BLSR_TYPE Values Description
EASTPROT Identifies that the OCN port is an east protecting port
EASTWORK Identifies that the OCN port is an east working port
WESTPROT Identifies that the OCN port is a west protecting port
WESTWORK Identifies that the OCN port is a west working port
4-44
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.18 C2_BYTE
Indicates C2 byte Hex Code
Table 4-68 C2_BTYE Values
C2_BYTE Values Description
0X00 Unequipped
0X01 Equipped-Non Specific payload
0X02 VT-Structured STS-1 SPE
0X03 Locked VT Mode
0X04 Asynchronous Mapping for DS3
0X12 Asynchronous Mapping for DS4NA
0X13 Mapping for ATM
0X14 Mapping for DQDB
0X15 Asynchronous Mapping for FDDI
0X16 HDLC-Over-SONET Mapping
0XE1 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 1VTx payload defect
0XE2 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 2VTx payload defects
0XE3 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 3VTx payload defects
0XE4 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 4VTx payload defects
0XE5 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 5VTx payload defects
0XE6 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 6VTx payload defects
0XE7 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 7VTx payload defects
0XE8 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 8VTx payload defects
0XE9 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 9VTx payload defects
0XEA VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 10VTx payload defects
0XEB VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 11VTx payload defects
0XEC VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 12VTx payload defects
0XED VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 13VTx payload defects
0XEE VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 14VTx payload defects
0XEF VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 15VTx payload defects
0XF0 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 16VTx payload defects
0XF1 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 17VTx payload defects
0XF2 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 18VTx payload defects
0XF3 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 19VTx payload defects
0XF4 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 20VTx payload defects
0XF5 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 21VTx payload defects
0XF6 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 22VTx payload defects
0XF7 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 23VTx payload defects
4-45
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.19 CCT
Defines the type of cross-connect to be created
4.5.20 CIRCUIT_SIZE
The DWDM circuit size used on a wavelength.
0XF8 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 24VTx payload defects
0XF9 VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 25VTx payload defects
0XFA VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 26VTx payload defects
0XFB VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 27VTx payload defects
0XFC VT-structured STS-1 SPE with 28VTx payload defects
0XFE O.181 Test Signal (TSS1 to TSS3) Mapping
0XFF Reserved, however, C2 is 0XFF if AIS-L is being generated by an optical card
or cross-connect downstream
Table 4-68 C2_BTYE Values (continued)
C2_BYTE Values Description
Table 4-69 CCT Values
CCT Values Description
1WAY A unidirectional connection from a source tributary to a destination tributary
1WAYDC UPSR mcast drop with (1-way) continue
1WAYEN UPSR mcast end node (1-way continue)
1WAYMON A bidirectional connection between the two tributaries
Note Starting with ONS 15454 R3.0 and ONS 15327 R3.3, 1WAYMON is
not supported with TL1. However, it is still supported from CTC.
Using CTC you can create 1WAYMON cross-connects and can be
retrieved via TL1.
1WAYPCA A unidirectional connection from a source tributary to a destination tributary
on the protection path/fiber
2WAY A bidirectional connection between the two tributaries
2WAYDC A Bidirectional Drop and Continue connection applicable only to UPSR
Traditional and Integrated Dual Ring InterConnections
2WAYPCA A bidirectional connection between the two tributaries on the extra protection
path/fiber
Table 4-70 CIRCUIT_SIZE Values
CIRCUIT_SIZE Values Description
10G_FEC The circuit size is 10 Gbit/sec with FEC
10G_NO_FEC The circuit size is 10 Gbit/sec without FEC
4-46
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.21 CMD_MODE
Command mode is used to force the system to execute a given command regardless of any standing
conditions. Normal mode is the default behavior for all commands but the user may specify FRCD to
force the system to override a state in which the command would normally be denied.
4.5.22 COMM_TYPE
The out of band communications channel termination type
2G5_FEC The circuit size is 2.5 Gbit/sec with FEC
2G5_NO_FEC The circuit size is 2.5 Gbit/sec without FEC
MULTI_RATE The circuit size support multi rate
NOT_SPEC The circuit size is Equipment not specific
Table 4-70 CIRCUIT_SIZE Values (continued)
CIRCUIT_SIZE Values Description
Table 4-71 CMD_MODE Values
CMD_MODE Values Description
FRCD Force the system to override a state in which the command would normally be
denied
NORM Execute the command normally. Do not override any conditions that may
make the command fail.
Table 4-72 COMM_TYPE Values
COMM_TYPE Values Description
DCC Section DCC type
GCC Generic Communication Channel (OTN) Type
NONE Disable DCC or GCC if enabled
4-47
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.23 COND_EFF
The affected unit’s condition
4.5.24 CONDITION
The condition type of the alarm indication
Table 4-73 COND_EFF Values
COND_EFF Values Description
CL Standing condition cleared
SC Standing condition raised
TC Transient condition
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values
CONDITION Values Description
8B10B-OOSYNC 8B10B Out Of Sync
ACOMAN Alarm cutoff is in manual mode
AIS External failure - Incoming - Alarm Indication Signal
AIS-L External failure - Incoming - Alarm Indication Signal - Line
AIS-P External failure - Incoming - Alarm Indication Signal - Path
AIS-PM Alarm Indication Signal - Path Monitor Point
AIS-SM Alarm Indication Signal - Section Monitor Point
AIS-V External failure - Incoming - Alarm Indication Signal - VT layer
ALM-SUPPRESS Alarms/Events Suppressed for this Object
APSB External failure - Incoming - Automatic Protection Switching
Channel - Byte failure
APSC External failure - Incoming - Automatic Protection Switching
Channel failure
APSC-IMP External failure - Incoming - Automatic Protection Switching- Invalid
K bytes
APSCCONNL External failure - Incoming -Automatic Protection Switching
-Connection Loss
APSCDFLTK External failure - Incoming -Automatic Protection Switching -Default
K byte
APSCINCON External failure - Incoming -Automatic Protection Switching
-Inconsistent
APSCM External failure - Incoming - Automatic Protection Switching
Channel - Protection Switching Channel Match failure
APSCNMIS APS Channel - BLSR - Node Id Mismatch
4-48
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
APSMM External failure - Incoming -Automatic Protection Switching Channel
- Automatic Protection Switch Mode Mismatch
AS-CMD Alarms and Events Suppressed By User Command
AS-MT Alarms and Events Suppressed For Maintenance
AUD-LOG-LOSS Audit Log 100 Percent Full - Oldest records will be lost
AUD-LOG-LOW Internal hardware - Facility Termination Equipment - Automatic
Laser Shutdown
AUTOLSROFF Internal hardware - Facility Termination Equipment - Automatic
Laser Shutdown
AUTORESET Recovery action - Automatic system Reset
AUTOSW-AIS Automatic Switch - Alarm Indication Signal
AUTOSW-LOP Automatic Switch - Loss of Pointer
AUTOSW-PDI Automatic Switch - Payload Defect Indication
AUTOSW-SDBER Automatic Switch - Signal Degrade Bit Error Rate
AUTOSW-SFBER Automatic Switch - Signal Fail Bit Error Rate
AUTOSW-UNEQ Automatic Switch - Unequipped
AWG-DEG AWG Temperature - Degrade
AWG-FAIL AWG Temperature - Failure
AWG-OVERTEMP AWG Over Temperature
BDI-PM Backward Defect Indication - Path Monitor Point
BDI-SM Backward Defect Indication - Section Monitor Point
BKUPMEMP Internal hardware - Control Equipment - Primary non-volatile Backup
Memory failure
BKUPMEMS Internal hardware - Control Equipment - Secondary non-volatile
Backup Memory failure
BLSR-RESYNC Bidirectional Line Switched Ring - Tables Resynchronized
BLSR-UPDATED BLSR Multiple Node Table Update Finished
BLSROSYNC Bidirectional Line Switched Ring - Out of Synchronization
BPV External failure - Incoming - Bipolar Violation
CARLOSS External failure - Incoming - Carrier Loss on the LAN
CASETEMP-FAIL Case High Temperature - Failure
CKTDOWN Signaling unable to setup circuit
CKTDOWNEV Signaled circuit going down
CLDRESTART Recovery action - Cold Restart
COMIOXC IO Slot To cross-connection Communication Failure
CONCAT Control Bus Failure
CONTBUS-1 Control Bus Failure - Bus 1
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-49
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
CONTBUS-2 Control Bus Failure - Bus 2
CONTBUS-A-X TCC/XTC card in Slot 7/Slot 5 has lost communication with the card
in Slot X
CONTBUS-B-X TCC/XTC card in Slot 11/Slot 6 has lost communication with the card
in Slot X
CONTBUS_A TCC/XTC A to shelf Slot communication failure
CONTBUS_B TCC/XTC B to shelf Slot communication failure
CONTBUS_IO_A Peer to Peer Slot communication failure
CONTBUS_IO_B Peer to Peer Slot communication failure
CONTCOM Internal hardware - Control Equipment - Control Communications
equipment failure
CONTEQPT Internal hardware - Control Equipment failure
CONTR Internal hardware - Control Equipment - Control processor failure
COPY-IOSCFG Copying IOS config file
CTNEQPT Internal hardware - Interconnection Equipment failure
CTNEQPT-PBXPROT Failure of the main payload between the protect XC/XCVT/XC10G
card in Slot 10 and the reporting I/O card in Slot X
CTNEQPT-PBXWORK Failure of the main payload bus between the active XC/XCVT/XC10G
card in Slot 8 and the reporting I/O card in Slot X
CTNEQPT-PBPROT Interconnection Equipment Failure - Protect XC Payload Bus
CTNEQPT-PBWORK Interconnection Equipment Failure - Working XC Payload Bus
DATAFLT Internal Error - Software Fault - Data integrity fault
DS3-MISM DS3 Frame Format Mismatch
E-W-MISMATCH Procedural Error - Mis-connect East/West Direction
EHIBATVG-A/B Extreme High Voltage - Battery A or Battery B
ELWBATVG-A/B Extreme Low Voltage - Battery A or Battery B
EOC Embedded Operations Channel (Section DCC) failure
EOC-DOWN Embedded Operations Channel (Section DCC) failure
EQPT Internal hardware - Critical alarm caused by equipment failure
EQPT-FAIL Equipment failure - Board Failure
EQPT-MAC Equipment failure - Medium Access Control
EQPT-MISS Replaceable Equipment/Unit is Missing
EQPT-RXLOCK Equipment Rx Locked
EQPT-SQUELCHED Equipment Squelched
EQPT-TXLOCK Equipment Tx Locked
ERROR-CONFIG Error in Startup Config
ESW External error - Excessive Switching
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-50
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
EXCCOL External failure - Incoming - Excess collisions on the LAN
EXERCISE-RING- FAIL Exercise Ring Failed
EXERCISE-RING-REQ Exercise Ring
EXERCISE-SPAN-FAIL Exercise Span Failed
EXERCISE-SPAN-REQ Exercise Span
EXERCISING-RING Exercise Ring Completed
EXERCISING-SPAN Exercise Span Completed
EXT Failure detected External to the NE
EXTERR External Error
EXTR-DROP BLSR Extra Traffic Dropped
EXTRA-TRAF-PREEMPT Extra Traffic preempted
FA Internal hardware - Power failure - Fuse Alarm
FAC External failure - Incoming - Facility, critical alarm caused by DS3
facility failure
FACTERM Internal hardware - Facility Termination equipment failure
FAILTORLS Internal hardware - Failure To Release from protection
FAILTOSW Internal hardware - Failure To Switch to protection
FAILTOSW-HO Failure to switch to protection - High Order Path
FAILTOSW-LO Failure to switch to protection - Low Order Path
FAILTOSW-PATH Failure to switch from the working path to the protection path on an
UPSR
FAILTOSWR Failure to Switch to Protection in a Ring
FAILTOSWS Failure to Switch to Protection in a Span
FAN Fan Tray failure
FANDEGRADE Partial Failure of cooling fan tray
FE-AIS Far-end DS3 node is reporting an AIS
FE-DS1-MULTLOS Multiple inputs detect a loss on the far-end
FE-DS1-NSA Non-service affecting failure detected from the far-end DS1
FE-DS1-SA Service affecting failure detected from the far-end DS1
FE-DS1-SNGLLOS One of the DS1 inputs on the far-end detects a LOS
FE-DS3-NSA Non-service affecting failure detected from the far-end DS3
FE-DS3-SA Service affecting failure detected from the far-end DS3
FE-EQPT-NSA Non-service affecting equipment failure is detected from the far-end
DS3
FE-EXERCISING-RING Far End Exercise Ring
FE-EXERCISING-SPAN Far End Exercise Span
FE-FRCDWKSWPR-RING Working facility forced to switch to protection unit - Ring Far end
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-51
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
FE-FRCDWKSWPR-SPAN Working facility forced to switch to protection unit - Span Far end
FE-IDLE Far end node detects an idle DS3 signal
FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-ALL Far end LockOut All Protection Channels of the network
FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-RING Far End Lockout Of Protection - Ring
FE-LOCKOUTOFPR-SPAN Far End Lockout Of Protection - Span
FE-LOCKOUTOFWK-RING Far End Lockout Of Working - Ring
FE-LOCKOUTOFWK-SPAN Far End Lockout Of Working - Span
FE-LOF Far end node reports a DS3 loss of frame
FE-LOS Far end node reports a DS3 loss of signal
FE-MANWKSWPR-RING Far end Manual Ring Switching command is activated
FE-MANWKSWPR-SPAN Far end Manual Span Switching command is activated
FE-SD-RING Far end detected SD on Working channel and issued a Ring Switch
FE-SD-SPAN Far end detected SD on Working channel and issued a Span Switch
FE-SDPRLF Far end detected SD on Protection Channel
FE-SF-RING Far end detected SF on Working channel and issued a Ring Switch
FE-SF-SPAN Far end detected SF on Working channel and issued a Span Switch
FEBE External failure - Incoming - Far End Block Error
FEC-UNC-WORD FEC Uncorrected Word
FEPRLF External failure - Incoming - Automatic Protection Switching
Channel - Far End Protection Line Failure
FIBERTEMP-FAIL Fiber High Temperature - Failure
FORCED-REQ Forced switch request on facility/equipment
FORCED-REQ-RING Forced switch request on a Ring
FORCED-REQ-SPAN Forced switch request on a Span
FRCDWKSWBK Recovery action - Working facility/equipment forced to switch back
to working
FRCDWKSWPR Recovery action - Working facility/equipment forced to switch to
protection unit
FRCDWKSWPR-PATH Recovery action - Working facility/equipment forced to switch to
protection unit - Path
FRCWKBK-R Working facility/equipment forced to switch back to working - Ring
FRCWKBK-S Working facility/equipment forced to switch back to working - Span
FRCWKPR-R Working facility/equipment forced to switch to protection unit - Ring
FRCWKPR-S Working facility/equipment forced to switch to protection unit - Span
FRNGSYNC Free Running Synchronization mode
FSTSYNC Fast Start synchronization mode
FULLPASSTHR-BI Bi-direction Full Pass Through is active
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-52
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
FULLPASSTHR-UNI Uni-direction Full Pass Through is active
GAIN-HDEG Gain not reached - High Degrade
GAIN-HFAIL Gain not reached - High Failure
GAIN-LDEG Gain not reached - Low Degrade
GAIN-LFAIL Gain not reached - High Degrade
GCC-EOC GCC Termination Failure
HI-LASERBIAS Laser Bias High Threshold
HI-LASERPELTIER Laser Peltier High Threshold
HI-LASERTEMP Laser Temperature High Threshold
HI-RXPOWER Receive Power High Threshold
HI-TXPOWER Transmit Power High Threshold
HI-XCVRVOLT Transceiver Voltage High Threshold
HITEMP Internal hardware - Equipment failure - High temperature
HLDOVRSYNC Holdover synchronization mode
IAE-SM Incoming Alignment Error - Section Monitor Point
IMPROPRMVL Procedural Error - Improper Removal
INC Incoming failure condition
INC-ISD Incoming failure condition - Idle Signal Path
INHMSG ALM/EVT Messages Suppressed for object & sub-objects
INHMSG-DBCHG DBCHG Messages Suppressed for entire shelf
INHMSG-PMREPT PM report message inhibited for the TL1 session
INHSWPR Inhibit switch to protect request on equipment
INHSWWKG Inhibit switch to working request on equipment
INIT Recovery action - Initialization initiated
INT Internal hardware fault or failure
INTER-RING-STARTUP Far end LockOut All Protection Channels of the network
INTERR Error Internal to the NE Detected
INTMSGERR One or more ALM/EVT/DBCHG messages lost
INTRUSION Security: invalid login with user-ID
INTSFT Internal Error - Software Fault or failure
INVMACADR Equipment failure - Invalid MAC Address
KB_PASSTHR K-Byte Pass Through is active
LANOVERFLOW Traffic storm on LAN. LAN temporarily disabled
LASERBIAS-DEG Laser BIAS - Degrade
LASERBIAS-FAIL Laser BIAS - Failure
LASEREOL Laser Approaching End Of Life
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-53
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
LASERTEMP-FAIL Laser High Temperature - Failure
LCK-PM Locked Defect - Path Monitor Point
LKOUTPR-R Lockout of Protection - Ring
LKOUTPR-S Lockout of Protection - Span
LKOUTWK-R Lockout of working - Ring
LKOUTWK-S Lockout of working - Span
LMP-HELLODOWN LMP Hello FSM on Control Channel Down
LMP-NDFAIL LMP Neighbor Discovery has failed
LO-LASERBIAS Laser Bias Low Threshold
LO-LASERPELTIER Laser Peltier Low Threshold
LO-LASERTEMP Laser Temperature Low Threshold
LO-RXPOWER Receive Power Low Threshold
LO-TXPOWER Transmit Power Low Threshold
LO-XCVRVOLT Transceiver Voltage Low Threshold
LOC Loss of Fiber Continuity
LOCKOUT-REQ Lockout switch request on facility/equipment
LOCKOUT-REQ-RING Lockout switch request on a Ring
LOCKOUT-REQ-SPAN Lockout switch request on a Span
LOCKOUTOFPR Recovery action - Lockout of Protection
LOCKOUTOFPR-ALL Far end LockOut All Protection Channels of the network
LOCKOUTOFPR-PATH Recovery action - Lockout of Protection - Path
LOCKOUTOFWK Recovery action - Lockout of working
LOF External failure - Incoming - Loss of Frame
LOF-SM Loss of Frame - Section Monitor Point
LOM-SM Loss of Multi-Frame - Section Monitor Point
LOP External failure - Incoming - Loss of Pointer
LOP-P External failure - Incoming - Loss of Pointer - Path
LOP-V Loss of pointer at the VT level
LOS External failure - Incoming - Loss of Signal
LOS-ABBX VIC loss of audio base band channel X signal
LOS-AFM VIC loss of Audio FM signal
LOS-VBB VIC loss of Video Base Band Signal
LOS-VIF Video Interface Card Loss of Video IF signal
LPBK Loopback
LPBKCRS Cross-connect loopback
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-54
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
LPBKDS1FEAC DS1 loopback signal is received from the far-end due to a Far-End
Alarm and Control (FEAC) command
LPBKDS1FEAC-CMD DS1 loopback command sent by the ONS 15454 to the far-end
equipment
LPBKDS3FEAC DS3 loopback signal is received from the far-end due to a Far-End
Alarm and Control (FEAC) command
LPBKDS3FEAC-CMD DS3 loopback command sent by the ONS 15454 to the far-end
equipment
LPBKFACILITY Loopback, Facility
LPBKM13 Loopback, Facility
LPBKM13-CMD DS1 Loopback due to Far End Command
LPBKNETWORK DS2 Loopback Command sent to Far End
LPBKTERMINAL Loopback, Terminal
MAN Manually caused abnormal condition
MAN-REQ Manual Switch Request on facility/equipment
MANRESET Recovery action - Manual system Reset
MANSWTOFIFTH Recovery action - Manual synchronization Switch To Fifth reference
MANSWTOFOURTH Recovery action - Manual synchronization Switch To Fourth reference
MANSWTOINT Recovery action - Manual synchronization switch to internal clock
MANSWTOPRI Recovery action - Manual synchronization Switch To Primary
reference
MANSWTOSEC Recovery action - Manual synchronization Switch To Second
reference
MANSWTOSIXTH Recovery action - Manual synchronization Switch To Sixth reference
MANSWTOTHIRD Recovery action - Manual synchronization Switch To Third reference
MANUAL-REQ-RING Manual switch request on a Ring
MANUAL-REQ-SPAN Manual switch request on a Span
MANWKBK-R Manual Switch of working facility/equipment to protection - Ring
MANWKBK-S Manual Switch of working facility/equipment to protection - Span
MANWKPR-R Manual Switch of Working facility/equipment to Protection unit -Ring
MANWKPR-S Manual Switch of Working facility/equipment to Protection unit
-Span
MANWKSWBK Recovery action - Manual Switch of working facility/equipment to
protection
MANWKSWPR Recovery action - Manual Switch of Working facility/equipment to
Protection unit
MANWKSWPR-PATH Manual Switch of working facility/equipment to Protection - Path
MEA Internal error - Mismatch of Equipment and Attributes
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-55
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
MEM-GONE Software operations exceed the memory capacity of the TCC/XTC
card
MEM-LOW Data generated by software operations is close to exceeding the
memory capacity of the TCC/XTC card
MFGMEM Manufacturing Data Memory (EEPROM) Failure
NEW-ROOT NewRoot trap in BRIDGE-MIB
NORMAL Normal condition. This condition type is used by the NE to report the
returning to normal from a previous off-normal condition
OCI-PM Open Connectivity Indicator - Path Monitor Point
OG External failure - Outgoing failure condition
OOF External failure - Incoming - Out of Frame
OPWR-HDEG Optical Power - High Degrade
OPWR-HFAIL Optical Power - High Failure
OPWR-LDEG Optical Power - Low Degrade
OPWR-LFAIL Optical Power - Low Failure
PATHSEL External failure - Incoming - Path Selector inability to switch to a
valid signal
PDI External failure - Incoming - Signal Label Mismatch Failure - Payload
Defect Indication
PDI-P External failure - Incoming - Signal Label Mismatch Failure - Payload
Defect Indication - Path
PEER-MISM Peer State Mismatch
PEER-NORESPONSE Peer card not responding
PLM-P External failure - Incoming - Signal Label Mismatch Failure - Payload
Label Mismatch - Path
PLM-V Content of the V5 byte in the SONET overhead is inconsistent or
invalid
PLUG-IN Internal hardware - Equipment unit plug-in
PM-TCA Performance Monitoring - Threshold Crossing Alert
PRC-DUPID Procedural Error - Duplicate Node ID
PRCDRERR Procedural Error
PROGFLT Internal Error - Software Fault - Program failure
PROTNA Protection unit not available
PS Occurrence of a protection switching event
PTIM Payload Type Identifier Mismatch
PWR Internal hardware - Power failure (detected internal to NE)
PWR-A Internal hardware - Power failure (detected internal to NE) on slot 7
PWR-B Internal hardware - Power failure (detected internal to NE) on slot 11
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-56
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
PWRRESTART Recovery action - Powerfail Restart
RAI External failure - Incoming - Remote Alarm Indication
RCVR Internal hardware - Facility Termination equipment - Receiver failure
RCVR-MISS Facility termination equipment detects a missing receive cable on the
DS1 port or a possible mismatch of backplane equipment
RCVRY Recovery or service protection action has been initiated
RDI-L External failure - Outgoing - Remote Defect Indication - Line
RDI-P External failure - Outgoing - Remote Defect Indication - Path
RFI External failure - Incoming - Remote Failure Indication
RFI-L External failure - Incoming - Remote Failure Indication - Line
RFI-P External failure - Incoming - Remote Failure Indication - Path
RFI-V Upstream failure has occurred at the VT layer
RFLOWCTL Receive pause frames Threshold crossing alert
RING-MISMATCH Procedural Error - Mis-connected Ring
RING-SEGMENT Ring Is Segmented
RING-SW-EAST Ring switch is active on the East side
RING-SW-WEST Ring switch is active on the West side
RMON-ALARM An RMON Alarm
RMON-RESET RMON histories and alarms have been reset due to chipset reboot
ROVERSUB Receive packets dropped - internal congestion Threshold crossing
alert
RSVP-HELLODOWN RSVP Hello FSM to Neighbor down
SD Facility has passed BER Threshold for Signal Degrade
SD-L BER threshold exceeded for Signal Degrade - Line
SD-P BER threshold exceeded for Signal Degrade - Path
SDBER-EXCEED-HO BER Threshold exceeded for Signal Degrade - High Order
SDBER-EXCEED-LO BER Threshold exceeded for Signal Degrade - Low Order Path
SEF External failure - Incoming - Severely Errored Frame
SF Facility has passed BER threshold for Signal Failure
SF-L BER Threshold exceeded for Signal Failure - Line
SF-P BER Threshold exceeded for Signal Failure - Path
SFBER-EXCEED-HO BER Threshold exceeded for Signal Failure - High Order Path
SFBER-EXCEED-LO BER Threshold exceeded for Signal Failure - Low Order Path
SFP-MISMATCH Pluggable Port Missing
SFP-MISSING Pluggable Port Missing
SFP-SECURITYCODE Pluggable Port Security Code Missing
SFTWDOWN Recovery action - Software download in progress
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-57
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
SFTWDOWN-FAIL Software Download Failed
SHUTTER-FAIL Problem in Shutter - Failure
SLMF External failure - Incoming - Signal Label Mismatch Failures -
SONET
SNTP-HOST SNTP host not alive condition
SPAN-SW-EAST Span switch is active on the East side
SPAN-SW-WEST Span switch is active on the West side
SQUELCH Ring is isolated into two or more segments
SQUELCH-PATH Squelching - Path level
SSM-DUS Synchronization Status Messaging - Do Not Use for Synchronization
SSM-FAIL Synchronization Status Messaging - Failed
SSM-OFF Synchronization Status Messaging - Off
SSM-PRC G811 Primary Reference Clock traceable
SSM-PRS Synchronization Status Messaging - Primary reference source -
Stratum 1
SSM-RES Synchronization Status Messaging - Reserved - quality level set by
user
SSM-SMC Synchronization Status Messaging - SONET minimum clock
SSM-ST2 Synchronization Status Messaging - Stratum 2
SSM-ST3 Synchronization Status Messaging - Stratum 3
SSM-ST3E Synchronization Status Messaging - Stratum 3E
SSM-ST4 Synchronization Status Messaging - Stratum 4
SSM-STU Synchronization Status Messaging - Synchronized traceability
unknown
SSM-TNC Synchronization Status Messaging - Transit Node Clock traceable
SWMTXMOD Switching Matrix Module Failure
SWTOFIFTH Recovery action - Synchronization Switch To Fifth reference
SWTOFOURTH Recovery action - Synchronization Switch To Fourth reference
SWTOINT Recovery action - Synchronization Switch To Internal clock
SWTOPRI Recovery action - Synchronization Switch To Primary reference
SWTOSEC Recovery action - Synchronization Switch To Second refernce
SWTOSIXTH Recovery action - Synchronization Switch To Sixth reference
SWTOTHIRD Recovery action - Synchronization Switch To Third refernce
SYNC External failure - Incoming - Loss of timing on synchronization link
SYNC-FREQ Synchronization Reference Frequency Out Of Bounds
SYNCCLK Internal hardware - Synchronization unit failure
SYNCEQPT Internal hardware - Synchronization switching Equipment failure
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-58
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
SYNCFIFTH External failure - Incoming - Loss of timing on fifth synchronization
link
SYNCFOURTH External failure - Incoming - Loss of timing on fourth synchronization
link
SYNCOOS External failure - Incoming - Loss of timing on all specified
synchronization links
SYNCPRI External failure - Incoming - Loss of timing on primary
synchronization link
SYNCSEC External failure - Incoming - Loss of timing on secondary
synchronization link
SYNCSIXTH External failure - Incoming - Loss of timing on sixth synchronization
link
SYNCTHIRD External failure - Incoming - Loss of timing on third synchronization
link
SYSBOOT Activation of new software
T-UIDAGE Security: user-ID has expired
TFLOWCTL Transmit pause frames Threshold crossing alert
TIM-P SONET Trace Identifier message defect - Path
TOP-CHANGE Topology Change trap in BRIDGE-MIB
TOVERSUB Transmit packets dropped - internal congestion Threshold crossing
alert
TPTFAIL Transport Layer Failure
TRMT Internal hardware - Facility Termination equipment - Transmit failure
TRMT-MISS Facility termination equipment detects a missing transmit cable on the
DS1 port or a possible mismatch of backplane equipment
TSI Internal hardware - Interconnection Equipment - Time slot
interchange equipment failure
TUNDERRUN Buffer Underrun Alarm
UNAUTHCKT Unauthorized incoming signaling request to create circuit
UNEQ-P External failure - Incoming - Signal Label Mismatch Failure -
Unequipped - Path
UNEQ-V VT is receiving an unequipped signal
UNPLUG Internal hardware - Equipment unit un-plug
VOA-HDEG VOA Attenuation - High Degrade
VOA-HFAIL VOA Attenuation - High Failure
VOA-LDEG VOA Attenuation - Low Degrade
VOA-LFAIL VOA Attenuation - Low Failure
WATM-TO Internal Error - Watchdog Timer Timeout
WKGMEM Internal hardware - Control Equipment - Working memory failure
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
4-59
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.25 CONT_MODE
Current state of environmental control
4.5.26 CONTTYPE
The Environmental control types as defined by Telcordia GR-833-CORE, Issue 2, November 1996,
Appendix G.
WKSWBK Recovery action - Working facility/equipment switched back to
working
WKSWPR Recovery action - Working facility/equipment switched to protection
unit
WRMRESTART Recovery action - Warm Restart
WTR Wait To Restore
WTR-RING Recovery action - SONET ring is in Wait To Restore state
WTR-SPAN Recovery action - SONET span is in Wait To Restore state
Table 4-74 CONDITION Values (continued)
CONDITION Values Description
Table 4-75 CONT_MODE Values
CONT_MODE Values Description
NA Indicates Not applicable (i.e., duration is MNTRY)
OPR Indicates that the environment control state is CLOSE
RLS Indicates that the environment control state is OPEN
Table 4-76 CONTTYPE Values
CONTTYPE Values Description
AIRCOND Air conditioning
ENGINE Engine
FAN Fan
GEN Generator
HEAT Heat
LIGHT Light
MISC Miscellaneous
SPKLR Sprinkler
4-60
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.27 CREATION_TYPE
The Optical Link creation type.
4.5.28 CRS_TYPE
Indicates the cross-connection type
4.5.29 DATARATE
Data Rate
4.5.30 DIRECTION
Transmit and receive directions
Table 4-77 CREATION_TYPE Values
CREATION_TYPE Values Description
AUTO Automatically created by NE
PROV Provisioned by user
Table 4-78 CRS_TYPE Values
CRS_TYPE Values Description
STS Indicates all the STS cross-connections
VT Indicates all the VT1 cross-connections
Table 4-79 DATARATE Values
DATARATE Values Description
FC Fiber Channel
GIG_E Gigabit Ethernet
PASS_THRU Pass thru
Table 4-80 DIRECTION Values
DIRECTION Values Description
BTH Both transmit and receive directions
RCV Receive direction only
TRMT Transmit direction only
4-61
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.31 DIRN
Specifies the discriminating level for the requested monitored parameter
4.5.32 DL_TYPE
Indicates software download type
4.5.33 DS_LINE_CODE
DS123 Line Code
4.5.34 DS_LINE_TYPE
DS123 Line type
Table 4-81 DIRN Values
DIRN Values Description
DN Monitored parameter with values equal to or greater than the level of LEV
will be reported
UP Monitored parameter with values equal to or less than the value of LEV will
be reported
Table 4-82 DL_TYPE Values
DL_TYPE Values Description
ACT Indicates to activate to a newer software load during the software download
RVRT Indicates to revert to an older software load during software download
Table 4-83 DS_LINE_CODE Values
DS_LINE_CODE Values Description
B3ZS Bipolar with Three-Zero Substitution
Table 4-84 DS_LINE_TYPE Values
DS_LINE_TYPE Values Description
C-BIT C-BIT line type applies to DS3XM and DS3E card
M13 M23 line type applies to DS3XM and DS3E card
UNFRAMED Line Type is unframed. The old DS3 (L3M) and DS3CR cards can only
run in unframed mode.
4-62
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.35 DURATION
Duration
4.5.36 E_LBO
Electrical signal line buildout
4.5.37 ENV_ALM
Environmental alarm types as defined by Telcordia GR-833-CORE, Issue 2, November 1996,
Appendix F.
Table 4-85 DURATION Values
DURATION Values Description
CONTS Continuous duration
MNTRY Momentary duration
Table 4-86 E_LBO Values
E_LBO Values Description
0-225 Electrical signal buildout range is 0-225
226-450 Electrical signal buildout range is 226-450
Table 4-87 ENV_ALM Values
ENV_ALM Values Description
AIRCOMPR Air compressor failure
AIRCOND Air conditioning failure
AIRDRYR Air dryer failure
BATDSCHRG Battery discharging
BATTERY Battery failure
CLFAN Cooling fan failure
CPMAJOR Centralized power major failure
CPMINOR Centralized power minor failure
ENGINE Engine failure
ENGOPRG Engine operating
EXPLGS Explosive gas
FIRDETR Fire detector failure
FIRE Fire
FLOOD Flood
FUSE Fuse failure
4-63
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.38 EQPT_TYPE
Identifies the type of equipment being provisioned into a slot
GEN Generator failure
HIAIR High airflow
HIHUM High humidity
HITEMP High temperature
HIWTR High water
INTRUDER Intrusion
LWBATVG Low battery voltage
LWFUEL Low fuel
LWHUM Low humidity
LWPRES Low cable pressure
LWTEMP Low temperature
LWWTR Low water
MISC Miscellaneous
OPENDR Open door
POWER Commercial power failure
PUMP Pump failure
PWR-48 48 Volt power supply failure
RECT Rectifier failure
RECTHI Rectifier high voltage
RECTLO Rectifier low voltage
SMOKE Smoke
TOXICGAS Toxic gas
VENTN Ventilation system failure
Table 4-87 ENV_ALM Values (continued)
ENV_ALM Values Description
Table 4-88 EQPT_TYPE Values
EQPT_TYPE Values Description
AD-1B Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 1 Band Filter
AD-1C Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 1 Channel Filter
AD-2C Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 2 Channels Filter
AD-4B Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 4 Bands Filter
AD-4C Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 4 Channels Filter
4-64
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
AIC The Alarm Interface Controller Card is an optional card which expands
system management capabilities for the customer defined alarm I/O and
orderwire functionality
AICI The AICI card
AIP The Alarm Indicator Panel
ALM-PWR Alarm Power
BP The Backplane of the NE
CRFT-TMG Craft Timing
DCC The Data Communications Channel
DMX-32 Optical De/Multiplexed (DMX) 32 Channels
DS1-14 A 14 port interface card supporting DS1 facilities
DS1N-14 A 14 port interface card supporting DS1 facilities
DS3-12 A 12 port interface card supporting DS3 facilities
DS3-3 A 3 port interface card supporting DS3 facilities
DS3ATM-12 A 12 port interface card supporting DS3 ATM facilities
DS3CR-12 Cost reduced DS3
DS3E-12 A 12 port interface card supporting DS3E facilities
DS3NE-12 A 12 port interface card supporting DS3E facilities
DS3N-12 A 12 port interface card supporting DS3 facilities
DS3XM-6 An interface card that converts six framed DS-3 network connections to
28x6 or 168 VT1.5s
E1000T-2 A 2 port interface card supporting 1000 Base T Ethernet facilities
E100T-12 A 12 port interface card supporting 100 Base T Ethernet facilities
E100T-4 A four port interface card supporting 100 Base T Ethernet facilities.
EC1-12 A 12 port interface card supporting EC1 facilities
FTA The Fan Tray of the NE
FTA1 The Fan Tray 1 of the NE
FTA2 The Fan Tray 2 of the NE
G1000-4 A four port G1000 card
MIC-28-3-A ONS 15327 MIC card A
MIC-28-3-B ONS 15327 MIC card B
MIC-EXT ONS 15327 MIC card
MIC-GEN ONS 15327 MIC card
MUX-32 Optical Multiplexed (MUX) 32 Channels
MXP-2.5G-10G 10G (4 * 2.5G) Muxponder Card
OC12 An interface card that supports one or more OC-12 (622Mbs) optical
facilities
Table 4-88 EQPT_TYPE Values (continued)
EQPT_TYPE Values Description
4-65
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
OC12-327 ONS 15327 OC12 card
OC12-4 A four port OC12 card
OC12-IR-1 An interface card that supports one intermediate range OC-12 (622Mbs)
optical facilities
OC12-LR-1 An interface card that supports one long range OC-12 (622Mbs) optical
facilities
OC12-SR-1 An interface card that supports one short range OC-12 (622Mbs) optical
facilities
OC192-LR-1 An interface card that supports one or more OC-192 optical facilities
OC3 An interface card that supports multiple OC-3 (155Mbs) optical facilities
OC3-327 ONS 15327 OC3 card
OC3-IR-4 An interface card that supports four intermediate range OC-3 (155Mbs)
optical facilities
OC3-SR-4 An interface card that supports four short range OC-3 (155Mbs) optical
facilities
OC3ATM-IR-6 An interface card that supports six intermediate range OC-3 (155Mbs) ATM
optical fibers
OC3IR-STM1SH-
1310-8
An OC3 card which has 8 ports over the lower speed slot of the ONS 15454
with XC10G/192
OC3POS-SR-4 An interface card that supports four short range OC-3 (155Mbs) POS
optical facilities
OC48 An interface card that supports one or more OC-48 (10Gbs) optical facilities
OC48-327 ONS 15327 OC48 card
OC48-AS-1 An interface card that supports one short range OC-48 (10Gbs) optical
facilities that can be provisioned in any I/O slot
OC48-ELR-1 An interface card that supports one short range OC-48 (2.5Gbs) optical
facility
OC48-IR-1 An interface card that supports one intermediate range OC-48 (10Gbs)
optical facility
OC48-LR-1 An interface card that supports one long range OC-48 (10Gbs) optical
facility
OC48-SR-1 An interface card that supports one short range OC-48 (10Gbs) optical
facilities
OPT-BST Optical Booster Amplifier
OPT-PRE Optical Pre-Amplifier
OSC-CSM Optical Service Channel (OSC) with Combiner/Separator Module (SCM)
OSCM Optical Service Channel (OSC) Module
TCC The Timing Communication and Control card
TXP-MR-10G 10G Multirate Transponder Card
XC A Cross-connect card
Table 4-88 EQPT_TYPE Values (continued)
EQPT_TYPE Values Description
4-66
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.39 EQUIP
Indicates the presence of a plug-in unit
4.5.40 EQUIPMENT_TYPE
Equipment type
XC-VT A Cross-Connect card
XC10G A Cross-Connect card
XTC ONS 15327 XTC card
XTC-DS1-14 ONS 15327 XTC DS1-14 card
XTC-DS1-28 ONS 15327 XTC DS1-28 card
XTC-DS1-56 ONS 15327 XTC DS1-56 card
XTC-DS3-3 ONS 15327 XTC DS3-3 card
Table 4-88 EQPT_TYPE Values (continued)
EQPT_TYPE Values Description
Table 4-89 EQUIP Values
EQUIP Values Description
EQUIP The unit is Equipped - present
UNEQUIP The unit is Unequipped - absent
Table 4-90 EQUIPMENT_TYPE Values
EQUIPMENT_TYPE Values Description
AD-1B Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 1 Band Filter
AD-1C Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 1 Channel Filter
AD-2C Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 2 Channels Filter
AD-4B Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 4 Bands Filter
AD-4C Optical Add/Drop Multiplexed (OADM) 4 Channels Filter
AIC AIC card
AICI AICI card
DS1 DS1 card
DS1N DS1N card
DS3 DS3 card
DS3E DS3E card
DS3I DS3I Card
DS3IN DS3IN Card
DS3N DS3N card
4-67
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.41 ETHER_DUPLEX
Duplex mode
DS3NE DS3NE card
DS3XM DS3XM card
E1000T E1000T card
E100T E100T card
EC1 EC1 card
G1000-2 A two port G1000 card (ONS 15327)
G1000-4 A four port G1000 card (ONS 15454)
MIC ONS 15327 MIC card
MIC-EXT ONS 15327 XC-EXT card
ML1000-2 2-Port GigE card
ML100T-12 12-Port FSTE card
MUX-32 Optical Multiplexed (MUX) 32 Channels
MXP-2.5G-10G 10G (4 * 2.5G) Muxponder Card
OC3 OC3 card
OC12 OC12 card
OC12-4 A four port OC12 card
OC48 OC48 card
OC192 OC192 card
OPT-BST Optical Booster Amplifier
OPT-PRE Optical Pre-Amplifier
OSC-CSM Optical Service Channel (OSC) with Combiner/Separator Module
(SCM)
OSCM Optical Service Channel (OSC) Module
TCC TCC card
TXP-MR-10G 10G Multirate Transponder Card
XC XC card
XC10G XC10G card
XCVT XCVT card
XTC ONS 15327 XTC card
Table 4-90 EQUIPMENT_TYPE Values (continued)
EQUIPMENT_TYPE Values Description
4-68
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.42 ETHER_SPEED
Ethernet speed
4.5.43 EXP
Indicates whether the user’s password is about to expire.
4.5.44 EXT_RING
Indicates if the ring supports the extended K1/K2/K3 protocol
4.5.45 FIBER_TYPE
The type of the system (fiber) connected to a port.
Table 4-91 ETHER_DUPLEX Values
ETHER_DUPLEX Values Description
AUTO Auto mode
FULL Full mode
HALF Half mode
Table 4-92 ETHER_SPEED Values
ETHER_SPEED Values Description
100_MBPS 100 Mbps
10_GBPS 10 Gbps
10_MBPS 10 Mbps
1_GBPS 1 Gbps
AUTO Auto
Table 4-93 EXP Values
EXP Values Description
NO The password is not about to expire.
YES The password is about to expire.
Table 4-94 EXT_RING Values
EXT_RING Values Description
N Indicates the Ring does not support the extended K1/K2/K3 protocol
Y Indicates the Ring does support the extended K1/K2/K3 protocol
4-69
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.46 FLOW
Indicates the type of flow control that has been negotiated for an Ethernet port
4.5.47 FRAME_FORMAT
The frame format for a T1 port
4.5.48 GCCRATE
The data rate of the GCC traffic
4.5.49 HEATER_STATUS
Heater status list.
Table 4-95 FIBER_TYPE Values
FIBER_TYPE Values Description
SMF-28 SMF-28 system type
Tabl e 4 -9 6 F LO W Va l ue s
FLOW Values Description
ASYMMETRIC Asymmetric flow control
ASYMMETRIC_LOCAL Asymmetric local flow control
NONE No flow control
SYMMETRIC Symmetric flow control
Table 4-97 FRAME_FORMAT Values
FRAME_FORMAT Values Description
D4 Frame format is D4
ESF Frame format is ESF
UNFRAMED Frame format is unframed
Table 4-98 GCCRATE Values
GCCRATE Values Description
192K 192 Kbps
576K 576 Kbps
4-70
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.50 INH_MODE
Indicates whether the function is inhibited
4.5.51 LASER_STATUS
Defines the laser status
4.5.52 LINE_BUILDOUT
Line buildout
4.5.53 LINE_CODE
Line code
Table 4-99 HEATER_STATUS Values
HEATER_STATUS Values Description
OFF The heater is off
ON The heater is on
Table 4-100 INH_MODE Values
INH_MODE Values Description
ALW Function is allowed
INH Function is inhibited
Table 4-101 LASER_STATUS Values
LASER_STATUS Values Description
APR The Laser is switched on but is working Automatic Power Reduction
OFF The Laser is switched off
ON The Laser is switched on
Table 4-102 LINE_BUILDOUT Values
LINE_BUILDOUT Values Description
0-131 Line buildout range is 0-131
132-262 Line buildout range is 132-262
263-393 Line buildout range is 263-393
394-524 Line buildout range is 394-524
525-655 Line buildout range is 525-655
4-71
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.54 LOCATION
Identifies the location where the action is to take place
4.5.55 LPBK_TYPE
Indicates the type of loopback that is to be operated or released
4.5.56 MFS_TYPE
Indicates the maximum frame size used by an Ethernet card
Table 4-103 LINE_CODE Values
LINE_CODE Values Description
AMI Line code value is AMI
B8ZS Line code value is B8ZS (Bipolar with Three-Zero Substitution)
Table 4-104 LOCATION Values
LOCATION Values Description
FEND Action occurs on the Far End of the facility
NEND Action occurs on the Near End of the facility
Table 4-105 LPBK_TYPE Values
LPBK_TYPE Values Description
CRS A path level loopback which is established at the cross-connect matrix
level (the XC card). An STS level cross-connect loopback causes an
AIS-P to be sent on the outgoing direction of transmission
FACILITY A type of loopback that connects the incoming received signal
immediately following the optical-to-electrical conversion (after
descrambling) to the associated transmitter in the return direction
TERMINAL A loopback that connects the signal that is about to be transmitted (after
scrambling but before the electrical-to-optical conversion) is connected to
the associated, incoming receiver
Table 4-106 MFS_TYPE Values
MFS_TYPE Values Description
1548 Normal frame size
JUMBO Jumbo frame size
4-72
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.57 MOD2
Line/Path Modifier
4.5.58 MOD2_IO
Facility/Line Modifier
Table 4-107 MOD2 Values
MOD2 Values Description
CLNT Client facility for MXP/TXP cards
DS1 DS1 line of a DS3XM card
EC1 EC1 facility
G1000 G1000 Facility
OC3 OC3 facility
OC12 OC12 facility
OC48 OC48 facility
OC192 OC192 facility
OCH Optical channel
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OTS Optical Transport Section
STS1 STS1 path
STS3C STS3C path
STS6C STS6C path
STS9C STS9C path
STS12C STS12C path
STS48C STS48C path
STS192C STS192C path
T1 T1/DS1 facility/line
T3 T3/DS3 facility/line
VT1 VT1_5 path
Tabl e 4 -10 8 MO D 2 _I O Va l u es
MOD2_IO Values Description
CLNT Client facility for MXP/TXP cards
DS1 DS1 line of a DS3XM card
EC1 EC1 facility
G1000 G1000 facility
OC3 OC3 facility
4-73
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.59 MOD2ALM
Alarm type for certain generic TL1 commands
OC12 OC12 facility
OC48 OC48 facility
OC192 OC192 facility
OCH Optical channel facility for MXP/TXP cards
OMS Optical multiplexing section
OTS Optical Transport Section
T1 T1/DS1 facility
T3 T3/DS3 facility
Table 4-108 MOD2_IO Values (continued)
MOD2_IO Values Description
Table 4-109 MOD2ALM Values
MOD2ALM Values Description
CLNT Client facility for MXP/TXP cards
DS1 DS1 alarm
E100 E100 alarm
E1000 E1000 alarm
EC1 EC1 alarm
FSTE Fast Ethernet Port alarm
G1000 G1000 alarm
GIGE GIG Ethernet Port alarm
OC3 OC3 alarm
OC12 OC12 alarm
OC48 OC48 alarm
OC192 OC192 alarm
OCH Optical channel
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OTS Optical Transport Section
POS POS port alarm
STS1 STS alarm
STS3C STS alarm
STS6C STS alarm
STS9C STS alarm
STS12C STS alarm
4-74
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.60 MOD2B
Alarm type for certain generic TL1 commands
STS48C STS alarm
STS192C STS alarm
T1 T1 alarm
T3 T3 alarm
UDCDCC UDCDCC Alarm
UDCF UCDF Alarm
VT1 VT1 alarm
Table 4-109 MOD2ALM Values (continued)
MOD2ALM Values Description
Tabl e 4 -110 MO D 2 B Va l ue s
MOD2B Values Description
BITS BITS alarm
CLNT Client facility for MXP/TXP cards
COM Common alarm
DS1 DS1 alarm
E100 E100 alarm
E1000 E1000 alarm
EC1 EC1 alarm
ENV ENV alarm
EQPT EQPT alarm
FSTE FSTE alarm
G1000 G1000 alarm
GIGE GIGE alarm
MIC MIC alarm (ONS 15327)
MIC-EXT MIC-EXT Alarm (ONS 15327)
OC3 OC3 alarm
OC12 OC12 alarm
OC48 OC48 alarm
OC192 OC192 alarm
OCH Optical channel
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OTS Optical Transport Section
POS POS alarm
4-75
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.61 MOD2O
MXP/TXP facility types
4.5.62 MOD_PATH
STS/VT Path Modifier
STS1 STS alarm
STS3C STS alarm
STS6C STS alarm
STS9C STS alarm
STS12C STS alarm
STS24C STS alarm
STS48C STS alarm
STS192C STS Alarm
SYNCN SYNCN alarm
T1 T1 alarm
T3 T3 alarm
TCC TCC alarm
UCP UCP Alarm
VT1 VT alarm
XTC ONS 15327 XTC Alarm
Table 4-110 MOD2B Values (continued)
MOD2B Values Description
Tabl e 4 -111 MO D 2 O Va l u es
MOD2O Values Description
OCH Optical Channel
OMS Optical Multiplexer Section
OTS Optical Trace Section
Table 4-112 MOD_PATH Values
MOD_PATH Values Description
STS1 STS1 path
STS3C STS3C path
STS6C STS6C path
STS9C STS9C path
STS12C STS12C path
4-76
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.63 MOD_PORT
Move from MOD2_IO without DS1
4.5.64 MOD_TACC
Test Access Modifier
STS24C STS 24C path
STS48C STS48C path
STS192 STS192C path
VT1 VT1_5 path
Table 4-112 MOD_PATH Values (continued)
MOD_PATH Values Description
Table 4-113 MOD_PORT Values
MOD_PORT Values Description
EC1 EC1 port
G1000 G1000 port
OC3 OC3 port
OC12 OC12 port
OC48 OC48 port
OC192 OC192 port
T1 T1/DS1 port
T3 T3/DS3 port
Table 4-114 MOD_TACC Values
MOD_TACC Values Description
DS1 DS1 line of a DS3XM card
STS1 STS1 path
STS3C STS3C path
STS6C STS6C path
STS9C STS9C path
STS12C STS12C path
STS24C STS24C path
STS48C STS48C path
STS192C STS192C path
T1 T1/DS1 facility/line
4-77
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.65 MODULE_OP
Module operation mode
4.5.66 MSGTYPE
Type of trace message
T3 T3/DS3 facility/line
VT1 VT1_5 path
Table 4-114 MOD_TACC Values (continued)
MOD_TACC Values Description
Table 4-115 MOD_OP Values
MODULE_OP Values Description
CLR Clear switch operation mode
LOCKDX Lock duplex switch operation mode
LOCKPRT Lock switch to protection operation mode
LOCKWKG Lock switch to working operation mode
RST Reset operation mode
SWITCHDX Switch duplex operation mode
SWITCHPRT Switch to protection operation mode
SWITCHWKG Switch to working operation mode
UNLOCKDX Unlock duplex switch operation mode
UNLOCKPRT Unlock switch to protection operation mode
UNLOCKWKG Unlock switch to working operation mode
UPGRADE Upgrade operation mode
Table 4-116 MSGTYPE Values
MSGTYPE Values Description
EXPTRC Expected incoming Path trace message
INCTRC Incoming Path trace message
TRC Outgoing Path trace message
4-78
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.67 MUX_TYPE
BLSR Extension Byte
4.5.68 NOTIF_CODE
The 2-character Notification Code associated with an autonomous message
4.5.69 OCN_BLSR
Modifier used to differentiate the various levels of OC-N in BLSR
Table 4-117 MUX_TYPE Values
MUX_TYPE Values Description
E2 E2 Byte (orderwire)
F1 F1 Byte (user)
K3 K3 Byte
Z2 Z2 Byte
Table 4-118 NOTIF_CODE Values
NOTIF_CODE Values Description
CL The condition causing the alarm has Cleared
CR A Critical alarm
MJ A Major alarm
MN A Minor alarm
NA The condition is Not Alarmed
NR The alarm is not reported
Table 4-119 OCN_BLSR Values
OCN_BLSR Values Description
OC12 Optical Carrier level-12 (662Mbs)
OC48 Optical Carrier level-48 (2.4Gbs)
OC192 Optical Carrier level-192 (10Gbs)
4-79
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.70 OCN_MONTYPE
OCN monitor type
4.5.71 OCN_TYPE
Modifier used to differentiate the various levels of OC-N in the ENT/ED/DLT/RTRV commands
4.5.72 ON_OFF
Disable or Enable an attribute
Table 4-120 OCN_MONTYPE Values
OCN_MONTYPE Values Description
CVL Coding Violation - Line
ESL Errored Second - Line
PJNEG PPJC-PDET:Negative Pointer Justification
PJPOS PPJC-PFEN:Negative Pointer Justification
PSC Protection Switching Count
PSD Protection Switching Duration
SEFS Severely Errored Framing Seconds
UASL Unavailable Second -Line
Table 4-121 OCN_TYPE Values
OCN_TYPE Values Description
OC3 Optical Carrier level-3 (155Mbs)
OC12 Optical Carrier level-12 (622Mbs)
OC48 Optical Carrier level-48 (2.4Gbs)
OC192 Optical Carrier level-192 (10Gbs)
Table 4-122 ON_OFF Values
ON_OFF Values Description
N Disable the attribute
Y Enable the attribute
4-80
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.73 OPTICAL_BAND
Defines the Optical Band
4.5.74 OPTICAL_LINK_TYPE
The type of the Optical Link between two optical facilities
4.5.75 OPTICAL_MODE
The facility optical mode
Table 4-123 OPTICAL_BAND Values
OPTICAL_BAND Values Description
1530.33-1532.68 Band 1
1534.25-1536.61 Band 2
1538.19-1540.56 Band 3
1542.14-1544.53 Band 4
1546.12-1548.51 Band 5
1550.12-1552.52 Band 6
1554.13-1556.55 Band 7
1558.17-1560.61 Band 8
UNKNOWN The band is not yet configured/retrieved from unit
Table 4-124 OPTICAL_LINK_TYPE Values
OPTICAL_LINK_TYPE Values Description
ADD-DROP Link between two points that result in an add/drop connection from a
Drop point to an Add point
HITLESS Link between two OMS points that result in a hitless connection from a
Drop point to an Add point of a consecutive Band/Channel Filter
OTS Link between two OTS points
Table 4-125 OPTICAL_MODE Values
OPTICAL_MODE Values Description
SDH The SDH optical mode the European format
SONET The SONET optical mode the American format
4-81
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.76 OPTICAL_PORT_TYPE
Qualifies the optical port of a card
4.5.77 OPTICAL_WLEN
The Optical Wavelength
Table 4-126 OPTICAL_PORT_TYPE Values
OPTICAL_PORT_TYPE
Values Description
ADD The signal is added to the port
DROP The signal is dropped from the port
IN The signal has entered the card
IN-EXP Express channel that continues the signal from the previous card
OUT The signal exit from the card
OUT-EXP Express channel that continues the signal to the next card
Table 4-127 OPTICAL_WLEN Values
OPTICAL_WLEN Values Description
1530.33 Wavelength 1
1531.12 Wavelength 2
1531.90 Wavelength 3
1532.68 Wavelength 4
1534.25 Wavelength 5
1535.04 Wavelength 6
1535.82 Wavelength 7
1536.61 Wavelength 8
1538.19 Wavelength 9
1538.98 Wavelength 10
1539.77 Wavelength 11
1540.56 Wavelength 12
1542.14 Wavelength 13
1542.94 Wavelength 14
1543.73 Wavelength 15
1544.53 Wavelength 16
1546.12 Wavelength 17
1546.92 Wavelength 18
1547.72 Wavelength 19
4-82
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.78 OPTICS
The type of Gigabyte Ethernet optics being used
1548.51 Wavelength 20
1550.12 Wavelength 21
1550.92 Wavelength 22
1551.72 Wavelength 23
1552.52 Wavelength 24
1554.13 Wavelength 25
1554.94 Wavelength 26
1555.75 Wavelength 27
1556.55 Wavelength 28
1558.17 Wavelength 29
1558.98 Wavelength 30
1559.79 Wavelength 31
1560.61 Wavelength 32
USE-TWL1 Use Tunable Wavelength 1
Table 4-127 OPTICAL_WLEN Values (continued)
OPTICAL_WLEN Values Description
Table 4-128 OPTICS Values
OPTICS Values Description
1000_BASE_LX 1000 Base LX
1000_BASE_SX 1000 Base SX
1000_BASE_ZX 1000 Base ZX
COPPER Copper
CWDM CWDM
DWDM DWDM
IR Intermediate Reach
LR Long Reach
SR Short Reach
UNKNOWN Unknown Optical Type
UNPLUGGED Unplugged
VLR VLR
4-83
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.79 PAYLOAD
Identifies payload type
4.5.80 PM_MODE
Identifies the type of PM parameters. Only P type is supported.
4.5.81 PM_STATE
Directs the named PM mode type - path (P) state
4.5.82 PRIVILEGE
Security level
Table 4-129 PAYLOAD Values
PAYLOAD Values Description
10GE 10GigE Payload Mode
SDH SDH Payload Mode
SONET SONET Payload Mode
Table 4-130 PM_MODE Values
PM_MODE Values Description
I Transport Intermediate Node PM parameters
L Transport Line PM parameters
NONE No PM parameters are being stored for the entity
P Transport Path PM parameters
S Transport Section PM parameters
SEG Transport Path Segment PM parameters (e.g., ISDN BRA)
Table 4-131 PM_STATE Values
PM_STATE Values Description
OFF Disable the mode
ON Enable the mode
Table 4-132 PRIVILEGE Values
PRIVILEGE Values Description
MAINT Maintenance security level
PROV Provisioning security level
4-84
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.83 PRODUCT_TYPE
Product (NE) type
4.5.84 PROTECTION_GROUP
Protection group type
4.5.85 PROTTYPE
Protection type for DWDM Client facilities
RTRV Retrieve security level
SUPER Superuser security level
Table 4-132 PRIVILEGE Values (continued)
PRIVILEGE Values Description
Table 4-133 PRODUCT_TYPE Values
PRODUCT_TYPE Values Description
15327 Cisco ONS 15327 NE
15454 Cisco ONS 15454 NE
UNKNOWN Unknown product type
Table 4-134 PROTECTION_GROUP Values
PROTECTION_GROUP Values Description
1-1 1 to 1 protection group
1-N 1 to N protection group
Table 4-135 PROTTYPE Values
PROTTYPE Values Description
Y-CABLE Y Cable Protection for the Client Ports on MXP/TXP cards
4-85
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.86 PST
Primary State. This parameter indicates the current overall service condition of an entity.
4.5.87 RDIRN_MODE
This type specifies the Optical Ring directionality
4.5.88 REVERTIVE_TIME
Revertive time
4.5.89 SD_BER
The threshold for declaring Signal Degrade on a facility or path
Table 4-136 PST Values
PST Values Description
IS In-service
OOS Out-of-Service
Table 4-137 RDIRN_MODE Values
RDIRN_MODE Values Description
E-W The direction of the signal is from east to west (or clockwise)
W-E The direction of the signal is from west to east (or
counterclockwise)
Table 4-138 REVERTIVE_TIME Values
REVERTIVE_TIME Values Description
0.5 – 12.0 Revertive time is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes
Table 4-139 SD_BER Values
SD_BER Values Description
1E-5–1E-9 SDBER is the 1E-5–1E-9
4-86
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.90 SDCC_MODE
Enables or disables the Section Data Communications Channel (SDCC) for the specified facility
4.5.91 SERV_EFF
Indicates the effect of the alarm on service
4.5.92 SF_BER
The threshold for declaring Signal Failure on a facility or path
Table 4-140 SDCC_MODE Values
SDCC_MODE Values Description
N Section Data Communications Channel is disabled for this facility
Y Section Data Communications Channel is enabled for this facility
Table 4-141 SERV_EFF Values
SERV_EFF Values Description
NSA The condition is Non-Service Affecting
SA The condition is Service Affecting
Table 4-142 SF_BER Values
SF_BER Values Description
1E-3–1E-5 SFBER is the 1E-3–1E-5
4-87
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.93 SIDE
The role the unit is playing in the protection group
4.5.94 SST
Secondary State. This parameter provides additional information pertaining to PST and PSTQ. Values
for this state included here are a subset of the list in the GR document.
4.5.95 STATUS
The status of the unit in the protection pair, either Active or Standby.
4.5.96 STM_TYPE
The Synchronous Transport Mode of the NE
Table 4-143 SIDE Values
SIDE Values Description
PROT The entity is the protection unit in the protection group
WORK The entity is a working unit in the protection group
Tabl e 4 -1 4 4 S ST Va l ue s
SST Values Description
AINS Out of service, auto in service
MT Out of service, maintenance mode
Table 4-145 STATUS Values
STATUS Values Description
ACT The entity is the active unit on the shelf
NA Status is unavailable
STBY The entity is the standby unit on the shelf
Table 4-146 STM_TYPE Values
STM_TYPE Values Description
SDH The NE is operating in Synchronous Digital Hierarchy mode
SONET The NE is operating in Synchronous Optical Network mode
4-88
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.97 STS_MONTYPE
STS Monitor Type
4.5.98 STS_PATH
Modifier for some of the STS commands. This table does not include STS for the RTRV-CRS command,
because STS is not a standard designator.
4.5.99 SW
The type of switch to be initiated
Table 4-147 STS_MONTYPE Values
STS_MONTYPE Values Description
CVP Coding Violation - P
ESP Errored Second - Path
SESP Severely Errored Second - Path
UASP Unavailable Second - Path
Table 4-148 STS_PATH Values
STS_PATH Values Description
STS1 Synchronous Transport Signal level-1 (51 Mbs)
STS3C Synchronous Transport Signal level-3 Concatenated (155 Mbs)
STS6C Synchronous Transport Signal level-6 Concatenated (310 Mbs)
STS9C Synchronous Transport Signal level-9 Concatenated (465 Mbs)
STS12C Synchronous Transport Signal level-12 Concatenated (622 Mbs)
STS24C Synchronous Transport Signal level-24 Concatenated (1240 Mbs)
STS48C Synchronous Transport Signal level-48 Concatenated (2488 Mbs)
STS192C Synchronous Transport Signal level-192 (9952 Mbs)
Table 4-149 SW Values
SW Values Description
APS-CLEAR APS-CLEAR switch state. It is a read only switch state, and is not allowed in the
OPR-PROTNSW-xxx commands.
CLEAR CLEAR switch state. This switch state is not allowed in the
OPR-PROTNSW-xxx commands.
EXERCISE EXERCISE switch state. This switch state is not allowed in the
OPR-PROTNSW-XXX commands.
FRCD Force a switch unless another FRCD or LOCKOUT is in effect.
4-89
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.100 SWITCH_TYPE
BLSR Switch Type
4.5.101 SYNC_CLOCK_REF_QUALITY_LEVEL
Clock Source Quality Level
LOCKOUT Locks the facility out of switching. The system cannot switch to the protect
facility to carry service.
MAN Requests a manual switch of the facility
Table 4-149 SW Values (continued)
SW Values Description
Table 4-150 SWITCH_TYPE Values
SW_TYPE Values Description
FRCDWKSWBK Working unit forced to switch back to working
FRCDWKSWPR Working unit forced to switch to the protection unit
LOCKOUTOFPR Lockout of protection
LOCKOUTOFWK Lockout of working
MANWKSWBK Manual switch of working unit back to working
MANWKSWPR Manual switch of working unit back to the protection unit
RING BLSR ring switch type
SPAN BLSR span switch type
Table 4-151 SYNC_CLOCK_REF_QUALITY_LEVEL Values
SYNC_CLOCK_REF_
QUALITY_LEVEL
Values Description
DUS Don’t Use for Synchronization
PRS Primary Reference Source, Stratum 1 Traceable
RES Reserved for network synchronization use
SMC SONET Minimum Clock Traceable
ST2 Stratum 2 Traceable
ST3 Stratum 3 Traceable
ST3E Stratum 3E Traceable (2nd generation only)
ST4 Stratum 4 Traceable
STU Synchronized, Traceability Unknown
TNC Transit Node Clock (2nd generation only)
4-90
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.102 SYNC_GENERATION
Synchronization status message set generation
4.5.103 SYNC_QUALITY_LEVEL
Reserved for network synchronization quality level
Table 4-152 SYNC_GENERATION Values
SYNC_GENERATION Values Description
GEN1 First generation SSM set
GEN2 Second generation SSM set
Table 4-153 SYNC_QUALITY_LEVEL Values
SYNC_QUALITY_LEVEL Values Description for Generation-1
ABOVE-PRS Better than Primary Reference Source. Valid setting for
Generation-1 and Generation-2 SSM set
ABOVE-SMC Between SMC and ST3. Valid setting for Generation-1 and
Generation-2 SSM set
ABOVE-ST2 Between ST2 and STU. Valid setting for Generation-1 and
Generation-2 SSM set
ABOVE-ST3 For Generation-1 SSM set, between ST3 and ST2. For
Generation-2 SSM set, between ST3 and ST3E
ABOVE-ST3E Between ST3E and TNC. Valid setting only for Generation-2
SSM set
ABOVE-ST4 Between ST4 and ST3. Valid setting for Generation-1 and
Generation-2 SSM set
ABOVE-STU Between STU and PRS. Valid setting for Generation-1 and
Generation-2 SSM set
ABOVE-TNC Between TNC and ST2. Valid setting only for Generation-2 SSM
set
ABOVE-SMC Between SMC and ST3
BELOW-ST4 Below ST4 but still usable. Valid setting for Generation-1 and
Generation-2 SSM set
SAME-AS-DUS Disable the RES message by equating it to DUS. Valid setting for
Generation-1 and Generation-2 SSM set
4-91
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.104 SYNC_GENERATION
Synchronization status message set generation
4.5.105 SYS_TYPE
The type of the system representing the fiber and the span length that connects two nodes.
4.5.106 T1_MONTYPE
T1 monitor type
Table 4-154 SYNC_GENERATION Values
SYNC_GENERATION Values Description
GEN1 First generation SSM set
GEN2 Second generation SSM set
Table 4-155 SYS_TYPE Values
SYS_TYPE Description
SMF-28-LR SMF-28 system type, long reach
SMF-28-MR SMF-28 system type, medium reach
SMF-28-SR SMF-28 system type, short reach
Table 4-156 T1_MONTYPE Values
T1_MONTYPE Values Description
CVL Coding Violation - Line
CVP Coding Violation - Path
ESL Errored Second - Line
SASP Severely Errored Framing/AIS Seconds
SESL Severely Errored Second - Line
SESP Severely Errored Second - Path
UASP Unavailable Second - Path
4-92
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.107 T3_MONTYPE
T3 monitor type
4.5.108 TACC_MODE
Test access mode
Table 4-157 T3_MONTYPE Values
T3_MONTYPE Values Description
CVL Coding Violation - Line
ESL Errored Second - Line
SESL Severely Errored Second - Line
Table 4-158 TACC_MODE Values
TACC_MODE
Values Description
LOOPE Indicates to split both the A and B paths, connect the line incoming from E direction
to the line outgoing in the E direction, and connect this looped configuration to the
FAD. The line outgoing in the F direction shall have a QRS connected, and the line
incoming from the F direction shall be terminated by the nominal characteristic
impedance of the line.
LOOPF Indicates to split both the A and B paths, connect the line incoming from F direction
to the line outgoing in the F direction, and connect this looped configuration to the
FAD. The line outgoing in the E direction shall have a QRS connected, and the line
incoming from the E direction shall be terminated by the nominal characteristic
impedance of the line.
MONE Indicates that a monitor connection is to be provided from the FAD to the A
transmission path of the accessed circuit.
MONEF Indicates that a monitor connection is to be provided from the FAD1 to a DFAD, or
the odd pair of a FAP, to the A transmission path and from FAD2 of the same DFAD,
or the even pair of a FAP, to the B transmission path of the accessed circuit.
MONF Indicates that a monitor connection is to be provided from the FAD to the B
transmission path of the accessed circuit.
SPLTA Indicates that a connection is to be provided from both the E and F sides of the A
transmission path of the circuit under test to the FAD and split the A transmission
path.
SPLTB Indicates that a connection is to be provided from both the E and F sides of the B
transmission path of the circuit under test to the FAD and split the B transmission
path.
SPLTE Indicates to split both the A and B paths and connect the E side of the accessed circuit
to the FAD. The line outgoing in the F direction shall have a QRS connected, and the
line incoming from the F direction shall have a QRS connected, and the line incoming
from the E direction shall be terminated by the nominal characteristic impedance of
the line.
4-93
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.109 TERM_MODE
Terminating mode of the card
4.5.110 TIMING_MODE
Timing mode for the current node
4.5.111 TMPER
Performance parameter
SPLTEF Indicates to split both the A and B paths, and connect the E side of the accessed circuit
to FAD1 and the F side to FAD2.
SPLTF Indicates to split both the A and B paths, and connect the F side of the accessed circuit
to the FAD. The line outgoing in the E direction shall have a QRS connected, and the
line incoming in the E direction shall have a QRS connected, and the line incoming
from the E direction shall be terminated by the nominal characteristic impedance of
the line.
Table 4-158 TACC_MODE Values (continued)
TACC_MODE
Values Description
Table 4-159 TERM_MODE Values
TERM_MODE Values Description
LINE Line Terminating Mode
SEC Section Terminating Mode
TRANS Transparent Mode
Table 4-160 TIMING_MODE Values
TIMING_MODE Values Description
EXTERNAL The node derives its clock from the BITS input
LINE The node derives its clock from the SONET lines
MIXED The node derives its clock from the mixed timing mode
Table 4-161 TMPER Values
TMPER Values Description
15-MIN Performance Parameter Accumulation Interval Length - Every 15 Minutes
1-DAY Performance Parameter Accumulation Interval Length - Every 24 Hours
4-94
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.112 TRANS_MODE
G1000 Transponder Mode
4.5.113 TRCFORMAT
Indicates the trace format
4.5.114 TRCLEVEL
Indicates the trace mode options
4.5.115 TRCMODE
Path Trace Mode
Table 4-162 TRANS_MODE Values
TRANS_MODE
Values Description
BI Bidirectional
NONE Not in Transponder Mode
UNI Unidirectional
Table 4-163 TRCFORMAT Values
TRCFORMAT Values Description
1-BYTE 1 Byte Trace Message
16-BYTE 16-Byte Trace Message
64-BYTE 64-Byte Trace Message
Table 4-164 TRCLEVEL Values
TRCLEVEL Values Description
J0-SEC Trace at the SONET Section level
PATH Trace at the path monitor level (OTUk)
SEC Trace at the section monitor level
Table 4-165 TRCMODE Values
TRCMODE Values Description
AUTO Use the previously received path trace string as the expected string (not
applicable to MXP/TXP cards)
AUTO-NO-AIS Use the previously received path trace string as the expected string and do not
turn on AIS and RDI if TIMP detected
4-95
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.116 TX_RSLT
Indicates the file transferred result
4.5.117 TX_STATUS
Indicates the file transferred status
4.5.118 TX_TYPE
Specifies the type and direction of the file transferred
MAN Use the provisioned expected string as the expected string
MAN-NO-AIS Use the provisioned expected string as the expected string and do not turn on AIS
and RDI if TIMP detected
OFF Turn off path trace capability. Nothing will be reported
Table 4-165 TRCMODE Values (continued)
TRCMODE Values Description
Table 4-166 TX_RSLT Values
TX_RSLT Values Description
FAILURE Indicates a failed result
SUCCESS Indicates a successful result
Table 4-167 TX_STATUS Values
TX_STATUS Values Description
COMPLD Indicates the file transmission is completed
IP Indicates the file transmission is in process
START Indicates the file transmission is started
Table 4-168 TX_TYPE Values
TX_TYPE Values Description
RFBU Indicates Remote File Backup
RFR Indicates Remote File Restore
SWDL Indicates Software Download
4-96
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.119 UCP_ADM_STATE
UCP Administrative States
4.5.120 UCP_CC_TUN_MD
UCP IP Tunneling mode. Default is DISABLED.
4.5.121 UCP_CKT_STATE
UCP Operation States of Circuits
Table 4-169 UCP_ADM_STATE Values
UCP_ADM_STATE Values Description
DOWN Indicates the UCP administrative state is down
UP Indicates the UCP administrative state is up
Table 4-170 UCP_CC_TUN_MD Values
UCP_CC_TUN_MD Values Description
DISABLED DISABLED UCP tunneling mode
GRE GRE UCP tunneling mode
IP-IN-IP IP-IN-IP UCP tunneling mode
Table 4-171 UCP_CKT_STATE Values
UCP_CKT_STATE Values Description
CLEARING UCP circuit is in the clearing state
CLOSED UCP circuit is in the closed state
FAILED UCP circuit is in the failed state
LISTENING UCP circuit is in the listening state. This state is applicable only at
termination.
OPEN UCP circuit is opened
OPENING UCP circuit is opening
PENDING UCP circuit is in the open-pending state
RETRY UCP circuit is in retry state. This state is applicable only at source
WAIT UCP circuit is in wait-cc state. This state is applicable only at source
4-97
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.122 UCP_CRC_MODE
UCP CRC mode for this control channel, it is applicable to IPCCs of the SDCC type only.
4.5.123 UCP_IPCC_TYPE
UCP Types
4.5.124 UCP_TNA_TYPE
Types of TNA (transport network administered address)
4.5.125 UNI_BI
Unidirectional and Bidirectional switch operations
Table 4-172 UCP_CRC_MODE Values
UNI_BI Values Description
16-BIT Indicates a 16-bit CRC mode
32-BIT Indicates a 32-bit CRC mode
Table 4-173 UCP_IPCC_TYPE Values
UCP_IPCC_TYPE Values Description
ROUTED Indicates the Optical User Network Interface–Client
SDCC Indicates the Optical User Network Interface–Network
Table 4-174 UCP_TNA_TYPE Values
UCP_TNA_TYPE Values Description
IPV4 Indicates IPV4 TNA type
IPV6 Indicates IPV6 TNA type
NSAP Indicates NSAP TNA type
Table 4-175 UNI_BI Values
UNI_BI Values Description
BI Bidirectional protection switching
UNI Unidirectional protection switching
4-98
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.126 UP_DOWN
Up/Down
4.5.127 VALIDITY
Response validity
4.5.128 VOA_CNTR_MODE
Defines the VOA control mode
4.5.129 VT1_5_MONTYPE
VT1_5 Monitor Type
Table 4-176 UP_DOWN Values
UP_DOWN Values Description
DOWN Down
UP Up
Table 4-177 VALIDITY Values
VALIDITY Values Description
COMPL Complete Response
PRTL Partial Response
Table 4-178 VOA_CNTR_MODE Values
VOA_CNTR_MODE Values Description
ATTN VOA has a fixed attenuation
POWER VOA controls the attenuation to obtain a fixed output power
Table 4-179 VT1_5_MONTYPE Values
VT1_5_MONTYPE Values Description
CVV Coding Violation - VT Path
ESV Errored Seconds - VT Path
SESV Severely Errored Seconds - VT Path
UASV Unavailable Second - VT Path
4-99
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
4.5.130 WDM
Facility Types for MXP/TXP cards
4.5.131 WLEN_MODE
The Wavelength configuration mode of a single node/direction
Tabl e 4 -1 80 W DM Va lu e s
WDM Values Description
CLNT Client Facility
OCH Optical Channel (DWDM) Facility
Table 4-181 WLEN_MODE Values
WLEN_MODE Values Description
ADD The wavelength is added at this node
DROP The wavelength is dropped from this node
EXP The wavelength is expressed in this node
4-100
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 4 TL1 Command Components
Parameter Types
CHAPTER
5-1
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
5
Ring Provisioning
This chapter provides information and sample procedures for setting up STS or VT circuits over existing
unidirectional path switched ring (UPSR) and bidirectional line switch ring (BLSR) configurations using
TL1, including:
UPSR topology
UPSR cross-connections
Ring-to-ring interconnection
1-way drop and continue
Note Because the ONS 15454/ONS 15327 implements logical UPSR, there are no defined east and west ports.
Instead, the east STS path for one circuit can exit a different port than the east STS path of another
circuit, even though the west STS paths for both circuits may share the same port.
5.1 UPSR Topology
No special configuration of the physical UPSR topology is required other than connecting the fibers to
the desired ports on the desired nodes. The east and west paths must exit a node at different ports (to
ensure link diversity), but there are no other physical topology restrictions
ONS 15xxx networks give you the option to set up path-protected mesh networks (PPMNs). PPMNs
extend the protection scheme of a UPSR from the basic ring configuration to the meshed architecture of
several interconnected rings. For more information about PPMN refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
Procedure Guide or the Cisco ONS 15327 User Documentation.
5-2
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 5 Ring Provisioning
UPSR Cross-Connections
5.2 UPSR Cross-Connections
To create a UPSR cross-connection using TL1, you only need to designate whether it is a 1-way or 2-way
cross-connect, but the access identifier (AID) must be more explicit. For example, to create a 1-way
UPSR circuit over the network with nodes A, B, C, and D and segments A-B, B-D, A-C, C-D as shown
in Figure 5-1, enter the following commands (Node A is the source node and Node D is the destination
node):
ENT-CRS-STS1:A:FROM,TO1&TO2:CTAG1::1WAY;
ENT-CRS-STS1:B:FROM,TO:CTAG2::1WAY;
ENT-CRS-STS1:C:FROM,TO:CTAG3::1WAY;
ENT-CRS-STS1:D:FROM1&FROM2,TO:CTAG4::1WAY;
Figure 5-1 Network configured with a 1-way UPSR circuit
5.3 Ring-to-Ring Interconnection
In the following examples, the form “5/1/1” represents “Slot 5, Port 1, STS 1.” For VTs add the normal
VT Group and VT ID extensions. These examples also assume that the slots/ports have been
auto-provisioned (via a plug-in event) and that the ports involved have been placed into the in service
state using a port configuration command, for example, ED-OCN.
For the examples in this section, both rings traverse the same node; therefore, only a single
cross-connection is required to create the ring-to-ring connection. Use the network map shown in
Figure 5-2 with the node named “Cisco” in the nexus.
ONS 15xxx
Node A
ONS 15xxx
Node B
ONS 15xxx
Node D
ONS 15xxx
Node C
51345
= Fiber 1
= Fiber 2
5-3
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 5 Ring Provisioning
Ring-to-Ring Interconnection
Figure 5-2 Network map with Cisco node showing ring-to-ring interconnection
5.3.1 Sample UPSR to UPSR Connection
Ring 1 = UPSR
Ring 2 = UPSR
This example, illustrated in Figure 5-3, uses a OC-3-4 to feed Ring 2. Ring 1 can have any OC-N trunk
card, but the trunk card is most likely a single-port OC-48 or OC-12.
Note STS 12/3/2 maps to STS-12-8 (((3-1)*3) +2).
The STS calculation formula is: (((Port # -1)*Number of STS per port)+STS#).
Figure 5-3 UPSR to UPSR connection specifications through the Cisco node
Use the ENT-CRS-STS1:CISCO:STS-5-1&STS-6-1,STS-12-8&STS-13-8:CTAG1::2WAY; input
format.
This command creates a selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1 which is bridged to Ring 2 (12/3/2 and 13/3/2),
as shown in Figure 5-4.
Node F
Node
Cisco
Node E
Node D
UPSR
or
2F BLSR
51346
Node A
Node C
Node B
UPSR
or
2F BLSR
Node Cisco
UPSR RING 1
UPSR RING 2
West5/1/1 East 6/1/1
West12/3/2 East 13/3/2
51347
5-4
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 5 Ring Provisioning
Ring-to-Ring Interconnection
Figure 5-4 Selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1
The command also creates a selector between 12/3/2 and 13/3/2 to a bridge to Ring 1 (5/1/1 and 6/1/1),
as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Selector between 12/3/2 and 13/3/2
5.3.2 Sample UPSR to Two-Fiber BLSR Connection
Ring 1 = UPSR
Ring 2 = Two-fiber BLSR
This example, illustrated in Figure 5-6, uses a UPSR end-point with a drop on a two-fiber BLSR and the
west span of the two-fiber BLSR (Ring 2) for the active path of the circuit. The example also uses
multiport addressing for Ring 2 and is based on a multiport OC12-4 card (this is only important for
computing the STS AID for multiport cards) where 13/3/2 = STS-13-26 and where
26 = (((3-1)*12) +2).
Figure 5-6 UPSR to two-fiber BLSR
Use the ENT-CRS-STS1:CISCO:STS-5-1&STS-6-1,STS12-26:CTAG2::2WAY; input format.
This command creates a selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1 which connects to 12/3/2 on Ring 2, as shown
in Figure 5-7.
51348
5/1/1
Rx 6/1/1
Rx
Selector
Bridge
12/3/2
Tx 13/3/2
Tx
51349
5/1/1
Tx 6/1/1
Tx
Selector
Bridge
12/3/2
Rx 13/3/2
Rx
Node Cisco
UPSR RING 1
2F BLSR RING 2
West5/1/1 East 6/1/1
West12/3/2 East 13/3/2
51350
5-5
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 5 Ring Provisioning
Ring-to-Ring Interconnection
Figure 5-7 Selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1
The command also creates a bridge from 12/3/2 to Ring 1 (5/1/1 and 6/1/1), as shown in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Bridge from 12/3/2 to Ring 1
In this configuration a two-fiber BLSR switch can automatically reconnect the selector output to the
protection path on the east port (12/3/2 assuming OC-12) if necessary.
5.3.3 Sample Two-Fiber BLSR to UPSR Connection
Ring 1 = Two-fiber BLSR
Ring 2 = UPSR
This example, illustrated in Figure 5-9, uses a UPSR end-point with a drop on a two-fiber BLSR and
uses the east span of the two-fiber BLSR (Ring 1) for the active path of the circuit. For STS addressing,
the UPSR is an OC-3 (e.g. STS-13-8).
Figure 5-9 Two-fiber BLSR to UPSR
Use the ENT-CRS-STS1:CISCO:STS-6-1,STS-12-8&STS-13-8:CTAG3::2WAY; input format.
This command creates a bridge from 6/1/1 to Ring 2 (12/3/2 and 13/3/2), as shown in Figure 5-10.
51351
5/1/1
Rx 6/1/1
Rx
Selector
12/3/2
Tx
51352
5/1/1
Rx 6/1/1
Rx
12/3/2
Tx
Bridge
Node Cisco
2F BLSR RING 1
UPSR RING 2
West5/1/1 East 6/1/1
West12/3/2 East 13/3/2
51353
5-6
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 5 Ring Provisioning
Ring-to-Ring Interconnection
Figure 5-10 Bridge from 6/1/1 to Ring 2
The command also creates a selector between 12/3/2 and 13/3/2 to Ring 1 (6/1/1) as shown in
Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Selector between 12/3/2 and 13/3/2 to Ring 1
5.3.4 Sample Two-Fiber BLSR to Two-Fiber BLSR Connection
Ring 1 = Two-fiber BLSR
Ring 2 = Two-fiber BLSR
All protection for a two-fiber BLSR interconnecting to a two-fiber BLSR is performed at the line level.
You can make the connection with a 2-way cross-connect from an STS on the working side of the
two-fiber BLSR span of Ring 1 to an STS on the working side of a two-fiber BLSR span on Ring 2. The
connections can be east to east, east to west, west to east, and west to west. This example, illustrated in
Figure 5-12, uses Ring 1 west to Ring 2 east and assumes a OC-12-4 in Slots 12 and 13 for subtending
to a two-fiber BLSR (Ring 2).
Figure 5-12 Two-fiber BLSR to two-fiber BLSR
Use the ENT-CRS-STS1:CISCO:STS-5-1,STS-13-26:CTAG4::2WAY; input format.
This command creates a 2-way connection from 5/1/1 to 13/3/2 as shown in Figure 5-13.
51354
6/1/1
Rx
13/3/2
Tx
12/3/2
Tx
Bridge
51355
6/1/1
Tx
Selector
12/3/2
Rx 13/3/2
Rx
Node Cisco
2F BLSR RING 1
2F BLSR RING 2
West5/1/1 East 6/1/1
West12/3/2 East 13/3/2
51356
5-7
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 5 Ring Provisioning
Ring-to-Ring Interconnection
Figure 5-13 2-way connection from 5/1/1 to 13/3/2
5.3.5 Sample Two-Fiber BLSR to Four-Fiber BLSR Connection (ONS 15454)
Ring 1 = Two-fiber BLSR
Ring 2 = Four-fiber BLSR
All protection for a two-fiber BLSR interconnecting to a four-fiber BLSR is performed at the line level.
You can make the connection with a simple 2-way cross-connect from the appropriate side, east or west,
of the two-fiber BLSR to the working fiber of the appropriate side, east or west, of the four-fiber BLSR,
as shown in Figure 5-14.
Figure 5-14 Two-fiber BLSR to four-fiber BLSR
Use the ENT-CRS-STS1:CISCO:STS-1-1,STS-5-1:CTAG5::2WAY; input format.
This command creates a 2-way connection from 1/1/1 to 5/1/1, as shown in Figure 5-15.
Figure 5-15 2-way connection from 1/1/1 to 5/1/1
In the event of a failure, the software will automatically switch the traffic to the appropriate line and path.
51357
5/1/1
Tx/Rx
13/3/2
Tx/Rx
Node Cisco
2F BLSR RING 1
4F BLSR RING 2
West1/1/1 East 2/1/1
West
work
5/1/1 East
work 12/1/1
West
prot
6/1/1 East
prot 13/1/1
51358
51359
1/1/1
Tx/Rx
5/1/1
TxRx
5-8
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 5 Ring Provisioning
Ring-to-Ring Interconnection
5.3.6 Sample UPSR to Four-Fiber BLSR Connection (ONS 15454)
Ring 1 = UPSR
Ring 2 = Four-fiber BLSR
This example uses the west span of the four-fiber BLSR (Ring 2) for the active path of the circuit. The
example also assumes that the four-fiber BLSR travels over OC-192 spans, as shown in Figure 5-16.
Figure 5-16 UPSR to four-fiber BLSR
Use the ENT-CRS-STS1:CISCO:STS-1-1&STS-2-1&STS-5-190:CTAG6::2WAY; input format.
This command creates a selector between 1/1/1 and 2/1/1 to Ring 2 (5/1/190), as shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Selector between 1/1/1 and 2/1/1 to Ring 2 (5/1/190)
The command also creates a bridge from 5/1/190 to Ring 1 (1/1/1 and 2/1/1), as shown in Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 Bridge from 5/1/190 to Ring 1 (1/1/1 and 2/1/1)
Node Cisco
UPSR RING 1
4F BLSR RING 2
West1/1/1 East 2/1/1
West
work
5/1/190 East
work 12/1/190
West
prot
6/1/190 East
prot 13/1/190
51360
51362
1/1/1
Rx 2/1/1
Rx
Selector
5/1/190
51361
1/1/1
Tx 2/1/1
Tx
5/1/190
Rx
5-9
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 5 Ring Provisioning
1-Way Drop and Continue
5.4 1-Way Drop and Continue
The following examples show how to create a 1-way drop and continue cross-connect. The examples use
three nodes (Node 1, Node 2, and Node 3) in a ring configuration. Node 1 is the source node, Node 2
has the drop and continue, and Node 3 is the destination.
Figure 5-19 1-way drop and continue
5.4.1 Sample Node 1 Configuration (Source Node)
Issue the ENT-CRS-STSn::STS-1-1,STS-5-1&STS-6-1:CTAG::1WAY; command on this Node 1.
Figure 5-20 Bridge from 1/1/1 to 5/1/1 and 6/1/1
6/1/1
East
5/1/1
West
6/1/1
East
5/1/1
West 6/1/1
East
5/1/1
West
1/1/1
Source Node
1/1/1
Drop and Continue Node 1/1/1
Destination Node
Node 2 Node 3
Node 1
61315
61313
1/1/1
Rx
6/1/1
Tx
5/1/1
Tx
Bridge
5-10
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 5 Ring Provisioning
1-Way Drop and Continue
5.4.2 Sample Node 2 Configuration (Drop and Continue Node)
Issue the ENT-CRS-STSn::STS-5-1&STS-6-1,STS-1-1:CTAG::1WAYDC; on this Node 2.
Figure 5-21 Selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1 to 1/1/1
5.4.3 Sample Node 3 Configuration (Destination Node)
Issue the ENT-CRS-STSn::STS-5-1&STS-6-1,STS-1-1:CTAG::1WAY; on this Node 3.
Figure 5-22 Selector between 5/1/1 and 6/1/1 to 1/1/1
61314
1/1/1
Tx
Selector
5/1/1
Rx 6/1/1
Rx
61314
1/1/1
Tx
Selector
5/1/1
Rx 6/1/1
Rx
CHAPTER
6-1
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
6
TL1 Performance Monitoring
Performance information is continuously monitored and stored in individual performance monitoring
(PM) registers and can be retrieved upon request or when a preset threshold is exceeded. For more
detailed information on performance monitoring, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Guide and the
Cisco ONS 15327 Reference Guide.
This chapter provides TL1 performance monitoring information for the Cisco ONS 15454 and the
Cisco ONS 15327, including:
Performance monitoring by card
PM parameters by line type
Scheduled PM report provisioning
6.1 Performance Monitoring by Card
Table 6-1 TXP_MR_10G (Transponder) and MXP_2.5G_10G (Muxponder) Card PMs
SONET Layer
Far-End (FE)1
1. Applicable to OCH and CLNT facilities
SONET Layer
Near-End (NE)1OTN Layer (NE and FE)2
2. Applicable to OCH facility
Optics (NE)1FEC (NE)2
CVL
ESL
SESL
UASL
FCL
CVS
CVL
SESS
SESL
SEFS
UASS
UASL
FCL
ES-PM
ES-SM
ESR-PM
ESR-SM
SES-PM
SES-SM
UAS-PM
UAS-SM
BBE-PM
BBE-SM
BBER-PM
BBER-SM
FC-PM
FC-SM
OPT-AVG
OPT-MAX
OPT-MIN
OPR-AVG
OPR-MAX
OPR-MIN
RXT-AVG2
RXT-MAX2
RXT-MIN2
LBCL-AVG
LBCL-MAX
LBCL-MIN
LAT-AVG
LAT-MAX
LAT-MIN
BIEC
BYEC
ZBED
OBED
UCW
6-2
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 6 TL1 Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring by Card
Table 6-2 EC1 Card PMs
Section (NE) Line (NE) STS Path (NE) Line (FE) STS Path (FE)
CVS
ESS
SESS
SEFS
CVL
ESL
SESL
UASL
FCL
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
CVL
ESL
SESL
UASL
FCL
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
Table 6-3 DS1(N) Card PMs
Line (NE) Rx Path (NE) Tx Path (NE) VT Path (NE) STS Path (NE) V (FE) STS Path (FE)
CVL
ESL
SESL
LOSSL
AISSP
CVP
ESP
SASP
SESP
UASP
AISSP
CVP
ESP
SASP
SESP
UASP
CVV
ESV
SESV
UASV
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
CVV
ESV
SESV
UASV
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
Table 6-4 DS3(N) Card PMs
Line (NE) STS Path (NE) STS Path (FE)
CVL
ESL
SESL
LOSSL
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
Table 6-5 DS3(N)-3E Card PMs
Line (NE) Path (NE) STS Path (NE) Path (FE)1
1. The C-Bit PMs (PMs that end in “CPP”) are applicable only if line format is C-Bit.
STS Path (FE)
CVL
ESL
SESL
LOSSL
AISSP
CVP
ESP
SASP
SESP
UASP
CVCPP
ESCPP
SESCPP
UASCPP
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
CVCPP
ESCPP
SASCPP
SESCPP
UASCPP
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
6-3
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 6 TL1 Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring by Card
Table 6-6 DS3XM-6 Card PMs
DS3 Line (NE) DS3 Path
(NE)1
1. The C-Bit PMs (PMs that end in “CPP”) are applicable only if line format is C-Bit.
DS1 Path (NE) VT Path (NE) STS Path (NE) DS3 Path
(FE)1VT Path (FE) STS Path (FE)
CVL
ESL
SESL
LOSSL
AISSP
CVP
ESP
SASP
SESP
UASP
ESCPP
SESCPP
UASCPP
AISSP
ESP
SASP
SESP
UASP
CVV
ES-V
SES-V
UAS-V
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
CVCPP
ESCPP
SASCPP
SESCPP
UASCPP
CVV
ESV
SESV
UASV
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
Tabl e 6 -7 O C3 C a rd P Ms
Section (NE) Line (NE) STS Path (NE) Line (FE) STS Path (FE)1
1. The STS Path (FE) PMs are valid only for the OC3-4 card on ONS 15454.
CVS
ESS
SESS
SEFS
CVL
ESL
SESL
UASL
FCL
PSC (1+1)
PSD (1+1)
PPJC-PDET
NPJC-PDET
PPJC-PGEN
NPJC-PGEN
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
CVL
ESL
SESL
UASL
FCL
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
6-4
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 6 TL1 Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring by Card
Table 6-8 OC12, OC48, OC192 Card PMs
Section (NE) Line (NE) STS Path (NE) Line (FE)
CVS
ESS
SESS
SEFS
CVL
ESL
SESL
UASL
FCL
PPJC-PDET
NPJC-PDET
PPJC-PGEN
NPJC-PGEN
PSC (1+1, 2F BLSR)
PSD (1+1, 2F BLSR)
PSC-W (4F BLSR)
PSD-W (4F BLSR)
PSC-S (4F BLSR)
PSD-S (4F BLSR)
PSC-R (4F BLSR)
PSD-R (4F BLSR)
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
FCP
CVL
ESL
SESL
UASL
FCL
6-5
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 6 TL1 Performance Monitoring
PM Parameters by Line Type
6.2 PM Parameters by Line Type
Table 6-9 PM Parameters by Line Type
Parameter OC-N T1 T3 STS VT1.5
CVL Y Y Y
CVP YYY
CVS Y
CVV Y
ESL Y Y Y
ESP YYY
ESS Y
ESV Y
FCP Y
FCL Y
PJNEG Y
PJPOS Y
PSC Y
PSD Y
SASP Y Y
SEFS Y
SESL Y Y Y
SESP Y Y Y
SESS Y
SESV Y
UASL Y
UASP YYY
UASV Y
AISSP Y Y
CVCPP Y
ESCPP Y
LOSSL Y
SASCPP Y
SESCPP Y
UASCPP Y
6-6
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 6 TL1 Performance Monitoring
Scheduled PM Report
6.3 Scheduled PM Report
Scheduled performance monitoring (PM) report is a feature that extends the capability of PM reporting
for the ONS 15454 and the ONS 15327. With scheduled PM report the system automatically and
periodically generates the PM report of any specified facility or cross-connection.
Note The current maximum number of schedules allowed to be created for an NE is 1000. If this number of
schedules has been created for the NE, an error message “Reach Limits Of MAX Schedules Allowed.
Can Not Add More” will be returned if trying to create more schedules on the NE.
Note Identical schedules for an NE is not allowed. Two schedules are considered identical if they have the
same AID, MOD2 type, performance monitor type, performance monitor level, location, direction and
time period.
Note An error message “Duplicate Schedule” is returned if you create a schedule which is a duplicate of an
existing schedule. However, if the existing schedule expires (with the parameter <NUMINVL> equal to
zero when retrieved by the RTRV-PMSCHED command which means no more performance monitoring
report to be sent), then the new schedule with the identical parameter will replace the existing schedule.
Note When you create a PM schedule, the minimum report interval should not be less than five minutes.
See each command description for command formats and syntax:
SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2> on page 3-257
ALW-PMREPT-ALL on page 3-20
RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2> on page 3-225
RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL on page 3-226
INH-PMREPT-ALL on page 3-102
REPT PM <MOD2> on page 3-140
6.3.1 Create a PM Schedule and Receive an Autonomous PM Report
1. Issue the SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2> command to create a PM schedule.
2. Issue the ALW-PMREPT-ALL command to allow the current TL1 session to be able to receive the
autonomous PM report.
6-7
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 6 TL1 Performance Monitoring
Scheduled PM Report
6.3.2 Manage PM Schedules
1. Create a PM schedule by issuing the SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2> command.
2. Delete a PM schedule by issuing the SCHED-PMREPT-<MOD2> command with the <NUMREPT>
parameter equal to zero.
Note The PM schedules created on a facility or a cross-connect will be automatically deleted if
the card or the cross-connect are unprovisioned.
3. Retrieve all the PM schedules created on the node by issuing the RTRV-PMSCHED-ALL command.
Retrieve a particular MOD2 type of PM schedule by issuing the RTRV-PMSCHED-<MOD2>
command.
Note The system will not automatically delete the schedules that are expired (for example, a
schedule is created to report PM 10 times. After 10 PM reports are sent, the schedule is
expired). The expired schedule can be identified by its <NUMINVL> field (equal to zero)
in the response of RTRV-PMSCHED.
6.3.3 Enable or Disable a TL1 Session to Receive Autonomous PM Reports
1. Enable a TL1 session to receive a scheduled PM report by issuing the ALW-PMREPT-ALL
command.
Note By default, a TL1 session is disabled to receive PM reports. The ALW-PMREPT-ALL
command enables a TL1 user to receive all the scheduled PM reports from the system,
regardless of whether or not the schedule is created by this TL1 user or by any other TL1
user.
2. Disable a TL1 session to receive any scheduled PM report by issuing the INH-PMREPT-ALL
command.
6-8
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 6 TL1 Performance Monitoring
Scheduled PM Report
CHAPTER
7-1
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
7
TL1 Alarms and Errors
This chapter provides TL1 alarm and error information supported by the Cisco ONS 15454 and
Cisco ONS 15327, including:
Alarms
Errors
Echo
Each alarm includes a description and severity. Errors are listed by error type and include error message.
For a list of TL1 conditions, see Table 4-74 on page 4-47.
7.1 Alarms
Refer to “Alarm Troubleshooting” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide or the
Cisco ONS 15327 Troubleshooting Guide for complete alarm definitions, trouble notifications, and fault
recovery procedures. The alarms are listed alphabetically by alarmable object:
ML1000, page 7-14 EXTSYNCH, page 7-12
AEP, page 7-2 FAN, page 7-12
AIP, page 7-2 FUDC, page 7-13
BITS, page 7-3 HDGE (G1000), page 7-13
BP, page 7-3 MSUDC, page 7-14
CC, page 7-3 NBR, page 7-14
CKT, page 7-4 NE, page 7-15
DS1, page 7-4 NERING, page 7-16
DS3, page 7-4 NESYNCH, page 7-16
DWDM Client, page 7-5 OCN, page 7-16
ECN, page 7-9 STSMON, page 7-18
ENV, page 7-9 STSTERM, page 7-18
EQPT, page 7-10 VT-MON, page 7-19
ETHER, page 7-12 VT-TERM, page 7-19
7-2
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
For a sample of each TL1 alarm that can be generated by the ONS 15454, refer to the file
15454_r40_tl1_alarms.txt on the Cisco ONS 15454 Software CD in the subdirectory \Tl1. For a sample
of each TL1 alarm that can be generated by the ONS 15327, refer to the file 15327_r40_tl1_alarms.txt
on the Cisco ONS 15327 Software CD in the subdirectory \Tl1. These files can be used to test an
operations support system’s ability to receive alarms which the ONS 15454/ONS 15327 can raise.
7.1.1 AEP
Alarm expansion panel
7.1.2 AIP
Auxiliary interface protection module
Ta b l e 7 - 1 A E P
AEP Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
EQPT CR/SA An Equipment Failure alarm indicates that a hardware failure has
occurred on the reporting card.
MFGMEM CR/SA The manufacturing data memory failure alarm means that the ONS
15454/15327 cannot access the data on the erasable programmable
read-only memory (EPROM).
Ta b l e 7- 2 A I P
AIP Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
INVMACADR MJ/NSA The ONS 15454/15327 media access control layer address (MAC
address) is invalid.
MEA CR/SA If the Mismatch of Equipment Attributes alarm is reported against
the AIP, the fuse in the AIP board blew or is missing. The MEA
alarm also occurs when an old AIP board with a 2-Amp fuse is
installed in a newer 10 Gbps-compatible or ANSI shelf assembly
(15454-SA-ANSI).
MFGMEM CR/SA The manufacturing data memory failure alarm means that the ONS
15454/15327 cannot access the data on the erasable programmable
read-only memory (EPROM).
7-3
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.3 BITS
Building integration timing supply (BITS) incoming references (BITS-1, BITS-2)
7.1.4 BP
The backplane
7.1.5 CC
Control channel
Table 7-3 BITS
BITS Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
LOF MJ/SA A port on the TCC/MIC BITS input detects a loss of frame (LOF)
on the incoming BITS timing reference signal.
LOS MJ/SA The TCC/MIC card has a loss of signal (LOS) condition from the
BITS timing source.
SSM-FAIL MN/NSA Synchronization status messaging failed.
Ta b l e 7- 4 B P
BP Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
MEA CR/SA The Mismatch of Equipment and Attributes (MEA) alarm for the
backplane means that the revision of the backplane is incompatible
with XC10G equipment.
MFGMEM CR/SA The Manufacturing Data Memory Failure (MFGMEM) alarm
means that the ONS 15454/15327 cannot access the data on the
erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM).
Ta b l e 7- 5 C C
CC Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
CKTDOWN CR/SA The Unified Control Plane (UCP) Circuit Down alarm applies
to logical circuits created within the UCP between devices.
LMP-HELLODOWN MN/NSA The Link Management Protocol (LMP) Hello Down alarm
means that Hello protocol, which monitors unified control
plane (UCP) control channel status, is not available for link
management.
LMP-NDFAIL MN/NSA The LMP Neighbor Detection Fail alarm means that neighbor
detection within the UCP has failed.
7-4
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.6 CKT
UCP circuit
7.1.7 DS1
A DS1 line on a DS1 or DS3XM card
7.1.8 DS3
A DS3 line on a DS3 or DS3XM card
Table 7-6 CKT
CKT Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
CKTDOWN CR/SA The Unified Control Plane (UCP) Circuit Down alarm applies to
logical circuits created within the UCP between devices and It
occurs when the there is signaling failure across a UCP interface..
Ta b l e 7- 7 D S 1
DS1 Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
LOF MJ/SA The receiving ONS 15454/15327 has lost frame delineation in the
incoming data.
LOS MJ/SA A loss of signal (LOS) at the card for either a DS-3 port or a DS-1
port.
RCVR-MISS MJ/SA The facility termination equipment detects an incorrect amount of
impedance on its backplane connector.
TRMT MJ/SA There is a transmit failure on the DS1-14 card due to an internal
hardware failure.
TRMT-MISS MJ/SA The facility termination equipment detects an incorrect amount of
impedance on its backplane connector.
Ta b l e 7- 8 D S 3
DS3 Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
LOF CR/SA The receiving ONS 1545415327 has lost frame delineation in the
incoming data.
LOS CR/SA This LOS for either a DS-3 port or a DS1-14 port occurs when the
port on the card is in service but no signal is being received.
7-5
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.9 DWDM Client
The port (such as OC-12 or OC-48) where the client signal is plugged in
Tabl e 7- 9 DW D M Cl i e nt
DWDM Client Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
AUTOLSROFF CR/SA The Auto Laser Shutdown alarm occurs when the OC-192 card
temperature exceeds 194° F (90 ° C).
CARLOSS
(ML-Series)
MJ/SA The Ethernet port has lost its link and is not receiving a valid
signal.
EOC MJ/NSA The SONET Data Communications Channel (DCC) Termination
Failure alarm occurs when the ONS 15454 loses its data
communications channel.
HI-LASERBIAS MN/NSA The Equipment High Transmit Laser Bias Current alarm is raised
against the TXP and MXP card laser performance. The alarm
indicates that the card laser has reached the maximum laser bias
tolerance.
HI-LASERTEMP MN/NSA The Equipment High Laser Optical Transceiver Temperature
alarm applies to the TXP and MXP cards. This alarm occurs when
the internally measured transceiver temperature exceeds the card
default level.
HI-RXPOWER MN/NSA The Equipment High Receive Power alarm is an indicator for
TXP card and MXP card received optical signal power. This alarm
occurs when the measured optical power of the received signal
exceeds the threshold.
HI-TXPOWER MN/NSA The Equipment High Transmit Power alarm is an indicator for
TXP card and MXP card transmitted optical signal power. This
alarm occurs when the measured optical power of the transmitted
signal exceeds the threshold.
LOF (OC-N) CR/SA The LOF alarm occurs when a port on the reporting OC-N card
has an LOF condition. LOF indicates that the receiving
ONS 15454 has lost frame delineation in the incoming data.
LO-LASERBIAS MN/NSA The Equipment Low Transmit Laser Bias Current alarm is raised
against the TXP and MXP card laser performance. The alarm
indicates that the card laser has reached the minimum laser bias
tolerance.
LO-LASERTEMP MN/NSA The Equipment Low Laser Optical Transceiver Temperature
alarm applies to the TXP and MXP cards. This alarm occurs when
the internally measured transceiver temperature falls under the
card default level.
LO-RXPOWER MN/NSA The Equipment Low Receive Power alarm is an indicator for TXP
card and MXP card received optical signal power. This alarm
occurs when the measured optical power of the received signal
falls under the threshold.
LOS (OC-N) CR/SA An OC-N LOS alarm occurs when a SONET receiver detects an
all-zero pattern for 10 microseconds or longer.
7-6
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.10 DWDM Trunk
The main span of the link; from the card point of view, it is the port operating in the 100-GHz spacing
frequency grid
LO-TXPOWER MN/NSA The Equipment Low Transmit Power alarm is an indicator for
TXP card and MXP card transmitted optical signal power. This
alarm occurs when the measured optical power of the transmitted
signal falls under the threshold.
PORT-CODE-MISM MJ/MSA The Pluggable Port Security Code Mismatch alarm refers to
ML-series Ethernet cards, MXP and TXP cards and occurs when
the SFP connector that is plugged into the card is not supported
by Cisco.
PORT-COMM-FAIL MJ/SA The Port Communication Failure alarm applies to TXP and MXP
card SFPs and occurs when the card cannot communicate with the
SFP.
PORT-MISMATCH MJ/NSA The Pluggable Port Mismatch alarm applies to ML-series
Ethernet card small form pluggable (SFP) connectors. The alarm
indicates that the provisioned payload for the connector does not
match the SFP configuration.
PORT-MISSING MJ/NSA The Pluggable Port Missing alarm applies to ML-series Ethernet
card small form pluggable (SFP) connectors. The alarm indicates
that the connector is not plugged into the card port.
SQUELCHED MJ/SA The DWDM Client Signal Squelched alarm is raised by an MXP
or TXP card when G.709 monitoring is enabled and the card is
operating in transparent mode.
SSM-FAIL MN/NSA The SSM Failed alarm occurs when the synchronization status
messaging received by the ONS 15454 fails.
TIM-P CR/SA
MN/NSA
CR/SA for STSTERM
MN/NSA for STSMON
The TIM Path alarm occurs when the expected path trace string
does not match the received path trace string. Path Trace Mode
must be set to manual or auto for the TIM-P alarm to occur.
Table 7-9 DWDM Client (continued)
DWDM Client Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
Tabl e 7- 10 DW D M Tru n k
DWDM Trunk Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
AUTOLSROFF CR/SA The Auto Laser Shutdown alarm occurs when the OC-192 card
temperature exceeds 194° F (90° C).
CARLOSS
(ML-Series)
MJ/SA The Ethernet port has lost its link and is not receiving a valid
signal.
7-7
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
DSP-COMM-FAIL MJ/SA The DSP Communication Failure alarm indicates that there is a
communications failure between an MXP or TXP card
microprocessor and the on-board DSP chip that controls the trunk
(DWDM) port.
DSP-FAIL MJ/SA The DSP Failure alarm indicates that a DSP-COMM-FAIL has
persisted for an extended period on an MXP or TXP card and that
the card is faulty.
EOC MJ/NSA The SONET Data Communications Channel (DCC) Termination
Failure alarm occurs when the ONS 15454 loses its data
communications channel.
GCC-EOC MJ/NSA The GCC Embedded Operation Channel Failure alarm applies to
the OTN communication channel for TXP and MXP cards. It is
raised when the channel cannot operate.
HI-LASERBIAS MN/NSA The Equipment High Transmit Laser Bias Current alarm is raised
against the TXP and MXP card laser performance. The alarm
indicates that the card laser has reached the maximum laser bias
tolerance.
HI-LASERTEMP MN/NSA The Equipment High Laser Optical Transceiver Temperature
alarm applies to the TXP and MXP cards. This alarm occurs when
the internally measured transceiver temperature exceeds the card
default level.
HI-RXPOWER MN/NSA The Equipment High Receive Power alarm is an indicator for
TXP card and MXP card received optical signal power. This alarm
occurs when the measured optical power of the received signal
exceeds the threshold.
HI-RXTEMP MN/NSA The Equipment High Receive temperature alarm refers to the
temperature of the receiver port on the TXP and MXP cards.
HI-TXPOWER MN/NSA The Equipment High Transmit Power alarm is an indicator for
TXP card and MXP card transmitted optical signal power. This
alarm occurs when the measured optical power of the transmitted
signal exceeds the threshold.
LOF (OC-N) CR/SA The receiving ONS 15454/15327 has lost frame delineation in the
incoming data.
LO-LASERBIAS MN/NSA The Equipment Low Transmit Laser Bias Current alarm is raised
against the TXP and MXP card laser performance. The alarm
indicates that the card laser has reached the minimum laser bias
tolerance.
LO-LASERTEMP MN/NSA The Equipment Low Laser Optical Transceiver Temperature
alarm applies to the TXP and MXP cards. This alarm occurs when
the internally measured transceiver temperature falls under the
card default level.
LOM MN/NSA The Loss of Multiframe alarm applies to MXP and TXP cards
when the MFAS overhead field is errored for more than five
frames and persists for more than three milliseconds.
Table 7-10 DWDM Trunk (continued)
DWDM Trunk Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
7-8
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
LO-RXPOWER MN/NSA The Equipment Low Receive Power alarm is an indicator for TXP
card and MXP card received optical signal power. This alarm
occurs when the measured optical power of the received signal
falls under the threshold.
LOS (OC-N) CR/SA An OC-N LOS alarm occurs when a SONET receiver detects an
all-zero pattern for 10 microseconds or longer.
LO-TXPOWER MN/NSA The Equipment Low Transmit Power alarm is an indicator for
TXP card and MXP card transmitted optical signal power. This
alarm occurs when the measured optical power of the transmitted
signal falls under the threshold.
OTUK-IAE MJ/SA The OTUK Incoming Alignment Error (IAE) alarm applies to
TXP cards and MXP cards when G.709 monitoring is enabled for
the cards. OTUK-IAE refers to a single bit that allows the input
port to notify the output port that the incoming signal has an
alignment error.
OTUK-LOF CR/SA The OTUK LOF alarm applies to TXP cards and MXP cards when
G.709 monitoring is enabled for the cards. The alarm indicates
that the card has lost frame delineation on the input data. Loss of
frame occurs when the optical transport unit overhead frame
alignment (FAS) area is errored for more than five frames and that
the error persists more than three milliseconds.
OTUK-TIM MN/NSA The OTUK TIM alarm applies to TXP cards and MXP cards when
G.709 monitoring is enabled and section trace mode is set to
manual. The alarm indicates that the expected TT1 string does not
match the received TTI string in the optical transport unit
overhead of the digital wrapper.
PTIM MN/NSA The Payload TIM alarm applies to TXP cards and MXP cards
when G.709 is enabled for the cards.
SECURITYCODE MJ/NSA The Pluggable Port Security Code Mismatch alarm refers to the
ML-series Ethernet cards. I means that the SFP connector
plugged into the ML-series Ethernet card is not supported by
Cisco.
SQUELCHED MJ/SA The DWDM Client Signal Squelched alarm is raised by an MXP
or TXP card when G.709 monitoring is enabled and the card is
operating in transparent mode.
SSM-FAIL MN/NSA The SSM Failed alarm occurs when the synchronization status
messaging received by the ONS 15454 fails.
Table 7-10 DWDM Trunk (continued)
DWDM Trunk Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
7-9
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.11 ECN
An EC1 line on an EC1 card
7.1.12 ENV
An environmental alarm port on an AIC card (ONS 15454) or MIC card (ONS 15327)
TIM-P CR/SA
MN/NSA
CR/SA for STSTERM
MN/NSA for STSMON
The TIM Path alarm occurs when the expected path trace string
does not match the received path trace string. Path Trace Mode
must be set to manual or auto for the TIM-P alarm to occur.
WVL-MISMATCH MJ/SA The Equipment Wavelength Mismatch alarm applies to the TXP
and MXP cards. It occurs when you provision the card in CTC
with a wavelength that the card does not support.
Table 7-10 DWDM Trunk (continued)
DWDM Trunk Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
Ta b l e 7- 11 E C N
ECN Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
LOF (EC1-12) CR/SA The receiving ONS 15454 has lost frame delineation in the
incoming data.
LOS (EC1-12) CR/SA A port on the reporting EC-1 card has a loss of signal condition. A
SONET receiver detects an all-zero pattern for 10 microseconds or
longer.
Ta b l e 7- 1 2 E N V
ENV Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
EXT MN/NSA A Failure Detected External to the NE alarm occurs because an
environmental alarm is present, for example, a door is open or
flooding has occurred.
7-10
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.13 EQPT
A card in any of the card slots. This object is used for alarms that refer to the card itself and all other
objects on the card including ports, lines, STS and VT.
Ta b l e 7- 1 3 E Q P T
EQPT Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
AUTORESET MN/NSA The Automatic System Reset alarm occurs when you change an
IP address or perform any other operation that causes an
automatic card-level reboot.
BKUPMEMP CR/NSA A problem with the TCC/XTC card’s flash memory.
CARLOSS MJ/SA A Carrier Loss on the LAN Equipment alarm occurs when the
ONS 15454 and the workstation hosting CTC do not have a
TCP/IP connection.
COMIOXC CR/SA The I/O Slot To Cross-Connect (XCON) Communication Failure
alarm is caused by the cross-connect card. It occurs when there is
a communication failure for a particular I/O slot.
CONTBUS-A MJ/NSA The TCC/XTC card in Slot 7/Slot 5 has lost communication with
a traffic card.
CONTBUS-A-18 MJ/NSA The main processor on the TCC/XTC card in Slot 7/Slot 5 has lost
communication with the coprocessor on the second TCC/XTC
card in Slot 11/Slot 6.
CONTBUS-B MJ/NSA The TCC/XTC card in Slot 11/Slot 6 has lost communication with
a traffic card.
CONTBUS-B-18 MJ/NSA The main processor on the TCC/XTC card in Slot 11/Slot 6 has
lost communication with the coprocessor on the TCC/XTC card
in Slot 7/Slot 5.
CTNEQPT-PBPROT CR/SA A failure of the main payload between the protect cross-connect
(XC/XCVT/XC10G) card in Slot 10, or the protect XTC card, and
the reporting traffic card.
CTNEQPT-PBWORK CR/SA A failure of the main payload bus between the active
cross-connect (XC/XCVT/XC10G) card in Slot 8, or the active
XTC card, and the reporting traffic card.
ERROR-CONFIG MN/NSA The Error in Startup Configuration alarm applies to the ML-series
Ethernet cards. These cards process startup configuration files
line by line. If one or more lines cannot be executed, the error
causes the ERROR-CONFIG alarm.
EQPT CR/SA A hardware failure occurred on the reporting card.
EXCCOL MN/NSA There are too many collisions are occurring between data packets
on the network management LAN, and communications between
the ONS 15454/15327 and CTC may be affected.
HITEMP CR/SA
MN/NSA
CR/SA for NE.
MN/NSA for EQPT.
The High Temperature alarm occurs when the temperature of the
ONS 15454 is above 122° F (50° C).
7-11
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
IMPROPRMVL CR/SA A card was physically removed from its slot before the card was
deleted from CTC.
MEA CR/SA The MEA alarm for equipment is reported against a card slot
when the physical card inserted into a slot does not match the card
type that is provisioned for that slot in CTC.
MEM-GONE MJ/NSA Data generated by software operations exceeds the memory
capacity of the TCC/XTC card.
MEM-LOW MN/NSA Data generated by software operations is close to exceeding the
memory capacity of the TCC/XTC card.
NO-CONFIG MN/NSA The No Startup Configuration alarm applies to ML-series
Ethernet cards and occurs when you pre-provision a high-speed
slot for the card without inserting the card first, or when you insert
a card without pre-provisioning.
PEER-
NORESPONSE
MJ/NSA The switch agent raises a Peer Card Not Responding alarm if
either traffic card in a protection group does not receive a
response to the peer status request message
PROTNA MN/NSA The Protection Unit Not Available is raised by an out-of-service
protection when a TCC/XTC or cross-connect card or port that is
provisioned as part of a protection group is not available.
PWR-REDUN MN/NSA The Redundant Power Capability Lost alarm applies to cards
(such as the TCC2 and newer optical cards) that have two built-in
fuses. The alarm indicates that one of the fuses has blown, and
must be serviced.
SFTWDOWN MN/NSA A Software Download in progress alarm occurs when the
TCC/XTC is downloading or transferring software.
SWMTXMOD CR/SA The Switching Matrix Module Failure alarm occurs on the
cross-connect card or a traffic card. If the alarm reports against a
traffic card, it means that the logic component on the
cross-connect card is out of frame (OOF) with the logic
component on the reporting traffic card.
Table 7-13 EQPT (continued)
EQPT Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
7-12
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.14 ETHER
Ethernet, such as for straight-through (CAT 5) LAN cables.
7.1.15 EXTSYNCH
BITS outgoing references (SYNC-BITS1, SYNC-BITS2)
7.1.16 FAN
Fan-tray assembly
Table 7-14 ETHER
ETHER Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
CARLOSS
(E-Series)
MJ/SA A Carrier Loss on the LAN E-Series Ethernet Card alarm is the data
equivalent of an LOS (OC-N). The Ethernet card has lost its link and
is not receiving a valid signal.
CARLOSS
(G-Series)
MJ/SA A Carrier Loss on the LAN G-Series Ethernet Card alarm is the data
equivalent of an LOS (OC-N). The Ethernet card has lost its link and
is not receiving a valid signal.
Ta b l e 7- 1 5 E X T SY N C H
EXTSYNCH Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
SYNCPRI MN/NSA A loss of the primary timing source (reference 1).
SYNCSEC MN/NSA A loss of the secondary timing source (reference 2).
SYNCTHIRD MN/NSA A loss of the third timing source (reference 3).
Ta b l e 7- 1 6 FA N
FAN Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
EQPT-MISS CR/SA Indicates the replaceable fan-tray assembly unit is missing or not
fully inserted.
FAN CR/SA A problem with the fan-tray assembly.
FANDEGRADE MJ/NSA The Partial Fan Failure alarm is raised if fan speed for one of the
fans in the fan-tray assembly falls below 500 RPM when read by
a tachometry counter.
7-13
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.17 FUDC
SONET F1 byte user data channel
7.1.18 HDGE (G1000)
High Density Gigabit Ethernet. Applies to G1000-4 cards.
FAN Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
MEA CR/SA The MEA alarm is reported against the fan tray when a newer
fan-tray assembly (15454-FTA3) with a 5 Amp fuse is used with
an older shelf assembly or when an older fan tray with a 2 Amp
fuse is used with a newer 10 Gbps compatible or ANSI shelf
assembly (15454-SA-ANSI) that contains cards introduced in
Release 3.1 or later.
MFGMEM CR/SA The manufacturing data memory failure alarm occurs if the
ONS 15454 cannot access the data in the erasable programmable
read-only memory (EEPROM).
Table 7-16 FAN (continued)
Ta b l e 7- 1 7 F U D C
FUDC Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
LOS CR/SA An OC-N LOS alarm occurs when a SONET receiver detects an
all-zero pattern for 10 microseconds or longer. An LOS means the
upstream transmitter has failed.
Table 7-18 HDGE (G1000)
NE Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
CARLOSS MJ/SA A carrier loss on the LAN G-series card is the data equivalent of an
LOS (OC-N) alarm. The Ethernet card has lost its link and is not
receiving a valid signal.
TPTFAIL MJ/SA Indicates a break in the end-to-end Ethernet link integrity feature of the
G1000-4 cards. This alarm indicates a far-end condition and not a
problem with the port reporting TPTFAIL.
7-14
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.19 ML1000
ML-series Ehternet cards
7.1.20 MSUDC
SONET multiplex section user data channel
7.1.21 NBR
UCP neighbor
Table 7-19 ML1000
ML1000 Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
CARLOSS MJ/SA The Ethernet port has lost its link and is not receiving a valid signal.
TPTFAIL MJ/SA The TPT Layer Failure alarm for the ML-series Ethernet cards
indicates a break in the end-to-end POS link integrity feature of the
ML-series POS cards.
Ta b l e 7- 2 0 M S U D C
MSUDC Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
LOS CR/SA An OC-N LOS alarm occurs when a SONET receiver detects an
all-zero pattern for 10 microseconds or longer. An LOS means the
upstream transmitter has failed.
Ta b l e 7- 2 1 N B R
NBR Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
RSVP-HELLODOWN MN/NSA The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) Hello Down alarm
means that Hello protocol, which monitors UCP control
channel status, is not available for reserving resources.
7-15
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.22 NE
The entire network element
Ta b l e 7- 2 2 N E
NE Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
DATAFLT MN/NSA The TCC/XTC exceeds its flash memory.
DBOSYNC MJ/NSA The standby TCC/XTC “To be Active” database does not
synchronize with the “Active” database on the active TCC/XTC.
EHIBATVG-A MN/NSA The voltage level on battery lead A exceeds -56.7 Vdc.
(ONS 15454)
EHIBATVG-B MN/NSA The voltage level on battery lead B exceeds -56.7 Vdc.
(ONS 15454)
ELWBATVG-A MN/NSA The voltage on battery feed A is extremely low or has been lost, and
power redundancy is no longer guaranteed. (ONS 15454)
ELWBATVG-B MN/NSA The voltage on battery feed B is extremely low or has been lost, and
power redundancy is no longer guaranteed. (ONS 15454)
HITEMP CR/SA
MN/NSA
CR/SA for NE
MN/NSA for EQPT
The temperature of the ONS 15454/ONS 15327 is above 122° F
(50° C).
PRC-DUPID MJ/SA Two identical node IDs exist in the same ring.
PWR-A MJ/SA This alarm applies to the NE shelf. It occurs when there is no power
supplied to the main power connector. (ONS 15454)
PWR-B MJ/SA This alarm applies to the NE rack. It occurs when there is no power
supplied to the backup power connector. (ONS 15454)
SNTP-HOST MN/NSA The SNTP (Simple Network Timing Protocol) Host Failure alarm
indicates that an ONS node serving as an IP proxy for the other
ONS nodes in the ring is not forwarding SNTP information to the
other ONS nodes in the network.
SYSBOOT MJ/SA New software is booting on the TCC/XTC card.
7-16
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.23 NERING
Represents the ring status of the NE
7.1.24 NESYNCH
Represents the timing status of the NE
7.1.25 OCN
An OCN line on an OCN card
Table 7-23 NERING
NERING Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
BLSROSYNC MJ/SA The BLSR Out Of Sync alarm occurs when a node on a working
ring loses its DCC connection because all transmit and receive
fiber is removed, and you attempt to add or delete a circuit.
PRC-DUPID MJ/SA The Procedural Error Duplicate Node ID alarm indicates that two
identical node IDs exist in the same ring.
RING-MISMATCH MJ/SA A Procedural Error Mismatch Ring alarm occurs when the ring ID
of the ONS node that is reporting the alarm does not match the ring
ID of another ONS node in the BLSR.
Table 7-24 NESYNCH
NESYNCH Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
FRNGSYNC MJ/SA The reporting ONS node is in free run synchronization mode.
FSTSYNC MN/NSA A Fast Start Synchronization alarm occurs when the ONS node is
choosing a new timing reference.
HLDOVRSYNC MJ/SA A loss of primary/secondary timing reference.
SYNCPRI MN/NSA A loss of the primary timing source (reference 1).
SYNCSEC MN/NSA A loss of the secondary timing source (reference 2).
SYNCTHIRD MN/NSA A loss of the third timing source (reference 3).
Ta b l e 7- 2 5 O C N
OCN Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
APSB MN/NSA The line terminating equipment detects protection switching byte
failure in the incoming automatic protection switching (APS)
signal.
APSCDFLTK MN/NSA A BLSR is not properly configured.
7-17
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
APSC-IMP MN/NSA Invalid K bytes.
APSCINCON MN/SA The SONET overhead contains K1/K2 APS bytes that notify
receiving equipment, such as the ONS 15454/ONS 15327, to switch
the SONET signal from a working to a protect path.
APSCM MJ/SA The ONS 15454/ONS 15327 expects a working channel but receives
a protection channel.
APSCNMIS MJ/SA The source node ID contained in the K2 byte of the APS channel
being received is not present in the ring map.
APSMM MN/NSA There is a mismatch of the protection switching schemes at the two
ends of the span.
AUTOLSROFF CR/SA The OC-192 card temperature exceeds 194° F (90 ° C). (ONS
15454)
EOC MJ/NSA The ONS 15454/ONS 15327 has lost its data communications
channel (DCC).
E-W-MISMATCH MJ/SA Nodes in a ring have an east slot/port misconnected to another east
slot/port or a west slot/port misconnected to another west slot/port.
EXTRA-TRAF-
PREEMPT
MN/NSA An Extra Traffic Preempted alarm occurs on OC-N cards in
two-fiber and four-fiber BLSRs because low-priority traffic directed
to the protect system has been preempted by a working system
protection switch.
FEPRLF MN/NSA an APS switching channel SF occurs on the protect card coming into
the node.
LASEREOL MN/NSA The Laser Approaching End of Life alarm applies to TXP and MXP
cards and occurs when the laser in the card will need to be replaced.
LOF CR/SA A port on the reporting OC-N card has an LOF condition.
LOS CR/SA A SONET receiver detects an all-zero pattern for 10 microseconds
or longer.
SSM-FAIL MN/NSA Synchronization status messaging received by the ONS
15454/ONS 15327 fails.
Table 7-25 OCN (continued)
OCN Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
7-18
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.26 STSMON
STS alarm detection at the monitor point (upstream from the cross-connect)
7.1.27 STSTERM
STS alarm detection at termination (downstream from the cross-connect)
Ta b l e 7- 2 6 S T S M O N
STSMON Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
LOP-P CR/SA A loss of pointer (LOP) condition at the path level.
PLM-P CR/SA A signal label mismatch failure (SLMF).
TIM-P MN/SA The expected path trace string does not match the received path
trace string.
UNEQ-P CR/SA The path does not have a valid sender.
Table 7-27 STSTERM
STSTERM Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
LOP-P CR/SA A loss of pointer (LOP) condition at the path level.
PLM-P CR/SA A signal label mismatch failure (SLMF).
TIM-P MN/SA The expected path trace string does not match the received path trace
string. Path trace mode can be set to auto or manual for this alarm to
occur.
UNEQ-P CR/SA The path does not have a valid sender.
7-19
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Alarms
7.1.28 VT-MON
VT1 alarm detection at the monitor point (upstream from the cross-connect)
7.1.29 VT-TERM
VT1 alarm detection at termination (downstream from cross-connect)
Ta b l e 7- 2 8 V T- M O N
VT-MON Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
AUTOSW-LOP MN/SA Automatic UPSR protection switchingoccurred because of an LOP
alarm.
AUTOSW-
UNEQ
MN/SA Automatic UPSR protection switching occurred because of an
UNEQ alarm.
LOP-V MJ/SA A loss of pointer at the VT level.
UNEQ-V MJ/SA The node is receiving SONET path overhead with bits 5, 6 and 7 of
the V5 overhead byte all set to zeroes.
Ta b l e 7- 2 9 V T- T E R M
VT-TERM Alarm Severity
(Active) Description
LOP-V MJ/SA A loss of pointer at the VT level.
PLM-V MN/SA The content of the V5 byte in the SONET overhead is inconsistent
or invalid.
UNEQ-V MJ/SA The node is receiving SONET path overhead with bits 5, 6 and 7 of
the V5 overhead byte all set to zeroes.
7-20
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
7.2 Errors
Errors may be generated by any command or command response message. You can find errors listed by
error code in Table 7-30 on page 7-20. The format of an error message is as follows:
SID DATE TIME
M CTAG DENY
<ERRCDE>
/* <ERRMSG> */
;
7.2.1 Errors Listed by Error Code
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code
Error Code Error Message
ENEQ Control Not Provisioned
Environmental Control Interface Not Found
Equipment Not Found
Equipment Not Present
Equipment Not Provisioned
Internal Communication Error
Sensor Interface Not Found
IBEX Invalid AID Block. Extra Datablock
Invalid Payload Block. Extra Datablock
ICNV Cannot Set DCC When G709 Is Enabled
Equipment Does Not Match Request
Equipment In Use
Invalid Command
Operation Not Supported By This Card
Performance Monitoring Type Not Supported
IDMS Loopback Type Missing
Missing Internal Data
IDNC Invalid Data
Invalid PST Value
Invalid SST Value
7-21
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
IDNC (continued) Primary Source Cannot Be INTERNAL When Secondary Source Is Not
INTERNAL
Primary Source Cannot Be INTERNAL When Third Source Is Not
INTERNAL
Secondary Source Cannot Be INTERNAL When Third Source Is Not
INTERNAL
IDNV 2F-BLSR Architecture Does Not Permit Manual/Forced Span Switching
AUTO Trace Mode Not Allowed
At least an XC10G XC card is needed for this equipment type
Cannot Change Protection Type
Command Not Valid On Protect Card
DCC Not Supported In Transparent Term Mode
Equipment Does Not Support Payload Type
Equipment Does Not Support Regeneration Group
Facility Loopback Not Supported
Frame Format Contains Invalid Data
Frame Format Not Supported On Equipment
GCC Not Supported On CLNT Port
Incompatible Equipment Type
Incompatible Equipment Type For Protection
Incompatible Protect Slot For Protection
Interval Out Of Range
Invalid AID For PCA Cross-Connection
Invalid Data For 2F-BLSR
Invalid Drop Path
Invalid Equipment Type
Invalid Ethernet Frame Size
Invalid Holdoff Timer Value
Invalid Log Name
Invalid MONLEV Value
Invalid MONTYPE Value
Invalid Mac Address
Invalid PM Interval
Invalid Peer Id
Invalid Protid
Invalid Reference
Invalid Report Interval
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-22
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
IDNV (continued) Invalid Start Time
Invalid Switch Type For BLSR
Invalid TAP Number
Invalid Time Offset
Invalid Trace Level
J0 Section Trace Not Supported In Transparent Term Mode
Keyword All Not Allowed
Line Code Not Supported
Multiple AIDs Not Allowed
Multiple Protection Group Card Slot Identifiers Not Allowed
Multiple References Not Allowed
Null Userid Or Range In Userid List Not Allowed
Number Of Reports Is Negative
Parameter Not Supported By Payload Type
Parameter Not Supported On Client DWDM Port
Payload Type Does Not Support DCC
Protect Card Does Not Support Protection Type
Protect Slot Not Provisioned
Protection Group Card Slot Identifier Field Required
Protection Group Does Not Exist
Protection Group Name Exceeds Maximum Length
Ring Lockout BLSR Switching Is Not Supported
Switch Type Is Not Allowed On 1+1
Term Mode Does Not Support Synchronization/Timing Parameters
Threshold Value Out Of Range
Trace Level Not Supported By Client Port
Trace Level Required
Trace Not Supported In Transparent Term Mode
Transponder Does Not Support Synchronization/Timing Parameters
VOA Out Of Range
IDRG Difference Value Range Error
Invalid PJMON Value
Invalid Threshold Value
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-23
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
IIAC AID Does Not Match with Requested BLSR Path Type
ALL, Ranging and Grouping Are Not Supported
CCT=1WAY Not Allowed When G1000 Or ML Series Ports Are Used
Cannot Make Changes To Protect Card
Cross-Connection Cannot Overlap PCA Boundary
Equipment Can Not Be Provisioned On Low Speed Slot
Equipment Does Not Match Request
Expected Trace Not Supported On This Card Type
Expected Trace String Exceeds Maximum Length (62)
Incoming Trace Not Supported On This Card Type
Incorrect Card Type
Input, Invalid Access
Invalid AID
Invalid DS1 AID
Invalid G1000 Facility Port
Invalid Month Or Day
Invalid NodeId
Invalid Operation On Drop AID
Invalid PJMON Value
Invalid Protect AID
Invalid Protect AID Or Working AID
Invalid Reference
Invalid RingId
Invalid Source/Destination AID Count For Cross-Connection Type
Invalid TAP
Invalid Time
Invalid Year
J1 Trace Not Supported On This Card
List AID Not Allowed For ALL AID
List Or All AID Not Supported
Multiple AIDs Not Supported
Multiple Destination AID Exceeds Limit
Multiple Destinations Not Supported By Cross-Connection
Multiple Source AID Exceeds Limit
Multiple TAP AIDs Not Supported
Not Allowed On 1+1 Protect Line
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-24
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
IIAC (continued) Not Allowed On BLSR Protect Line
Optional AIDs Are Not Supported
RingId Does Not Match with AID Number
Trace Mode Not Supported On This Card Type
Trace Not Supported On This Card Type
Trace String Exceeds Maximum Length (62)
UPSR Cross-Connections Not Allowed When G1000 Or ML-Series Ports Are
Used
IICM Input, Invalid MOD1
Input, Invalid VERB
IICT Invalid Correlation Tag
IIDT 2F-BLSR Does Not Support SRVRTV/SRVTM/EASTPROT/WESTPROT
Parameters
Cannot Activate To Older Software
Cannot Add And Remove Drops Together
Cannot Revert From R2 To R1
Cannot Revert To Newer Software
Command Already In Progress
DEST Incompatible With RFR Type
DEST Incompatible With SWDL Type
DEST Required For RFBU Type
Duplicate BLSR Working/Protect Facilities
Duplicate Performance Monitoring Schedule
File Name Missing in FTP URL
Flash Manager Not Active
Hostname Missing In FTP URL
IOS Config File Too Big
Invalid BLSR Mode
Invalid BLSR Protect Facility
Invalid BLSR Working Facility
Invalid Data Parameter
Invalid Port In FTP URL
Invalid Revertive Time
Invalid Software Switch Type
Invalid State Value
Mandatory FTP URL Not Provided
Maximum Performance Monitoring Schedule Limit Reached
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-25
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
IIDT (continued) Memory Out Of Range
Missing/Invalid Destination
Missing/Invalid Source
Non-IP Hostname In FTP URL
Null Outputs In FTP URL Parsing
Only NORM CMD_MODE Is Supported
Only OOS PST Is Supported
Only Port 21 Is Supported
Only SWDL Is Supported For The xfertype Argument
Password Missing In FTP URL
Performance Monitoring Schedule Does Not Exist
Port Missing In FTP URL
SRC Incompatible With RFBU Type
SRC Required For RFR Type
SRC Required For SWDL Type
SWDL Incompatible With RFILE-PKG Aid
Software Activate/Revert Failed
Software Not Available For Switch
Unknown Error Processing FTP URL.
Username Missing In FTP URL
ftp:// Missing In FTP URL
IIFM Invalid AID Block. Invalid Data Format.
Invalid Payload Block. Invalid Data Format.
IISP Input, Garbage
IITA Input, Invalid Target Identifier
INUP General Block Unsupported
IPEX Invalid Payload Block. Extra Parameters.
Invalid Payload Block. Extra Parameters.
IPMS Invalid AID Block. Missing Mandatory Field.
Invalid Payload Block. Missing Mandatory Field.
IPNC Cannot Change Existing Protection Type
Description Cannot Have More Than 64 Characters
Invalid Flow Control Value
Invalid Maximum Frame Size
Invalid Parameter
Parameters Are Not Consistent
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-26
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
IPNC (continued) Parameters Not Compatible
IPNV Cannot Set Expected Path Trace For Source Path
Cannot Set Expected Path Trace In Auto Mode
Cannot Set Outgoing Path Trace For Drop Path
Cross-Connection Does Not Have UPSR Path Selector
Exercise Is Not Allowed On Protected Facility
Far End Performance Monitoring Values Not Supported
Holdoff Timer Not Supported For Non-DRI Cross-Connections
INT Not Valid For BITS-OUT
Internal-Ip Lookup Failed
Internal-Network Nodes Lookup Failed
Invalid Clock Source
Invalid Default Router Address
Invalid IIOP Port number
Invalid IP Address
Invalid IP Configuration Parameter
Invalid IP Mask
Invalid Parameter
Invalid Payload Block. Empty Parameter.
Invalid SNTP Host Address
Invalid Switch Command For Synchronization
Invalid Switch Type
New Source Must Be Specified
Node Name Exceeds Maximum Length (62)
PM Not Supported
Primary Reference Incompatible With Timing Mode
Protection Type Does Not Support Reversion Mode
Reference Type Not Supported
SPNWTR Parameter Not Supported
Secondary Reference Incompatible With Timing Mode
Synchronization Source Already Defined For The Slot
TMGREF Parameter Not Supported
Third Reference Incompatible With Timing Mode
Time Period Not Applicable
Timing Mode Not Compatible
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-27
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
PICC AID Required
Invalid User Access Privilege Value
Invalid User Identifier - Must Conform To TL1 Rules
Invalid User Password - Must Conform To TL1 Rules
New Password Same As Old Password
Unknown CORBA Exception (Internal Error)
Unknown User
User Access Privilege Required
User Already Exists
User Identifier Exceeds Maximum Length Allowed
User Not Authorized
User Password Required
PIMA Memory Out Of Range
PIUC Cannot Delete The Logged In User
User Currently Logged Into Another Session
User Is Not Superuser
User Not Allowed To Change User Access Privilege
User Not Allowed To Change User Password
User Not Allowed To Lock/Unlock Self
RALB Requested DCC In Use
RRNG Invalid Slot Number
Invalid Slot Number For Sdh Electrical Cards
RTBY Connection In Service
TAP Already In Use
TAP Number In Use
RTEN Cannot Access VT
Cannot Change Access Mode
Cannot Set Access Mode
Invalid Access Mode
Invalid STS TAP Number
Invalid TAP AID
Invalid TAP Mode
Invalid TAP Number
Invalid VT TAP Number
Requested TAP Does Not Exist
TAP Not Found
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-28
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
SAAL Already Allowed
SAAS Equipment Already Provisioned
SADC TAP Not Connected
SADS Loopback Applied On Cross-connection
SAIN Already Inhibited
SAIS Port Already In Service
SAMS Already In Clear Maintenance State
Already In Force Maintenance State
Already In Lockout Maintenance State
Already In Manual Maintenance State
SAOP Control Already Operated
Control Already Released
Control Operated In Mntry
SAOS Port Already In OOS-AINS
Port Already In OOS-MT
Port Already Out Of Service
SCAT STS Is Already Connected
Test Access Busy
VT Is Already Connected
SDBE AID Parser Failed
Cannot Access Conditions
Cannot Access Controls
Cannot Access Date/Time
Cannot Access Defaults Description
Cannot Access Environmental Settings
Cannot Access Equipment
Cannot Access Facility
Cannot Access IP Configuration
Cannot Access Interface
Cannot Access Node ID
Cannot Access Object
Cannot Access Orderwire
Cannot Access Protection Group
Cannot Access Protection State
Cannot Access SNTP Host
Cannot Access STS
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-29
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
SDBE (continued) Cannot Access Software Version
Cannot Access Synchronization Configuration
Cannot Access Timezone
Cannot Access Trace Information
Cannot Access VT
Cannot Access VT Performance Monitoring Parameters
Cannot Create 1+1 Protection Group
Cannot Edit STS
Cannot Get Line Information
Cannot Get Synchronization Configuration
Cannot Set Date
Cannot Set Date When Using SNTP
Cannot Set IP Configuration
Cannot Set Node Name
Cannot Set Pointer Justification Monitoring Parameter (PJMON)
Cannot Set SNTP Host Configuration
Cannot Set Timezone
Cannot Switch To E2 Byte With Express Orderwire IS
Card Type Not Supported
Delete Protection Group Failed
Equipment Not Found
Facility Does Not Exist
Facility Does Not Match Request
Facility Does Not Support Mac Address
Facility Is Not Provisioned
File Transfer In Progress
IOS Config Update In Progress
Incompatible Parameter Values
Incorrect Facility Type
Interface Does Not Support Loopback Type
Internal Access Failed
Internal Database Error
Invalid DCC
Invalid Performance Monitoring Mode
Invalid Protection Group
Invalid Time Period
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-30
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
SDBE (continued) Location Value Invalid
Loopback Is Invalid
Loopback Port In Service
Mac Address Not Supported By Payload
Object Not Provisioned
Operation Not Supported On EC1 Interface
STS Not Provisioned
Synchronization Configuration Not Available
Synchronization Status Messaging(SSM) Not Supported On EC1 Interface
Synchronization Status Messaging(SSM) Not Supported On SDH
Used Frame Format Does Not Support Synchronization Status
Messaging(SSM)
VT Not Provisioned
SDLD Duplex Unit Locked
SDNA Active TCC Not Ready
Standby TCC Not Ready
SNCC Replace This Message When A SNCC message is needed
SNCN Cannot Switch To Inferior Reference Source
Clock Source Failed
Command Not Implemented
Cross-Connection Type Not Supported In TL1
Invalid Clock Source
Requested Direction Not Supported
STS Rate Changing Not Supported
SNNS Reference Not From Optical Card
SNPR Cannot Get Role Of Port
SNVS Already Switched To Internal Reference Source
BLSR East Operation Already Set
BLSR West Operation Already Set
Cannot Operate Loopback In Current Cross-connection State
Cannot Operate Loopback In Current State
Facility Not Part Of BLSR
Invalid AINS Soak Time
Invalid Admin State
Invalid BLSR Element
Invalid Clock Source
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-31
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
SNVS (continued) Invalid Equipment State
Loopback Already In Progress
Loopback Not In Progress
No Switch In Progress
Protection Group Does Not Exist
Protection Unit Active
Working Unit Already Active
Working Unit Already Standby
SOSE Unrecognized Message Type
SPFA Cannot Get Current Card Status
Protection Unit Failed Or Missing
SPLD Cannot Create 1+1 Protection Group
Cannot Delete Equipment
Equipment In Use
FTP Task Is Busy
Facility Is Busy
Protection Unit Locked
SRAC Invalid Connection Type
SRCN Already In Requested Mode
Requested Condition Already Exists
SROF 1+1 Protection Group Not Found
ALS Mode Does Not Allow Laser Restart
Active Flash Not Ready
All DCCs In Use
BLSR In Use
BLSR Protect STS Path List Is Empty
Can Not Get IOS Config Source Origin
Cannot Access 1+1 Line
Cannot Access 1+1 Protected Line
Cannot Access 2 Fiber BLSR
Cannot Access 4 Fiber BLSR East Protection
Cannot Access 4 Fiber BLSR West Protection
Cannot Access 4F BLSR
Cannot Access Alarm Log
Cannot Access BLSR
Cannot Access BLSR 2 Wire Line
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-32
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
SROF (continued) Cannot Access Cross-Connection
Cannot Access DCC
Cannot Access Facility
Cannot Access Performance Monitoring Statistics
Cannot Access Protected Equipment
Cannot Access Protection Group Information
Cannot Access Protection Group Name
Cannot Access Protection Group Reversion Information
Cannot Access STS
Cannot Access TAP
Cannot Access Unprotected Line
Cannot Access Unprotected Line
Cannot Access VT
Cannot Change Ethernet IP With DHCP Provisioned
Cannot Change Ethernet IP With OSPF Provisioned
Cannot Change XTC Protection Group
Cannot Create Cross-Connection Between Incompatible Interfaces
Cannot Create Protection Group
Cannot Create TAP
Cannot Create TAP On Last VT
Cannot Create Ycable Protection
Cannot Delete Cross-Connection
Cannot Delete Last Drop
Cannot Delete Protection Group
Cannot Disable DWRAP With FEC Enabled
Cannot Disable DWRAP With GCC Enabled
Cannot Edit Ethernet IP
Cannot Edit STS
Cannot Enable FEC When G.709 Is Disabled
Cannot Enable FEC With DWRAP Disabled
Cannot Perform ACO
Cannot Provision Equipment
Cannot Provision Protection Equipment
Cannot Set Bidirectional Protection Group
Cannot Set DCC When Digital Wrapper Is Enabled
Cannot Set GCC When DWRAP Is Disabled
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-33
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
SROF (continued) Cannot Set NodeId
Cannot Set Payload Type
Cannot Set Protection Group Name
Cannot Set Protection Group Revertive Behavior
Cannot Set RingId
Cannot Set Span Revertive Mode Unless 4-Fiber Ring
Cannot Set Span Revertive Time In Non-revertive Mode
Cannot Set Span Revertive Time Unless 4-Fiber Ring
Cannot Set Termination Mode
Cannot Set Wave Length
Cannot Switch For Specified Connection Type
Cannot Switch For Specified Path
Cannot Update Synchronization Reference List
Command Not Supported
Cross-Connection Creation Failed
Cross-Connection Does Not Exist
DCC Does Not Exist
DCC Not In Use
DWRAP Not Enabled
Database Is Busy
Element Not Found
Equipment Does Not Match Request
Equipment Does Not Support Cross-connection Loopback
Ethernet IP And Default Router IP Subnets Are Different
Expected Trace Size Exceeds Trace Format Limit
Facility Does Not Support Laser Restart
Facility Not Protected
Facility Not Provisioned
Flash Is Busy
Generation1 Does Not Support Given Quality Of RES
Get IOR Failed
Host Not In IP Address Format
Insufficient Path Width For Cross-Connection
Insufficient Path Width For Test Access
Internal Exercise Failure
Internal Facility Type Failure
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-34
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
SROF (continued) Invalid ALS Recovery Interval
Invalid ALS Recovery Pulse Width
Invalid Control Type (CONTTYPE) For AID
Invalid Cross-Connection Path
Invalid Cross-Connection Type For Drops
Invalid Drop Path
Invalid FTP Username/Password
Invalid Loopback Provision
Invalid Operation For Connection Type
Invalid Operation For Specified Path
Invalid Path
Invalid Protection Group
Invalid Protection Switch Operation
Invalid State When Loopback Present
Invalid Subnet Mask
Invalid Synchronization Source
Invalid UPSR Path
J0 Section Trace Level Not Supported By 10GE Payload Type
Laser Was Not Shutdown.Cannot Restart Laser
Loopback Not Allowed On Drop Path
Loopback Type Does Not Match
MIC Cards Cannot Be Reset
Maximum User Limit Reached
No Start-Up IOS Config
Operate Alarm Cutoff Failed
Operation Not Supported
Parameter Not Supported When DWRAP Is Enabled
Path Already In Use
Path Specified Is Not Valid
Path Used For Test Access
Peer Equipment Attributes Do Not Match
Peer Equipment Type Does Not Match
Peer Payload Type Does Not Match
Peer Termination Mode Does Not Match
Pool Does Not Exist
Protect Port Active
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-35
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
SROF (continued) Protection Switching Failed
Protection Type Mismatch
Provisioning Rules Failed
Regeneration Group Already Exist
Regeneration Group Does Not Exist
Requested Operation Failed
Ring Reversion Failed
SDBER Out Of Range
SFBER Out Of Range
STS Does Not Exist
STS Does Not Have TAP
STS Path Width Does Not Match
STS Path Width Does Not Match
Section Termination Mode Not Supported
Software Activation Failed
Software Download Failed
Software Error
Software Error
Software Revertion Failed
Span Reversion Failed
Specified Operation Is Not Valid
Standby Flash Not Ready
Synchronization/Timing Parameters Not Supported With DWRAP Enabled
TTI Trace Not Allowed With G709 Disabled
Test Access Active
Trace Format Not Supported By J0 Section Trace
Trace Format Not Supported By TTI Section Trace
Trace Message Size Exceeds Trace Format Limit
Trace Mode Incompatible With Termination Mode
Trace Mode Not Supported
Trace Not Supported By 10GE Payload Type
Unprovisioning Rules Failed
Unsupported BLSR STS Path Operation
Unsupported Command Type
Unsupported Element Type
VT Does Not Exist
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-36
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Errors
SROF (continued) VT Does Not Have TAP
Wavelength Value Not Supported
Working/Peer Card In Use
XC Card Does Not Support VT Cross-Connection
XC Card Not Present
Y-Cable Protection Does Not Exist
SRQN BLSR Creation Failed
BLSR Deletion Failed
BLSR Does Not Exist
BLSR Editing Failed
Cannot Edit SENDDUS On Protect Port
Cannot Edit SYNCMSG On Protect Port
DCC Not Allowed In SDH Mode
DCC Not Allowed On Protect Port
Data Access Request Failed
Invalid Mode For Current Configuration
Invalid Request
Protect Card Does Not Support Electrical Protection
Protect Card Does Not Support Protection Type
SDH Not Allowed
SDH Not Allowed On Protect Port
SDH Not Allowed With DCC
SDH Not Allowed With SENDDUS
SDH Not Allowed With SYNCMSG
SENDDUS Not Allowed With SDH Mode
SYNCMSG Not Allowed With SDH Mode
Sync Status Messaging(SSM) Not Allowed With SDH Mode
SSRD Manual Switch Cannot Override Forced Switch
Switch Request Denied
SSRE Memory Resources Exceeded
SWFA Working Unit Failed Or Missing
SWLD Working Unit Locked
Table 7-30 Errors listed by Error Code (continued)
Error Code Error Message
7-37
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Echo
7.3 Echo
In order to improve telnet functionality for automated systems, the echo function has been turned off
since ONS 15454 Release 3.0. This change is transparent to users running standard UNIX-compliant
telnet clients; however, PC users may need to change their client setup to enable “local echo.” This is
normally accomplished by a pull-down menu or a preference attribute.
To test the local echo on your PC client, use the RTRV-HDR command. If you receive a response but no
data, set local echo ON. Cisco recommends that you close any windows containing sensitive information
after exiting a TL1 session.
7-38
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
Chapter 7 TL1 Alarms and Errors
Echo
IN-1
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
INDEX
Numerics
1-way cross-connect 5-9
1WAYPCA see PCA
2-way cross-connect 5-6
2WAYPCA see PCA
A
access identifier see AID
AID 1-5, 4-10
ALL 4-10
AONS 4-17
BAND 4-17
BITS 4-18
BLSR 4-18
CHANNEL 4-19
COM 4-19
CrossConnectID 4-14
DS1 4-20
ENV 4-20
EQPT 4-21
FACILITY 4-22
IPCC 4-16
LINE 4-23
NBR 4-16
OSC 4-24
PRSLOT 4-16
RFILE 4-24
STS 4-24
SYN 4-26
SYN_SRC 4-27
SYNC_REF 4-28
SYNCSW 4-29
TACC 4-29
TAP 4-30
UCP 4-17
UDC 4-30
VT1_5 4-30
alarmable object 7-1
alarm codes 1-6
critical 1-6
major 1-6
minor 1-6
non-alarm 1-6
alarm file on software CD 7-2
alarms, TL1 7-1
AEP 7-2
AIP 7-2
BITS 7-3
BP 7-3
CC 7-3
CKT 7-4
DS1 7-4
DS3 7-4
DWDM client 7-5
DWDM trunk 7-6
ECN 7-9
ENV 7-9
EQPT 7-10
ETHER 7-12
EXTSYNCH 7-12
FAN 7-12
FUDC 7-13
HDGE (G1000) 7-13
ML1000 7-14
Index
IN-2
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
MSUDC 7-14
NBR 7-14
NE 7-15
NERING 7-16
NESYNCH 7-16
OCN 7-16
STSMON 7-18
STSTERM 7-18
VT-MON 7-19
VT-TERM 7-19
ATAG 1-6, 4-31
autonomous message tag see ATAG
B
BLSR
setting up STS or VT circuits 5-1
BRTU 1-17
C
cards
improper removal 7-11
see TL1 commands, listed by card
circuit, CTC interoperability 1-14
command completion behavior 1-14
COMPLD 1-15
DENY 1-15
PRTL 1-15
command length 3-17
command syntax 1-5
conditions 4-47
correlation tag see CTAG
cross-connect, CTC interoperability 1-14
CTAG 1-5, 4-32
CTC
autoprovision 1-8
create cross-connects 1-14
DS3-E card 1-8
interoperability 1-14
message log for masked passwords 3-17
open a TL1 session 1-2
request history for masked passwords 3-17
test access tab 1-17
unframed 1-8
D
default values 4-1
BLSR 4-1
cross connections 4-1
environment alarms and controls 4-2
equipment 4-2
performance 4-2
ports 4-3
SONET line protection 4-4
STS and VT paths 4-4
synchronization 4-5
testing 4-5
download software see FTP software download
E
echo 7-37
end-point network element see TL1 gateway, ENE
errors 7-20
error codes 7-20
error messages 7-20
listed by error code 7-20
Ethernet
carrier loss 7-13
F
file transfer protocol see FTP software download
FTP software download 1-35
Index
IN-3
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
activate new software 1-40
APPLY 1-36
COPY-RFILE 1-35
download new software 1-37
flash 1-36
remote 1-41
report start, completion, and completed 1-37
REPT EVT FXFR 1-37
revert software 1-36
G
gateway network element see TL1 gateway, GNE
gateway see TL1 gateway
I
incomplete circuit 1-14
intermediate network element see TL1 gateway, INE
International Telecommunications Union see ITU
ITU 1-1
L
login 1-2
M
maintenance see security levels
Man-Machine Language see MML
masked passwords 3-17
mixed mode timing 1-14
MML 1-1
monitor circuits 1-17
MXP/TXP provisioning rules 1-8
DCC/GCC provisioning 1-10
FEC provisioning 1-11
G.709 provisioning 1-10
payload provisioning 1-8
PM and alarm threshold provisioning 1-12, 1-13
regeneration group provisioning 1-13
synchronization provisioning 1-11
termination mode provisioning 1-9
trace provisioning 1-12
wavelength provisioning 1-9
Y-cable protection group provisioning 1-13
O
open a TL1 session 1-2
via craft interface 1-4
via CTC 1-2
via telnet 1-3
operations support system see OSS
OSS 2-1
P
parameter types 4-31 to 4-99
password, masked see masked password
PCA 1-34
1WAYPCA 1-34
2WAYPCA 1-34
extra-traffic 1-34
provision a cross-connection 1-34
retrieve a cross-connection 1-35
performance monitoring see PM
PID 3-18, 3-26, 3-41, 3-67
PM 6-1
by card 6-1
create a PM schedule 6-6
enable or disable reports 6-7
manage PM schedules 6-7
parameters by line type 6-5
receive autonomous PM reports 6-6
scheduled PM report 6-6
Index
IN-4
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
port 1-3
protection channel access see PCA
provisioning see security levels
R
remote software download 1-41
remote test unit see RTU
retrieve see security levels
ring provisioning 5-1
1-way drop and continue 5-9
BLSR 5-1
bridge 5-4
destination node 5-10
drop and continue node 5-10
ring-to-ring interconnection 5-2
selector 5-3
source node 5-9
two-fiber BLSR to four-fiber BLSR connection (ONS
15454) 5-7
two-fiber BLSR to two-fiber BLSR connection 5-6
two-fiber BLSR to UPSR connection 5-5
UPSR 5-1
UPSR to four-fiber BLSR connection (ONS 15454) 5-8
UPSR to two-fiber BLSR connection 5-4
UPSR to UPSR connection 5-3
RTU 1-17, 1-29
S
scheduled PM report see PM
security, user 1-7, 3-79
security default time outs 1-8
security levels 1-8
maintenance 1-8
provisioning 1-8
retrieve 1-8
superuser 1-8
sessions 1-1
craft interface 1-4
CTC 1-2
telnet 1-3
setting up TL1 communication 1-2
specification characters 1-5
SSM
failure 7-6, 7-8
superuser see security levels
T
TACC 1-17, 3-26, 3-27, 3-32, 3-44, 3-68, 3-69
changing test access modes 1-22
connecting test access points 1-18
deleting test access points 1-23
disconnecting test access points 1-22
loop E and F modes 1-29
mode definition 1-26
modes 1-26
modes supported by circuit type 1-33
retrieve TAP information 1-23
split A and B access modes 1-30
split E and F access modes 1-28
test access terminology 1-18
unmapped AID TAP connections 1-31
1-way circuit 1-32
2-way circuits 1-33
unmapped AID 1-33
TAP 1-17
target identifier see TID
telnet 1-3
test access point see TAP
test access see TACC
test access tab in CTC 1-17
test access terminology see TACC
test circuits 1-17
TID 1-5, 4-32
timing, mixed mode 1-14, 3-62
TL1 1-1
Index
IN-5
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
TL1 commands
descriptions 3-17 to 3-267
listed by card (ONS 15327)
E1000T 3-12
E100T 3-12
G1000-2 3-12
OC12 3-12
OC3 3-12
OC48 3-12
XTC 3-12
XTC/AIC 3-12
XTC/DS1 3-12
XTC/DS3 3-12
XTC/XCVT 3-12
listed by card (ONS 15454) 3-6, 3-12
AIC 3-6
AICI 3-6
DS1 3-6
DS1N 3-6
DS3 3-6
DS3E 3-6
DS3N 3-6
DS3NE 3-6
DS3XM 3-6
E1000T 3-6
E100T 3-6
EC1 3-6
G1000-4 3-6
ML1000-2 3-6
ML100T-12 3-6
MXP 3-6
OC12 3-6
OC12-4 3-6
OC192 3-6
OC3 3-6
OC3-8 3-6
OC48 3-6
OC48AS 3-6
TCC 3-6
TCC2 3-6
TXP 3-6
XC 3-6
XC192 3-6
XCVT 3-6
XCVXL 3-6
listed by category 3-1
BLSR 3-1
cross connections 3-1
DWDM 3-2
environment alarms and controls 3-2
equipment 3-2
fault 3-3
IOS 3-3
log 3-3
network 3-3
performance 3-3
ports 3-3
security 3-4
software download 3-4
SONET line protection 3-4
STS and VT paths 3-4
synchronization 3-4
system 3-5
test access 3-5
testing 3-5
UCP 3-5
UPSR switching 3-5
TL1 gateway 2-1
autonomous messages from remote ENE 2-5
concurrent communication sessions 2-2
DCC 2-2
DCC TCP/IP 2-1
ENE 2-1
forwarding commands 2-5
GNE 2-1
GNE session 2-1
implementing 2-4
INE 2-1
Index
IN-6
Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15327 TL1 Command Guide, R4.0
March 2003
log into a remote ENE 2-5
log out of a remote ENE 2-5
resource pool 2-2
unique node name 2-3
transaction language 1 see TL1
TXP provisioning rules see MXP/TXP provisioning rules
U
UID 1-5, 3-18, 3-41, 3-67
UPSR
1-way cross-connection 5-2
2-way cross-connection 5-2
cross-connections 5-2
PPMN 5-1
setting up STS or VT circuits 5-1
topology 5-1
user identifier see UID
Y
Y cable
create protection 3-91
delete protection 3-38
edit protection group 3-59
protection group provisioning 1-13
protection switch request 3-115
release protection switch 3-145
retrieve protection 3-204

Navigation menu